Animation vs. DreamWorks

Cover art

When it's Red's turn to share a movie for the Squad's weekly movie night, he dreams of making it more real. With help from an old friend, he is able to do so, but his dream quickly turns into a nightmare when Gold has an encounter with a Wolf. Now the Squad races to escape movie night before their time runs out... in more ways than one...

Chapter 1: Making Movie Magic (Red)

“Shh! Shh! Be quiet, guys!” Purple ordered. “This part gets me every time!”

“I agree, I love this scene.” I confessed.

“I know who I am…” the big, fat, lovable panda onscreen said to his goose father. “I’m your son.”

Purple snuggled up closer to his adopted father, King wrapped his arm around him, and I started bawling. It’s such a sweet scene and I could not control myself. As I wiped the tears from my eyes, I got a playful slug from Green.

“Control yourself, bro.” Green said.

“Lay off, Green.” Blue reprimanded. “Let the man cry at such a cute scene.”

“Especially after all Po endured, with Shen’s genocide of his species.” Yellow added.

“Let it be known that I love you guys as much as Po’s father loves him.” SC professed.

“Awww, we love you too.” King said. A little while later, we saw the final scene, and the final line from Po’s biological dad.

“My son is alive!”

“Oh, Goldy… When I heard you were alive…” King began, “that was pretty much my reaction. I just couldn’t believe it.”

“I’m just happy to be home… With my dad and my little brother.” Gold replied.

It’s been a few months since Gold returned home, since he came running like the Prodigal Son, and it’s been great getting to know him. It turns out he hasn’t outgrown the somewhat mischievous and troublesome kid that King described, but he still has a great heart and loves his dad and us greatly for what we did for him. As the weather grew colder here in the Outernet, the eight of us began a new tradition: Friday night movie night at King’s house. Tonight, Purple chose one of my favorites: Kung Fu Panda 2. He loves it, too, mostly for the message about found family, but sadly it was over, and the credits rolled. We all got up from our seats and Purple turned off the TV.

“Great choice, Purple.” I told him. “You know my love of DreamWorks movies.”

“Thanks, Reddy Bear.” Purple replied.

“I appreciate its mature tone.” Yellow noted. “It far exceeds one’s expectations for a cinema titled, Kung Fu Panda.” SC nodded in agreement.

“I love the fight scenes.” Green said.

“Same,” Blue confirmed.

“I love the family message, too. It reminds me of my own family.” King added, giving loving noogies to both his sons.

“Daaad…” Gold moaned, wrestling himself away from King’s grip. “I’ve… kinda missed that, not gonna lie. I’ve also missed watching movies with you. I forgot how much I enjoyed it.”

“Awwww, that’s so cute!” I gushed.

“It really is, and I love it.” Purple agreed. “Oh, Red, don’t forget, it’s your turn to pick out a movie next week.”

“Knowing Red, I’m pretty sure it’s either going to involve cats, pandas, dragons, lions, some animated animal.” Green teased.

“I’d say the odds of that are… Very likely.” Yellow said, nodding.

“Yeah, Red loves DreamWorks more than I love Netherwart.” Blue added.

“Hey, maybe Red will surprise us.” SC suggested. “But… I doubt it.”

“Maybe I will reach into my bag of tricks.” I said sneakily. “See what I can find.”

“Whatever you choose, I’m looking forward to it, Reddy Bear.” King said. “Mostly as an excuse to spend time with you all.”

“I think Gold and I are in agreement.” Purple added.

“Well…” Gold paused jokingly. We shared a laugh. “In all seriousness, I forgot how much I love these movies. Not to Red’s extent, but I do enjoy them greatly.”

“Let’s head home, guys.” SC insisted. “Thanks, King, for opening your home.”

“Well, as Yellow sometimes says, ‘mi casa es su casa.’” King replied. “You’re welcome to stop by any time.”

“See ya, guys!” Purple called as we dropped down the trapdoor, one-by-one. “Love you!”

“We love you guys too!” We shouted as we disappeared into the trapdoor. From there, it was a quick trip through the portal back home to ALANSPC, and as we flew, I thought of ways I could surprise the guys. As hard as I wondered, one thing kept coming back to my mind: ‘What if we could interact with the characters?’

Something I’ve always wanted to do was join my favorite characters on their adventures, maybe practice kung fu with Po, Shifu, and Tigress, fly through the clouds on Toothless’s back, party with legions of lemurs or join Puss in Boots, Kitty, and Perrito through the Pocket Full O’ Posies. Sadly, that would forever be nothing more than a fantasy… right? A part of me wanted to believe that we could. We’ve been through games, why couldn’t we go into movies? I couldn’t shake that thought as I went to bed… but maybe an old friend could help.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

I awoke the next morning and flew to King’s house via our Nether portal. I had an idea, one last shot to make a distant dream a reality. It was wild, it was crazy, it was very much me. I had to try it… right? If this went well… The guys would be surprised, shocked beyond belief. Eventually, I made it to King’s portal and knocked on the trapdoor. King answered it.

“Red! This is a surprise!” He exclaimed.

“Morning, King. I had an idea and I needed to be here… in the Outernet. I hope you don’t mind my stopping by…”

“No, not at all.” King said. “Like I said, you’re always welcome.”

“What’s your idea?” Another voice asked. I turned and saw Gold standing outside his bedroom.

“Morning, Gold.” I began. “Where’s Purple?”

“Still sleeping. He likes sleeping in whenever he can.” Gold explained.

“Gotcha.” I said, understanding. “Well, I know someone who runs a major tech company. I’m hoping she could help me make my dream a reality.”

“Ooh, could I go too, Dad?” Gold asked.

“I’m not sure…” King admitted. “Having you two together seems dangerous, considering your reputations.”

“We won’t cause any trouble! I promise.” Gold swore.

“We’re gonna be good. You’ve got to trust me.” I added. I stopped at trying to do the cute-eyes thing, but I didn’t need to, as King reluctantly caved.

“Alright, alright!” He said. “Gold, take your cell phone, in case things go haywire, and… Be careful, you two. I just got you back, Goldy, I don’t want to lose you again.”

“I will.” Gold promised. “I’ll only push the limits, not break them.” I laughed, and even King cracked a smile.

“Grab your elytra, Gold!” I ordered. “Purple taught you how to fly, right?”

“Yeah, he has. It’s SO COOL! I always wanted to fly.”

“Well then, let’s fly!” I shouted eagerly, bursting out the door and taking off. Gold followed, and King waved good-bye to us from down below. Once we got into the sky, Gold spoke up.

“Where are we headed, Red?”

“My friend’s building: The center of the Tiger Tech Company.” I answered.

“Tiger Tech? What’s that?”

“You’ll find out soon enough.”

We soon arrived at the front doors of Tiger Tech and stepped through the sliding doors. It was hectic as always, I guess working in a major tech company is a busy job, but we slid through the mass of sticks and approached the front desk, where a black-and-yellow zigzagged stick–Bea, according to her nametag–waited.

“Hello there! How may I help you?” She asked brightly.

“Is the CEO here?” I wondered. “I’m friends with her.”

“Do you have an appointment?”

“Noooo…” I answered slowly, “but if you tell her that Red is here, I’m sure she’ll let me up.”

Bea shrugged, clearly a little skeptical, but she complied, calling the CEO on her intercom.

“Ma’am, I’m sorry to bother you but someone by the name of Red is here to see you.” She paused to listen. “Yes, ma’am. He’ll be right up.” She hung up. “My boss sounds really excited to see you. I will take you to her office.”

“Thank you.” I said gratefully. “I’m Red, and this is Gold.”

“Nice to meet you.” She replied.

Bea led us to the staircase, bouncing off the walls with her enhanced agility that Zigzags have, and guided us to the third floor, eventually stopping at a door marked, “CEO.” She gently knocked on the door.

“Ma’am, your red visitor is here.” Bea said to the door.

“Send him in.” said a voice from inside.

Bea opened the door and Gold and I stepped inside. There, at the desk, was the CEO of Tiger Tech, my dear friend Candy, who is a red-and-white striped stick gifted with super speed from her old boss. Upon making eye contact with me, Candy dropped everything and stood up.

“Reddy Bear!” She hugged me. “How have you been? It seems like it’s been forever!”

“Hey, Candy. It’s good to see you too.”

“And who’s this?” Candy asked.

“I’m Gold. Nice to meet you.” He shook hands with Candy. “Wait… Red, you’re friends with the CEO of a tech company?”

“I certainly am.” I said proudly.

“You seem a little young, Candy, like, closer to Red’s age than mine.” Gold noted, gesturing to me. “How’d you rise to CEO? And, while we’re at it, how’d you two meet?”

Candy and I exchanged a look, remembering vividly that day, the day Dark was defeated once and for all and I made some decisions that haunt me even now… to put it lightly.

“It’s quite the story.” Candy explained. “But, to put it simply, my old boss abducted SC and stripped him of his powers. Red and his friends arrived to rescue him, and rescued me in the process.”

“Wait… Hold on… SC has powers?” Gold asked, his eyes wide with astonishment. “Like… superpowers powers? Why am I just hearing about this now?!”

“Goldy, my friend…” I sighed, putting a hand on his back. “We’ve been through a lot in the past few months, before you returned. We’ll tell you everything in time. Now… is not that time, but I will say this: I had a similar reaction when I first heard the news.”

“OK, fine… I’m sorry I missed it…” Gold muttered, a little frustrated, but he decided to change the subject. “Candy, you said Red… rescued you? How so?”

“Red was the first one to show me mercy.” Candy explained. “I owe him a lot… I owe him everything.”

“Awww, thanks, Candy.” I said, a little embarrassed. Gold smiled cheekily.

“You two are really cute together. Are you two a couple or something?” Gold wondered.

“NO!” I exclaimed. “Jeez, not you, too. It’s bad enough that I get it from Lemon-Lime. I don’t need you on that bandwagon, too.”

“Sorry, Red.” Gold said sheepishly.

“Are you sure, Red?” Candy teased. “I know we’re just friends, but if you ever want to make it official, I can’t think of a guy I’d rather be with.” I felt myself blush.

“Thanks, Candy. You’re so sweet, like your name…” I said. “Wait, did I just say that out loud?”

“You sure did, Romeo.” Gold joked.

“Oh my gosh how embarrassing…” I felt my face turn an even hotter shade of pink. Candy giggled, seemingly not minding my self-humiliation. “Anyway… I was wondering if you and your team could do something for me.”

“What is it?” Candy asked.

“I was wondering… Is it possible to make a sort of… VR television?” Candy looked surprised.

“That’s ambitious, Red.” She said, nodding.

“It’s hard to describe, but I’ve always wanted to interact with my favorite characters from my favorite movies, to go on their journeys with them. Do you think that’s possible through VR or something?” I wondered cautiously. I didn’t want to be disappointed in case it wasn’t possible.

“Actually… We might have something in the works. Follow me.” Candy led us out of the office. “To be honest, Red, I’ve always wondered what it would be like to be inside my favorite movies, to do kung fu with my favorite character, Master Tigress.”

“Tigress?” Gold repeated. “Like the name of your company? Tiger Tech?”

“Yep. I named it after her when I took over.” Candy explained. “I figured this place needed a rebrand, especially after what happened to it with our last leaders.” She shuddered at the thought, and I did as well, vividly remembering Flodge’s murder and Dark’s downfall. I myself committed crimes I’d rather not relive that day. “Thankfully, we’ve thrived thanks to our innovations, like the one I am prepared to show you.” We followed her down one flight of stairs to the second floor and led us into a massive white room. Numerous chessboard sticks were working busily on something, I had no idea what. I was in awe. “Bishop!” Candy called. “Bishop?”

“Who’s Bishop?” Gold asked.

“My second-in-command, and chief inventor here at Tiger Tech. Most of the innovations we have made since my old boss’s downfall and my ascension to CEO were his ideas. I owe him a lot, he and chessboards like him have always been the brains of the company.” Candy explained. “They were given super intelligence, after all.”

“Do different patterns have different abilities?” Gold asked.

“Yep.” She answered. “Flodge–my old boss–wanted to convert everyone to resemble her: patterned sticks with undying loyalty toward her because she gave us special abilities. But she never cared about us. She wanted nothing more to control us. She saw her camo-colored coating as a deficiency, a flaw, an excuse for her to do what she did. It was Reddy Bear here who showed me mercy, who showed me that there’s more to us than our patterns, and turned me for the better.”

“Awww, thank you.” I said in my Perrito voice. Just then, a blue-and-white chessboard stick ran up to us.

“You shouted, Candy?” Bishop asked.

“How’s the experiment coming?” She asked. “My friends here, Red and Gold, are eager to learn of its progress.”

“We think we’re close to a breakthrough. We’re not totally sure, though.”

“Breakthrough on what?” I asked.

“A TV that takes the viewer inside the show or movie.” Candy explained. Gold looked uneasy with that information, which is new for him. Judging by how King describes him, and what I’ve seen in recent weeks, he’d be the first to attempt some crazy stunt, but not this, evidently.

“It’s all… virtual, right? Like, I won’t actually be inside the show, right? Like, it’s just a VR headset… right?” He asked shakily. “I can’t go back in there… Not again…”

“I’m in agreement. We’re not teleporting anyone anywhere.” I said firmly. I was fully aware of what happened to Gold his first time in Minecraft. He was lucky to be here. I wasn’t putting him back in that situation.

“Do not worry. That’s what we’re aiming for.” Bishop answered. “Perfectly harmless VR headsets. No need to have a repeat of… the Incident. That made news for weeks afterwards.” This put my mind at ease, and I think Gold was a bit more relaxed as well.

“When do you expect to finish it?” Candy wondered.

“A few weeks at the earliest. You can’t rush this type of thing.”

“Can you get it done by Friday?” I asked.

“Friday?” Bishop repeated. “One week? No way. That’s impossible, unless we work double-overtime or something…” I sighed deeply, thinking this plan was going to be put on hold until it’s my next turn for Movie Night, and considering there are eight of us, each of us in a rotation, I knew I’d have to wait a loooooooong time. Candy must’ve sensed my disappointment.

“Bishop, call everyone. We’re putting all hands on deck for this.” Candy said. “This is for Reddy Bear, after all. He deserves this after all he did for me.”

“This has a great chance of going haywire,” Bishop warned.

“I’ll give it a test run myself.” Candy promised. “I won’t risk any of you, and you all shall be properly compensated.” Bishop looked at Candy with concern in his cobalt blue eyes.

“Just so long as you know the risks of this. You can’t rush this kind of innovation.” Bishop warned again.

“What’s the point of having limits if you never push them?” Gold wondered. “Let’s at least try it, Red! C’mon! Just so long as it’s safe. VR headsets I can deal with, but don’t put me, like, in the show itself.” He shuddered. I was concerned for him, but I had to admit, it sounded like a lot of fun, and I always wanted to do it. However, Gold’s well-being comes first and foremost.

“Gold, are you sure about this?” I asked, worried for him. Gold breathed deeply. “You just got your dad back! Losing him again…”

“I won’t lose him… Because this is just VR. We’re not going anywhere.” Gold looked at me with passion in his sunflower yellow eyes. “I promise.”

Gold seemed determined, and he did have a point. These were only VR headsets and remotes. We wouldn’t be going anywhere, aside from Candy’s laboratory. Plus, he seemed pretty determined to do it, and he promised me that he’d be OK, so I trusted him. I turned to Candy.

“Candy, can you get it done?” I begged. “In a week?”

“I’ll try my best.” She promised. “Call everyone, and I’ll help you as much as I can, Bishop. We’re doing this… For Red.”

“I’m not sure about this, but… You’re the boss.” Bishop shrugged. “Everyone, it’s time to kick it into overdrive. We got a big project to finish and a tight deadline to meet.”

“Really?” I asked excitedly. “Oh, thank you, Candy! Thank you thank you thank you!” I said this so rapidly one would think I was an auctioneer.

“You’re welcome, Reddy Bear.”

“All I can say is,” I lowered my voice to mimic the Wolf, “this is gonna be fun!”

Chapter 2: The Test Run (Red)

The plan was set. Candy, Bishop, and their team of patterned and solid sticks alike got to work on their innovation. Despite Gold and I offering to help, Candy insisted that it be a surprise for us for Friday. I was frustrated by this, but agreed to Candy’s wishes and Gold and, after confirming Candy and I have each other’s contact information, I left the lab, heading for King’s house with our elytra. On the way there, Gold and I talked.

“I still can’t believe you’re friends with a CEO of a tech company.” Gold said, in awe. “That’s like if I knew William Fences or Stephen Tasks.”

“What can I say?” I smirked. “I have a magnetic personality.” Gold laughed, and I did as well.

“Are you excited, Red?” Gold joked. “For movie night?”

“‘Excited?’ Buddy, at this point, calling me excited would be an understatement.” I answered. “I might have a chance to interact with my favorite characters! You have no idea how much I’ve longed for this.”

“You have an obsession, Red, but I can’t say I blame you. DreamWorks has a lot of great movies.”

“And villains! Don’t forget the villains!”

“Definitely.” Gold said, nodding. “I remember seeing Kung Fu Panda with my dad as a kid. I thought Tai Lung was absolutely ferocious.”

“And Lord Shen in the second?”

“He too is an incredible villain. I mean, committing mass murder to avoid your destiny? Oh my gosh that’s intense!”

“He’s also got some funny, yet threatening moments.” I noted. “I mean how could you forget his parting gift… In that it will part you. Part of you here, part of you there part of you waaaay over there, staining the wall!” Gold chuckled.

“He’s easily one of the best I’ve ever seen…” Gold paused, “but I’m still a little anxious about the VR stuff.”

“I get that, Gold, but it’ll be OK. Candy and her team are great inventors. I’m sure they can make it work.”

“I hope so.”

“If nothing else, your dad will be here with you, and so will we.” I promised. “You’re not going alone, Goldy. We’ll be right alongside you whatever happens.”

“Thanks, Red. It’s so nice having… actual sticks with me and not just a mass of mobs who are trained to do what I say.” I laughed.

“Welcome to the family. You truly never left.”

We flew back to King’s house, landed in front of the door, put our elytra away, and stepped through the door. By then, Purple was up and waiting for us.

“There’s my big brother!” Purple exclaimed. “And Red! What are you doing here?”

“Um… Let’s just say, we’re getting ideas for our next movie night.” I explained discreetly. “Well, I have been, at least.”

“What other ideas do you have other than The Last Wish?” Purple joked.

“The Last Wish?” Gold repeated. “What’s that?”

“You’ve never seen it?!” I gasped.

“I was stuck in Minecraft for, like, two or three years, Red.” Gold quipped. “When was the movie made?”

“After the Incident…” I said sheepishly. “Oooooooh, you’re gonna love it!”

“I probably will.” Gold replied. “No spoilers, Purple, I want to see it for myself, and you too, Red.”

“I won’t say a word… Anymore.” I promised. “Though it’ll be hard. I can quote it backward and forward, practically…” I had to stop myself from adding, “And I don’t mean that metaphorically, or rhetorically, or poetically, or theoretically or in any other fancy way.”

“Thanks, buddy.” Gold said. I then heard my stomach growl, and evidently I wasn’t the only one.

“Ya hungry, Red?” Purple asked. I blushed.

“Was it that obvious?” I joked. “Where’s your dad?”

“He’s grocery shopping,” Purple answered. “He should be back-”

At that moment, King stepped through the door, grocery bags wrapped on his arms.

“Purple! Gold! Help bring in the groceries!” He called.

“On it, Dad!” Gold replied, stepping outside. Purple and I followed, but King stopped me.

“You don’t have to, Red. You’re our guest.”

“I insist, King, let me help.” King smiled.

“OK, fine,” he said.

I hopped outside and helped Purple and Gold with the groceries. It didn’t take too long with all three of us helping, and once we finished, Gold and Purple asked me if I wanted to stay for lunch.

“Dad will whip up something delicious, I’m sure of it.” Gold insisted.

“I’d love to, but I should probably be heading home. The guys are probably worried, and we have a round of sparring planned after lunch. It’s Blue’s turn to cook!” I explained.

“Isn’t it always Blue’s turn to cook?” King asked jokingly. We laughed.

“Well, I guess you should be going.” Purple said sadly. “We’ll see you around.”

“You better believe it!” I replied. “And, Gold… Movie magic! Hopefully on Friday!”

“I’m looking forward to it!” Gold exclaimed. “Bye, Red!”

“Bye, Tango family!” I waved good-bye to them before dropping into the trapdoor.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Several days passed with no word from Candy and the progress with the VR TV. I was getting worried that we wouldn’t have it ready in time for my turn and I’d have to wait even longer for the guys to see this, but late Thursday night, as I was going to bed… I got a text from Candy.

“Reddy Bear! Come to my lab! I have GOT to show you this!” She wrote.

She needed to say no more. I got up, grabbed my elytra, snuck out of our shared house, opened the portal to the Outernet in our PC–I wasn’t barging into King’s house in the middle of the night–and ran through it, flying through the dark night sky and dim light of the moon upon reaching the other side. I felt the cold, autumn air against my skin and regretted grabbing something warm ahead of time, like the red-dyed leather tunic in my room, but it was too late now. I flew as fast as I could to Candy’s lab and soon arrived, where Candy was waiting for me at the door.

“Candy!” We greeted each other with hugs. “What’s up?”

“I’ve GOT to show you this. Ooooh, you’re gonna love it! Follow me!”

She led me up the stairs and into the lab, and inside was an array of VR headsets and remotes hooked up to a TV. It didn’t seem special at first, but I knew there was a reason why she wanted to show me this.

“Is this… what you’ve been working on?” I asked. “The VR TV?”

“Yep.” Candy confirmed. “It was hard, but we somehow managed to do it.”

“Does it work?”

“It worked during my trial run. Wanna test it with me?”

“I’d love to!”

“Where to, Reddy Bear?” Candy asked, handing me a headset and remotes. “I’ve already been to the Valley of Peace, learning kung fu from Po, Shifu, and Master Tigress at the Jade Palace!” She squealed with excitement. Kung Fu Panda is her favorite franchise, and I can’t blame her. “But this is your test run. Where would you like to go?”

“Ooh! Can we go to the Dark Forest? Perrito’s path?”

“I figured you’d want to go there. Let’s go!”

I put my headset on. It was dark at first, but suddenly, I found myself inside the Dark Forest. Brightly colored grassy hills stretched out into the horizon, a rainbow arched in the sky, colorful trees were dotted around us, it seemed like I was there. I looked and saw Candy there with me.

“Candy, this… this is incredible!” I gasped. It felt like I was actually there. “I am in awe! I can’t believe you did all this in a week. Thank you so much! Thank you thank you thank you!”

“It wasn’t just me, but you’re welcome, Red.”

I couldn’t help but hug her. This was a dream come true. But then, another thought hit me.

“Can I interact with… Team Friendship?” I cautiously asked.

“Hola, Rojo!” came a voice from behind me. I turned and saw Puss in Boots, Kitty Softpaws, and Perrito the puppy behind me.

“Oh… my… gosh… P- Puss in Boots? The legend himself?” I stammered. I turned to Candy. “Is this… real?”

“As real as VR can be.” Candy answered.

“Candy. Red.” Kitty Softpaws greeted us. Just when I thought my heart would give out, Perrito poked his head out from behind the cats.

“Oh cool! Two more members of the team!” Perrito yipped excitedly. “And you two are?” He extended his paw. I put my hands to my mouth, unable to find words, and I could feel my heart skip several beats. Thankfully, Candy was there to speak for me.

“I’m Candy, and this is Red.”

“Oh wow, great names.” Perrito complimented. “There’s music in a name like that. Candyyyyy and Reeeeeed.”

“I’ve dreamed of meeting you three.” I gasped finally, my heart finding its beat. I dropped to one knee. “Perrito… PERRITO!” I squealed like an excited schoolkid. “Come here, little buddy!”

Perrito ran over to me, his tongue hanging out of his mouth, and I hugged and nuzzled him. Even though it was just VR, I stroked his fur and it felt so real. It felt so soft. It felt so warm between my fingers. It was like snuggling up with a best friend in a blanket. I let him lie down in my lap and I gave him all the belly rubs I could. He’s so sweet and innocent and I love him for it.

As for Candy, she was eager to practice sword fighting with the cats.

“She doesn’t have a sword.” Puss joked.

“She can have Red’s diamond blade.” Kitty said, handing Candy a diamond sword. “Better than a stick.”

“Wait, what?” I asked. I checked my inventory and realized my sword was missing. I was floored. I didn’t even notice she swiped it, but I guess that’s her soft paws in action. “Kitty, you’ve got to teach me that move. That’s amazing!” I exclaimed, still scratching Perrito’s belly.

“She’s good.” Perrito confirmed. Kitty smirked.

“OK, Candy, no more messing around.” Puss said. He whipped out his sword. “Fear me, if you dare!”

“Show me your moves, Puss! Become the Legend again!” Candy begged.

“I got to get in on this, too.” I insisted.

Candy and I spent a lot of time practicing our fighting skills with Kitty and Puss, while also getting therapy and advice from my favorite boy Perrito. It was so much fun, the most fun I’ve had in a very long time, and I felt like my dream came true. After some time, Candy told us that we had to go, so after waving good-bye to Team Friendship, we took off our headsets, taking us back to the lab.

“Candy… Thanks. Thanks for everything. That was one of the greatest experiences I’ve ever had in my life.”

“You’re welcome, Reddy Bear. I’m so glad you enjoyed it.”

“You made my dream come true, and for that, I am forever grateful.” I said appreciatively. “I can’t express my gratitude enough other than… another hug.” I hugged her tightly, and she blushed an even brighter red and cleaner white. I felt myself blush as well.

“Thanks, Red. You’re so sweet.”

“You’re even sweeter… Candy.” I replied. “Definitely living up to your name.”

“Stop it, Red.” Candy joked, giving me a playful sock in the arm. I laughed.

“Sorry.” I paused to control myself. “The guys are gonna love this. Thank you so, so much!”

“You’re welcome, Red, but you should probably get home. It’s late.”

“You’re right, but I doubt I’m gonna get much sleep. Too much excitement for tomorrow!” I said eagerly as I put my elytra on. She led me outside and bid me good-bye as I took off into the chilly night sky. I looked over my shoulder and saw Candy waving back at me. As much as I didn’t want to admit it, I had a deep affection for her. She’s probably the sweetest girl I’ve ever met, and I can see why Green and Yellow think we’re a couple.

Maybe it was time to make it official… I just worried what the guys would think. I could only imagine the teasing I would get from everyone, especially Green. Being the youngest, I often get the brunt of the jokes and insults, and I can’t imagine how getting together with Candy would only amplify the mockery from them. I know it’s all in fun, but…

It’s hard for me to describe. I can’t seem to place it. Maybe I should just talk to the guys about it. Maybe they could help. They’re my best friends. They would understand. If nothing else, Purple and King would have my back, especially Purple. He too found a girl in Magenta. He would understand me the best out of anyone. But, the more I thought about it, the more ridiculous it seemed. Nothing was going to change between us.

I’ve just… never felt this type of love before. It’s not like a love I have for my brothers or the Tango family… No, this is the “cartoon character gets hearts for eyes” type of feeling. I just wondered if this was going to work out. What was her faith? If she was a Christian, then this will go swimmingly. If she wasn’t… We might not be anything more than great friends. But, if that was the worst-case scenario, then I didn’t have much to worry about. We’re friends already. Nothing will change between Candy and I. It’s my brotherly relationship with the guys I’m more concerned about. How would they react if I did get together with her? They’d be supportive… right?

‘We’ve been through thick and thin together. Nothing will change,’ I told myself. ‘Now calm down, Red. You need to get some sleep. Hopefully a good night’s rest will be what you need, and then tomorrow… The big reveal. The guys are gonna love what you have in store for them! I’m sure of it.’

That calmed my anxieties a bit, but it was time to go home. I flew through the hole in the sky leading to ALANSPC and quietly returned to the friendly confines of my bedroom. As I snuggled into bed, I whispered to myself…

“Tomorrow… The guys are gonna be blown away. It’s gonna be awesome.”

Chapter 3: Into the Movie (The Second Coming)

I woke up to the smell of Blue’s cooking outside the house. Still a little sleepy, I got up, rubbed my eyes, and slumped outside, meeting Green and Yellow, who were practicing their sparring.

“Morning, guys.” I said sleepily.

“Morning, sleepyhead.” Green joked.

“Whoa, SC, you expressed that greeting in an exhausted tone.” Yellow said worriedly. “Perhaps it would be beneficial for you to catch a few additional Z’s.”

“I’ll be fine,” I insisted. “I just need some food in me, which is what coaxed me awake.” I heard my stomach growl, confirming this. “What’s Blue cooking?”

“Omelets.” Yellow explained. “You recall how he obtained the cookbook from the village a little while ago?” I nodded, confirming it. We all were there, after all.

“Well, the dude’s been adding to it ever since.” Green added. “He has several recipes for breakfast, lunch, dinner, and dessert. He’s been going cooking crazy ever since our meeting with the Chef.”

“Hey, where’s Red?” I wondered. “Is he up yet?”

“Negative.” Yellow answered. “He’s snoozing late, even later than you.”

“Perhaps my vegetarian omelet will awaken him.” Said a voice from behind me. I turned and saw Blue carefully balancing five plates on his arms. Green, Yellow, and I grabbed the plates off of him and carried them over to the table. The only thing missing was Red.

“Should we wake Red up?” I asked.

“Oooooor… should we prank him?” Green said jokingly.

“That’s an efficient method to get stuffed in an aluminum can, Green.” Yellow warned. “Best to gently awaken the dozing bear.” Blue and I nodded in agreement.

“I’ll go wake him.” I said. “A simple flick of the switch should suffice.”

“I should know. I wired the contraption myself.” Yellow added.

“C’mon, SC, before my food gets cold.” Blue insisted, rising from his chair.

“Wait, bro, don’t you have a Potion of Awakening?” Green asked, snickering.

“That’s not what ‘awakening’ means in that context.” Blue quipped. “SC, let’s go. A gentle hand will make it work.”

“That and Redstone lamps.” I said, joining Blue on the way back. We crept into Red’s room, where Red was sound asleep.

“Kid must’ve been tired, judging by how late it is.” Blue whispered to me.

“I wonder when he got to bed.”

“No telling.” Blue shrugged. “Do you think this has anything to do with our movie night?”

“Possibly, I’m not sure.” I replied, looking over at the sleeping Red. “I guess we’ll find out soon enough.”

I flicked the lights on and off a couple of times. Red tossed and turned in his bed, trying to shield his eyes from the light, and moaning frustratedly. Blue and I chuckled to each other.

“Ugh… Is it morning already?” Red whined. “Morning comes too early…”

“Morning, Reddy Bear!” Blue said cheerily. “Guess what time it is?”

“Wait… It’s Friday isn’t it?” Red asked sleepily. He suddenly panicked. “I missed movie night? What time is it?”

“Quarter past 10.” I answered.

“There’s no way… I missed it?!” Red gasped, alarmed.

“No no no no no, you’re fine.” Blue said comfortingly. “10:15 AM, not PM, little brother. You’re just in time for breakfast.” Red exhaled a sigh of relief and got up from his bed.

“Thank goodness… I have something big planned for all of you guys.” He said as we led him toward the table, where Yellow and Green were waiting.

“Something big?” I repeated. “Red, we’ve all seen The Last Wish before.” Blue chuckled.

“But you haven’t seen it like this.” Red insisted.

“Like what?” Blue asked.

“You’ll see tonight.” Red said eagerly as he took his seat.

“Morning, little bro.” Green greeted him.

“Morning, Green, Yellow.” Red replied sleepily. He took a whiff of the food in front of him. “Mmmm, it looks delicious.”

“A 100% vegetarian omelet for little Red,” Blue announced, “and customized omelets for everyone else, filled with your favorite foods.”

“SC, care to bless it?” Yellow asked.

“Absolutely.” I replied. We bowed our heads, I blessed the meal, and we all dug in. It’s delicious, as always, and no Netherwarts. Those are exclusive to Blue’s, thankfully. When we got about halfway through, Red spoke up.

“Hey… Guys… May I ask you all something?” he asked nervously.

“Of course, Red, what is it?” I wondered gently.

“If I got together with Candy… Nothing would change between us, right?” I saw him turn a hot shade of pink. The poor kid looked like he wanted to die than confess this to us.

“So you DO have feelings for her!” Green exclaimed.

“It made logical sense at the time, and it still does.” Yellow added.

“Lay off, guys.” Blue scolded. “Reddy Bear, nothing will come between us.”

“We’ll always be a family, no matter what.” I promised.

“I know… I was just… so scared to admit it because… I don’t want things to change… too much.” Red said, pausing on several occasions.

“Too much?” Blue repeated. “What do you mean?”

“I figured Green would tease me even more if I brought it up.” Red elaborated. “And, as much as I love ya, Green, I could do without some of the jokes at my expense. You too, Yellow. You’ve been on the ‘ship’–pun intended–since we left Flodge’s factory.” Green and Yellow glanced at each other.

“Perhaps I was a bit too quick on the trigger.” Yellow admitted. “I shouldn’t ‘ship’ individuals who prefer not to be ‘shipped.’ I apologize, Red.”

“I didn’t realize you felt that way, Red.” Green said. “I’m sorry, too. I didn’t mean any harm…”

“I know it’s all in fun.” Red interrupted. “It’s just hard getting the brunt of the jokes, the little guy, am I right, the Perrito of the litter.” We chuckled.

“I get it.” Green sympathized. “I’ll… try to dial it down a bit, bro. If I do cross a line, just let me know.”

“Thanks, guys. I appreciate it.” Red smiled at them, his face slowly returning to his normal cranberry red shade. “I was so nervous about admitting it to you guys.”

“What made you bring it up in the first place?” I asked.

“Well…” Red began, “I’ve been asking Candy for a favor, something for tonight’s movie night. You guys remember how she took over Flodge’s tech company?”

“Yeah, how could we forget?” Blue quipped, shuddering.

“She and her team have been working on something. Something to make movies more real, shall we say. It’s gonna be wicked!” Red explained, whipping out a British accent for the last line.

“Huh, you were right, Blue, it does have something to do with movie night.” I noted.

“Make cinemas more authentic?” Yellow repeated. “What is implied by that, Reddy Bear?”

“Yeah, dude, what have you been up to?” Green asked. “Besides mischief, of course.”

“You’ll see soon enough, but I know this: I am beyond excited to show you what I have planned!” Red said eagerly.

I felt a bit of unease, but a part of me was curious. Curious to see what was up Red’s sleeve.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Later on that night, the five of us swung by the Tango household and got King and his kids on board. Red explained to them his plan, what we were doing, and though it took some convincing, mostly for King, he and his kids were on board. We flew to the Tiger Tech building and met Candy on the bottom floor.

“Candy!” Red exclaimed, hugging her. She hugged him back.

“Good to see you again, Red!” She exclaimed. “And the rest of you! SC, Yellow, Green, Blue, King, Purple, and Gold, welcome to Tiger Tech! I’d imagine you’re here for movie night.”

“We certainly are.” King confirmed.

“Red was here a few days ago, he gave me the details. Follow me upstairs, prepare for an experience you shall not forget.” Candy instructed.

“Ooh, this is gonna be awesome!” Gold exclaimed eagerly.

We followed the striped stick up the stairs and into a massive white-walled lab. In the center of it was a TV and in front of it were nine VR headsets plugged into it. I was in awe, simply speechless, and the guys were the same, except for Red.

“Guys, I present to you our latest breakthrough in technology, the VR TV!” Candy proclaimed. “The name is still a work in progress, but the tech itself is finished.”

“What function does it perform?” Yellow asked.

“It virtually takes the user inside the movie or TV show they’re watching, allowing for the user to explore, experience, and even interact with their favorite characters, scenes, and moments firsthand.” Candy explained.

“Virtual… reality?” King asked cautiously. “I’m not sure about this…”

“I have my skepticisms as well.” I chimed in. “This won’t backfire… will it?”

“Red and I tested it ourselves yesterday, and we saw no problems with it.” Candy assured. “I’ve tested it twice, and I’ve seen no problems thus far.” The guys and I looked at each other, mixed expressions of our faces ranging from excited to anxious. Candy and Red must’ve noticed our indecisiveness and spoke up about it.

“I understand your hesitation, and I promise you, it’s perfectly safe.” Candy swore. “If it does go haywire, just take off the headset and we’ll be right back here.”

“C’mon, guys! It’s incredible!” Red claimed. “It’ll be beyond your wildest dreams. Plus, we’ll all be in it together. No one’s going alone. We promise. Imagine it… exploring your favorite TV shows and movies like you were there. How cool would that be?”

“There’s no waiver to sign, right?” King asked. “We’re not getting transported into the show, right? The last time I allowed Gold to do something like this, I nearly lost him.”

“Yeah, that’s my main concern with this as well.” Purple added. “Losing any of you guys. Will this be safe?”

“It is, I promise.” Candy insisted.

“C’mon, guys! It’ll be awesome!” Gold proclaimed. “Let’s do it, Dad!”

“I’m intrigued as well. I’ll give it a shot.” Yellow said.

“I agree, it sounds like a lot of fun.” Blue added.

“Sounds hype, to be honest. Let’s do it.” Green confirmed. I sighed.

“I’m in, just so long as it’s safe.” I conceded begrudgingly. “Purple? King? Are you in or not?” The two of them looked at each other, but ultimately decided on…

“I’ll join you.” Purple said. King slowly nodded.

“I’ll come along, if only for my sons. I’m not losing either of them, not without a fight.”

“Thanks, everyone!” Candy exclaimed. “I’ll come along with you, just for extra security. And, to be honest, I’m eager to see this again.”

“I’m so glad you’re joining us.” Red said sweetly. “Let’s go, guys!”

We each took a headset, put them on and grabbed our remotes.

“Is everyone ready?” Candy asked.

“Yes.” We all said in unison.

“Alrighty.” Candy then began speaking to the TV’s built-in AI. “Angel, initiate the Best of DreamWorks series.”

“Initiating the ‘Best of DreamWorks’ series.” Angel responded. Just like that, we were gone, suddenly appearing outside Shrek’s home in the swamp.

Chapter 4: Sickle, Meet Stick-le (Gold)

I was shocked. Simply shocked.

Candy’s technology had worked, and now, we were inside Shrek’s swamp. I looked around at the environment, at my friends, at myself. It looked like I was actually there. I felt the tall grass, glanced at the mud pits, it was astounding. It felt so real… and I wasn’t the only one who was stunned beyond belief. The guys, except for Red and Candy, gaped at all of it, ooh-ing and aah-ing in stunned disbelief. Candy beamed with pride, and Red… Well, he was geeking out, racing back and forth. He was doing everything he possibly could.

“Welcome to Shrek’s swamp!” Candy proclaimed.

“Candy… This… Wow! I’m blown away!” Red exclaimed. “Though I’m surprised we’re starting here. If you ask me, The Prince of Egypt and Chicken Run are a couple of bangers from even before Shrek.”

“Shrek is arguably more iconic.” Candy explained. “I mean, it spawned three sequels and two spin-offs, but I will agree, those two, especially The Prince of Egypt, are great movies, even though I’m not religious.” She shrugged.

“You’re not?” Red asked, sounding a little disappointed.

“No, not really. Why?”

Red didn’t respond. I personally didn’t see a problem with it, as I’m not religious either, despite Purple’s and Dad’s Christian faith. I tried it, but it wasn’t–and still isn’t–for me and I told them as much. It’s too stifling for a free spirit like me, and I find it hard to fathom how people live with that many rules. Dad and Purple still respect my choice, thankfully, but we don’t discuss it much, outside of them occasionally telling me they’re praying for me. It doesn’t bother or affect me all that much, but it’s nice to know they keep me in mind, I guess.

As for Red, he quickly hid his disappointment and changed the subject.

“No reason.” Red replied, examining his surroundings. “Wow, Candy… I’m amazed again.”

“I agree, Candy, this… this is astounding.” SC said, shocked.

“I am in agreement.” Yellow confirmed. “How have you constructed this environment? It appears to be incredibly authentic.”

“My team is incredible.” Candy complimented. “They did most of it.”

“They did an exceptional job.” Dad admitted.

“It’s like we’re actually here.” Purple added.

“It’s amazing, Candy!” I exclaimed. “I am in awe.”

“Dude… I am blown away.” Green agreed.

“I can’t believe you invented this. It’s spectacular.” Blue said.

“Thanks, guys.” Candy said humbly. “Feel free to explore! But, don’t get too close. I don’t think Shrek is taking visitors as of yet.” She advised.

“Ooh, can we meet him?” Red asked eagerly.

“We can see him, though like I implied, I don’t think he’d appreciate us on his property.” Candy warned. “You know how he values his privacy.”

“You’re probably right.” Red noted.

We watched from the tall grass as the iconic ogre left his outhouse and went about his day, as per the first few minutes of Shrek. It was so cool, it was like we were actually there. As the day wore on, we indirectly encountered the villagers and their torches and pitchforks. We remained hidden in the bushes as the villagers’ torches flickered.

“Should we intervene?” SC asked.

“No, Shrek’s got this.” Red insisted.

“Oh wait… Doesn’t he mention something about squeezing jelly from their eyes?” Blue asked queasily.

“Yesssss…” Candy confirmed slowly.

“Oh, I don’t want to be here for that.” Blue confessed. “The thought of it is making me feel nauseous.”

“And your Netherwart diet doesn’t?” Green jabbed.

“You guys can leave, if you want.” Red insisted. “I want to see Shrek scare them away. It’s pretty funny, especially when he says, ‘This is the part when you run away,’ that always draws a chuckle from me.”

We split at this point. Red, Candy, and Green–surprisingly enough–watched Shrek do his thing, Green thought it’d be cool to see an “All-Star” do his thing, while the rest of us slipped into the grass around the swamp. As we trudged through the grass, a flicker of light caught my eye. I, who was already behind everyone else, stopped in my tracks.

‘What is that?’ I thought. ‘I don’t recognize it, but then again, I haven’t seen this movie in a while.’

I glanced at Dad and the guys, and they were quickly disappearing in the thick grass. When they were out of earshot, I slinked away toward the light. It was faint at first, but when I drew closer, I could see where the light was emanating from. It was a small lantern hung on a sign, which was itself hanging from a building I didn’t recognize.

‘This isn’t in Shrek.’ I thought. ‘At least, I can’t recall ever seeing it.’

I took the lantern off its hook and read the sign it was hanging from. “Las Nueve Vidas Tavern,” it read. “Serving fairytale creatures and humans of all shapes and sizes,” was written in small print underneath it. I didn’t realize it at the time, but I was a little bit thirsty. Plus, I was incredibly curious. I wanted to explore everything Candy put into this simulation. What’s the point of going to a place if you’re not gonna venture out into it?

I put the lantern back, placed a hand on the wooden door and pushed. It slowly creaked open, showing me the tavern. It was very empty and rundown, tables, chairs, and stools were knocked over, the only light came from one candle lit on the chandelier overhead, several other candles on the countertop, and the moon shining through a window. The only other person there was the bartender, who was behind the counter, cleaning a glass with a cloth.

“Hola. May I help you?” The bartender asked.

“Could I get a glass of water?” I asked, righting a stool and sitting upon it. There was a giant mirror on the wall behind the bartender, allowing me to see the rundown bar. “The trek here has made me a bit parched.”

“Say no more.” The bartender filled a glass with water and slid it over to me. I caught it in my palm and took several swigs from it.

“Thanks, friend.”

“Anything else, mi amigo?” The bartender asked. I scanned the menu on the wall. I wasn’t old enough to drink, and I didn’t think Dad would approve of me drinking anyway. I may like pushing my luck, but this wasn’t worth it. If Dad found me wasted… I didn’t want to know what he’d do to me. Probably prohibit me from leaving my bedroom until I turn 21… four years from now. And that’s a low estimate.

“Do you have any soda? Or other non-alcoholic beverages?” I wondered.

“Oh I keep that stuff in the back.” The bartender replied. “Let me check.”

“Take your time.” I insisted. He disappeared into the back, leaving me alone in the empty saloon.

At least, I thought I was alone.

A light breeze blew in through an open window, extinguishing the candle above me, making the atmosphere even more dark, dreary, and cold. I wasn’t bothered by it. I lived with mobs in a dark castle for years after all, so I didn’t notice all too much.

“I could get used to this.” I said to myself. As I continued sipping my water, I heard a sound.

A whistle.

An eerie whistle.

I can’t say I scare easily, but this whistle… it sent a shiver up my spine. I glanced around, looking for the source of the chilling notes, and then turned to my right. There, on the stool next to me, was a silver-white wolf dressed in a black cloak with a hood covering his head. I stared at him with wide eyes and slowly took my glass away from my mouth and set it onto the countertop. The wolf held up a shot glass, allowing me to see my reflection in it.

“Well, well…” The Wolf began, “if it isn’t Gold Tango himself.” He chuckled and turned to face me, allowing me to see his sinister, shining, ruby red eyes. “In the flesh.” He smiled an evil, crazy smile, immediately giving me major “villain” vibes.

‘How does he know my name?’ I thought. ‘Must be that interactive technology Candy described.’

“Hey… Dude…” I said slowly. “You know me?”

“Of course… There’s your famous blonde locks, your color, and of course, your stunts.” The Wolf replied. “My compliments to your reputation.” He leaned in closer, chuckling, his red eyes seemed to stare into my soul.

“Thanks… Uh… Nice to meet you…” I said uncertainly, scooting my stool away from him.

“Hey, I never do this, but… Can I get your autograph?” The Wolf asked, reaching into his cloak. “Been following you for a loooooong time.” He pulled out a WANTED poster with a picture of me on it. “Dead or alive” was written below my picture. “Sign right there.” He continued, tapping the word, “Dead” on the poster.

‘Jeez, this is getting creepier by the second.’ I thought. ‘But… This is just VR, right? He can’t hurt me.’

“I’m not one to stray away from risks, bounty hunter.” I countered, glaring at him.

“So I’ve heard.” The Wolf replied, pulling his hood down and frowning.

“I’m not going to go down without a fight.” I said tersely, pulling out Diane, my diamond sword I brought with me from my years in Minecraft. “I promise you that.” The Wolf rolled his eyes.

“Everyone thinks they’ll be the one to defeat me,” he quipped, reaching over the counter, grabbing a bottle, and pouring it into a mug, “but no one’s escaped me yet.”

“Let’s do this.” I pointed my sword at the Wolf. “Come at me, bro-”

The Wolf interrupted me by swiftly knocking my sword out of my hand. It got stuck in a barrel, but it seemed like he didn’t move. He just… sipped his mug. I was annoyed, but I shuffled back to Diane and pulled it out.

“OK, no more Mr. Nice Guy.” I charged the Wolf and tried stabbing him, but he swerved away from my attacks. I turned around and took three more strikes at him, but he dodged each one of my attacks.

“Slow. Sloppy. Sad!” He mocked. I lashed out once more, but he blocked my sword with twin sickles, which caught me by surprise. He pushed me back and knocked me off the countertop, spinning his sickles in his paws. Furious, I leapt at the Wolf once more, but he caught me in midair with his massive paw. He held me by the neck and drew me closer, lowering his voice to a whisper.

“You’re not living up to the legend, Oro.”

With that, he lifted me up and slammed me on the countertop, dragging me against it and throwing me against his chair. I just barely managed to avoid his sickle by leaping backwards onto a table, which he split instantly, continuing to take massive swipes at me with his sickles. I, now off my feet and backing away, barely blocked them with my blade, Diane, until he knocked her out of my hand and grazed the top of my head with his razor sharp blade.

I stared at the Wolf with eyes wide with fear, and I felt a small drop of blood trickle down my face. ‘This wasn’t real, right?’ I thought. ‘This is just VR. Yeah. I just gotta take off the helmet and I’ll be back home.’

I reached for my helmet…

Except it wasn’t there.

All that was there…

Was a drop of blood from the scar.

I looked at my bloodstained hand and gasped. ‘There was no way that this was real… right?’ I wondered. ‘Candy assured me this was just VR. So… why can’t I escape this nightmare?’ I felt my heart start to beat out of my chest, the hair on my arms and neck stood on end, and the Wolf tauntingly sniffed the air, sighing.

“I just LOVE the smell of FEAR!” He proclaimed, spinning his sickles. Lightning struck outside, making his striking red eyes shine even more like rubies. He dragged his sickles on the ground, sending sparks through the air, and I backed away, paralyzed with fear. It was so bad I saw my life flash before my eyes: growing up with Dad, the numerous stunts I pulled, the Incident, the years in Minecraft, and finally… now. I panted heavily, my heart racing a mile a minute, and it was only accelerating…

“What’s the matter? Life flashing before your eyes?” The Wolf mocked. I saw him kick Diane over to me.

“Pick it up.” He taunted.

“Pick.

“It.

“Up.”

Each word injected more fear into my heart, piercing me like the world’s worst flu shot. I felt panic well up in my body and soul, filling me like a water balloon about to burst. What do I do? Do I continue the fight? Pick up Diane and fight for my life? Or do I flee, cut my losses and escape to fight another day? Seeing the Wolf in front of me, mocking me, telling me to continue the fight, the answer was obvious.

‘I gotta get out of here.’ I thought. ‘This guy could legitimately kill me.’

I scrambled to my feet and took off, leaving Diane behind, and took refuge in the bathroom. I locked myself in, but I knew this wooden door would be no match for his sickles. The dude sliced a table if half, after all. This door was not gonna hold. I braced myself against it, breathing heavily, sweat pouring down my face, my heart still going at Mach 10, the fear and panic overwhelming me, and if that wasn’t bad enough, I heard it again.

The whistle.

That horrifying whistle.

It drew closer.

He drew closer.

The monster was coming to kill me…

Permanently.

The Wolf’s shadow appeared through the crack under the door. I watched it grow larger and longer under my feet.

I looked around for some way to escape, but there were no windows. The only thing in there was the toilet, not even any toilet paper. Thankfully, it was big enough for me to fit in.

‘I got no choice.’ I thought. ‘It’s either this or die.’

I bolted for the toilet and flushed myself down, and just in time, too. As I disappeared into the sewage pipes, I heard the lock break and the door creak open. I didn’t think the Wolf could fit in here, but I was already on my way out. As I floated down, however, I heard his voice echoing faintly in the pipes.

“Corre, corre, Oro.”

I wasn’t sure what that meant, I don’t speak Spanish, but that’s all I heard before reaching the end of the pipe.

Chapter 5: Searching for Gold (Purple)

We trudged through the grass, not fully sure where we were going, but keeping sure to stay out of Shrek’s way, as we knew he wasn’t in the mood to make new friends. It wasn’t long before we heard his powerful yell in the distance. I could only imagine the fear the villagers must’ve felt… or I could just rewatch the movie. It was so loud birds flew out of the trees, which made me realize it was kinda dark outside.

“Hey, guys, do you think we should be settling in for the night or something?” I asked over my shoulder.

“I’m not sure.” SC answered. “We can go back and ask Candy to figure out more of the ins and outs of this machine.”

We stopped and turned around, quickly realizing someone was missing.

“Hey… Where’s Gold?” Dad asked.

“I thought he was still with us.” Blue said shakily.

“I assumed that also.” Yellow added. “What became of him?”

“Oh no…” Dad sighed, shaking his head. “He’s always been so adventurous. He could be anywhere at this point.”

“Let’s retrace our steps, and if we find nothing, we split up.” SC suggested. “Green and the Bears can help with our search.”

“The Bears?” I repeated.

“Reddy Bear and Candy.” SC explained.

“Candy Bear?” Green wondered. “What does that even mean?”

“Ever heard of gummy bears, Green?” Blue quipped.

“Guys, guys. we’d better get a move on.” I insisted. “It’s already dark, and it’s only gonna get darker.”

“At least nothing is capable of injuring him. It’s just VR.” Yellow said comfortingly. This gave Dad ease.

“You’re right.” Dad replied. “He’ll be fine, just… bring him back, kids.”

“I’ll double back and grab Green and the Bears.” I promised. “They’ll help us.”

“The rest of us, fan out.” SC ordered. “We’ll scour this entire swamp if we have to.”

“When one of us does manage to locate King’s elder child,” Yellow began, “inform everyone via text. We’ll rejoin and resume our journey once that occurs.”

We all agreed to the plan and split up, scanning everywhere for my big brother. I did the same as I returned back down the path we came, eventually stumbling upon Green, Red, and Candy.

“Hey, bro.” Green greeted me.

“Hi, guys.” I replied. “Listen, Gold wandered off and we’re looking for him.”

“Oh no… Can you not text him?” Red asked.

“I can try.” I pulled out my phone and sent him a text, only for it to show up as undeliverable. “What’s going on? My texts won’t work. Candy, you can text in here, right?”

“Yeah, we accommodated for that.” Candy confirmed. “It could be something else, like his phone is off or something.”

“Whatever the case, we need to find Gold.” I determined. “Split up, guys. We’ll find him.”

The four of us nodded and we separated. It was hard to see anything, even with the flashlight on my phone, but I stayed resilient, looking far and wide for him. As I searched, I heard lightning strike and thunder boom in the distance.

‘I’d better pick up the pace.’ I thought. ‘If a storm is brewing, we shouldn’t be outside for this.’

I speed-walked through the tall grass and soon enough, I heard the sound of a door bursting open, startling me and causing me to freeze.

‘Maybe that’s Gold.’ I thought, going toward where I heard the sound, but I only took a few steps when something collided with me. After a second to recover from the collision, I realized who it was.

“Gold?” I asked.

“Purple!” He exclaimed, looking around in a panic. “Where are we? Where are the others?” I gave him a puzzled look.

“We’re in… Shrek’s swamp…?” I answered, positively dumbfounded.

“Oh jeez… He’s nearby…” Gold said, terrified.

“Who is?” I asked.

“Listen, I don’t have time to explain. We’ve gotta get out of here! NOW!”

He grabbed me by the hand and yanked me away from the swamp, sprinting as fast as he possibly could. It was hard for me to keep up, and I thought my arm was going to be disconnected from my body, but I followed, sending the guys a text that I found Gold and we were heading down a path, I believed the path to the castle, though I couldn’t remember the name of the kingdom it ruled over. We ran for what seemed like a few minutes, but the sun started to rise on a new day. Perhaps the VR world was on a different timetable.

As dawn broke, Gold stopped, my shoulder in a little pain from the run, but I figured I’d be OK. I was more concerned about Gold, who was turning a pale shade of yellow. He looked like he had just seen a ghost, panting heavily, sweat staining his face, his heart beating so loud I could hear it from a few feet away, though that might’ve been the run. Not to mention he smelled and looked like he got flushed down a toilet. I had to ask about it.

“Gold, what happened? Are you OK?”

He did nothing but pant heavily, hunched over with his hands on his knees, looking completely exhausted. I bent down and put my hand on his back, rubbing it in an attempt to soothe him. His breathing slowed down, his heartbeat also slowed to a regular pace, and his color returned to his face. After he collected himself, he looked up at me.

“Thanks, Purple. I needed that.”

“What happened to you, Gold?” I asked. “Where did you go?”

Gold swallowed hard, breathed deeply, and answered.

“First, Purple… I need you to do something for me.”

“What is it?”

“Are you… wearing a headset?”

“What?” I asked, bewildered. “Of course. How else would I be here?”

“Then take it off.” Gold insisted. “Reach for it.”

Despite my confusion, I did as told, but to my surprise… It wasn’t there.

“Wh- Where’s the headset?” I wondered, a little desperate. “We’re not… inside the movie, are we?”

“I didn’t think so… until what just happened last night.”

“Gold, you have to tell me. What happened?” Gold paused. “I’m your brother. I’m here to help you… Please… Let me help you…” Gold looked at me, and I could see desperation in his eyes.

“OK…” He began. “When we split from Red, Green, and Candy, I saw a faint light in the distance. Curiosity overtook me and I followed, stumbling upon a bar, where I had a run-in with a Wolf.”

“Wolf?” I repeated.

“Yeah. Do you know something about him?”

I was unsure. There is a recurring wolf in the Shrek franchise, the one from Little Red Riding Hood, but then again, I have seen The Last Wish before with Red and our family, and safe to say, despite his limited screen time, that Wolf made a definite impact, though not as much as Goldi and the Bears for me, being an adopted child. But there was no way this was the same Wolf. That was from a different movie entirely. I had to know more.

“I might.” I said uncertainly. “What did he look like?”

“Silver-white fur, a black hooded cloak, double sickles… Those were the most terrifying…” He shuddered.

I felt my heart skip a beat. There was no way Goldy, my beloved older brother, had a “run-in” with the physical incarnation of Death itself… right?

“And a whistle… right? He whistles to announce his presence?”

“Yeah, that’s the first thing I ever heard from him.” Gold confirmed.

“There’s no way…” I said, shaking my head in disbelief.

“But you’re familiar with him.” Gold figured. “Who is he?”

I didn’t know how to answer this. Gold met Death itself. How could I tell him? Would he believe me if I told him the truth? Should I keep him from worrying and tell him it’s just a bounty hunter or something? Maybe just use the “Big Bad Wolf” excuse and tell him that.

“Gold, does it matter who he is?” I asked. “I mean, this is all virtual. He can’t hurt you, it’s just a character in a movie.”

“That’s what I thought, until he gave me this.”

He lifted his long, golden bangs and showed me a fresh scar on his forehead. I couldn’t believe it, and I just stared at him in shock. This was too creepy, too wild, and I stood there frozen, barely breathing… that is, until my family came running toward us, Red taking the lead.

“Goldy!” He cried, racing up to us. The rest of my family followed, and Red almost threw his arms around Gold until he noticed how filthy dirty he was.

“My Golden Boy!” Dad exclaimed. He didn’t seem to mind the odor and he hugged Gold. “What happened to you? You disappeared!”

“Yes, that stunt you pulled was highly illogical and brash.” Yellow reprimanded.

“Are you OK, buddy?” SC wondered.

“You look like you got sprayed in toilet water.” Green observed.

“You smell like it, too.” Blue noted, sniffing the air and gagging.

“Are you OK, Gold?” Candy asked. “You don’t look like you’re all there.”

“I was just telling Purple this, but…” Gold said slowly. “I met a Wolf in a bar.”

“A Wolf in a bar?” Red asked, alarmed. He and Candy looked at each other.

“Gold described him as… the Wolf.” I added. “You know the one, Red. Shining red eyes, twin sickles, the whistle…” Red shared a shocked, terrified expression with Candy.

“Candy, did you program the Wolf in here?” Red asked.

“No, I swear!” Candy said defensively. “I made sure that there would be no movie crossovers.”

“So… then… How is he here?” Yellow wondered. “The Wolf shouldn’t be present, should he?”

“No, not at all.” Red confirmed.

“Who is this Wolf character?” Gold demanded to know. “He seems to clearly have a lot of plot relevance, yet I can’t recall ever seeing him.”

Red walked up to him and put a hand on his shoulder, looking very uneasy.

“Gold, my dear friend, there’s no easy way of putting this, but…” Red paused, swallowing hard. “I can’t talk to you metaphorically or rhetorically or poetically or theoretically or in any other fancy way. That Wolf you met in the bar… He’s Death.”

Gold gasped, looking absolutely stunned and terrified at the same time.

“Straight up.” Red finished. “And I fear he’s come for you… Gold Tango… and maybe the rest of us as well.”

Chapter 6: The Villain Lineup (Red)

Gold looked back at me with an expression of shock on his face. As much as I didn’t want to tell him, I had to. The Wolf, the most epic villain in all of DreamWorks, was here. All of us, not just Gold, looked at each other in shock, stunned expressions in all of our faces, especially Candy’s. Outside of Gold, she seemed the most spooked out of all of us, but she tried to de-escalate the situation.

“OK, OK, OK… This isn’t real, guys. This is all virtual.” She insisted.

“That’s what I thought, too,” Gold replied, “until the Wolf gave me this.” He showed us all a scar on his forehead that was hidden under his bangs. It looked fresh as well. Candy took a close look at it.

“No… No no no no no this isn’t happening… This cannot be happening…” Panic crept into her voice.

“It’s just VR, right?” King asked. “Just take off the headsets.”

“This isn’t VR any more, Dad.” Purple explained desperately. “We’re inside the movie.”

“Impossible.” Yellow insisted, reaching for his face. “Wait… what became of my headset?” Everyone else followed suit, reaching for their faces. I did the same, only to be just as shocked as everyone else upon realizing that this was no longer VR. We were inside the movie. We looked at each other in a panic.

“Wh- What’s going on?!” Blue asked desperately. “Candy?”

“I- I don’t know!” Candy confessed, also in a panic. “This was not how I told Bishop to program it.”

“You don’t think the dude is still working against us?” Green asked.

“No! There’s no way!” Candy insisted.

“Of course you’d vouch for him.” Gold quipped. “You’re his boss. Candy, I almost died! Like permanently died!”

“I know we shouldn’t have done this.” King said, shaking his head worriedly. “I could’ve lost my son again because of a VR experience.” He sighed deeply, pain in his voice. “How could I have let this happen? Again?!” He took off.

“Dad, wait!” Purple called, racing after him. Gold followed him.

“Wait… ‘Again?’” Candy repeated slowly. “What does he mean by that?”

“Well, you remember the Incident, Candy?” I explained. She nodded, confirming this. “Well, Gold was the one lost in the simulation.”

“That’s why I was so hesitant to join.” SC added. “And I’d imagine King was as well.”

“Oh jeez, I… I didn’t realize…” Candy said, her voice starting to crack as if she were crying.

“It’s not your fault, it’s mine.” I assured her. “I was the one who had this idea. I was the one who pushed so hard for this. I was the one who dreamed of this… And now my dream has turned into a nightmare… for all of us.” I looked up at the guys with tear-stained eyes. “Guys, I…”

“We forgive you, Reddy Bear.” Blue said gently before I could finish.

“We haven’t lost anybody.” Green assured me. “We’ll make it through this together, bro.”

“I recommend locating the Tango family.” Yellow added. “I can only imagine how distraught King currently is.”

“I agree.” Candy confirmed. “Plus, I need to make amends.”

We followed the path and soon found the three Tangos, King leaning against a tree in desperation, with Purple and Gold flanking their grieving father. As we got closer, we heard them talking.

“Dad, it’ll be OK.” Purple said comfortingly. “You haven’t lost us.”

“And you won’t lose us.” Gold added.

“I’ve seen you unleash your lion before.” Purple continued. “I’m sure you can channel that again.”

“I appreciate your words, kids,” King began, “I just feel like an unworthy parent.”

“Wh- What do you mean?” Gold asked, a little shaken.

“I’m supposed to protect you two. It’s my job as a father, but now you’re in danger and it’s partially because of me. If I had just stood my ground… If I had said, ‘No,’ we would be home safe and sound.” King was on the verge of tears, which was a shock to me. I’ve always thought of him as a rock, a firm foundation, but I guess we’re all shakable at some points. “Goldy, I made your late mom a promise that I would raise you right, but how can I do that when you’re being put in legit danger because of me?”

“Dad…” Purple said, tears in his eyes, “it’s not your fault. You’re still a great father. You mean the world to me. You’re exactly what I need, you were then, and you still are now.” He threw his arms around King, and Gold did as well.

“And I think if Mom was still here,” Gold added, “she’d be proud of you. You’re raising me right, you’re keeping me safe… I’m just not raising myself right.” King couldn’t help but smile as he wiped tears from his eyes.

“You’re a great father, one of the greatest, and I don’t think I’m alone in that sentiment.” Purple said, locking eyes with us. King looked up at us through his tear-stained eyes.

“King, we love you like a father.” SC confirmed, nodding.

“And we love you dearly… Dad.” I professed sheepishly.

“You’re the equivalent of the father figure my brothers and I never had.” Yellow confessed.

“You’re a great fighter, dude, and you have my respect.” Green added.

“We’ll be a family, and nothing will ever separate us.” Blue said confidently.

“Kids… my beloved kids… Thank you.” King said. I ran up to him and hugged him, Purple, and Gold, the guys right behind me. King hugged us back, and dried his eyes. He then saw Candy behind us.

“King… I’m sorry for putting you and your kids through this.” She apologized. “I promise you, I never meant for this to happen. I don’t know how, I don’t know why, but I swear… I’ll do whatever I can to make it right.”

“We all will.” I affirmed, releasing King to stand at Candy’s side. “We’ve faced Vic, we’ve faced Flodge, we’ve faced the literal Dark Lord! This is child’s play compared to them.”

“You’re right.” King agreed, regaining his composure. “Red, you know DreamWorks more than any of us. What do we do?” After a moment of thought, I knew what was next.

“To the kingdom of Duloc. Let’s play through this as if we were the protagonists. And maybe Lord Farquaad will give us some answers.”

We all nodded in agreement and ran down the path toward the castle, the kingdom of Duloc, home of Lord Farquaad. I could tell there was a lot of tension between us, especially between some of the guys and Candy. No doubt they partially blamed her for getting us stuck here, but I didn’t want to believe she did this deliberately. Candy herself was looking very distressed, almost on the verge of tears while we ran toward Duloc. I had to stop and comfort her several times along the way.

“Don’t worry, Candy, we’ll get out of here.” I assured her. She looked at me.

“I just don’t know fully how we got in here in the first place.” She admitted.

“However we got here, we’re getting out.” I promised. “In the meantime… Let’s enjoy getting to know some of the characters, the heroes, the villains.” Candy chuckled.

“Ever the optimist, Reddy Bear.”

“And you’re still so sweet, Candy.”

As we approached Duloc, we saw the massive castle in the distance. It’s even bigger in person, making me wonder again if Farquaad is making up for his short stature. We stepped through the gates one-by-one and stumbled upon the singing puppet machine with one of the best gags in the movie.

“Ooh, I know this thing!” I said eagerly, pointing to the machine.

“What’s that?” King asked.

“It’s a machine! You pull the lever and cute little puppets sing a song welcoming you to Duloc!” I explained.

“Cute…” SC noted, not fully sure how to react. I pulled the lever anyway. After a moment of random ticking, the puppets sang their song.

“Welcome to Duloc, what a perfect town

Here we have some rules, let us lay them down:

Don’t make waves, stay in line

And we’ll get along fine,

Duloc is a perfect place!

Please keep off of the grass,

Shine your shoes, wipe your… face!

Duloc is… Duloc is… Duloc is a perfect place!”

The machine then snapped a picture of us and printed it. I smiled for it, but everyone else was just visibly confused. I showed it to the guys, and they just shrugged me off for the most part.

“You gotta get your head in the game, bro.” Green said flatly. “We’re trying to get home.”

“I’m trying to lighten the mood!” I exclaimed. “Is that too much?”

“Oh, speaking of which,” Purple began, “Goldy, what else happened to you? With the Wolf?”

“Well, to put it simply, he kicked my butt, nearly killed me.” Gold explained, shuddering. “He didn’t seem interested in killing me at first, but he was just luring me, getting me to strike first for him to retaliate harder. Oh, and he said something after I flushed myself away.”

“What was it?” King asked, concerned.

“Something in Spanish… ‘core-ay, core-ay, or-oh,’ or something like that.” Gold answered. “Anyone know what that means?”

“Corre, corre, Oro. It means, ‘Run, run, Gold.’” Yellow translated. “He’s playing the psychological game with you, my yellow-colored counterpart.” Gold shuddered.

“Red, you seem to be quite familiar with him.” Gold said, turning to me.

“I’ve seen the movie a few times, yes.” I answered humbly.

“A few?” Yellow repeated. “Reddy Bear, you’re past double-digit rewatches at this point.” Candy chuckled. “You’re at 13 at the minimum.”

“14, but who’s counting?” I corrected.

“So… What does he want with me?” Gold asked desperately.

Before I could give an answer, though, we stumbled upon the courtyard where Shrek first met Farquaad in the movie. There was a roaring audience around us, knights everywhere, and the one and only Farquaad standing on his balcony above us.

“Lord Farquaad…” I shouted, staring up at him.

“He’s not the only Lord.” said another, familiar voice. Candy gasped.

“I know that voice…” She noted. “That’s… the peacock…”

Sure enough, the sinister white-and-gray peacock named Lord Shen appeared next to Farquaad.

“Get the baddies ready. We leave now.” Shen ordered. “NOW! Now now now now now!”

“Other villains?” SC wondered, whipping his sword out. Sure enough, several other villains, some of DreamWorks’ best, most powerful, and most iconic antagonists, joined Farquaad and Shen on the balcony. One by one appeared Tai Lung and Kai the Collector from the Kung Fu Panda franchise, Drago Bludvist and Grimmel the Grisly from the How to Train Your Dragon franchise, Big Jack Horner from Puss in Boots: The Last Wish, the Fairy Godmother from Shrek 2, Tighten from Megamind, Vincent the Bear from Over the Hedge, and Professor Marmalade from The Bad Guys… and Ken from The Bee Movie for whatever reason. It was the guinea pig, Marmalade, who spoke first.

“So you finally get it!” He exclaimed. I love animals more than almost anything, but Marmalade I despise. The nine of us assumed a fighting position. We might’ve been outnumbered, but we were willing to fight.

“Marmalade… You patchy-cheeked runt!” I shouted.

“Now now, no need for name calling.” Farquaad interrupted.

“Who are you?” SC yelled. “What do you want from us?”

“Those guys, SC, are some of DreamWorks’ villain arsenal.” Candy explained. “Powerful, ferocious, menacing… and Ken.”

“We want to rewrite history.” Farquaad said smoothly. “We are constantly deemed as the villains of our stories, when I just want to be King.”

“Oh calm down, Junior. You’re still gonna be king.” The Fairy Godmother demeaned.

“I rotted in jail for 20 years because of Shifu’s weakness!” Tai Lung thundered.

“My parents hated me.” Shen muttered. “They wronged me, and I will make it right.”

“I alone should’ve controlled the dragons…” Drago added.

“I got my stuff stolen from me… Twice…” Vincent growled. “Arrrr Jaaaaaaaay!!!!!!!”

“I wanted the one thing that would make me happy: All of the magic in the world, for me, and no one else gets any.” Jack Horner said dreamily. “Is that so much?”

“She left me… for a BEE! A BEEEEE!” Ken wailed, garnering a look from all of us, heroes and villains alike.

“Ignore him. He’s here for comic relief.” Farquaad said, waving his hand dismissively. “You nine are now the main protagonists of each of our movies. Since we couldn’t defeat the so-called ‘heroes,’ the villains of our own stories, we had to make our own marks, and who better to make them on than nine puny stick figures?”

“According to us, we’re the heroes, and yet none of us won. Especially Oogway… I loved him like a brother…” Kai said, swinging his iconic jade blades. “We want that chance to do what Oogway did: Come out on top.”

“But first, you’ll have to rescue my princess for me.” Farquaad began. “Play through our movies, see if you can defeat us. Some of you may die, but that’s a sacrifice I’m willing to make.”

“What if we can defeat you?” I demanded to know. “Because if there’s one thing I know about bad guys, they always LOSE!”

“What if we don’t accept your challenge?” King wondered.

“You will.” Tighten said. “I have my eye on someone, and I’ve had my eye on her for a while now.” He gazed at Candy, flew down, and grabbed her before any of us could react.

“CANDY!!!” I screamed. “Let her go, you knuckle-dragging, honey scrounging…!”

“To the tower for the rest of her days with her,” Farquaad ordered, shooing Tighten away. Instantly, he took off into the sky, Candy in his grip. “If you bring her back for me… If you can defeat me, which I doubt you will, you may advance to the next movie, but I’ll be sure you won’t. I know what our boss will do to us if you succeed.” Even he shuddered at the thought.

“Give us a minute to think it over.” SC said. We huddled up.

“Guys, we gotta save her!” I insisted. “She’s a great friend. We gotta rescue her! She’s in danger!”

“Not to mention Farquaad said that we will be capable of progressing through the cinemas if we complete this task.” Yellow noted. “Red, you possess the most knowledge about DreamWorks than any of us do. Do you believe there is something that is capable of assisting us in our quest to escape in one of these cinemas?” I racked my brain for something, a clue that could help, and I came up with an idea.

“Yes! I know how we can get out of here!”

“How, bro?” Green asked.

“The Wishing Star!” I proclaimed. “That star has one wish to grant. Think of what that could mean for us! We can wish us all out of here and home!”

“Red, that’s a brilliant idea.” King complimented. “Assuming it works.” I felt myself blush. Usually it’s Yellow or SC who gets called, “Brilliant.” They’re probably the smartest of all of us, but me? The youngest stick who is even younger at heart, the one who punches first and thinks second? I was honored, but I couldn’t let it go to my head.

“I don’t see why it wouldn’t.” I shrugged. “Puss in Boots wanted it to get his nine lives back.”

“But the only way we can get that wish…” Gold theorized, “is to go along with Farquaad’s quest, right?”

“Yeah.” I confirmed. “We’re looking for The Last Wish. I know you’ve never seen it before, Goldy, but I know it backwards and forwards. We need to finish these quests and get there.”

“So we’re in agreement?” SC asked.

“I believe so.” Blue confirmed. We all nodded in agreement and broke from our huddle.

“Lord Farquaad,” I proclaimed, “we accept your quest. We’ll bring you your ‘queen’ and take you down in the process.”

“I doubt that, but I look forward to your demise.” Farquaad quipped. “Oh, there’s one more of us I forgot to mention.” He clapped his hands together, and instantly a massive shadow began to appear before us on the ground, like the sun was slowly getting blocked out. We all looked up and saw a massive beast casting an even bigger shadow on the ground. It was unmistakable. It was the Queen of the dragons, the Red Death… And she was powering up her fiery breath.

“Guys, move! MOVE!” I shouted. We scattered and escaped just in time to avoid a massive fiery blast from her, escaping the castle and regrouping outside. “This is going to be fun,” I quipped sarcastically, “but we’ve got no other choice. Let’s get home!”

We all nodded in unison and fled into the forest, not the best place to hide from a fire-breathing dragon, but it worked enough to keep us from the Red Death’s gaze. We headed toward the Dragon’s Keep, hoping to rescue Candy.

Chapter 7: The Dragon's Keep (Third Person)

The eight sticks raced through the fields and forests past the castle and kingdom of Duloc, heading toward the Dragon’s Keep, where Candy was being held. Panic flooded through Red’s mind, as he was concerned what they were doing to her and if they could free her from her prison, but he also felt guilty for getting them in this predicament. He had to clear the air. He had already apologized to the rest of the Gang, but not the Tango family. His soft voice spoke up.

“Gold, King, I’m sorry for putting you through all this.” He apologized. “It’s my fault. It’s all my fault.”

“What do you mean, Red?” King asked gently.

“I was the one who came up with this idea.” He explained. “I was the one who was eager to get this up and running by the time my turn for movie night came up. This all started because of me. Gold, King, guys, I deeply apologize for this.”

Gold and King paused, knowing how sincere and apologetic Red was. Gold felt a large weight fall on his heart, and King stepped toward the young stick and put a hand on his shoulder.

“Red, you’re forgiven.” He said. “I know you love us greatly and wouldn’t do something like this on purpose. I know it wasn’t intentional, it’s just a bug, a glitch. It’s just… I just got Goldy back and I don’t want to lose him again…”

“I don’t want to lose you either, Dad,” Gold began, stepping between Red and King, “but, this is also partially my fault. I was with Red when Candy showed us what she was working on. I too urged her and her team to push with this. You know me, how much I enjoy pushing my boundaries, and I was the one who ventured off, away from you guys. If I didn’t, we… well, I… might not have this Wolf tailing me. It’s not all on Red or Candy… I deserve some blame as well.” King looked at Gold and smiled.

“Look at you, taking responsibility.” King praised. “I applaud it. It’s a sign of maturity.”

“Thanks, Dad.”

“I remember vividly how you accused everything except you for… The Hang Gliding Accident.” King added. Gold blushed.

“Daaad…” He moaned.

“The Hang Gliding Accident?” Purple asked. “What happened?”

“Let’s just say… never let an 11-year-old who aspires to be a pilot access to a hang glider.” King described vaguely. “But if they do, and you find out about it, tell them to avoid any and all power lines.” King shook his head in disbelief. “I still don’t know how you got that hang glider.”

“I’ll never tell.” Gold smirked. “Let’s just say… I know a guy.”

“A guy who almost gave you the key for your demise.” King scolded.

“How was I supposed to know you don’t need to actually fly to be a pilot?” Gold shot back defensively.

“Oh I don’t know… Ask your loving and caring father?” King quipped. The Gang and Purple snickered.

“Jeez, Gold, rules are there for a reason.” Purple reprimanded.

“Rules are made to be broken, little brother.” Gold insisted. “Limits are made to be pushed. Life doesn’t start until you reach the edge.”

“I disagree, but that’s beside the point.” Purple shrugged. “We’ve got a friend to save.”

The sun sank lower and lower in the sky, and as it did, the octet of sticks came across the Dragon’s Keep, a massive castle made of black bricks surrounded by a lava moat, a small light shining from the window of the tallest tower. The only way inside was a rickety rope bridge that looked rather dilapidated. The eight of them stopped and stared at the impending danger, and Yellow observed the light emanating from the window.

“That room!” Yellow pointed. “That must be the location where Candy is being imprisoned.”

“Red, you know these movies the best. What dangers are there inside the Keep?” SC asked.

“Aside from the lava moat?” Red quipped. “Well, there’s a fire-breathing dragon who has killed all who tried venturing inside.”

“Sooo… How did the heroes survive?” Blue asked. “I can’t go swimming in lava again.” He shuddered at the thought.

“They distracted the dragon with flirty talk.” Red explained. “She’s a girl and developed a crush on one of the main protagonists.”

“A donkey, correct?” Purple guessed. “He sweet talked her, right?”

“Yep.” Red confirmed. “All of that is accurate.”

“And we’re the protagonists now. That’s what Farquaad said.” King recalled. “So which ones of us are the main characters?”

“Well, Red’s obviously Shrek.” Green joked. “His ‘princess’ is in the tower.”

“Look who’s talking, Green Bean.” Red retaliated. “You’re Shrek’s color.”

“Guys, guys,” SC interrupted. “Let’s… just… cross this bridge and figure out how to tame the dragon when we get there. We have elytra, so we can just fly over.”

“I just hope I don’t have to tame her.” Gold muttered.

“Careful, Goldy. Don’t want to jinx it.” King teased. Gold rolled his eyes.

The eight of them put on their wings and flew across the lava moat. That, as it turned out, would be the easy part, and the worst was yet to come. Once inside the keep, they paused to make a game plan.

“OK, guys, there’s a dragon somewhere inside this castle.” SC explained. “Explains why this place is called the ‘Dragon’s Keep.’ Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue, you four look for Candy. Red knows this place the best, so he should be a natural to lead you guys.”

“No pressure…” Red said, wiping sweat from his brow.

“You got this, bro.” Green said confidently, patting Red on the back. Red looked at him and smiled.

“The Tangos and I will provide a distraction for the dragon. Hopefully we can buy enough time for you guys to find Candy and get out of here.” SC finished.

“But what about you four?” Green asked.

“We are not exiting this keep with the trio of Tangos and you absent.” Yellow swore.

“We’ll get out.” King said tersely. “We promise.”

“We’ve taken down Vic, Flodge, the Dark Lord…” Purple reminded us. “A dragon is child’s play for us at this point.” He shrugged.

“Ooh, one more thing,” Red began, “keep the dragon alive. She comes in clutch, assuming this movie will play out how I think it will.”

“Gotcha.” Gold said, nodding.

“OK, guys…” Blue sighed. “My fellow FSF, let’s save a stripe! Red, lead the way!”

Red bolted in one direction, Yellow, Green, and Blue following. SC and the Tango family slowly headed in the opposite direction, cautiously looking for the dragon. Fears and anxieties flooded their minds, as they knew fighting a fire-breathing dragon could mean the end for all of them, but King assured his kids and SC that together, they were unstoppable.

“Stick together, guys.” King advised. “Looking at you, Gold. A dragon is no joke.”

“Looking at all these… skeletons around,” Gold noted, shuddering, “I don’t plan on going anywhere.”

“Wait, my older brother’s using common sense?” Purple quipped, feigning surprise.

“You’re real funny, you know that?” Gold replied sarcastically, giving Purple a playful sock in the arm.

“Yep. It’s why I’m Dad’s favorite.” Purple smirked, rubbing his arm.

“Oh come on. Dad did what he did because of me.” Gold retaliated. “I am his First Prize, after all.”

“Dad-” Purple began before King cut him off.

“I love you kids both equally.” He insisted. “Now keep your voices down. Remember our mission: find the dragon, preferably before it finds us, and your squabbling isn’t helping.”

“Sorry, Dad.” the embarrassed Tango kids said in unison. SC chuckled at the brothers’ antics.

“What are you gonna do with those two?” He jokingly asked King. The taller, older, darker orange stick shook his head.

“Get them a therapist… and then go to therapy myself.” King joked. SC laughed.

“Soooo… What do we do when we find the dragon?” Purple asked.

“Keep her away from the FSF. We need to buy them time.” SC advised.

The quartet of sticks scanned the dark walls of the castle, looking for any trace of the dragon, but they didn’t have to wait long. They soon heard the sound of faint, heavy, powerful breathing, and on a small hole in the wall, Purple noticed a large, green eye peering at them through a hole in the wall.

“Guys…” He said shakily, “I found her.”

“DRAAAA-GOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOON!” Gold exclaimed.

With that, a massive, deep red dragon stood up straight, towering over the four sticks. The heroes stared at her, trembling in fear, just barely able to escape a massive fiery breath from her, escaping into another hallway. They weaved through a maze of halls and corridors, managing to avoid the dragon’s attacks, but Gold was lagging behind.

“Hang on, guys!” Gold wheezed. “I need a minute to catch my breath.” King turned around and noticed his son tailing them.

“We’re coming, Goldy!” King called, doubling back toward him, but they were cut off when the dragon’s massive tail swung down and landed between them.

“Dad!”

“Gold! Hang on! We’ll swing around and find you!” King exclaimed.

Gold turned and saw the dragon, her emerald green eyes shining brightly, about to unleash a massive fireball at him.

“I can’t stick around! I gotta go!”

Gold raced down another corridor, soon finding himself on a bridge, but with two quick swipes from her tail, the dragon left Gold stuck on one pillar with no way to escape. The dragon charged up, about to shoot a finishing blow onto Gold, but the desperate stick sacrificed his dignity for his life.

“Oh my, Dragon, what lovely green eyes you have.” He said. The Dragon paused. “And what shiny teeth you have. So massive, so sharp, and your scaly skin, oooh, it shines like the sun. Do you moisturize? Because I have GOT to know your skincare routine.”

Gold’s sweet talk soothed the dragon, and she breathed a huff of heart-shaped smoke in Gold’s face. She was clearly starting to fall for him, though the feeling was far from mutual. Gold was growing more and more uncomfortable with each passing word, but at least he wasn’t smelted into ingots. He internally begged for anyone to rescue him, and soon enough, King, Purple, and SC found him and watched from a hiding spot below.

“Guys, are you hearing this?” Purple said eagerly. “My bro is flirting… with a DRAGON!”

“Do whatever it takes to survive, I guess.” SC shrugged.

“At least he’s OK.” King breathed a sigh of relief. “But… How do we get him out of this predicament?”

“I’m not totally sure,” SC confessed, “I just hope that the others are finding Candy. Surely she and Red have answers.”

As they were talking, the dragon carefully picked up Gold in her massive jaws and carried him off deeper into the keep. King, Purple and SC followed as well as they could.

“We can’t lose him!” King determined, putting his elytra on.

“We won’t, we promise.” SC insisted, following suit and putting on his own wings. “We’ll bring him back.”

With that, the three of them took off into the air with their wings, following the dragon, and Gold along with her.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

While SC and the Tangos distracted the dragon, the FSF scoured the halls looking for stairs leading to the highest room in the tallest tower. With the roof in such an abysmal condition, so bad it could barely be considered a roof, it was easy for them to see the tallest tower, head in that direction, and stumble upon the stairs.

“It’s this way, guys.” Red said, gesturing toward the stairs.

At that moment, they heard the dragon shout not far away from it.

“Sounds like the Tangos and SC have successfully made contact with the dragon.” Yellow noted.

“Which means we don’t have time to scale all these stairs.” Blue pointed out. “We’d better rescue Candy before our friends become ashes.”

“Hmm… Who said anything about scaling them, my dudes?” Green asked, pulling his elytra out and putting them on. The Primaries saw where he was going and put on their own elytra, soaring into the illuminated window of the tower. Red reached it first and flew through it, landing in the middle of the room. The room was mostly empty, except for a bed with a curtain in front of it with a shadow of someone waiting for a rescue lying down on it.

“Candy? Is that you?” Red asked cautiously.

“Red?” asked a familiar, female voice. A shadow lifted up and the curtain rose, revealing the red-and-white stripe. “Reddy bear!” She exclaimed, hugging him tightly “You rescued me!”

“Of course. How could I not?” Red blushed. “Now, let’s get outta here. Ever been flying?”

“No… Am I going to be flying?” Candy asked nervously. Red leapt into the window, turned around, and held his hand out for her.

“Grab on! We’ll get SC and the Tangos and get outta here!” He shouted.

Candy didn’t need to hear any more. She grabbed Red’s hand and the five sticks slowly lowered to the ground. Upon reaching the castle floor, Candy was quick to speak up.

“Yellow, Blue, Green… My dear friend Red… You four should get out of here while you can.”

“We’re not leaving anyone behind.” Blue insisted determinedly.

“I’ll find the others. My super speed will make that easy.” Candy replied. “I’m not endangering more lives. Not again…” She sighed deeply. Red put a hand on her shoulder.

“It’s not your fault, Candy. It’s mine. This was my idea. I will take the blame.” He told her.

“I’m partially responsible as well. Let me prove my worth to you all.” Candy said tersely.

Before anyone could respond, they heard the dragon cry out, a massive roar that shook the walls around them.

“Guys, I question the structural integrity of this castle.” Yellow noted. “I suggest that we execute our getaway as quickly as possible.”

“He’s right.” Green agreed. “Let’s get the others and get outta here!”

“You guys go, and I’m not taking no for an answer!” Candy exclaimed, tears filling her eyes. “I’ll find them and get them out, I promise.” Red could see determination in her eyes and conceded.

“Alright, alright!” He said frustratedly. “Just… Be careful.”

“I dealt with Flodge in a duel. This dragon has got nothing on her.” Candy replied.

The FSF, having completed their mission, bolted for the entrance to escape. Candy, with her super speed, soon found SC, King, and Purple. The three of them were overlooking the dragon with Gold wrapped up in its tail, trying to figure out what to do. As for Gold, he was trying to play it cool, sweet talking the dragon in an attempt to survive.

“Guys!” Candy greeted them.

“Candy!” Purple whisper-shouted. “You made it!”

“Where are the others?” SC asked.

“They’re safe, they escaped.” Candy answered. “Where’s Gold?”

“Stuck in the grip of the dragon’s tail.” King answered worriedly.

“Wait… He’s Donkey?” Candy wondered, giggling.

“He’s what now?” King demanded to know.

“Donkey, one of the main characters. In the movie, Donkey hooked up with Dragon in part due to his sweet talk.” Candy explained. “But that’s beside the point. Can I have a look?”

“Sure. They’re right down there.” SC gestured to Gold and his predicament, which Candy saw. This gave her an idea.

“I can save him with my speed.” Candy figured. “I just need you three to run, or fly, or whatever. Get as far as you can. She’s not gonna be happy to see her love suddenly gone.”

“You’ll save him, right?” Purple begged.

“It’s about time I did something for you guys, and not the other way around.” Candy insisted. “Let me do this. Please.” King sighed, a little skeptical.

“Dad, give her a chance. Please. We were in worse shape when the guys found us.” Purple said. “I do believe she’s changed.”

“I’ll bring him to you safely.” Candy swore. King looked at her and Purple.

“I’m not leaving Gold. I’m joining you whether you like it or not.” King said. Candy sighed. “Purple… Get out of here. I’m not putting both my sons in jeopardy.”

“Purple will be safe with me.” SC promised, putting his elytra on.

“OK… Just get outta here! Go!” Candy ordered.

“Be careful, Dad, Candy.” Purple said before leaving, the SC right behind. Candy and King watched them go before turning to see Gold, still wrapped up in a dragon tail.

“OK, King, we need chains to temporarily subdue her and cover our escape.” Candy plotted. “Do you think you could provide a distraction that might make her loosen her grip on Gold?”

“Yeah, no problem.” King assured her. “I see a chandelier positioned for the perfect distraction.”

“Perfect. I’ll get the chains and we’ll meet back up here. Gold should be fine as long as Dragon’s smitten for him.”

“Do you want me to help you look for chains?” King asked.

“No need, Majesty. My speed will make searching easy.” King chuckled at his new nickname.

“Go. Help me save my son. Go.”

With her orders, Candy bolted quickly finding and grabbing a long chain, long enough for her purposes. With that out of the way, she returned to King.

“I got the chain. Now King! Let’s make our grand entrance.”

King nodded, put on his elytra, and flew onto a low-hanging chandelier, getting it stuck around the dragon’s neck like a necklace. Surprised, the dragon roared, releasing Gold from her grip, allowing Candy the split second she needed to wrap the dragon in chains. With speed like hers, Candy didn’t need long, she just needed a distraction, and she was doing it quite well. With the dragon momentarily subdued, Candy grabbed Gold.

“Dad?” Gold gasped. “Candy?”

“No time, Gold!” Candy exclaimed. “It’s time to go!”

King grabbed Candy, who herself held onto Gold, and flew out of the keep, barely escaping one last powerful breath of fire that torched the rope bridge, reducing it to ashes. The three of them managed to escape and regrouped with the Squad outside.

“Just call me a delivery girl!” Candy proclaimed. Purple ran to his father and brother and hugged them.

“Candy! You made it!” Red exclaimed, hugging her. The rest of the Gang hugged her as well.

“Super striped speed has its perks.” She smirked. The Gang released her. “Now… Let’s finish this thing. We have a movie to escape.”

Chapter 8: Wedding Crashers (Third Person)

The nine sticks had managed to escape the Dragon’s Keep, and all of them without a single burn mark or scratch on their bodies. King was so thankful that Gold was unharmed and safe, a status he wouldn’t be in if not for Candy’s rescue.

“Candy… I greatly appreciate what you did back there. Thank you.” King said.

“I agree with Dad.” Gold confirmed. “You saved my life. Thanks, Candy.”

“I told you she’s changed.” Purple said. “Redeemed for the better.”

“Thanks, Purple, for believing in me.” Candy said humbly. Red wrapped an arm around her.

“I knew there was something in you.” He said. “It just needed to be brought out.”

“Thank you too, Reddy Bear.” Candy replied. “You’re such a great friend.” Red blushed.

‘Maybe even more than that… someday…’ Red thought.

“I’m glad we all made it out OK.” SC began. “But let’s not forget our mission: Bring Candy back to Lord Farquaad… as much as I don’t like that idea.”

“It’s the only chance we have of getting home…” Green replied, “assuming Red’s plan works and Farquaad keeps his word.”

“Few people are as familiar with DreamWorks as Red is.” Yellow noted. “I believe it to be beneficial to acknowledge Red’s obsession and allow him to take command, if only for periods of time.”

“Yellow’s right.” Blue agreed. “We should head for Duloc and bring Candy to Farquaad. Jeez, that sounds dark saying it out loud…”

“Farquaad kept his word.” Red explained. “I think we should pull the trigger on this plan.”

“We have to.” Candy confirmed. “But I think we should split up. Farquaad’s downfall came when the Dragon swooped in. We need some of us to stay behind and recruit the Dragon for our side. I made sure to not completely trap her in chains, just enough for us to escape.”

“Well, it’s me she wants.” Gold admitted sheepishly. “I should be staying back. Maybe I can tame her.”

“I’ll stick around as well.” King added. “I’m not losing my son.”

“Nor I my brother.” Purple added. “We Tangos stick together.”

“Anyone else?” SC asked. No one said a word. “So it’s settled. The Tangos will remain behind while the FSF, Candy, and I return to Duloc.”

The nine sticks agreed on the plan and split up, the Gang and Candy returning to Duloc while King and his kids stayed outside the castle. It took a few days’ journey to return to the kingdom, and in that time, the Dragon managed to free herself from her bondage and escape the Keep. She let out a bellowing roar as she flew into the air, soon spotting Gold on the ground below. He, however, was ready. The roar was enough to tip him, Purple, and King off that she was coming. The three sticks held their ground, not drawing their weapons, and stared into the Dragon’s green eyes.

“Be careful, kids.” King ordered. “I can’t have either of you becoming ashes.”

“Don’t worry… I think I can tame her.” Gold said.

“You think?” Purple quipped.

“There’s only one way to find out.” Gold said tersely.

The Dragon lowered to the ground. Gold slowly approached her and put a gentle hand on her nose. She fell for Gold once again and wrapped her massive head around the young stick. Purple and King cautiously stepped closer, but the Dragon growled defensively.

“Easy there, Dragon.” Gold said soothingly. “They’re my family. They’re good people.”

The Dragon paused and looked at the other two Tangos. Purple and King both extended their hands and gently rubbed the Dragon’s scaly skin. She warmed up to them and even allowed them to ride on her back, with Gold taking the lead. King was a little unsure about it, but Gold was loving every minute of it. Even Purple was excited to ride on a dragon, and King, seeing his sons so happy, calmed down as well.

“This is AWWWWWWWWWWWWESOOOOOOOOOOOOOOME!” Gold screamed as he rode on the Dragon’s back. “I’ve always wanted to fly!”

“I love this!” Purple agreed. “I’ve flown before, but this is a whole ‘nother level!”

“Just don’t let go, kids.” King advised. “But… This is really cool.”

“Gold, you’re a bit of a DreamWorks fan, too, right?” Purple asked.

“Yeah, though not to Red’s or Candy’s extent.” Gold confirmed. “Dad and I have seen a few movies here and there, even had some on DVD when I was a kid, but I’m not a mega-fan like they are.”

“Do you remember how this movie ends?” King asked. “It’s been so long…”

“A wedding between Farquaad and Fiona… Or I guess Candy in our case… which is interrupted by Shrek at the last moment.” Gold answered. “And the Dragon makes a grand entrance.”

“When should we swing by? Make our ‘grand entrance’ and whatnot?” Purple asked.

“Probably soon.” Gold figured. “Dragon, to Duloc! And wait for a whistle to do your thing!”

The Dragon nodded and took off toward the kingdom, and just in time, too, as the sun was setting…

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Eventually, the Gang, plus Candy, managed to reach the fields outside of Duloc, overlooking the towering castle against a clear blue sky. Red’s stomach was in knots, not wanting to give a friend who meant so much to him to someone else in a twisted trade, but he knew that’s how the story went. Candy assured him she’d be fine, but he couldn’t shake his fears.

“It’ll be OK,” Candy promised.

“I know, but I still don’t want to do this.” Red admitted.

“I’m willing to take one for the team.” Candy said. “No use delaying it. Let’s go. I’ll bet you can’t outpace me!”

She broke into a sprint, encouraging the others to chase after her in a race. This lifted the Gang’s spirits, especially Red’s, and though Candy won easily with help from her super speed, the six of them were laughing and enjoying each other’s company. They almost forgot their troubles… until they heard the clip-clop of horse hooves approaching and saw Farquaad himself approaching, coupled with his knights.

“Ahhh, my queen!” Farquaad said, getting lifted off his horse with help from one of his knights. “My dear Candy, would you become my blushing bride?”

Candy looked at Red as tears filled his eyes. Blue wrapped an arm around him.

“It’ll be OK.” Blue promised quietly. “We’ll get her back.” Red looked at him and nodded.

“Go for it, Tiger.” Red said, wiping tears from his eyes.

“Tigress.” Candy corrected smartly. She turned to Farquaad. “Lord Farquaad, I accept.”

“Excellent!” The short Lord proclaimed. “We shall start the preparations immediately! We shall be wed tomorrow!”

“Why wait?” Candy asked. “Let’s get married tonight.”

Farquaad agreed to it and returned to Duloc, Candy in tow. The Gang went their own way, but they couldn’t get too far before Red held them up. The rest of the Gang could clearly tell Red was deeply hurting and surrounded him, hugging him from all sides.

“What’s wrong, buddy?” SC gently asked.

“I… I just don’t want to lose her.” Red confessed, wiping tears from his eyes. “She means so much to me…”

“I doubt you will, dude.” Green assured him. “You two really seem like the closest of friends, maybe even potential partners.”

“I am in agreement with Green.” Yellow chimed in. “You and Candy were created for each other, and I am skeptical that anything could drive a wedge between the two of you.”

“And if you’re so scared of losing her…” Blue began, “do what you do best, my dear friend: Fight for your family.”

This gave Red an injection of energy. He realized his friends were right. He had to fight. He was to step in. He had to stop the wedding. He looked at his friends through tear-stained eyes.

“Thanks, guys.” He said. “Now… I think we got a wedding to crash.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The Gang raced into the courtyard of Duloc as the sun sank lower and lower into the sky, and just in time to meet the Tango family, who were lowered into the courtyard by the Dragon. The Tangos got off and rejoined with the Gang, Gold delivering some final instructions to the Dragon.

“Alright, Dragon, wait ‘til you hear a whistle. Until then, have fun.”

Dragon nodded and walked away, leaving the eight sticks behind. They raced to the church where the wedding was being held, and Purple used his elytra to see through a high window.

“They haven’t said their ‘I do’s,’ yet,” Purple explained after he lowered to the ground, “but they’re close! If you’re gonna crash this wedding, it’s now or never!”

“Alright, let’s do this.” Red said darkly.

“Wait, Red,” Green interrupted, “you kinda like her, right? You want to hold her? Please her?”

“Yes!” Red shouted, getting what Green was doing.

“Then you gotta gotta try a little tenderness!” Green sang. “She’ll love that romantic crap!” Red laughed, but Green got looks of confusion from most everyone else.

“More movie lines.” Red explained. “Now, let’s bust this thing.”

He burst through the doors.

“I object!” He shouted, garnering the attention of everyone in the room, all the onlookers, the priest, even Farquaad and Candy. His friends stormed in after him, except for Gold for whatever reason.

“You’re too late, Red!” Farquaad mocked. “This marriage is binding, and that makes me King! See? King!” He put a crown on his head and pointed at it. “Guards! Arrest them!”

Red and his friends–Candy included–were instantly surrounded by legions of knights, too many to fight off. But when all hope seemed lost, Purple spoke up amidst the chaos.

“Dad! Time to call in the reinforcements!”

“I agree!” King clocked a knight, freeing his arm, and whistled loudly.

“I will have order!” Farquaad proclaimed. “I will have perfection! I will have…”

Suddenly, Dragon burst through a massive stained glass window above them. Farquaad screamed in terror and was promptly devoured by the beast, swallowed whole by her. The only thing that remained of him was his kingly crown, burped up by Dragon. On top of Dragon was Gold, celebrating Farquaad’s defeat.

“Nobody move!” Gold shouted. “I’m a stick on the edge!”

The knights fled in fear, leaving just the sticks, now freed from their captors. Red ran up and embraced Candy.

“Candy!” He shouted, tears pouring down his face.

“Reddy Bear!” She hugged him back. Everyone else surrounded the two red sticks and celebrated their success.

“This deserves a celebration, guys!” SC exclaimed.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The nine sticks returned to Shrek’s swamp, where they all partied and celebrated. Green sang I’m a Believer, the others danced, but Red’s mind was on other things besides the celebration.

‘Am I falling… for Candy?’ He thought. ‘No… There’s no way. I mean, she’s a sweet girl, but…’

Red’s main conflict was the fact that Candy wasn’t religious. While he respected her choice, he wasn’t sure if they could be together. Red wanted someone who shared his Christian faith, and unless Candy someday became a believer, he feared they would be friends and nothing more.

‘I really like Candy. She’s a great friend, but feelings?’ Red thought. ‘Am I really falling in love? I… might be, and that’s frightening. Is she falling for me? No, we’re just friends. Nothing more. We’ve both agreed to being friends. Let’s just enjoy our time together inside our favorite movies. Now is a time for celebration! Yeah… Don’t get yourself so worked up, Red. Things will play out in the way they’re meant to be.’

As Red turned to return to the party, he bumped into Purple.

“Red! There you are!” Purple exclaimed.

“Purple! What are you doing here?”

“I noticed you were missing, so I decided to look for you. Dad’s playing limbo with Gold, so I got away for a second.” Purple noticed Red’s divided expression, like he was wrestling with something. “You OK, buddy?”

“Yeah, I just… Wanted to think, that’s all.” Red answered. “Sometimes I need to get away from the noise.”

“I guess that makes sense…” Purple figured, not fully believing Red’s story, but still willing to listen. “What are you thinking about?”

“Getting home.” Red lied, not ready to confess the potential conflict to Purple yet. “I mean, I love DreamWorks, but eventually, Alan’s gonna worry if we’re gone for too long.” Purple was still skeptical, suspecting something deeper going on in Red’s mind, but he didn’t want to pry. He felt Red would tell him when he was ready, so he rolled with it.

“We’ll get home.” Purple assured him. “That wish in the Wishing Star is waiting for us. You know how powerful it is more than any of us. And with the nine of us, one with super speed, nothing is impossible for us.”

‘Nothing…’ Red thought, ‘He’s right. Maybe Candy will come to faith, just as Purple and King have.’

“You’re right.” Red replied. “Thanks, Purple. I think I just needed that reassurance.”

“And even if we don’t, there’s nowhere I’d rather be than with you. You guys are my best friends. My family.” Purple added. “I’m sure you feel the same way about us.”

“I do. You know I do.”

“Now let’s head back and party! Let’s celebrate! We’re one step closer to that Wishing Star!”

“Yeah… Let’s do it!” Red then sighed deeply. “Thanks, Purple.”

“Anything for my family.” Purple replied, putting a hand on Red’s back. As the two of them returned, Red’s brain worked overtime, scheming.

‘Who knows?’ Red thought. ‘Maybe I can find a potion that can deliver Candy and I both a happily ever after.’

Soon after they returned, all nine sticks suddenly found themselves flying through a black hole of sorts.

“What’s happening?!” King exclaimed.

“I think we’re heading into the next movie!” SC shouted.

“But which one?” Blue asked.

“I suppose we’ll see shortly!” Yellow answered. “Look! A white light!”

“And we’re barrelling toward it!” Purple yelled.

“Brace for impact!” Gold said. “Or not, it’s up to you!”

“Ooh, I wonder where we’re going!” Red shouted.

“We’ll find out soon, bro!” Green yelled. “Here we GOOOOOOOOOOOO!”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Unbeknownst to the sticks, a meeting was being held in a Nether-like place. It was a massive room partially on fire, various shades of red painted the walls. Lined up in the room were various DreamWorks villains, all looking upon a black-cloaked figure, the final boss of all DreamWorks villains, seated on a massive throne of various shades of black, red, and gray. Nothing could be seen from the boss, as his cloak nearly covered him completely, except for a long canine snout and a row of razor sharp teeth scowling sinisterly. The throne itself had carvings of human skulls, bones, weapons, other sinister shapes and markings all over it.

“Bring me Lord Farquaad.” The cloaked figure thundered. Farquaad stepped out of line and stood before him.

“Sir, please, I beg your forgiveness…” Farquaad pleaded.

“I will not stand it. You promised me you would defeat them.”

“I was sure the Dragon would’ve used those pathetic sticks as toothpicks.”

“You were wrong.” The Boss snarled, sighing deeply. “But you were pretty close with your knight army. Seeing your efforts, I will extend mercy. You may go.”

“You… You’re releasing me?” Farquaad asked, shocked.

“I’m allowing you to run for it. Use this time wisely.” The Boss sniffed the air. “Mmm… Fear…” He licked his lips hungrily. Farquaad said nothing else, but instead bolted.

“Fairy Godmother!” The Boss boomed. She appeared before him. “Don’t fail me like your predecessor.”

“Don’t worry, I shall not.” She promised. “Stripes don’t live happily ever after.”

“And neither do Golden Boys…” the Boss snarled. “You are all dismissed. I have someone else who needs to meet my blade.” He rose from his throne, his ruby red eyes shining like laser beams in a dark room. “Let Farquaad run for it… Makes it more fun for me.”

Chapter 9: Going Far, Far Away (Red)

We soared through the black hole once Shrek ended, landing hard on a dirty ground. I held my head, trying to recover from the slight concussion I got, and once my vision came back, I examined my surroundings. It was the familiar confines of Shrek’s swamp, and we are at the iconic ogre’s front door. The guys and Candy also sat upright shortly after, groaning and moaning and rubbing their heads. Evidently they were as just as dazed as I was, but it was Green who spoke up first.

“Wait… We were just here. What was the point of falling through… whatever that was?!”

“There are multiple Shrek movies.” I explained. “Perhaps we’re at the start of another one.”

“But which one?” SC asked. “Red, you and Candy are the biggest DreamWorks nerds we have. Can you tell which one we’re in?”

“Perhaps that incoming group of regally-dressed individuals can shed some light upon that inquiry.” Yellow reasoned, pointing to a procession of people with trumpets, one of them delivered a message.

“Based on that, we’re in Shrek 2.” Candy figured. “Does anyone recall seeing the Fairy Godmother among the villains we met?”

“I recall seeing some sort of fairy, something like that.” Blue answered. “I noticed because she was dressed in blue, though not my shade.”

“That’s the Fairy Godmother all right.” I confirmed as I helped each member of the Tango family to their feet. “Are you guys OK?”

“I’ve been through worse.” Purple answered.

“Same.” Gold replied.

“If they’re OK, then I’m OK.” King insisted, dusting himself off. “Now, let’s see what this whole thing is about, with this approaching group of people.”

The group formed two lines of trumpet players… trumpeteers…? I’m not sure. I’m not Green. Regardless, they blew their horns and the messenger walked between the two lines and read his letter to the nine of us.

“Ms. Candy Kane… You have been requested by the King and Queen of Far Far Away to return to your castle home, and you are to bring your entire procession. They too have been asked to come along by the monarchs themselves. They would like to speak with them, especially your red counterpart.”

“Me?” I asked, glancing at Candy.

“This is part of the movie, Reddy Bear. You know as well as I do.”

“But… Are we the characters of Shrek and Fiona in this universe? Who’s everyone else?” I heard Green snicker at that realization, so I shot him a look.

“The other fairy tale characters, like Gingy, Pinocchio, the three little pigs, etc. etc.” Candy answered, shrugging. “Let’s roll with that.”

“That makes the most sense.” I agreed. “Well? Do you accept? It’s you and I that they want.”

“They also want us,” SC noted, “but we’re on board if Candy is.”

“I don’t suppose we have a choice.” Candy figured. “We need the Wishing Star’s wish, after all. Messenger, tell the King and Queen that we accept.”

“Excellent. Your carriage is right over there.” The messenger gestured to an onion-shaped carriage pulled by white horses. While the shape wasn’t the most appealing, we had no other choice. We piled into it, it was a bit of a tight squeeze considering there were nine of us, but we managed to fit with just enough leg room and we began the long journey to Far Far Away. Gold annoyed all of us with his constant asking “Are we there yet?” He had the role of Donkey nailed, but we all finally made it to the kingdom.

I forgot how beautiful Far Far Away was. It was like a fairy tale city, but yet still set in the modern day. Well, as modern as an almost 20-year-old movie can be at least. We rode through the crowded streets toward the massive castle, one even bigger than Farquaad’s. The guys gasped in amazement as we got closer, impressed with the splendor of the castle.

But, soon enough, we arrived at the castle. We rolled up to the red carpet and Candy and I stepped out of the onion-shaped carriage. The chauffeur there claimed he’d park the carriage and lead the others to their rooms, which they were appreciative of. Leaving just Candy and I facing Harold and Lilian, the King and Queen of Far Far Away.

“This isn’t going to go similar to how the movie goes, right?” I asked. “Where Harold actively resents Shrek and hires Puss in Boots to assassinate him?”

“I guess we’ll find out soon enough.” Candy replied, gesturing for me to join her. I nervously followed, approaching the monarchs. As I got closer, I saw a look of distaste on Harold’s face, and I knew that this was going to be a long night.

Lilian invited us in for dinner, and that went about as well as it did in the movie: Terribly. Harold actively put me down, resenting me because he believed that Candy could do a whole lot better for whatever reason. Candy and Queen Lilian came to my defense, thankfully, but the entire dinner was pretty unbearable, just a massive fight between us, and while it’s humorous in the movie, I can sympathize with Shrek a lot more now. After dinner, we were led to our room, with two beds thankfully. Neither I nor Candy wanted to share a bed, and we made that clear. Once we reached our room, which was really fancy, if I might add, I flopped onto my bed.

“Ugh… That was awful.” I moaned. “I never want to do that again.”

“I agree.” Candy, now seated on the other bed, confirmed. “What’s the big deal? You’re a sweet guy. No one should tell me otherwise.”

“Aww. Thanks, Candy, but tonight only drove home more insecurities…”

“Insecurities?” Candy repeated. “About what?”

I looked at Candy’s gentle, pink eyes. How do I tell her? How do I say that I’m having doubts about our relationship, and it’s not because of her, but me and my faith. Candy must’ve noticed my hesitation and she spoke up about it.

“Reddy Bear?” Candy asked. “You OK?”

“Yeah.” I insisted. “Sorry, Candy, I just… fear that my faith will drive a wedge between us.” Candy sat down next to me. “That we can’t become a couple because of me.”

“Red, I… I never knew… But it doesn’t have to, right?” Candy assured me. “It doesn’t matter to me.”

“Maybe not, but it does matter to me.” I insisted. “Candy, my faith means the world to me… and I want to spend my life with someone who shares it. It’s the most important thing in my life, it makes me who I am, for lack of a better word, it’s my identity…” My voice trailed off for a moment. “I’m sorry…” I breathed deeply, tears filling my eyes. “I’m deeply sorry…”

“I appreciate your honesty, and I respect your decision. Even if I don’t fully agree…” Candy sighed. “If nothing else, we can still be friends, right?”

“Yeah, the very best-est of friends.” I said in my Perrito voice. Candy chuckled.

“I promise… We’ll always be friends, and nothing will ever change that. You saved my life, and I am grateful… eternally grateful.” She hugged me, and I hugged her back.

“Thanks, Candy.” We released each other.

“You’re such a sweet guy, and I’ll tell you this: If something does change between us, there’s no guy I’d rather spend my life with than you.” I started bawling tears of joy.

“I might be developing feelings for you as well…” I confessed through my tears. “You’re such a sweet girl and I’d love to spend my life with you… but you don’t share my Christian faith.”

“I may not understand it fully, but I’d be willing to listen.” Candy said gently. “If you want to tell me about this passion, this faith of yours.”

“Really?”

“Of course. Tiger Tech has been expanding, and I’ve gotten more employees with a variety of opinions and viewpoints. I enjoy getting to know them deeper. It helps my company feel more like a home, like a family, than a business.” Candy explained. “I’d love to get to know you, the Po to my Tigress, a bit better.” I laughed.

“The Perrito to your Kitty Softpaws.” I joked. “In that case… then I’d love to.” I thought it was perfect, my prayers were getting answered. I could share my perspective, maybe plant the seeds… but before I could, we heard something outside, like a “whoosh” sound of sorts, if that makes sense. Candy and I looked at each other and I dried my eyes.

“Did you hear that?” I asked.

“This is probably her big entrance.” Candy considered. “The Fairy Godmother, the master manipulator herself.”

“We still gotta play through the movie.” I said. “The Wishing Star isn’t here, and it probably won’t be for a while if we’re going chronologically through DreamWorks’ timeline.”

“You have a point.” Candy replied. “Let her in, I guess. It’d be nice to see someone widely considered as a top-tier villain in DreamWorks arsenal.”

“I prefer power to manipulation, but I can see the appeal.” I said, shrugging. “But Candy, I promise, I’ll share my faith with you as soon as I get the chance.”

“I appreciate it. Thanks.” Candy said. I nodded at her, got up and went to the patio, Candy right behind me, and saw a massive floating carriage. Not long after popping outside, the carriage door burst open and out popped none other than the Fairy Godmother. She flew into the air with a twirl before slowly descending.

“Hello, Candy!” She said cheerily. “And… Who is this?”

“I’m Red.” I answered.

“You must be my fairy godmother.” Candy noted. “I’ve heard of you. What are you doing here?”

“I was called here by your tears, Red.” Fairy Godmother answered. Candy glanced at me.

“I get emotional easily.” I said defensively. “Especially around… the people I hold dearest in my heart.” Candy smiled at me and turned back to Fairy Godmother.

“Why are you here? If I may ask.” She asked.

“To simply deliver to you what every princess wants: A happily ever after.” Fairy Godmother replied. “I know you and Red are having doubts about your relationship. How would you like someone who could sweep you off your feet, someone who can deliver for you anything you could ever want, someone who could bring you a happily ever after despite your background? Your ‘Prince Charming,’ if you will.”

Candy and I glanced at each other, and I wanted to shrivel up and die by the Wolf’s blades, even if we were in the wrong movie. Candy, however, had my back.

“I might’ve already found that person.” Candy replied.

“I can remove that ‘might’ve’ for you, Candy.” Fairy Godmother insisted. “Happily ever afters are my forte, after all.”

“She already found him, OK?!” I snapped. “It was about time I stood up for myself. I've been quiet all day, and that’s not who I am. I’m no coward. I’m a fighter, and I fight for my family.”

“Red, do you really think you can bring her happiness like Prince Charming can?” Fairy Godmother quipped. I was taken aback, admittedly uncertain, but I had to say something, so I unleashed the bear.

“You know, I may not have money, or fame, or magical powers like you do, but I have something even greater than all that: Love and passion for those closest to me. I probably can’t supply Candy with everything you and Charming can in one sense, but at least I’m not artificial. I’m not a slippery deceiver. I know you grant people’s happily ever afters, but I also know you can take them away just as easily. That’s one thing I would never do to my family, not deliberately, at least. I may not be Candy’s happily ever after, but I’ll do whatever I can to bring it to her.

“Now if you would please be going…” I breathed heavily.

Fairy Godmother seemed taken aback by my outburst, and in a sense, I was as well, and it kinda looked like she would make us disappear right then and there, but she choked down her anger and maintained her sweet, kindly facade.

“I’ll go, but in case you’re interested…” Fairy Godmother said, handing Candy a business card for herself. “Just a teardrop away. And don’t forget, Candy… Your magic ball in a couple of days to celebrate you and… your ‘partner.’”

“I am aware, thanks.” She said tersely. “Now go.”

Fairy Godmother returned to her carriage and flew into the night sky. After she left, Candy and I examined the business card. “Fairy Godmother” it read, and on the back was her “slogan” of sorts. “Happiness is just a teardrop away.” Candy handed it to me.

“You should hold onto it.” She insisted. “We gotta keep the story moving if we want the Wishing Star later on, and I’m prepared for the repercussions.” I was well aware of what was coming: A magic potion and a radical transformation, but she wanted me to have it.

“You know DreamWorks as well as I do, Candy. Are you sure?”

“Positive, Reddy Bear.” I sighed deeply.

“OK… But don’t blame me if I accidentally mess up.” I said. She laughed.

“Don’t worry, I won’t.” Candy replied. I sighed deeply, realizing what I did.

“Candy, I apologize for my outburst. I don’t know what got into me. I guess… I felt compelled to protect you.”

“No need to apologize, Reddy Bear. I greatly appreciate it. It’s nice to have someone stand up for me.” Candy admitted. “Flodge never would’ve done that for me.”

“And the other sticks, your coworkers?”

“At that time, it wasn’t a familial relationship, more like a coworker one. I was the second in command, they were under me. We didn’t interact much, to be honest.”

“I’m sorry to hear that.” I confessed. “It’s more positive now, right?”

“Oh, certainly.” She answered. “Like I said, we’re more like a family… like what you and the guys have.”

“You’re a part of it too, Candy.” I insisted. “If nothing else, you’re a part of mine.”

“Thanks, Red, you’re so sweet.” Candy replied. I blushed. She then checked the large clock in the room. “It’s getting late. Shall we turn in?”

“Yeah, let’s do that.” I said distantly. My mind was in other places, but Candy must’ve noticed my tone.

“Hey, cheer up. Tomorrow, you can meet the Legend himself, Puss in Boots. Albeit before his legendary status, but still, it’s the birth of a great character.” I smiled as I climbed into my bed.

“Yep, you’re so, so true.” I replied. “Night, Master Tigress.” She laughed.

“Good night, Dragon Warrior. Love you… as a friend.” I chuckled.

“I love you too… as a friend.” I replied, turning off my lights and snuggling up in the soft blankets.

‘Maybe even more than that… Maybe someday we’ll make it official…’ I thought. ‘Someday…’

Chapter 10: Tabbies and Tangos (Purple)

Once the carriage was parked, we were escorted to our rooms. Yellow, Blue, SC, and Green got a room to themselves while Dad, Gold and I got a room down the hall from the others. Once we saw our room, we were all in awe of how beautiful it was. It was decorated in fancy linens and fabrics, all brightly-colored and eye-catching, with various furniture pieces around the room: A dresser, a giant grandfather clock, three beds, and a table and chairs, among other things. There was also a massive door leading to a balcony outside. I wondered what it overlooked.

“Wow!” Gold exclaimed, in awe. “I feel like a king!”

“Same, and I didn’t have to usurp control over the Piglins.” Dad noted, chuckling. I laughed as well. Gold raced inside and claimed the biggest bed for himself. “Goldy, that’s mine.” King said, slightly annoyed at my brother’s antics, but he still had a smile on his face.

“I know, I know…” Gold replied, getting off the bed. “I’ll take this one.” He plopped himself down on another bed with gold-colored blankets laced with gold trim. “It seems fitting for me with the gold on the outside.”

“I noticed that too.” I noted, taking a seat on my own bed. My blanket was entirely my shade of purple. “Oh my gosh this bed is SO SOFT!” I flopped onto it facefirst, rubbing the blanket on my face. “It feels like a cloud. Hey Dad, how’s yours?”

“It’s the most comfortable bed I’ve ever felt, kiddo.” Dad answered. His blanket too was his orange color. “It seems like this was made for us. Weird…”

“I’m not gonna question it.” Gold replied. “This sure as heck beats my bed when I was sleeping with mobs.” I looked up at Gold, noticing the massive door leading to the balcony. I got up and walked over to it, opening it and stepping onto said balcony. It overlooked a massive garden of flowers of every color of the rainbow. In the distance, beyond the castle walls, was the kingdom of Far Far Away. It was a majestic scene. Dad and Gold soon joined me.

“What a view.” Dad noted.

“Maggie would love this.” I said thoughtfully.

“Maggie?” Gold asked.

“My girlfriend.” I answered. “I met her over the summer, but she’s at art school now…” I paused. “Wait! I can show her this!” I whipped out my phone and took a picture of the scene. “Maybe this will give her inspiration. She loves art, as well as flowers. She’d love this scene, walking through the garden… I miss her so much…” I sighed.

“Ooooh, look who’s found loooove!” Gold teased. “My baby brother!”

“Knock it off, Gold.” I shot back. “You’re just jealous I found a sweetheart of a girl to be my GF.”

“Why would I be jealous, bro?” Gold quipped.

“‘Cause you’re destined to be single for life.” I retaliated.

“That’s enough, Gold, Purple.” Dad reprimanded.

“Sorry, Dad.” I replied, a little sheepishly.

“I’m just teasing, Dad.” Gold said defensively. “I’ve never had a younger brother to tease until now.”

“Just be warned, Gold, I fight back.” I shot back.

“Kiddos, kiddos, stop squabbling.” Dad ordered. “Jeez, how old are you two? Six?” Gold and I looked at each other and smiled.

“No, but if you want us to…” Gold joked.

“NO!” Dad interrupted, sighing. “I’m not dealing with that again…”

I could tell he was annoyed with us, but even he couldn’t help but smile. He loves us dearly and wouldn’t trade us for the world, and even despite our petty bickering, he chuckled at our childish antics. At that moment, we heard a knock at the door. I returned inside to answer it, with Dad and Gold right behind me, and found the guys–minus Red and Candy–standing before us.

“Guys! What are you doing here?” I asked, pleasantly surprised.

“We wanted to stop by and see how the Tangos are doing.” SC answered. The rest of them ran past me and checked out our room.

“Wow, bro, you got yourselves set up pretty well.” Green noted.

“This bed feels like cotton candy…” Blue moaned, rubbing his face on my blanket. Yellow stepped outside onto the balcony and examined the view. I joined him.

“Such an extravagant scene from this ledge.” Yellow said.

“I agree, buddy.” I replied. “Magenta would be gushing at this right now.” Yellow then glanced at the garden below us.

“Wow! Blue’s gonna desire to examine this.” Yellow figured. He turned and called for his best friend. “Hey Blue, you must gaze upon the scenery! It’s breathtaking!”

“I’ll be right there.” Blue called back. I stepped out and Blue took my place, oohing and aahing at the massive garden. As I left, I overheard Yellow wishing to desire the soil for experimenting, but I didn’t catch all of it. I was headed back to the living room, where the two orange sticks were seated at the table, talking.

“We got a similar style of room.” SC said as I approached. “It’s incredible, and the bed is the softest bed I’ve ever felt. I think I fell asleep for a moment when I first lay my head on the pillow.” Dad and I laughed.

“To be honest, I wouldn’t mind making this my new home.” Dad admitted. “I’m sure the kids wouldn’t mind.”

“I wouldn’t!” Gold shouted. Dad, SC, and I chuckled.

“It’s fit for a King, Dad.” I joked.

“The dad jokes are wearing off on this one.” Dad remarked. “I’ve trained you well.”

“Hey guys, there’s a garden below here!” Blue called. “Yellow and I are gonna walk through it! You guys want to join?”

“I think I’ll pass, bros.” Green said. “But have fun together.”

“Same, guys.” SC called. “I want to return to our room and sleep for some, 12 hours.”

“I’ll go later, probably with my kids.” Dad answered, shrugging. “I might as well make lemons into lemonade. If we’re stuck here, we might as well enjoy it.”

“Awww. Well, we had best be venturing forth.” Yellow replied, strolling toward the door, Blue behind him. “Blue and I are eager to examine the flora beneath us.” He and Blue left, SC followed soon after.

“I want to get a quick nap… Or a long nap…” He explained. “I’m gonna sleep on a bed that’s as soft as a cloud!!”

“I know, right?” I replied, laughing. He left, and Green was soon to follow suit.

“Maybe I should go with Yellow and Blue. Seems more exciting than watching SC sleep.” Green shrugged. “See ya, dudes!”

“Bye, Green!” We replied.

We settled into our room, which was easy since we didn’t have anything outside of our inventories, but we soon found ourselves getting a bit restless, especially Gold. He was eager to get outside, to explore, and to be honest, I had to agree. Dad noticed and decided to join us on a walk around the castle garden, where we bumped into Green, Yellow, and Blue on their way back.

“Oh these flowers are glorious!” Yellow gushed. “And their fragrance is so effervescent!”

“Do you think I could bring some back for Maggie, Blue?” I asked. “She loves flowers.”

“They probably wouldn’t survive by the time we got back.” Blue answered. “Plus, picking flowers is the flower equivalent to beheading someone. Cannot support that.”

“Jeez, Blue, I didn’t realize you were so passionate about… flowers.” Gold noted.

“Gardening in general, the dude is into.” Green explained. “Not so much for me, but I do appreciate art, and flowers can be a type of it.”

“They are pretty,” Dad admitted. “And they’re full of life, like my sons.”

“We probably should be returning, however.” Yellow said. “We’ve investigated practically everything and we do not wish to keep you from it.”

“Yeah, I gotta agree. We’ll see you guys later!” Blue called as he, Yellow, and Green strolled past us, waving.

“Bye, guys!” We called back.

We continued through the garden. While Gold wasn’t that much interested in the flowers, I was able to get some good pictures of them for Maggie, despite Gold teasing me about it. If I couldn’t keep them alive, this was the next thing. Maggie has a love for flowers, their color, their beauty, the fond memories they bring her. I took lots of pics for her, hoping to send them. This is the type of thing she would get inspired by.

Gold was soon getting restless again, bored with the garden, and tried slipping away, but Dad was one step ahead and caught him before he could get too far. I just shook my head at his antics, but Dad seemed up for exploring the city in more detail as well. I joined him and my brother and the Tango clan explored outside the castle. We stepped into various shops like a Farbucks–Dad loves his coffee–along with other places. Before long, it was getting dark, so we returned for a great meal with the guys, except for Candy and Red. We soon got to talking.

“Where do you guys think Candy and Red are?” I asked.

“I’m not sure, but I hope they’re getting the royal treatment.” Blue said.

“I’m kinda skeptical that they are…” Gold said worriedly.

“What do you mean, kiddo?” Dad asked.

“Don’t you remember, Dad? The movie?” Gold replied. Dad shook his head no. “Well, in the movie, Shrek and Fiona… did not have a good meeting with the king and queen, to put it lightly.”

“And Candy and Red are playing the roles of the married ogres.” Yellow added, putting the pieces together. “Oh no…”

“Should we find them? See if they’re OK?” Green asked. “No one does that to my little bro.”

“Where would they be?” SC wondered. “This castle is huge.”

“The seven of us could split up and look for them.” I reasoned. “Just to make sure they’re OK.”

“Red’s a fighter, and he’s got Candy by his side.” Dad figured.

“And he’s got the wildest mood swings.” SC added. “That does not bode well…”

“I’m worried too, buddy.” Blue agreed, concerned. “Should we go look for him?”

Before we could make a decision, the many castle servants informed us that it was… quiet hours, for lack of a better phrase. Disappointed, we returned to our bedrooms, though SC was eager to snuggle back up in his blankets after, in his words, “The most heavenly nap [he’s] ever had.” We agreed that we’d keep Red and Candy in prayer and bid each other good night before separating, Tango family in one room, four-fifths of the Gang in the other. Dad, Gold, and I stayed up a little bit longer before going to bed, Red and Candy still on our minds.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I woke up the next morning after what was probably the best night of sleep I’ve ever had. The bed felt like the child of a cloud and cotton candy. It was so soft, and the blanket was so warm and snuggly. The grandfather clock in our room read a few minutes after 9, a perfectly reasonable time to awaken. Outside, birds were chirping, the sun was shining, and Dad was already up sipping a coffee from Farbucks.

“Morning, my little Prince.” Dad greeted me quietly. “My First Prize is still sleeping.”

“Morning, Dad.” I replied in a hushed tone. “What do you think today will bring?”

As if for an answer, we heard a quiet knock at the door. It wasn’t much, but it was enough to arouse Gold from his slumber. He always has been an early riser, well, for the month and change I’ve lived with him, so seeing me outsleep him was surprising. Gold sat up and rubbed his tired eyes.

“Morning, Dad.” He said. “Purple? You’re up? What time is it?”

“A bit past 9:00,” I answered. “You might’ve gotten up at the right moment. Someone’s at the door.”

Dad went to answer it, and I hopped out of bed and joined him, and at the door was none other than Reddy Bear.

“Red!” Dad exclaimed. “Good morning! Come in! Come in!” Dad ushered him inside.

“Morning, Tango family.” Red replied, breathing a sigh of relief. “I’ve been looking for you, this castle is huge.”

“What brings you here?” I asked.

“I got a message… from King Harold.” Red explained. “He wanted to meet me in the woods behind the castle. We got off to a bad start, and he claims to want to make amends.”

“OK, I’m following…” Dad noted. “But I don’t understand why you came to us.”

“I don’t either.” Gold said, before a thought came to him. “Wait… Do you want us to meet Puss in Boots with you?”

“It’s not that.” Red elaborated. “I… need someone to talk to, and I figured the Tango family would be the perfect candidates, since you guys know of this type of thing.”

“What type of thing?” I wondered.

“Romance.” Red answered. “I’ll fill you in on the way.”

Red led the three of us out of the castle toward the woods behind it, looking for his meeting spot with King Harold. He explained what happened the night before, how he feared he and Candy would be nothing more than just friends, and how he might be developing feelings for her. The poor guy poured his heart out to the three of us, and it warms my heart knowing he trusts us enough as a confidant to keep some pretty heavy stuff. Even Gold was quiet for most of it, which was surprising to me. I would’ve expected some playful jabs from him, but I guess Gold knew how serious Red was being.

“That’s… what I’ve been feeling recently.” Red finished. “I’m at a bit of a loss, I’ll admit.”

“Oh Red…” I sympathized. “I’m sorry to hear all that.”

“Is there anything we can do for you?” Dad asked.

“Pray for us, I guess.” Red answered, shrugging. “I don’t know what else we can do at this point.”

“I just don’t get why they can’t be together.” Gold noted. “You guys love each other, right?”

“There’s more to a relationship than just love.” Dad answered. “Just because two people love each other doesn’t mean they’re the right fit for each other.”

“The heart is deceitful above all things.” I recited. “One should not rely on the heart, the whims of emotion, to make life-changing decisions like this.”

“How’d you realize Maggie was the one for you, Purple?” Red asked. I was caught off-guard by his question, but I answered as well as I possibly could.

“Well, you’re just dating. Let me make that clear.” I insisted. “But I guess we got to know each other more and more, lots of thought, lots of prayer, advice from my dad. Eventually we confessed our love for each other, but that wasn’t until after we got to know each other deeply. Not to mention she shares my faith. That’s the most important thing for us.” Red sighed.

“I just wish Candy did…” He said remorsefully. “She’s interested, so that’s a start. Maybe I can plant the seeds.” Dad put a hand on his shoulder.

“If people like me can find salvation, anyone can.” He said softly. “But she might not. It’s up to her. At this point, Red, my advice is to be yourself, be her friend. You never know what might come of it.”

“Hey guys… How long have we been walking?” Gold asked. I had gotten so caught up in our conversation that I didn’t realize where we were until my big brother spoke up about it.

“He’s right… Where are we?” I wondered.

“Are we lost?” Red asked. “Oh no…”

“Don’t panic, kids.” Dad advised. “We should be able to find the castle easily with our wings.”

Before we could whip out our elytra, though, we were stopped by a new character: one of my personal favorites… Puss in Boots. He appeared on the path in front of us, blocking our way. He whipped out his sword and pointed it at us.

“Fear me if you dare!” He exclaimed, hissing. Red extended his arms across us.

“Be careful, guys. This cat’s got claws.” He warned. “And he has a target on us.”

“If anyone can tame him, it’s you.” I assured him.

Without warning, Puss leapt out of his boots at us, spinning in midair with his claws extended. We swerved out of the way and dodged his attacks as well as we could, though not without a few scratches and scars. He’s got skills, I’ll admit. He soon returned to his boots.

“Pray for mercy from Puss in Boots!” He shouted before starting to wheeze and hack. Gold and I glanced at each other, confused, but Red stepped forward and stroked Puss’s back as the feline hacked up a hairball.

“Let it out, Puss. Let it out.” Red said gently. Puss looked up at him.

“Gracias…” Puss said gratefully. Red looked at me and my family.

“Shall we head back?” I wondered.

“Yeah.” Red confirmed, about to join us, but Puss stopped him.

“Wait! Señor!” He began. Red turned around. “You have spared my life. I have clearly misjudged you. You have my loyalty.” He took off his hat and bowed low before us. Red glanced at us.

“I’d love to have a Spanish-speaking feline along for the ride.” He said. “I mean, look at him!” He gestured to Puss as he did his cute-eyes thing. My heart started to melt as well. I love cats.

“We gotta keep the story moving.” I noted.

“I’m down for it.” Gold agreed.

“Alright then.” Dad said, nodding. “Red, you know this better than the rest of us. Where do we go?”

“The Fairy Godmother’s factory.” Red said. “Puss, can you take us there?”

“Sí, of course.” Puss answered. With that, he led us deeper into the woods, and soon enough, we found it. Her factory. Now the next thing to do, according to Red, was break in.

Chapter 11: The Potion (Third Person)

Red, the Tangos, and Puss in Boots soon arrived at Fairy Godmother’s factory, the home of all her magical potions, charms, enchantments, and everything in between. They hid in the shrubbery outside while they took stock of everything about it and inside it.

“OK, Red, how do we get in?” Purple asked. “They won’t let us stroll in, will they?”

“No, which is why we need to be sneaky.” Red schemed. “But first… A bit of deception.” Red whispered to them the plan and the five of them executed it.

King led the others through the front door up to the receptionist and slipped by due to claiming they’re from “The union.” From there, they grabbed an outfit by stealing it from a worker, Red, Purple, Gold, and Puss hid themselves inside a cart and King pushed them unnoticed into the potion room. Upon making it there, King opened the cart door and the three sticks and cat tumbled out of it, stiff and sore from the tight squeeze. Gold clambered to his feet.

“We made it!” He said quietly.

“Now to secure the potion.” Red determined. “It should be up high. Puss, can you climb those shelves?”

“You got it, boss.” Puss confirmed, climbing the shelves.

“I’ll keep watch.” King assured them, peeking out the door. Gold joined him.

“Red, you think this could… secure your future with Candy?” Purple asked.

“I don’t know.” Red confessed. “But I’m willing to try…”

“How about this one?” Puss called. “It’s called, ‘Happily Ever After.’” Puss called from above.

“Sounds perfect for a lovestruck Red.” Gold teased, a little too loudly.

“Knock it off, Goldy.” King reprimanded. “And keep quiet.”

But it was too late. Someone had heard Gold’s remark and pointed it out to the other employees. The factory was quickly put into lockdown, a metal door lowering and about to block their exit from the potion room.

“Oh, jeez… What have I done?” Gold said, panicked. Red’s panic level also began to rise.

“Grab it and go!” Red yelled. Puss cut a circle out of the glass, grabbed the potion bottle, leapt onto the floor, and he and the sticks ducked under the door where they met an army of the Fairy Godmother’s employees, some of whom wielding automatic crossbows.

“Shields up, kids!” King ordered. “We’re flying outta here!”

The four sticks equipped shields, put on their elytra and broke for a window, Puss riding on Red’s shoulder like a parrot, still hanging onto the potion. They escaped unharmed, the shields blocking any arrows shot at them, though not without causing a little bit of chaos. Gold bumped into a massive vat of potion that turned everyone into doves. By the time the Fairy Godmother and her son, Prince Charming, arrived, the damage was already done. Charming was furious.

“Whoever did this shall pay! I will smite them where they stand!” Charming swore, pulling out a large sword and holding it in front of him.

“Oh put that away, Junior, you’re still gonna be King.” Fairy Godmother promised. One of the employees–now a dove–flew up to her, showing her a list.

“Ma’am, we have taken inventory. Only one thing is missing.” Fairy Godmother examined the list.

“Hmm… We might be able to use this.” She said connivingly. “To the castle!”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Back at the castle, Candy woke up after a wonderful night’s sleep, only to find Red gone. She figured she knew where he was, continuing the story as they agreed upon the night before. She got up and opened the door to the balcony, stepped out onto it and inhaled the fresh, morning air.

“Such a beautiful day.” She sighed. “I hope Red’s doing OK.” She chuckled. “He’ll be excited to meet Puss in Boots, that’s for sure.” She gazed upon the morning scenery for a moment before returning inside. “I wonder where the rest of the guys are. They should explore this magical kingdom.”

Using her super speed, she zipped around the castle, looking for where the remaining members of the Squad were staying.

On the other side of the castle, Yellow was just waking up, stretching after a wonderful night of sleep. He felt more refreshed than he had in a while, but he was surprised to see the blue-blanketed bed already made. He got up and soon found his best friend on the balcony, leaning on the wall, gazing into the distance. Yellow walked up to him.

“Good morning, Blue.” Yellow said quietly so as to not wake the sleeping Secondaries. Blue flinched slightly, a little startled, but smiled at Yellow.

“Morning, Bestie.” Blue replied.

“How was your night of rest?” Yellow asked. “One of the best you’ve experienced, I would imagine.”

“It truly was heavenly.” Blue gushed. “I wonder what they put in there to make it feel so soft.”

“I must conduct experiments on that mattress stuffing.” Yellow said thoughtfully. “I got myself a sample. Surely SC would greatly appreciate it if I could replicate or even recreate it. Once we escape this adventure and reach our quarters, I think we all could benefit from a long duration of respite, SC especially.”

“You know him.” The two of them chuckled. “But yes, I have to agree with that.” They sat, enjoying each other’s company, the crisp morning air, and the view from the balcony. After a little while, they were joined by Green, who greeted them.

“Morning, bros.”

“Morning, Green.” Yellow and Blue said in unison.

“I presume SC is still snoozing.” Yellow guessed.

“With these beds? He’ll probably sleep ‘til 1:30.” Green joked. The Primaries laughed. “But I don’t want to stay cooped up in here. Maybe we can find Red or get the Tangos to explore the kingdom with us.”

“I must admit, that sounds like fun.” Blue considered. Yellow nodded in agreement.

“Should we awaken SC? He might enjoy this as well.” Yellow offered.

“The only thing he loves more than us is sleep.” Green reasoned. “And maybe Minecraft. I’d imagine he wants to catch as many Z’s as possible.”

“Can’t argue with that logic.” Blue said, shrugging.

“I am forced to comply.” Yellow agreed. “Let’s vamoose, albeit silently.”

The three of them snuck out of their shared room so as to not awaken SC and quietly shut the door behind them. After they left, they saw Candy zooming up to them and she quickly hit the brakes.

“Morning Yellow, Blue, the combination of yellow and blue.” Candy greeted them.

“Jeez, I am, aren’t I?” Green considered.

“You’ll eternally be a half-nerd, Green Bean.” Yellow joked. Blue chuckled, but Green was not amused.

“Candy, we were thinking about exploring the kingdom. Care to join us?” Green asked.

“I’d love to, but what about SC?” Candy wondered.

“He’s out like a light.” Blue answered. “To be honest, he deserves it after putting up with us for so long.”

“Let’s see if the Tango family is still within the confines of their dormitory.” Yellow advised. “If not, then we shall explore without them.”

“Their room is nearby. Let’s give them a knock.” Green said.

The four of them made their way down the hall to the Tango’s room, only to find the door open and a note on it. Blue took it down and read it to the others.

“‘Dear remaining members of the Squad,’” Blue read, “‘Red came to us earlier and said he needed to talk with us in the woods. We’re with him now. Don’t worry about us, we’ll be fine. We’ll be back as soon as we can. In the meantime, enjoy yourselves… and be careful.

“‘We love you guys. Signed, Red and the Tango family.’”

“They’re absent?” Yellow wondered.

“They’ll be fine.” Candy assured them. “This is all a part of the movie. Now… Do you guys want to venture out? You all seem like the adventurous type.”

The FSF nodded, confirming this, and the four friends flew–sprinted in Candy’s case–to the bustling kingdom of Far Far Away. They tried everything they could get their hands on, exploring all they possibly could, until the sun began to set. After a fun day at the kingdom, they returned to the castle, where SC was waiting for them, looking far from pleased.

“Where were you guys?” SC demanded to know. Yellow, Green, and Blue blushed in embarrassment.

“We were exploring the kingdom.” Blue confessed sheepishly.

“It was-” Yellow began.

“It was my idea, SC.” Candy interrupted, stepping in front of the others. The FSF looked confused, but Candy gave them a determined look. “If we scared or worried you, don’t take it out on them. Take it out on me.”

“I’m not angry, guys.” SC said. “I was just a little worried as to what happened to you. I should’ve expected you four to wander off.”

“What were you doing, dude?” Green asked.

“Well, after I woke up, I strolled around the castle, practiced my flying and took a stroll through the garden.” SC elaborated. “It was nice to get some peace and quiet for once, to be honest, so I rather enjoyed myself.”

“I’m glad to hear that.” Blue said, sighing in relief.

“Hey, Candy, are you well? You’re not appearing to be 100%.” Yellow observed.

“It’s happening… guys…” She said woozily. “...The next part… of the movie…” She collapsed backwards, but Blue was quick enough to catch her.

“Candy!” He exclaimed. “What’s wrong? Are you OK?”

“She’s still breathing, and I can feel her pulse.” Yellow noted. “She just passed out and will recover soon. But she explained that this was the proceeding stage of the cinema…”

“This must be what’s supposed to happen, dudes.” Green figured.

“Let’s take her to her room.” SC advised. “I saw her room when I was walking, and I know how to get there.”

“Lead the way!” Blue insisted.

SC and the FSF carried Candy into her room, gently set her on her bed and left the room, a little worried but they trusted Candy when she implied that this was what was supposed to happen. They weren’t sure fully what had happened, but there was nothing else they could do at the moment. They just hoped that they were doing the right thing.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Red, the Tangos, and Puss escaped the Fairy Godmother’s factory and quickly took refuge in the safety of the surrounding forest. When they felt safe, they celebrated their success. Puss handed Red the potion and he held it up to show his friends.

“We got it!” Red exclaimed. “We got a Happily Ever After!”

“But what’s it do?” Purple wondered. “It’s a potion, so it obviously has magical properties. If only Blue was here…”

“I’ll bet it’ll be awesome!” Gold exclaimed.

“I just hope this isn’t dangerous…” King said, a little worriedly.

“Rojo, since you saved my life, I should be the one to take the first sip.” Puss suggested.

“No, no, I’m… Sure it’ll be fine.” Red said uncertainly.

“Reddy Bear, are you sure?” Purple asked, concerned. “We still don’t know what’ll happen to you.”

“I’ve seen this movie numerous times.” Red replied. “Drinking the potion is what the main character does. I’ll be fine, I promise. Besides, I promised Candy I’d do this.” He sighed deeply. “Candy, this is for us.” He raised the vial as if making a toast, drank half of the potion, and they waited to see what would happen. After a long moment, Gold broke the silence.

“Nothing happened.” He muttered. “What a rip-off.”

“Red, are you OK? Do you feel anything happening?” King asked.

“No, not really…” Red answered. “But nothing is supposed to happen until after nightfall. Let’s head back to the castle. The guys are sure to be missing us.”

“Afraid we can’t.” Purple observed, pointing out dark clouds in the distance. “There looks like a storm brewing, and we won’t be able to fly through that without the risk of getting struck by lightning.”

“Sounds cool, not gonna lie.” Gold considered.

“Not happening, Goldy.” King insisted. Gold sighed, disappointed, but silently nodded in agreement. “We’d better find a shelter then.” King added.

“Y rapido. These boots are made for fighting, not mud.” Puss added.

The five of them took off deeper into the woods, searching for shelter. As they ran, Gold deliberately lagged behind with Red.

“Hey Red, do you mind if I polish that potion off?” He asked quietly.

“I don’t think your dad would approve…” Red replied, concerned.

“I’ll be fine, just like you.” Gold said, swiping the potion and finishing the remaining contents.

“Goldy!” Red protested. “What was that?”

“I’ve never been one to follow instructions.” Gold quipped. “I wonder what’ll happen to me.”

“For your sake, you’d better not have poisoned yourself.” Red half-joked.

As the sun began to set and a hard rain began to fall, the five of them took shelter in an old barn and watched the rain fall, trying but failing to dry themselves off.

“I forgot how we used to do this, Goldy.” King reminisced as he wrapped an arm around his biological son. “We’d sit and watch the rain fall. The most calming thing you did as a kid.”

“That was probably the only calming thing I did as a kid.” Gold replied.

“Yep, it really was.” King confirmed, chuckling. “I’m so glad you’re back in my life, Goldy, even if you drive me crazy sometimes.”

“What’s a family if they didn’t drive each other crazy?” Purple joked.

“It’s not a family, that’s for sure.” Red confirmed. “I couldn’t live without the teasing from the guys… sometimes.”

The sticks laughed. Soon after, they realized how late it was, so with the leftover hay already in the barn, they made some makeshift mattresses and turned in for the night, Puss curling up in Red’s lap. As the five of them slept, two of them underwent some incredible transformations, making the next 24 hours pivotal not only for their lives, but for their friends’ lives as well.

Chapter 12: The Lion, the Godmother, and the Wardrobe

King

The following morning soon came, going from powerful storms the night before to clear sunny skies as the sun rose. It wasn’t the greatest night of sleep for me, my kids, or Red, despite the latter having Puss in Boots curled up in his lap, but we’ve definitely had worse nights before. I woke up with the sun, which streamed through a crack in the old barn we were sheltered in and rubbed my tired eyes.

“Ugh, it’s too early for this,” I groaned quietly. I looked around at the others, who were still sleeping, except for Gold, who was already gone. I was frustrated upon seeing Gold absent, but he wasn’t surprised, not in the slightest.

“Why can’t this kid stay in one place?” I muttered. “Maybe I can leash him up again… Nah, he’s too old for that…” While I pondered my choices, I looked around. Purple was still here, fast asleep, as well as Red… I was shocked upon seeing Red. His shade of red was different, like a shade of ruby red, albeit with more pinkish hues than I would’ve thought. He seemed to glow as well, with thin white lines all over him giving his stick body a 3D appearance, resembling a depiction of a ruby to match his newer, brighter color.

“Whoa…” I said. “That potion is some powerful stuff.” I then put the pieces together. “Gold probably snuck himself some. That’s such a Gold thing to do.” I shook my head, wondering what to do about Gold, but that had to wait. The first thing I had to do: wake up the others. I leaned over Purple and gently nudged him awake.

“Purrrrrr-ple… My little Prince…” I said gently. “It’s a wonderful day outside and we gotta get back to the castle.” Purple opened his eyes and smiled at me.

“Hey Dad,” he said, a little drowsily. He rubbed his eyes and saw Red, which jolted him awake. “Is that… Red?”

“I’d imagine so.” I answered. “Quite the change, huh?”

“You bet.” Purple replied. “I wonder what Candy’s reaction will be.”

“Probably shock.” I guessed. “Alrighty, let’s awaken the Bear, which is a lot less dangerous than it sounds.” Purple laughed.

“Hey, where’s Goldy?”

“Not sure. He was gone when I woke up.” I sighed. “I love him, but I swear… this kid is going to be the end of me.” Purple laughed again.

“He loves you back, Dad. He’s just adventurous. Maybe a bit overly so, but he’s still a blessing… to both of us.”

“He truly is.” I agreed. “Just as you are to me.”

“Awww. Thanks, Dad. You’re a blessing to me, too. Infinitely so.” Purple replied.

“Could you guys stop talking?” Red moaned sleepily. “How’s a guy supposed to sleep with all this talking going on?”

“Hey, you’re up!” Purple exclaimed. “And you look amazing today!”

“C’mon, Prince, stop teasing me…” Red muttered before a thought hit him. “Wait… The potion! It worked?” He looked at his hands and gasped. “Oh my gosh, I’m so bright! I’m like a diamond, but red! Like a ruby… I guess…? I wonder if this is permanent…”

“I’m afraid not, mi amigo,” Puss–who was awakened by Red–replied, examining the potion vial. “But it can be if you can get your girl’s embrace… by midnight.”

“Hmm… I hope Candy’s doing OK…” Red said. “Hey, where’s Gold?”

“I’m right here!” Exclaimed a familiar voice from the doorway. We turned and saw Gold, enhanced by the potion. His shade of yellow was even brighter, shining brightly like a gold ingot, and he had massive wings coming out from his arms, making him resemble an eagle. “I’ve always wanted to fly, and now I got wings! Like actual wings! This isn’t just an elytra! I can fly! I CAN FLY!” He took off into the air, flying loop-the-loops for us to see. “These wings can put elytra to shame!” He laughed and bellowed, overjoyed with his transformation and landed in front of us. Purple and Red applauded, and even I had to crack a smile seeing my son so happy.

“Impressive, Goldy, though I wish you would’ve asked me before drinking the potion.” I reprimanded.

“You never would’ve let me.” Gold whined.

“Exactly.” I sighed. “I don’t want to be a buzzkill, my First Prize. I love fun just like you, it’s just… losing you and the promise I made to your late mom… I want to honor her last wish. And the thought of losing you, putting you in danger… Failing your mother… I can’t bear the thought.” I exhaled deeply again. “I know how fun-loving you are. You remind me of me when I was younger, but I still have scars from losing you the first time… and I don’t want to repeat that horrible, horrible moment.”

“I don’t want to lose you either, Goldy.” Purple added. “You’re a great big bro.”

“Dad, I… I'm sorry....” Gold confessed.

“It’s OK, kiddo.” I insisted, hugging him tightly. Gold wrapped his arms around me in return, and we started crying. “I love your outgoing, excitable self, even if you drive me crazy sometimes. I just hope you know that I love you dearly, and I’m so protective of you to honor your mom’s last wish.”

“I do, and I love you too, Dad.” Gold professed. “Thanks, Dad, for everything. For raising me, for caring for me, for all you’ve done for me.”

I glanced at Red, Purple, and Puss watching the scene, a father and son growing to understand each other better. Red was bawling, leaning on Purple’s shoulder, Purple comforted him, wiping tears from his eyes himself, and even Puss started to tear up, which Purple noticed. It was nice to know Red hadn’t changed, even if his appearance did.

“Are you crying, Puss?” He asked.

“No, I just got a bit of fur in my eye.” Puss insisted, wiping his eyes. “I must not cry…” Gold and I separated.

“You guys OK?” I asked.

“I’m fine.” Red said tearfully. “Just… give me a minute to collect myself.” He inhaled deeply and dried his eyes and face. “Alright… I’m good… I think I’m good… Let’s return to the castle! I need to show this to Candy! She’s gonna love it! … I hope…”

“Shall we fly?” Gold asked, spreading his new wings.

“Let’s do it.” Purple answered. Puss climbed onto Red’s shoulder and the five of us took off for the castle, unaware of what was happening within the castle walls.

Candy

I woke up that morning after another great night’s sleep in the castle. I woozily slumped over to a mirror in my bedroom and glanced at my reflection. What I saw in it made me jump backwards in surprise. I was no longer striped, rather, I was back to my original solid color before I met Flodge and was transformed into a Stripe. At least… I think. Most of my memories before Flodge are a blur at this point. I was shocked beyond belief, but soon figured it out.

“Red must’ve gotten the potion.” I reasoned. “In the movie, it changed Shrek and Fiona. It must’ve done the same to me and Red. I just wonder…” I raced about her room, and as it turned out, she still had her super speed. “I’m… solid-colored…” She gasped. “And I still have my speed. It’s like… I’m back to my old self… I think…”

I couldn’t remember much of what I was like before meeting Flodge. I did retain my love of DreamWorks, but most things deemed as “important” by Flodge were blurry at best. I racked my brain, trying to remember, but soon got a knock at my door. I opened it and there was both Fairy Godmother and Prince Charming.

“Oh, it’s you…” I said, a little annoyed.

“And look who’s gotten a glow-up since I was here last!” Fairy Godmother gushed. “My my, you look lovely, Candy.”

“Candy… a name as sweet as you are…” Charming added.

“Who’s this guy?” I asked, disgusted. I knew who it was, obviously, but I decided to play ignorant. Best they don’t know my love of DreamWorks.

“This is your Prince Charming.” Fairy Godmother explained. “It’s what every princess deserves. Tell me, Candy, don’t you have doubts that you and Red will be anything more than friends?”

I paused. I wanted nothing more than to take the next step with Red, but I wasn’t sure how to do it. Red and I agreed to be best friends, and I didn’t want to push something that wasn’t there, especially if Red wasn’t ready yet.

“Red’s a great person, one of the best I’ve ever met.”

“But can he deliver everything you want, like a happily ever after?” Fairy Godmother asks.

I paused again. I wanted to stick up for Red, but I was also concerned about the bigger picture. The goal was to get to The Last Wish, the Wishing Star, and the only way to get there was to play through the movie. I was torn as to what to do, but luckily for her, I didn’t have to make a decision.

“I’ll let you two get to know each other.” Fairy Godmother said. “I have some things to take care of before your celebration tonight.” She flew off out the castle door.

‘If you hurt Red…’ I thought, ‘I’ll make you and Charming hurt.’

“So it’s just you and me.” Charming said flirtatiously. I glanced around and saw Yellow, Green, Blue and SC approaching.

“No… My friends are here.” I replied, racing over to them. “Guys! Guys!”

“Whoa… hang on… Candy?” Green asked, dumbfounded. “Is that you?”

“Yes.” I answered. “I know you probably don’t recognize me without my stripes, but I promise you, it’s me.”

“There’s no way… What the phlox happened to you?” Blue asked. “Are you OK?”

“Her red is her same shade, #E40A16.” Yellow observed. How he knew my hex code, I have no idea.

“It’s a long story, listen, I fear Red and the Tangos might be in trouble.” I explained frantically. “I know how this movie goes. The others are going to get in trouble. Given the Fairy Godmother’s generally positive reputation, no one’s going to take kindly to them stealing from her.”

“Whoa whoa whoa, stealing? Red would never!” SC protested.

“He would if it meant continuing the story.” I replied, lowering my voice. “Keep an eye out for them and the Fairy Godmother. She wants to hook me up with him,” I gestured to Charming, “but I’m not interested. I intend on faking it until the others return, but I advise you to keep your eyes open, especially on the jail.”

“Jail?” Blue repeated, concerned.

“If worst comes to worst, I’ll explode it open.” Yellow promised. “Is that all you desire from us? Just watch for the Tangos and Reddy Bear?”

“Pretty much.” I answered. “I can handle myself.”

“Are you sure, Candy?” SC wondered, concerned. “I can join you if you want…”

“I live with two Killer Bunnies.” I replied. “Plus, Red taught me a few things. I feel confident that I can handle it.”

“Candy, shall we prepare for tonight?” Charming asked, wrapping an arm around her.

“Oh yeah, the ball later on. Yeah, I’ll get to that immediately.” I said.

“And we shall as well.” SC added, winking at me. I smiled back and nodded, returning to my room. The others did the same, doubling toward their room. I can only assume they eventually took off for the skies. They have their role, I have mine.

“OK… Time to get ready for this thing.” I sighed. I opened my wardrobe and it was filled with all different outfits for me to try on. As I tried figuring out which worked best with my now clean red color, I felt… conflicted, mostly about my new appearance.

For one, my stripes were the last link to my past, a past I’d rather not relive. Without my stripes, I could start reinventing myself. My slate was as clean as my new solid color, and I could forge a new identity, one I have been building with Red now in my life. But I wasn’t excited about it. Rather, I felt… empty.

Like it or not, my stripes are a part of me. I’m unique, I’m a Stripe, I always will be, so being solid for the first time in years… it felt weird. I thought I might like the change, I can put Flodge behind me for good. She gave me those stripes after all, but perhaps there’s a deeper meaning to them.

I looked at myself in the mirror and gave it thought, a lot of thought. I had time to prepare, after all. Why did I feel empty and hollow without my stripes? Why wouldn’t I be ecstatic about being free from Flodge’s final influence? Why? Why? Why? It took a while, but I finally settled on an answer.

“My stripes are reminders of who I was… And who saved me from my boss. Red rescued me, showed me mercy, something I never experienced working under Flodge.” I said to myself. “I might not have the happiest story, but my stripes are reminders of who I was, and who I will never become again. They remind me of Reddy Bear, my hero… Without my Stripes… who am I?”

I sat down on my bed, wrestling with the questions overflowing in my mind. I was so distracted I almost lost track of time, only snapped out of my trace by the chimes on the grandfather clock marking every quarter hour. Looking at the clock, and the sinking sun outside, I knew it was time.

“It’s getting late. I’d better head to the celebration.” I noted. “Just gotta fake it ‘til I make it, and working for Flodge for so long, that should be easy.” I sighed. “Reddy Bear… I look forward to seeing you. I can handle it, just… Stay safe out there.”

King

It didn’t take long for me, my kids, Red, and Puss to return to the kingdom, but with the movie’s accelerated time frame, we arrived as the sun was just starting to sink and the sky was turning Red’s new shade of ruby red. The five of us landed not far from the castle.

“We made it, guys!” Red exclaimed. “Now, to the castle. I can’t wait for Candy to see me!”

“She’s gonna love your new look.” Gold complimented. “And mine, too.”

“You’re doing this for… Your lady friend, Rojo?” Puss asked.

“Yeah…” Red admitted, turning a brighter shade of pink, “she’s such a sweet girl.”

“I agree.” I said, nodding.

“Magenta’s sweeter, for the record.” Purple quipped. I chuckled, and Red gave Purple a playful sock in the arm.

“Sure she is…” Red said sarcastically.

As we got closer to the castle, we were soon stopped by a multitude of knights, officers of sorts who had caught wind of our escapade the day prior, when we stole from Fairy Godmother.

“Halt!” They said, all at once. “You’re under arrest for stealing from the Fairy Godmother!”

“That hack?” Gold muttered. “I thought she was the villain.”

“She has a good outward reputation.” Red replied. He turned to the knights. “You wanna fight? Come and get it!” He whipped out his sword, and Puss, Purple and I did the same. Gold raised his fists in defense. Despite our weaponry and skills, we were outnumbered and surrounded, and they had weapons as well. We soon found ourselves overmatched.

“Dad! There’s too many!” Purple yelled.

“We can fight them off, kiddo!” I insisted.

“Get off me you…” Gold flapped his wings, trying to get away, but more soldiers pinned him down and began dragging him off. “Dad! Help!”

“Gold!” I exclaimed. It wasn’t long before Red and Puss were overpowered, and I was soon after them. “Unhand my sons, you cowards! Unhand them!” I ordered.

“You’re gonna need a lion before that’s gonna happen.” One soldier scoffed. His friends laughed at their cohort’s joke, but something about that clicked with me.

‘A lion…’ I thought. Through my tear-stained eyes, I saw Purple struggling and Gold getting dragged off. My memory flashed back to Gold fighting the simulation… to Purple fighting the beam… to Neon’s dying wish… Something within me activated, all my rage and anger and fatherly nature boiled over, erupting like a volcano.

“Release… MY KIDS!” I shouted, standing up suddenly, knocking multiple knights off of me. Without warning, with barely any control, I swiped, kicked, and punched, unafraid to punch fully-armored knights in the visor with my bare fists. I grabbed the knights off of Purple and Gold and used them as weapons, tossing them at their allies like they were boomerangs. “You will PAY FOR THIS!” I screamed. “NO ONE ATTACKS MY FAMILY!!!” Red and Puss were freed as well, as I grabbed the knights around the two of them and, somewhat literally, mopped the floor with them. Any knights that weren’t knocked unconscious fled into the castle. “RUN, YOU COWARDS! COME MESS WITH US AGAIN, NEXT TIME I WON’T GO SO EASY ON YOU!”

“D- Dad?” Gold stuttered, absolutely stunned. I turned around and saw Gold, looking straight-up in awe. Red also stared at me, open-mouthed.

“Goldy!” I exclaimed. “My little Prince! Are you two OK?”

“We’re fine Dad…” Gold answered distantly. “Thanks…”

“El Rey… You were strong, like the bull…” Puss gasped.

“You released your lion again, Dad…” Purple said, shocked. “I haven’t seen that since Vic’s factory…”

“But… Buddy… You’re a lion, King.” Red pointed out.

“Wait, what?” I asked. I then looked at my hands, except instead of hands, I had lion paws with long, sharp claws and fur of my orange shade covering my body. I gasped in horror and felt around my head, feeling a bushy mane around me and long lion whiskers, even a lion tail behind me. “What.. What happened to me?! Kids, don’t look! Please!” I shielded my face, horrified. “I’m a monster! I’m a terror! I’m-”

“A hero.” Gold interrupted gently. “Dad… you saved us.”

“We would’ve been jailed if not for you.” Red added. “King of the Piglins is now King of the Beasts.”

“You’re a legend to me, Dad.” Purple praised. “And no matter what happens, you’re still my beloved dad.” He hugged me as tears flowed down my face. I carefully hugged him back.

“But why am I like this?” I asked. “I didn’t drink the potion. Red?”

“I don’t know, King, I truly don’t.” Red confessed. “I guess that’s what living in a fairy tale world can do. Anything can happen.”

“But… This isn’t permanent, right?” I wondered desperately. “I can’t live like this!”

“If it’s any consolation, Dad,” Gold began, joining Purple in the hug, “we’re still together, we’re OK… And that’s all that matters.” Red hugged me as well and felt my new, soft fur. I carefully wrapped my arms around them so as not to scratch them with my claws and let tears flow down my face.

“You’re not a monster, Dad, you’re my father whom I love dearly.” Purple said. “And a father who loves me back.”

“He loves us back, Purple.” Gold added cheekily. “And we love him no matter what.”

“Kids, my dear, dear sons…” I said tearfully. “Thank you. I don’t know where I’d be without you.”

“Probably inside the black hole you made.” Red joked. We Tangos laughed and everyone separated. At that moment, SC, Yellow, Green, and Blue descended in front of us.

“Red? Gold?” SC asked. “Is that you?”

“Quite the glow-up, eh?” Red joked. “Yes, it’s us. I’m shining like a gem!”

“And I can fly like an eagle!” Gold exclaimed. Purple wrapped an arm around him.

“That’s my big brother. Got his own wings that could make my elytra jealous.” He said.

“And… A friend of yours, Red?” SC cautiously asked, referring to me.

“Kids… It’s me.” I confessed, sheepishly.

“He unlocked his lion!” Red exclaimed. “And now he is one! It’s incredible…”

“Dude… There’s no way…” Green gasped.

“Examining the color of his fur…” Yellow analyzed. “It is definitely #D46907, mango tango.”

“That’s what tips it off for you, buddy?” Blue joked. “Not his voice?”

“You gotta be certain of these things, Blue.” Yellow answered.

“Well… King… I’m in awe.” Blue added, stepping toward him. “Your love for Red and your kids is apparent. If nothing else, I can turn you back with a potion when we free ourselves of this.”

“Thanks, Blue.” I sighed.

“Awww,” Gold moaned. “I kinda like having a lion as a dad.”

“I agree.” Purple admitted.

“Not to mention his fur is so soft!” Red added, gently stroking my new fur. I couldn’t help but smile at him.

“I’ve seen you at full power, King.” SC said. “You’re probably the most passionate and furiously vindictive opponent I’ve ever faced, and I’m grateful to have you as an ally.”

“Thanks, SC.” I replied.

“It’s time to channel that passion for the good.” SC continued. “No longer to avenge your family, but now to save it.”

“Candy’s still in there, after all!” Red insisted. “We need to save her!” I nodded in agreement.

“Kids… Let’s storm this castle.” I said confidently. “There’s a new monarch in town, and he’s the King of the Beasts!”

Chapter 13: Sticks vs. Fairy (Third Person)

‘I hope you’re doing OK…’ Candy thought. ‘Reddy Bear… be careful.’

She was ready for the magic ball that evening, essentially what Fairy Godmother was using to hook Prince Charming up with her. Candy knew what she had to do, however. She was planning to put on her best possible facade and seem interested in the prince. She was confident in her ability, as she learned a few things from Flodge. Soon, the sun set and night fell, the time had arrived. She arrived at the courtyard where Prince Charming and Fairy Godmother were waiting.

“There’s Princess Candy!” Fairy Godmother exclaimed. “You look amazing!”

“I’ve looked better…” Candy muttered.

“My dear Candy… Shall we have this dance?” Charming asked.

“Yeah, where’s Red?” Candy quipped. “I’d love to spend this night with him and his family.”

“Forget about them,” Charming insisted, “tonight is our night.” Candy fumed inwardly, wanting to fight back, but she held herself back, knowing that this was for the greater good. Plus, she was unsure what the Fairy Godmother would do. She was a magic wielder and she was not afraid to use it, and Candy knew that well.

‘I know what you’re doing.’ Candy thought, describing Charming. ‘I’ve worked with Flodge for long enough to recognize deception… now, at least. You don’t like me for me, you like me for what my “character” can give you: the throne of Far, Far Away.’

“You know what… You’re right. Let’s get this night started.” Candy lied discreetly, hoping to buy enough time for her friends to arrive. The Fairy Godmother floated over to the orchestra on a stage and began singing Holding Out for a Hero.

‘Anytime now, guys.’ Candy thought. ‘I don’t want to do this for any longer than necessary. It’s not who I am… Not any more.’

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Outside the castle, the Squad, along with Puss in Boots, charged toward the castle doors with a single-minded determination. Red was determined to intervene and put a stop to Fairy Godmother, which would lead to them progressing to the next movie. Any knights that tried to stop them soon realized they had to deal with King… in his full-blown lion form.

King roared a powerful, deafening roar, and instantly the knights fled in terror. The others looked on in shock as King seemed to embrace his new lion, but King smiled warmly at them before turning to face the cowardly knights.

“That’s what I thought.” King scoffed as a group of knights fled in terror from him. Unfortunately, not all the knights were that spineless, and several dozen knights covered their escape. This is when Puss in Boots stepped up to the plate.

“Go! Go! Save your lady friend! Go!” He ordered.

“But… Puss…” Red said sorrowfully. “I don’t want to leave you.” Puss looked Red squarely in the eyes.

“Today I repay my debt.” the Spanish feline said. Red, understanding, nodded and took off down a hall with his friends. Puss distracted the knights by whipping out his cute eyes routine before engaging in a swordfight, outclassing them rather effortlessly.

As for the sticks, they navigated the maze of corridors to reach the courtyard where Candy, Charming, and Fairy Godmother were just as the fairy was wrapping up her song. When the eight sticks burst through the door, they got everyone’s attention.

“You…” Red seethed, pointing at Fairy Godmother. “You’re going down.”

“You’re too late, Red. Candy is Charming’s.” Fairy Godmother scoffed. Red turned and saw Charming pull Candy in for a kiss.

“No!” Red exclaimed. However, before anything could happen, Candy used her speed to break away from Charming’s grip and gave him a roundhouse kick in the face, knocking him out cold.

“Not. Gonna. Happen.” Candy said to Charming’s body. “Red taught me that move.” She then turned to the Squad. “Guys! You’re here! And… you brought a lion?”

“It’s King.” King explained. “Don’t ask me how it happened, because I don’t know.”

“It’s his love for his kids shining through, his ‘final form’ of sorts.” SC explained. “It looks like I’m not the only one with hidden powers.” Candy then glanced at Red and Gold.

“And Red? Gold? Wow, you two…” Candy gasped.

“Well, Red and I drank a magic potion, and now…” Gold squealed excitedly, “we’re handsome! Not to mention we’re literally shining like precious metals!”

“I did it for you, Candy.” Red replied. “I never would’ve imagined you solid-colored, but… wow, you’re still amazing.” The Fairy Godmother, however, was furious.

“Don’t you know… Stripes don’t live happily ever after!” She shouted, powering up her wand, about to shoot a burst of magic from it.

“Guys, move! MOVE!” Red ordered. The Squad didn’t need to hear anything more. They scattered in all directions, managing to avoid Fairy Godmother’s blast.

“A magic wielder, huh?” Blue muttered. “You’re not the only one who has potions.” He whipped out several potions from his inventory and tossed them to his friends: Speed, strength, resistance, the Squad was now enhanced with different things.

“Thanks, Blue!” Yellow called, whipping a sword out. “Now, let’s show her our happily ever after.”

“She’s not the only one who can fly.” Purple added. “Dad, Gold, I have a plan. Dad, you got a Strength potion, right?”

“Yeah, Blue got it for me.” King confirmed.

“Perfect. Gold and I got speed. OK, here’s what we’re gonna do.” He quickly explained his plan to the other Tangos, and they agreed to it. Purple put his wings on and floated into the air. Gold joined him up there as well with his own wings from the potion.

“Don’t think I’m letting you have all the fun, little brother!” Gold exclaimed.

“Just be careful up there, kids!” King called. “I’m not losing you!”

“We’re not losing anyone, King.” Green assured him. “Not as long as I have music in my lungs, dude.”

Green sang a few notes, launching them like projectiles at Fairy Godmother. She dodged and retaliated with more magic blasts from her wand. Purple and Gold proved to be a worthy distraction, though, allowing SC to regroup with the two red sticks.

“Red, Candy, how did the heroes win?” SC asked desperately.

“King Harold sacrificed himself and deflected her magic back at her.” Red explained.

“But that wasn’t without consequences.” Candy added. “Harold turned into a frog, but there has to be a way of getting around that…”

“Wait… How did Harold reflect it?” SC wondered. “It was a chestplate, right?” Red suddenly understood what SC was getting at.

“I got chestplates in my inventory.” Red exclaimed. “Get these to the guys! Quick! But don’t put them on. It’s time for some sort of UNO Reverse Card or something like that.”

“Got it.” SC acknowledged, breaking for the others, but as it turned out, he didn’t need to. Purple and Gold were floating around with their newfound speed like flies, irritating Fairy Godmother and distracting her.

“Enough!” She shouted. “None of you are getting a happily ever after!” She exclaimed. She charged her wand again, only for King to pounce at her from behind and pin her down, stealing the wand with his lion tail. Fairy Godmother was stuck, pinned to the ground by King’s strike, before he picked up Fairy Godmother with one paw and transferred the wand from tail to his free paw. He pulled her close and got face-to-face with her.

“You know, I’ve learned that anyone can have a happy ending.” King growled, his fangs bared, his usually lively voice about as menacing and vicious as the Wolf’s. “My sons are proof of that, but you… You’re not getting that. Anyone who messes with my family doesn’t deserve a Happily Ever After.”

He tossed Fairy Godmother into the air and zapped her with a blast from the wand, causing her to spin backwards in midair. She regained her balance and floated in midair for a brief moment before suddenly turning into a bunch of bubbles, some of which burst in the air, others floated harmlessly to the ground and popped upon impact. There was nothing left of her, aside from her glasses and the wand, still in King’s powerful paw. King snapped the wand in half, rendering it useless, and dropped it onto the ground. The rest of the Squad, along with Candy, gathered around King.

“We did it!” Gold celebrated. “We defeated another villain!”

“Are you OK, King?” SC asked gently. “I mean… You did that.”

“She’s just a fictional character.” King assured him, shrugging, his voice back to normal. “I would never do that to anyone in real life.”

“Unless they mess with us.” Purple added. “You hold nothing back when it comes to our safety.”

“That is true, kiddo.” King confirmed, pulling both his sons in close.

“Hey! Watch the claws, Dad!” Gold said, chuckling.

“Sorry, Goldy.” King laughed, kissing both of his sons on the head. “I love you two.”

“We love you too, Dad.” Purple and Gold replied in unison.

“You know, I could get used to being the King of the Beasts.”

“You are definitely epic, bro, in your lion form.” Green complimented.

“And just ponder what this means for the scientific community.” Yellow considered. “I mean, stick-animal hybrids! If we could harness this, who could imagine the impossible tasks we could perform!” Blue gave him a joking jab in the gut.

“Ignore my bestie, King, he’s got his priorities mixed up.” Blue said, laughing. Yellow chuckled as well. During their reunion, Puss joined them.

“I seem to have missed the excitement, mis amigos.” He said. He then noticed Candy. “Señorita,” he tipped his hat to her.

“Nice to meet you, Puss.” Candy replied. “Or remeet you, I guess.” She added under her breath.

At that moment, the clock in the courtyard struck midnight, reminding Puss of the potion Red and Gold drank.

“Boss! The potion!” Puss shouted. Red exhaled sharply.

“It’s now or never.” He realized, looking at Candy. “Candy, is this what you want? I can be everything you want, you can be free of the stripes. All you have to do is join me in a hug. If you want it… that is.” Candy paused to think it over.

“You know, looking at your new look, and mine, a part of me wants nothing more than to stay like this…” Candy confessed. Red extended his arms, but Candy stopped him. “But like it or not, my stripes are a part of who I am, and if I could, I want to spend the rest of this adventure with the gem of a person who saved my life. And he doesn’t need to shine on the outside when his heart shines through from the inside.”

Red smiled at her, tears filling his eyes, and Candy smiled back, tearing up as well. As the clock approached its twelfth chime, the two of them, and Gold, began levitating and shining in a bright yellow light. Despite Gold’s disappointed protests, the three of them slowly, bit by bit, returned to their old selves as the potion effects wore off. Red’s shiny, gleaming color returned to his original, duller red, Candy’s stripes returned, and Gold’s wings slowly disappeared, his shade returning to normal. They then slowly descended and landed on the ground, albeit Gold less gracefully than the red sticks. King and Purple rushed to his aid.

“Goldy!” King exclaimed, helping him up. “Are you OK?”

“I’m fine, Dad, I’m fine.” Gold said, rising. “Aww, no more wings. Well, it was fun.”

“I’m sure you’ll get more chances to fly.” Purple promised him. Gold smiled back and the three Tangos hugged each other.

As for Red and Candy, they were perfectly fine. Better than fine, they were back to normal. The two of them hugged and were soon swarmed by the rest of the Gang, who also embraced them.

“It’s good to see you again, Candy.” Red said. “It’s so, so good.”

“I’m glad to see you as well, Reddy Bear,” Candy complimented. “I love you, my dear friend, my brave Red-scuer.” Red blushed a bright pink, the brightest shade anyone might’ve seen from him.

“I love you too, my dear, dear friend, the sweetest girl I’ve ever met.” Red gushed sweetly. Candy blushed, her white shining brighter and her red turning pink.

“Hey, isn’t we supposed to be having a fiesta?” Puss exclaimed.

The nine sticks, and Puss, partied the night away, celebrating another success. Puss and Green sang Livin’ La Vida Loca on stage together and everyone had a great time, even Red, who wasn’t distracted by lingering thoughts of his relationship with Candy. He pushed those aside and celebrated with his family, confident that, if nothing else, the two red sticks would stay close friends.

As the party wound down, the sticks suddenly found themselves barreling through a black hole through no fault of their own.

“What’s going on?” Blue yelled.

“We’re off to the next movie, I’d imagine!” SC exclaimed.

“I forgot this was a thing!” Green admitted.

“Where do you predict we’re headed?” Yellow asked.

“There’s no telling, Yellow.” Candy answered.

“The next movie chronologically is my guess.” Red figured. “We just finished Shrek 2, so…” He racked his brain, trying to figure out which villains they saw.

“No matter where we’re going, maybe we can use our wings to slow our fall!” Purple suggested.

“Good idea, kiddo.” King complimented, putting his wings on. “It’s worth a shot, but there’s no stopping this descent.”

“Brace yourselves, guys!” Gold ordered. “Or not, if you’re like me. I see a light at the bottom of this hole!”

“Here we goooooooooooooooooo!” Red yelled. They all braced themselves for impact, flapping their elytra frantically before they hit the ground.

Gold was the first to wake up, rubbing his sore head, and Red soon did the same. They examined their surroundings, soon realizing they were in a forest at night, a half-moon shining in the sky illuminating their surroundings, and then saw each other.

“You OK, Goldy?” Red asked.

“I’m fine, but where are we?” Gold asked.

“It looks like… a forest.” He looked around. His friends were lying on the ground around him, still breathing, but a bit woozy. “Let’s wake up the others. I think I know what movie we’re in.”

The two of them didn’t need to do that, and the others arose almost immediately after. They were unharmed, if only a little dazed from the fall.

“Dad, you’re back to normal.” Purple noticed. King examined himself.

“You’re right, my little Prince.” King replied. “I just hope I never have to unlock my lion form again.” Gold overheard this and asked about it.

“Why? I thought your lion form was growing on you.” He figured.

“It was, but if I have to see you and Purple in grave danger to unlock the lion, then I’d be happy if he never shows up again.” King explained.

“Aww, I love you too.” Purple said, hugging his father.

Red then clapped his hands to get everyone’s attention, and once the Squad had their attention on him, Red updated everyone on their status, where they were and what movie they were in.

“My dear family, after a solid investigation, I believe that… We’re in Over the Hedge.” He explained. “It looks like early spring, and the empty log is a big giveaway. Is everyone here?”

“Uhh… Where’s Blue?” Yellow asked, concerned. He looked around, but didn’t see him. He wasn’t there with them. “Oh no… My bestie! True Blue!” Panic welled up in the usually mellow Yellow.

“Blue!” SC called. “Blue? He wouldn’t wander off.”

“Was he with us when we arrived?” Red wondered.

“I don’t recall ever seeing the dude.” Green confessed.

“Oh no…” Candy said, worried. “What happened to Blue?”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Back in the Hall of Villains, another meeting was assembled with the DreamWorks antagonists that were still remaining. The Boss was seated at his throne, whistling a familiar, spine-tingling tune as the other villains trembled in fear.

“Bring me Fairy Godmother!” the Boss growled. She slowly flew in front of the Boss.

“Sir, please, there were too many of them.”

“I don’t want excuses… I want results!” He ordered, furiously pounding his fist on the arm of his throne. “A magical fairy with both deception and magic powers can’t even handle nine stick figures. You’re not living up to your reputation, Godmother.”

“I don’t know what happened… The tall one… He turned into a lion… He… He…”

“Enough!” The Boss thundered, his voice so loud the room shook. He pulled out his blade and wiped a red stain off of it with the inside of his cloak. “You may go. Get out of my sight… And prepare for the hunt.”

Terrified, the Fairy Godmother flew off.

“Magic is overrated anyway.” The Boss muttered. “It’s no substitute for good, old-fashioned muscle. Vincent!” The Boss demanded. The massive black bear stepped forward. The Boss locked his piercing red eyes with Vincent’s. “You know, Vincent, I am a bear person. You and I are pretty similar, after all: You have a major beef with the main character and desire nothing more than to kill them. You also don’t have much screen time, but you make the most of it when you do show up. Because of these factors, I’ll be joining you.”

“Sir… You’re coming with me?” Vincent asked.

“Yes.” The Boss snarled, rising from his throne and pulling his hood down, revealing his wolf head and a pair of ruby red eyes. “But first, let me finish my newest hunt. I’ll be down there shortly. I intend on torturing them, especially this one,” He pointed at a dull-yellow circle marked on his crescent-shaped blade. “The arrogant little showboat… Such a careless way he lives, no regard for me. It’s time I instilled the fear of Death into him.” He chuckled evilly. “But for now… It’s time for me to show the Fairy Godmother how to disappear… permanently.” He took off for the hunt of Fairy Godmother, with Gold soon to be next.

Chapter 14: Poking the Bear (Blue)

The guys and I flew through the black hole, and eventually, I landed on the ground hard. I wasn’t hurt, just a little sore and woozy. I got up and found myself at a sort of empty convenience store on the side of a desolate road, a small toy golf bag next to me. Across the road was a massive rocky hill, I would call it a mountain, but this wasn’t big enough to call it that. However, that wasn’t my biggest concern. It was the others I was worried about.

“SC?” I called. “Red? Green? … Yellow? My bestie?”

I saw no trace of them. Nor the Tangos. Nor Candy. I was alone in the middle of seemingly nowhere in a place I was totally unfamiliar with.

“Where’s Red when you need him?” I asked. “He could tell me where I am or what to do. OK, calm down, Blue. You can come up with something… Maybe the bag has something.”

I checked the bag and found random toys: a paddleball paddle, a dinosaur head clacky toy, a boomerang, a few quarters, a DVD, a troll doll, nothing I thought could help me. What I found weird was the fact that these toys were massive, relatively speaking. It made me wonder if I was in a land of giants or if I had somehow shrunk to the size of an animal or something. But I had bigger problems. I had to find the others.

As I racked my brain for a game plan, a light turned on behind me. I turned and there before me was a vending machine, somehow still working. Even better, there was one single bag of nacho cheese chips still inside. It felt like I hadn’t eaten in a while, and for confirmation of this, I heard my stomach growl. I was hungry, really hungry. Even better, the bag was about the size of me, at least judging from my lower vantage. I had to try. I had a few quarters after all.

I flew up to the coin slot, deposited the quarters, and selected the bag, only for my number one pet peeve to happen: The bag got stuck.

“Ugh, who makes vending machines so narrow, anyway?” I muttered angrily. “Maybe I can get it down.”

I tried the various objects in the golf bag, trying to reach it and pull it down, or perhaps knock it loose from its predicament, but nothing seemed to free it. All I was able to do was turn the lights in the machine off, revealing a reflection of a cave behind me in the dim light of the half-moon. I turned and saw the cave far above me.

“I’d hate to meet whoever’s in there.” I said to myself. “It’s best if I follow the road. Perhaps I can find civilization, or–even better–the guys.”

I slung the golf bag over my shoulder, approached the road and put my elytra on, but before I took off, I smelled something.

Something familiar…

Something succulent…

Something oh, so tasty…

Something I cannot live without…

“Is that… what I think it is?” I gasped. “There’s no way… Where’s it coming from?”

I followed the trail of the sweet, sweet aroma and followed it to the cave, promptly seeing the warnings of bears in the area. If the signs weren’t enough, then the bear claws scarring them were almost enough to put me off, but my stomach overrode my head’s judgment with another loud growl. I was starving, and with nothing but potions, glass bottles, my elytra, and various tools and weapons in my inventory, I craved sustenance.

After chugging a Night Vision potion, yes I know how to make those, I cautiously stepped into the cave, and in the back was a massive stash of… Netherwart… along with a red wagon in front of it. There must’ve been stacks and stacks of the stuff piled into a mound illuminated like a singer on a stage. It was right there… The only thing stopping me was a massive bear in front of me. Thankfully, it was sleeping, which gave me the opportunity to chow down.

I gently flew over the bear and landed in front of the treasure trove, promptly stuffing my face with what Green calls, “Drugs.” They aren’t drugs, they have no side effects. Regardless, I stuffed myself until I was satisfied. I turned to leave, but seeing the massive pile still there… I couldn’t help myself. I don’t usually do stuff like this, but when it comes to Netherwart, there’s no limit to the things I won’t do.

‘Just take what you need.’ I thought. However, my inventory was like my belly at the time: Completely full. However, I soon thought of a way to slip away with the bounty, with help from the wagon. I poured a levitation potion onto the wagon, making it rise into the air, hooked it with a fishing rod and pulled it toward the cave entrance like a balloon. When the levitation potion was about to wear off, I hit it with a slow falling potion, allowing it to softly fall to the ground. With the wagon situation handled, I piled all the Netherwart I could grab onto it, managing to get practically all of it onto the wagon, tying it down with fishing rods.

I had done it. I had managed to pull off the greatest Netherwart heist yet. I pumped my fist in celebration, extremely proud of myself. As I turned to leave, however, I knocked an empty bottle, the Night Vision potion I chugged, and it fell with a soft “clink.” Somehow, that woke the bear up. He stared at me with wide eyes, and I froze in place.

“Blue?” The bear asked.

“Uh… No…” I answered.

“Wait… The moon’s not full yet.” The bear noted, squinting. “You woke me up a week early?” He turned to me and must’ve noticed the missing Netherwart. “Don’t tell me you’re dumb enough to actually try and steal from me. Blue, I’m gonna have to kill you.”

“Please, I’m just trying to feed my family.” I pleaded.

“You don’t have a family.”

“I meant myself.” I lied, not wanting this bear to hunt the others as well. “But, uh… I still have it on me, so it’s not stolen…” I chuckled nervously, backing myself into the wagon, accidentally bumping it.

“Oh no!” The bear winced, I tried stopping the wagon, but I couldn’t reach it. It clanged down the hill, the slow-falling potion having worn off, and eventually rolled to a stop in the middle of the road. From afar, the wagon and its contents seemed to be completely unharmed, thankfully. The bear and I chuckled.

“That was close!” I laughed, before the worst possible thing happened. An 18-wheeler truck plowed through the wagon, absolutely annihilating it and the Netherwart on it.

“NOOO!” I yelled. Never before have I seen so much deliciousness, so much succulent goodness decimated in such a small amount of time. I think I even felt a tear roll down my face, but the bear was having none of it. He tried smashing me, but I escaped, fleeing in terror out of the cave and across the street, but he stopped me and grabbed me by the head with his massive claws. He opened his jaw, and considering how humongous he was, he could’ve swallowed me whole, used me as a toothpick, something like that. Panicked, I had to do something.

“Wait! Wait! I can get it all back!” I shouted. The bear paused and raised an eyebrow, intrigued. “Yeah, I can get it back for you rather than you foraging for it yourself.”

“Hmm…” The bear considered. “All my stuff?”

“And then some! Ow…” I winced as the bear gripped my head even tighter with his massive claws.

“A red wagon?”

“Can do!” I insisted, not fully sure how I could get a wagon, but I wasn’t in a position to negotiate.

“A blue cooler?”

“Blue cooler, can deliver!” I replied.

“It has to be blue, as well as Spuddies! I love those things… Because with a Spuddie, enough just isn’t enough…”

“So true! So, so true!” I agreed, not fully sure what a “Spuddie” was, but I was in the grip of a massive bear. “Uh… Quick question… How much food do you want?”

“Replace everything you stole… and what got destroyed.” The bear answered tersely. I was astounded.

“What?”

“You heard me.”

“OK! OK! I’ll get it for you!” I gasped.

“OK, Blue, I’m going back to sleep now. When that moon is full, I’m waking up, and all of my stuff had better be right back where it was.”

“In that little time? That’s, like, a week! That’s-” I was cut off when he squeezed my head tighter. “Perfect! Absolutely perfect! I’ll deliver it!”

“Full moon. And don’t even think of running away because if you do, I will hunt you down and kill you.” The bear growled, tossing me like a ragdoll onto the ground. He returned to the cave.

“OK, OK you got it!” I called after him. “You know, soon we’ll be laughing about this!” I chuckled, trying to lighten the mood, but it was clear what I had gotten myself into. I sighed deeply, leaned against the vending machine and bonked my head against it, the bag of chips falling on cue.

“Stupid chips.” I muttered as I grabbed it and stuffed it into the golf bag. “OK, I got a massive debt to pay and I have no idea where my friends are. Should I be dragging them into this? Heh, knowing Red, he already knows what’s going on. Now all I gotta do is find them.”

I slung the bag over my shoulder and raced into the road, looking for any scraps, anything I could use to better my situation, but the Netherwart, the wagon, everything was flatter than a pancake. Emotionally devastated, I put my wings on and flew over the road, following it toward what I hoped would be civilization, and my friends. If they were OK, perhaps they could help me with my problem. Plus, I needed some comfort after what happened, a heavy weight fell on my heart from seeing my sweet, sweet Netherwart get flattened.

As I flew, following the road, I stumbled upon a massive billboard showing off a new suburban complex a few miles away. I stopped and read the sign, soon getting excited.

“Civilization!” I said to myself. “I can get everything I need there and fly it back! Maybe the guys are over there as well. I got no other leads, after all.” I shrugged and took off, and as dawn started to break, I found it. The suburban complex that was advertised on the billboard. I squinted at it, shielding my eyes from the rising sun, and resumed my flight, flying lower to hopefully find the guys sooner… or for them to see me. Considering my shade was so similar to the sky, I feared I’d blend in with it too much, so I made sure to keep a sharp eye out for any trace of my rainbow-colored friends.

It took a little while, well into the morning as it turned out, but I caught a glimpse of a familiar shade of yellow below me.

“Yellow?” I wondered, lowering to the ground. I put my elytra away and called out. “Yellow?” I looked around for the source of the shade of yellow I saw.

“Blue?” I heard Yellow’s voice call. “True Blue?” I followed his voice, continuing to call his name until I found him.

“Mellow Yellow!”

“True Blue!” Yellow’s little-known nickname for me, it always gets a smile out of me. The two of us hugged each other, tears flowing down our faces. “I was so anxiety-induced! I feared you vanished and I would cease to locate you for eternity!”

“I missed you too, buddy.” I chuckled, a bit surprised to hear Yellow was worried, but I know well that he loves me dearly. “It’s so good to see you. Where are the others?”

“Pursue me, dear companion, they are located nearby.” Yellow ordered.

I did as told, thoughts flowing through my mind. I wondered how to tell him and the guys about my predicament with the bear. I had to tell them about it, right? Red probably already knew, but even if he didn’t, I should tell them regardless. They would be able to help, and besides, we’re a family. We don’t keep secrets from each other. It was settled. I was telling them, and I made up my mind just in time, too, as Yellow soon led me to the rest of the Squad.

Chapter 15: Run for It (Gold)

We looked around frantically and quickly realized that, yes, we were one man down. We were all looking especially worried, but none more than Yellow, which was a surprise to me. I’ve always known Yellow to be sensible and calm, the voice of reason, but now that Blue was missing, he seemed about as frantic as Red can be at times.

“Blue’s missing?” Yellow asked desperately. “What could’ve become of him?”

“Calm down, Yellow, panicking won’t help us.” Dad said soothingly. “Red, Candy, do you two have any ideas about where he could be?”

“Let me think…” Red said.

“If we’re in the forest…” Candy theorized. “Oh no… You don’t think Blue took on the role of RJ, do you, Red?”

“And we’re the forest animals?” Red considered. “Considering we have been the protagonists thus far in the two movies we’ve been in, that would make sense.”

“RJ?” SC asked. “Who might I ask is RJ?”

“Yeah, we aren’t all DreamWorks nerds like you two are.” Green jabbed. Yellow socked him in the arm.

“Get serious, #66CC00, my bestie is absent!”

“Wait, Yellow, what the heck did you just call him?” I asked.

“Yellow uses our Hex codes when he’s really stressed.” Purple explained. “It’s a coping mechanism of sorts, how he hides his true feelings.”

“Affirmative, AB0AA0. Who is this RJ?” Yellow asked.

“A raccoon that got caught stealing food.” Red answered slowly.

“From a bear named Vincent.” Candy added nervously.

“Whoa whoa whoa, hang on,” SC began, “Steal from a bear? Blue would never! I mean, he has an appetite, but he would never steal! Unless…” His voice trailed off.

“There’s no way he’d find Netherwart in the cave, though, right?” Dad wondered. He was well aware of Blue’s… addiction, and even though I’ve known him for a little over a month, I’ve seen it firsthand myself, too.

“I’ll be honest, guys, I’m not in control of this simulation.” Candy confessed. “It’s possible Vincent’s cave is filled with… whatever Netherwart is.”

“Blue’s favorite food.” Red answered.

“Nearly ended the world because of it.” Green joked. Dad and I glanced at each other, well aware of our roles in Dad’s descent into madness. “But that’s another story.”

“We must locate him! Quickly!” Yellow insisted, putting his wings on. The guys and I were quick to agree. We put our wings on and fanned out, looking high–and low in Candy’s case–for any trace of Blue, but we soon realized something: It was too dark to see anything, even with the dim light of the half-moon shining on us. After a few minutes of struggling to see our hands in front of us, we regrouped outside a hollow log.

“Guys, we can’t do this. It’s too dark.” I said remorsefully.

“As much as I hate to say it, I have to agree.” SC conceded.

“We must not ditch Blue!” Yellow protested. “He could be in peril… or worse…”

“Yellow, even I don’t know where Blue is.” Red admitted. “Assuming he is RJ, he’s on the side of a highway in the shade of a rocky mountain of sorts.”

“I don’t know how far away that is, Yellow.” Candy confessed. “I’m deeply sorry…”

“We’ll look for him in the morning, bro.” Green promised.

“King? Purple?” Yellow pleaded.

“We can barely see each other.” Purple said. “Finding Blue at this time of night is almost impossible.”

“I’m sure Blue will be fine. He’s a capable fighter and he’s armed with magic potions.” Dad assured him. “Maybe he’ll find us.”

“Fine!” Yellow said spitefully. “You all remain behind. I will search for Blue, all night if I must.”

With that, Yellow took off into the air. He’s resilient, I’ll give him that, but it was simply the dead of night and there was no chance we could find him, even with our phone flashlights. The forest was too dense to see much of anything. We silently wished Yellow the best, and we went to bed inside a nearby hollow log. It was rather late and we were all really tired, especially after partying all night in Far Far Away. Even despite the suboptimal “mattress,” I dozed off quickly and slept soundly.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We all woke up with the sun the next morning and stretched. Some of us were a little sore from the wooden bed we used, but when we remembered Blue was still missing, we knew what we had to do. With dawn breaking, it would be much easier to find him, but thankfully, Yellow found him first. He led Blue through the forest to our little clearing.

“Blue!” We exclaimed at once, racing over to him and hugging him. Blue hugged us back.

“It’s good to see you guys, too,” Blue said tearfully, “but right now… I’ve got a big problem.” We released him to listen.

“What is it, buddy?” Purple asked.

“If I had to guess, he has about this long to deliver a wagonload of food to a homicidal bear, and if Spuddies aren’t on the menu, then he will be.” Red theorized.

“Now let go of my tail!” Candy joked. Red smiled at her.

“You know the line?” Red asked.

“From easily the most underrated movie in DreamWorks’ arsenal? Of course.” Candy answered.

“Red’s right.” Blue confessed. “A bear wants a crap ton of food because he caught me in his stash of Netherwart, and I got until the next full moon to deliver it to him.”

“We’re willing to help you, Blue, if you need it.” SC said gently. Blue looked up at him.

“You’d do that?” He asked.

“What are friends for, bro?” Green asked. “Check that, what’s a family for?” He wrapped his arm around my younger brother.

“How do we go about it?” Dad asked.

“By going… over the hedge.” I answered. Purple chuckled.

“Shall we fly?” Purple asked.

“No, let’s wait until nighttime.” Red suggested. “I don’t think the people would appreciate nine sticks rummaging through their trash, especially if we are the forest animals that RJ stumbled upon in the movie. Once we get in our groove, we’ll get more aggressive.”

“Ya know, Red, if we are the animals, SC’s definitely Verne the Turtle.” Candy teased. “The overprotective leader.” Red laughed.

“And you’re definitely Hammy the Squirrel.” Red replied. “Super speed and all that.”

Once night fell, we flew over the titular hedge and raided various trash cans illuminated by the various porch lights of similar-looking houses. We didn’t find much outside of scraps and empty wrappers, but we found a few unopened packages of things, which delighted Blue, who was eager to pay off his debt. We gathered as much as we could that would fulfill Vincent’s demands and began filling up the log, slowly but surely, as much as we could before we overstepped our bounds.

“We hit the jackpot with this can, boys!” I exclaimed. “There’s so much here!”

“I agree, I can use most of this. Thanks, guys.” Blue said.

“You’re welcome, Blue.” Yellow replied, yawning.

“Yellow, when did you last sleep?” Purple asked, concerned.

“It’s been a few days at least.” SC figured.

“I’m amazed he still has energy.” Green admitted.

As we were raiding the cans, a cat popped out of his pet door and instantly spotted us.

“Halt! Intruders! Intruders!” The cat hissed. The cat’s owner, a well-dressed human named Gladys–as Red explained–stepped outside and saw us. She shrieked and grabbed a broom.

“Time to go!” Candy said, zipping away.

“I’m with you there!” Red agreed.

“Purple, Goldy, go! Go!” Dad exclaimed. He didn’t need to tell me twice. Purple and I were gone, barely managing to avoid Gladys’s swipes from her broom and returning to our side of the hedge. Once we made it to safety, we all took a minute to catch our breath.

“I guess we’re not welcome over there.” Blue admitted.

“Not by the original Karen.” Red joked.

“At least we didn’t get a chance to… Do the thing RJ suggested whenever spotted by a human.” Candy said discreetly.

“Which was…?” Yellow asked.

“You don’t want to know.” Red insisted. “You really don’t.”

“Let’s just get to bed for the night.” Dad suggested. “We’ve gathered a lot, and we still have six days. At this rate, we’ll have enough and then some.”

We all agreed and went to bed, the nine of us grabbed spots in the log and we soon dozed off, but I had no idea how restless the night would be.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I was woken up by what sounded like rustling coming from the hedge. Everyone else was sleeping, and I didn’t want to bother them, so I snuck out of the log, flashlight shining from my phone, wandered to my left and curiously poked around inside the hedge. I couldn’t find anything, so I stepped out of the hedge and gazed up at the sky. I saw a lovely crescent moon with stars scattered around it and breathed in the crisp air. It was kinda calming, to be honest.

And then I heard another rustling, and this time, it was louder and coming from my right. I turned around and checked another area of the hedge, but I still found nothing. A bit more creeped out, I began to return to the log, when I was frozen in my tracks by a whistle.

A familiar whistle.

It sent chills up my spine.

He was back.

The Wolf had found me yet again.

I looked at the moon, except it wasn’t a moon any more. It was the curved blade of the Wolf’s sickle. Four stars below it made the handle, and the Wolf himself grabbed it out of the sky like it was nothing. I felt my heartbeat race faster and faster again.

“You…” I gasped. The Wolf smelled the air again.

“I do love the smell of fear.” He inhaled sharply. “It’s intoxicating.” He put his sickle away underneath his cloak, staring at me with his ruby red eyes.

“How’d you even get here? How’d you find me?” I demanded, trying to sound brave, but inwardly, I was freaking out.

“One might say… No one can escape me.”

“You said something like that earlier. Why are you here?” I asked.

“Oh, Gold Tango… I have my reasons.”

“Reasons to kill me?!” I shouted. He said nothing in response, instead growling and leaning in closer, his red eyes only getting more and more intense as his gaze seemed to drill a hole through my stick body.

I was terrified. This dude had almost killed me once before, and now he was back. I was paralyzed with fear, but I needed to get help. Dad and the guys, they were here, maybe they could help me get out of here, or fight this beast off. The guys are powerful fighters. They could fend him off. Finally unfreezing, I retreated to the log, my heart still pounding out of my chest.

“Dad! DAD! We gotta get out of here! NOW!” I shouted, only to feel something cold and wet under my feet as I ventured deeper into it. I took a closer look and was just barely able to make out something red… a red liquid staining the leaves and ground, and no trace of the guys. I put two and two together. The Wolf had gotten to them first.

“Don’t bother, Gold.” The Wolf mocked from behind me. I turned around and saw his other blade glinting. I squinted and saw something on it, a deep red stain on it, along with eight circles etched into his blade, with each of my friends’ colors. “I already took care of them.”

“No… Dad… Purple…” I felt tears fill my eyes. “You monster!”

“Are you gonna fight?” The Wolf mocked heartlessly.

I wanted to fight.

I wanted to avenge my family…

But I had no weapon to fight with…

No friends to provide support…

No way to win.

I had to get out of here while I still could. I turned and raced through the log, tripping and nearly falling on my face, but that actually saved my life. The Wolf sliced the log in half from end to end, and if I hadn’t stumbled, I would’ve been dead. I quickly gathered myself, got up and sprinted as fast as I could into the forest, hoping the darkness could hide me.

“Go ahead, run for it.” The Wolf said. “Makes it more fun for me.”

I heard him snarl and take off after me. I desperately checked my inventory for something that could help and soon found my elytra. I had been in such a panic I forgot I even had it. I quickly put it on and tried flying away, but the Wolf grabbed my wings before I could get off the ground. Terrified, I ditched the wings and raced away.

As I ran, I heard it again…

The whistle.

The horrifying whistle.

He was hunting me down.

He was going to kill me.

I didn’t stop. I couldn’t stop. I was going to die, I knew it, I was a goner, but I had to try. I had to try to escape this dude, this Wolf, this murderer. I fled into the dense brush as far as I could, until I couldn’t run any more. I braced myself against the back of a tree to catch my breath. I wanted to glance behind me to see if I was still being followed, but I was too scared to do so. I had to. I had to know if I was safe. So I cautiously peeked out from behind the tree. I saw no sign of the Wolf and I breathed a sigh of relief.

“I lost him.” I whispered.

I was safe.

Or so I thought.

When I turned back around…

The Wolf was there.

He used his sickle to pin me against the tree, driving his blade mere centimeters from my neck. I was stuck in the open gap of his C-shaped blade, unable to move or fight back without my throat getting cut open.

“I’ve enjoyed the chase, Oro, but I think we’ve reached the end now, you and I.”

I couldn’t find the words to say. I was too terrified, afraid any word out of my mouth would cause the Wolf’s blade to slice my throat. That’s how close it was to my neck. I felt my heartbeat accelerating, and I didn’t know what was going to kill me first: The Wolf or the impending heart attack I was about to have. The Wolf chuckled.

“It’s about time you learned something.” He mocked, his red eyes growing wide and shining even brighter, as if he was savoring my torture. His lips curved into a sinister smile. “No matter how much you try, how far you run… Death catches up with everyone.”

I let out one final scream before he swiftly closed his blade on my throat…

Causing me to wake up.

Chapter 16: A Shaken Son (King)

I woke up with the sunrise the next morning. I never have been able to sleep much with the sun streaming in, illuminating my surroundings, and though I wanted to get some more sleep, I decided to get up. Blue was still in deep debt to Vincent the Bear and we needed all the time we could manage to gather enough food for him. I rose and met everyone else, except for Gold, outside the log, devising our next plan.

“Morning, kids.” I greeted them.

“Morning, King.” The kids said in unison.

“We were devising our next strategy for pilfering the treats.” Yellow explained.

“Red thinks we should be more aggressive, as per usual.” SC joked, rolling his eyes.

“To be fair, we don’t have time to play passively.” Red insisted. “Besides, the animals in the movie did the same.”

“He has a point, SC.” Candy agreed.

“And we’re burning daylight.” Green noted. “I suggest we get started ASAP, dudes.”

“I would agree, for my sake.” Blue confessed.

“Are you coming, Dad?” Purple asked.

“I haven’t had my morning coffee yet.” I said a little sleepily. Purple chuckled. “In all seriousness, I think I’ll hang back. Gold’s still sleeping and I figure he’ll want to join you guys once he awakens. I think you seven are capable of delivering a massive bounty.”

“What are you gonna do, Dad?” Purple asked.

“Might as well do a quick count of what we have thus far. Surely if we find enough, we should have extra for ourselves, and we can’t save a friend on an empty stomach.”

“Definitely agree.” Blue confirmed, his stomach growling. “Sorry, I haven’t had breakfast.”

“You and your appetite, Blue.” SC joked. We laughed.

“Oh, Dad, may I-” Purple began before I gently cut him off.

“Of course you can go with them.” I answered. “You’re such a blessing, my little Prince. Goldy would’ve just taken off.” Purple chuckled.

“You still love him, Dad.”

“I do, immensely so, but he’s a real handful, especially compared to you… But I wouldn’t have him any other way. He’s my Golden Boy, just as you’re my little Prince.” I gave Purple a quick noogie.

“Ow! Cut it out, Dad!” Purple laughed, pushing my hand away. The kids laughed.

“Have fun, kiddo. I love you.”

“Love you too, Dad.” Purple kissed me good-bye, put on his elytra, and he and the kids took off over the hedge to the suburban jungle. I waved them good-bye until they were out of sight.

“Time for a headcount on the stash we have.” I said to myself. I returned to our stash, grabbed a book and quill from my inventory and began jotting down notes, counting the items in the small stash we had. It was only going to get bigger, I knew it, but we already had a decent start, especially for dumpster diving our first night. I could only imagine the loot the kids were going to bring back, and a part of me hoped for someone to bring some coffee. I live off the stuff, albeit not to Blue’s Netherwart degree, but it is a great way to get me kickstarted every morning.

“Let’s see…” I muttered. “Five bags of chips, various granola bars, a couple of fiber brownies… Must’ve gotten old in the pantry.” I figured. “Half-empty bottles of water, sandwich halves… We got lots of old picnic stuff, too. We’re still lacking a can of Spuddies, though, and a lot of other things, but we’re off to a good start. Relatively speaking, I think.”

As I was wrapping up, I was caught by surprise when I heard a deafening scream coming from the log. I recognized it instantly, as any father should, because it was my son. Once the initial shock wore off, I bolted into the log and met Gold sitting up, though if he didn’t scream, I’m not sure I would’ve recognized him. His usually lovely yellow was replaced with a clean white, white as a ghostly picture of a polar bear on an iceberg during a January blizzard drawn in MS Paint. It was like all the blood had stopped circulating to the top half of his body, and I immediately became concerned for his health.

“Goldy! Are you OK? What happened?”

“Dad?” Gold asked, panting heavily, seemingly in a daze. “Is this… the afterlife?”

“What?” I asked, taken aback. “No, no, this is the log.”

“The log?” Gold repeated.

“Goldy, are you OK? Your lovely color is entirely gone.”

“I… I don’t know…” Gold admitted, his yellow shade slowly returning. “Where am I? Am I dead? Wait… How are you still alive, Dad?”

“Alive? Gold, why wouldn’t I be?”

“B- B- Because! The Wolf! H- He was here! He killed you all!” Gold gasped. “Wait… Where are the guys?” He sat upright quickly and bolted, blowing past me out of the log. “Red? SC? Yellow?” He called. “Purple? My baby brother?” I ran up to him, and he spun around, tears filling his eyes. “Where are they, Dad?? What happened to them?!? Are they…?”

“Shhhhhh… Gold, calm down…” I said soothingly, seating him down on the soft grass. I sat with him. “They’re not dead, they’re just gathering food on the other side of the hedge, I promise. Now… Can you tell me what happened to you? You saw the Wolf?”

“Yes!” Gold insisted rapidly. “He was here! He- He hid in the hedge and grabbed the moon and it was his sickle and killed you all and… and…”

“Shhhhh…” I hushed him soothingly, slowly realizing I hadn’t lost my little Golden Boy, he was still the same little kid from his youth. I hugged him and rubbed my hand up and down his back in an attempt to calm him. He hugged me back. “Goldy, it was just a nightmare. It’s not real. The Wolf isn’t here. You’re safe.”

“I saw him, though! It felt… so real… I- I thought I lost you…”

“My sons seem to have a knack for having realistic dreams,” I noted. “It’s not real, Goldy, it’s not real. It’s just a nightmare.”

“But the Wolf! He’s still after me!” Gold exclaimed.

“He won’t get to you, not if I have anything to say about it.” I promised. “You’ll be OK, Goldy, you’ll be OK.”

“I’m going to die, Dad!” Gold cried, weeping into my side. “I can’t lose you and Purple. I don’t want to lose you. You mean so much to me.”

“Oh, Goldy, my dear dear son…” I said, starting to cry myself. “You won’t lose us, I promise. This Wolf doesn’t win, he won’t win, he has been defeated already.”

“How do you even know this? You’ve seen the movie?”

“Once or twice, yeah.” I confessed.

“So… How does the hero survive?” Gold asked, desperation in his bright yellow eyes. “How does he defeat the Wolf? And, while we’re at it, what does the Wolf want with him?”

“Red probably has a better answer to that, kiddo. I’m sure he’ll give them to you when he returns.” I replied. “But listen to me, Goldy. It’ll be OK, I promise. I will fight for you with every breath I have, and Purple will as well.”

“I can’t put you two at risk because of me.”

“You’re not. You’re part of this family, and that’s what family does for each other. We love each other, and greater love has no one than this: to lay down one’s life for one’s friends. I’d be willing to do that if it meant keeping you safe.”

“Dad… I can’t let you do that.” Gold insisted.

“I know where I’m going if worst comes to worst.” I assured him.

“The void?”

“Paradise.” I corrected. “Eternity with the God I serve.”

“Oh yeah. I forgot you’re religious now.”

“Yep. But religion or not, there’s one thing I promise you… my Golden Boy.”

“What’s that?”

“I will do whatever it takes to protect you, and I won’t ever lose you… Not without a fight.”

“But… the guys…” Gold wondered.

“I’m sure they’d say the same thing.” I figured. “You can ask them once they return.”

“Yeah… I will… Thanks, Dad. For everything.”

“You’re welcome, Goldy. I love you.” I kissed him on the head, he kissed me back.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The kids soon returned with a massive stash of food on a red wagon. I was amazed, but impressed. Soon enough, Blue would be free of his debt, but it was more Gold I was concerned about. I knew he wanted answers, mostly about the Wolf, and I knew Red would have all the answers. He’s crazy about The Last Wish, and I figured he would be able to shed some light on our situation. As I approached, I overheard them high-fiving and congratulating themselves.

“Did you see me?” Candy gushed. “I was a crazy rabbit squirrel!”

“You were really hamming it up in your role, Candy.” Red admitted.

“And you were Stellar!” Candy joked. Red gave her a look.

“Wait… Are you calling us skunks?”

“Nope. Just you.” She teased. Red gave her a soft sock in the arm.

“Wait, Candy, did you just utter ‘rabbit’ squirrel?” Yellow asked. “Because the term is ‘rabid,’ not ‘rabbit.’”

“I live with two Killer Bunnies.” Candy stated bluntly. “Rabid, rabbit, it’s all the same to me.”

“Ugh, the grammarian in me is going berserk at this moment in time.” Yellow muttered.

“Great haul, guys!” Blue proclaimed. “Some more stashes like this and we’ll… er, I’ll… be off the hook in no time.”

“Anything for a brother.” SC replied.

“Shall we head out for another trip?” Green asked.

“I’m down.” Purple answered before noticing me. “Dad?”

“Hey, kids.” I greeted them. “Before you guys go, Red, Candy, do you two have a minute?”

“Sure. What's up, King?” Red asked.

“It’s Gold. He had a nightmare last night… about Death. The character, to be clear. I figured you two would be able to comfort him.”

“Us?” Candy asked. “Why us?”

“He wants to know more about the Wolf. His motivation, his defeat, that sort of thing.” I explained. “You know more about it than I do, Red.”

“King… I’m honored, but… I’m just not sure what I could do that you couldn’t.” Red admitted.

“You can answer his questions better than I. He’s your favorite character in all of fiction, after all.” I said. “Could you?”

“I’m willing to try.” Red promised. “Guys? Do you need me?”

“We can handle ourselves, Reddy Bear.” SC assured him. “We got a great stash already. We can get even more!”

“Hold on, Dad, I’m coming with you.” Purple insisted. “If I had known about this, I would’ve stayed behind. I’m sorry.”

“It’s not your fault, Purple.” I assured him before turning to the others. “Thanks, kids. Gold’s back at the log.” I led Red, Purple, and Candy back while Yellow, Blue, Green, and SC took off over the hedge to gather more stuff. “The whole experience has left him quite shaken… It seems like he’s legitimately afraid of the Wolf, and I can’t bear to see him so… fearful.” I explained. “It’s not who he is, and he’s but a shell of his lively, energetic self.”

“He’ll be OK.” Candy assured me. “He just needs a little therapy dog from Reddy Bear here.” Red laughed.

“I’m no Perrito.”

“Sweet, kind, pure-hearted, and a furry?” Candy asked. “Yep, you’re Perrito.” Purple and I giggled.

“Hey, I’m not a furry!” Red protested, giving Candy a playful shove. “I simply love animals more than… most anything else…”

“Like I said, furry.” Candy teased. Red rolled his eyes, but he couldn’t help but smile.

“Careful, Candy. This puppy bites back.” Red jokingly threatened. Candy snickered.

“Hey, Candy, remind me to tell you about what Red did for me after Gold came home.” Purple said quietly. “More fuel to the ‘furry’ fire.” He giggled. Candy nodded OK and we soon reached Gold. He was ecstatic to see us.

“Purple!” Gold exclaimed, rising and throwing his arms around him. “I’m so glad to see you!”

“Wait, Gold? Is that you?” Purple joked. “You never greet me like this.”

“I had a long night.” Gold admitted. “Red, Candy, I’m glad to see you.”

“Your dad told us that you had a nightmare.” Red confessed. Gold shuddered.

“It was the worst thing I’ve ever experienced…” Gold admitted. “Well, one of the worst. Red, you have to tell me, is that really the personification of Death itself?”

“Yes. Yes it is.” Red answered tersely.

“I half-thought you were joking when you said it. What am I supposed to think when you talk like Yellow for a second?” Gold said, chuckling before getting serious again. “So, what does he want with me specifically?”

“In the movie, Death was after the main hero, Puss in Boots, for carelessly tossing away his first eight lives.” Candy explained.

“You know how Puss is a cat, and cats have nine lives.” Red added. “Well, he burned through his first eight and Death assumed that he wasn’t worthy of living out his last life.”

“But Gold isn’t like that, is he?” Purple asked.

“No! I’m not careless like that!” Gold protested.

“Gold, don’t lie to them.” I said tersely. “I have a laundry list of stories from your youth. Need I spill them in depth?”

“No…” Gold answered sheepishly. “Dad’s right. I live life on the edge, dangerously, and a number of my stunts should’ve killed me. I don’t need you reminding me, Dad.”

“I didn’t think so.” I said smartly.

“That’d definitely make you a target for the Wolf.” Red noted, nodding. “He doesn’t appreciate arrogant little legends who think they’re immortal.”

“But Gold’s not arrogant, is he?” Candy asked.

“Goldy?” Purple asked gently. Gold sighed deeply.

“I have a love for adrenaline, for thrills, for adventure. Is that a bad thing?” Gold protested.

“There’s nothing wrong with that,” I assured him, “in fact, your thrill-seeking nature is what I love about you. But there’s a fine line between being adventurous and being reckless. Mountain climbing, for example, is adventurous and many people do it on a yearly basis. Mountain climbing without proper equipment, however, is reckless and will, most likely, end badly.”

“Sounds like how Puss died the first time.” Red observed. “He stopped during a Running of the Bulls to flirt with someone.”

“That’s recklessness.” I added. “And you do your stunts with no second thought for the consequences. Running away from home… the hang gliding incident… jumping off the roof with an umbrella and attempting to float down… Need I go on?”

“No…” Gold admitted sheepishly. “Though to be fair, I was six when I did the umbrella thing.”

“Is it possible that… While you think you’re living life to the fullest… You’re almost throwing it away?” Candy wondered gently. Gold looked up at us with tear-stained eyes. I sat down next to him and rubbed his back to console him.

“You can still live adventurously, Goldy, even if you have taken several years off my life doing so.” I said. Gold chuckled. “But life’s a lot more than the adventures we go on… It’s also the friends we make and the family we build along the way. If you ask me, that’s one of many things that makes life worthwhile.”

“We love ya, Goldy.” Red said, throwing his arms around Gold. Purple, Candy, and I followed suit, and Gold hugged as back, tears flowing down his face.

“Thanks, guys.” He said tearfully before releasing us. “You’d… fight for me, right? Even against the Wolf?”

“With every breath in my body, brother.” Purple promised. We also nodded in agreement.

“We all will, we promise you that.” I added. “We’re a family. Nothing will separate us.”

“This whole thing, though, makes me wonder…” Red said thoughtfully.

“About what, Reddy Bear?” Candy asked.

“If Death is after Gold for nearly escaping him numerous times…” Red began, “I fear he’s hunting all of us. The guys and I have eluded death numerous times, and if nine lives are considered absurd to the inevitable Wolf… Imagine how he feels about infinite respawns.” He turned to the striped stick. “I fear this isn’t a simulation any more, Candy. This might be a matter of life and literal Death.”

We all gasped, surprised, but I had to say something in response, if only to reassure my Golden Boy.

“Kids… We will escape this, I promise you all… and no Wolf is going to tell me otherwise.” I swore. “That Wishing Star will soon be ours, and we’ll get out of here… or I’ll die trying.”

“Dad, we’re not losing you.” Purple promised. “Either we’re all getting out… or none of us are.”

“I’m with my baby bro.” Gold added, garnering a look from Purple. “I know you guys have done incredible things. How about we do another one?”

“There’s the Goldy I know and love.” I praised. “Fearless… Overly fearless, might I add. Kids, we’re going home. No matter how long it takes… no matter what dangers we go through, no matter what villains we face! We’re going home.”

Chapter 17: The Verminator (The Second Coming)

After King called Red and Candy to talk with Gold, Blue, Green, Yellow, and I took off over the hedge to gather another load of food to pay off Blue’s debt. As I was flying, however, a thought struck me. Were we doing the right thing? Was I being an example, the leader I should be to the guys? We’re stealing from these people. That’s not right. There had to be a different way of going about this. I couldn’t shake the thought, so I spoke up about it.

“Guys… What are we doing?” I asked.

“What do you mean, bro?” Green asked.

“Are you guys sure we should be doing this? I mean, we’re stealing from these people!”

“Trust me, SC, I’d like nothing more than to find some other solution to this problem,” Blue confessed, “but as far as I can tell, there isn’t any way of doing that.”

“Recall we’re taking on the roles of the forest animals in this universe, as Red explained.” Yellow pointed out. “I don’t believe the humans would appreciate several animals strolling into a general store asking for a plethora of unhealthy foods just because one of us made an enemy out of a massive, bloodthirsty ursus.”

“Not to mention these are all movie characters.” Green added. “They’re literal NPCs. They’re not real. They won’t mind.”

“So… in that case… the bear, Vincent, isn’t real either, right?” I figured.

“He definitely was, SC.” Blue disagreed vehemently. “He picked me up by the head, could’ve swallowed me whole. Phlox, he almost did.”

“Not to mention we need to play through the events of each cinema to escape this virtual prison.” Yellow added. “Red explained as much, this is how the cinema goes.” I sighed deeply.

“Do you have a better idea, bro?” Green asked. I paused for a long moment before I shook my head no.

“If we are the animals, then yes, our options are limited.” I confessed. “There isn’t any other choice.”

“To be honest, SC, this isn’t the time to grow a conscience.” Blue reprimanded. His tone took me by surprise. “My life is at stake here! Maybe even all of ours. If I can’t deliver this payment, then I’m getting used as a toothpick.”

“And who’s fault is that?” I snapped back. “If not for your addiction, you wouldn’t have found yourself in this mess!”

“Whoa whoa whoa, it’s not an ‘addiction.’” Blue said angrily. “It’s a high dependence!”

“Whatever you want to call it, we all know what it truly is: Something else that is nearly going to get us killed!”

“SC, Blue, cease!” Yellow shouted, floating between us. “You two are behaving more immaturely than Red and Gold in a typical, 24-hour period.”

“I agree, now is not the time to be at each other’s throats.” Green said. “We can’t change the rules of this twisted game, just play along with it.” I looked at Blue’s eyes and my anger suddenly dissipated.

“I apologize, Blue. I don’t know what came over me.” I confessed.

“I’m sorry too, buddy. I’m just… a little wound-up, that’s all.” Blue admitted. “You would be too if you were me.” I chuckled.

“Let’s put that behind us and just focus on the task at hand… No matter how sketchy it is.” I offered.

“Agreed.” Blue said, nodding.

“And I believe I have located our next target.” Yellow said, squinting through his glasses. “Blue cooler strapped to the top of a minivan at our 9:54 and growing closer to our location.”

“We need a blue cooler, right?” Green asked.

“Yes. Vincent made that clear.” Blue answered.

“If we’re the animals in this movie…” I considered, “then it’s time for one of us to play possum.”

“I see what you’re hinting at, SC.” Yellow said, nodding. “One of us will play the role of a decoy while the other trio will pilfer the cooling unit upon that minivan.”

“I got slabs in my inventory, bros.” Green said. “What better bump in the road than that?”

“That’ll be perfect, Green.” Blue said. “Will you be the decoy?”

“I’m good at everything else. Playing possum should be easy.” Green shrugged. “Can you three manage the cooler?”

“A slow falling potion will make it easy to get it down.” Blue figured. “And our blades will make freeing it even easier.”

“So the plan’s set?” I asked. We all nodded in agreement. “OK, Green, when I give the signal, get out of there.”

“What’s the signal?” Green asked.

“Me yelling at you to get out of there.” I replied. We laughed and took our positions, hiding in various locations on the side of the street like bushes and behind mailboxes. As the car approached, Green bolted from his hiding place and put a slab under the moving car, causing it to jolt. The driver stopped, and Green did his “play dead” maneuver, soon getting flocked by the driver–a typical suburban mom–and her sports-playing kids and their friends. With them distracted, Blue, Yellow, and I worked on the cooler. Blue cut it loose, hit it with a slow falling potion, and it floated slowly to Yellow’s and my arms. As we caught it, I managed to overhear a familiar voice: Gladys… the original Karen, as Red described.

“This is precisely why I called the exterminator.” Gladys said to the other people gathered around. “To kill them before they get hurt like this.”

‘Kill them?’ I thought. ‘Wow, what a hero.’

“You got it, guys?” Blue asked.

“We have obtained it, bestie.” Yellow answered. “Let’s evacuate.”

Blue hopped down and we made our escape, shuffling away with the cooler in our arms. As we did, I heard another car approach, a massive white truck with the word “Verminator” emblazoned on the side. My alarm bells went off. This must’ve been the exterminator Gladys described.

“You guys get yourselves and the cooler out of here.” I said to Yellow and Blue.

“What do you mean?” Blue asked. “Where are you going?”

“I’m getting Green.” I answered, saying nothing more before sprinting, hiding under the car that “hit” Green. I then heard the exterminator talking.

“I believe someone phoned about an animal problem. The solution is standing before you.” He said. Gladys was quick to reprimand him.

“I am throwing a welcome to the neighborhood party in a few days and so far, Debbie’s car has killed more animals than you have.”

“Do you have an associates degree from Verm Tech?” The Verminator shot back. “Stand down, sister.” He bent down to examine Green, pulling out a sort of claw-grabber thing. “GreenStickFigure, musically inclined, skilled builder, multi-talented, a bit of a show-off but compassionate as well.”

That was enough for me. This guy seemed like another real threat. Two villains in a movie? Debatably three with the Karen as well? I had to get Green out of there. I called out to him quietly, so as to not reveal my location.

“Green, get out of there! Now!” I ordered. Green, thankfully, heard me and immediately bolted for the hedge, terrifying Gladys.

“Kill it! Kill it!” She shrieked. The Verminator, however, seemed rather chill. Green disappeared in the hedge.

“What are we up against?” He asked, sniffing the air between names. “Red… Yellow… Green… Blue… Purple… Mango… Gold… Stripe… Empty head…”

“Hollow-Head.” I muttered to myself. The Verminator took another long inhale.

“No… Hollow-Head.” He said with a sort of malicious joy, like he was eager to apprehend me.

This guy was serious. How did he know all our names? How did he know us? I didn’t have the time to ponder this, I just fled for the hedge, just barely escaping without getting caught. I burst through the other side of the hedge to our safe spot in the woods, where Green, Yellow, and Blue were waiting.

“You survived without facing capture, SC!” Yellow exclaimed.

“I’m just glad you three are safe.” I admitted. “Hey, do you guys know where Red and Candy are? I need to ask them something.”

“You called?” I heard Red’s voice say. I glanced toward the log and saw Red, Candy, and the Tango clan walking toward us.

“Gold! Are you OK?” Blue asked, running over to him. “Your dad was saying how you had a nightmare last night.”

“I’m OK… Now…” Gold breathed. “Thanks to my family.”

“Anything for a brother, Goldy.” Purple insisted, wrapping an arm around him. I was relieved to hear Gold was doing better, but I was more interested in the red-colored duo.

“Red, Candy… While I was out there, I heard the voice of the exterminator… the Verminator. Does that name ring a bell?”

“The third of the three antagonists of the movie.” Red answered, nodding. “He’s not one to be trifled with, even despite his comedic role.”

“He has a lot of high-tech gear and a strange amount of enjoyment for capturing animals.” Candy explained. “And… He eventually catches the main squad of animals.”

“Wait, what? How?” King asked. “The animals are the heroes, right?”

“Yep, but they were captured by a heist gone wrong.” Candy explained. “Vincent’s need for Spuddies caused some… rather rash decisions from the character of RJ… AKA, Blue. He left the forest gang to save his tail, and the Verminator captured the others soon after.”

“Me?” Blue repeated. “I’d never abandon my family!”

“It might be necessary.” Red confessed. “Unless… we can somehow get all three villains in the same place… on both sides of the hedge attacking us.”

“Sooo… How exactly did the heroes survive?” Purple asked.

“The Verminator’s trap in Gladys’ yard got cranked up to 100… By Hammy on caffeine.” Candy explained.

“That’s you, Candy.” Red said, wrapping an arm around her. “We’re gonna need your speed for this deed.”

“Indeed.” Candy joked, drawing a laugh from us.

“What’s the game plan, then?” Gold asked. “I’ve only seen it once, when I was a kid.”

“Well, with Verminator in the game, it’s only a matter of time before Gladys installs… the Depelter Turbo, which is illegal in 49 states.” Red explained.

“Just get to the point, dude.” Green sighed, a little annoyed.

“Simply put, we’ll break into Gladys’ house, lure her and the Verminator out, and with Vincent on Blue’s tail, we’re getting all three of them caught in the Depelter with Candy channeling Herobrine and his speed.” Red explained. “And, Blue, you’re gonna need an iron chestplate. You’re essentially the bait for Vincent, and you’re going to need the protection from his teeth. Maybe we can find Spuddies and pay off the debt, but until then… that’s what we’re going with. The Depelter plan.” He sighed deeply. “It’ll be risky, but since when has that stopped me? Let’s get to it!"

Chapter 18: Caffeinated Candy

Candy

A few more days passed, and I noticed as the moon changed from half to three-quarters to nearly full. With each passing day, the guys and I gathered more and more supplies for Blue’s debt, though we couldn’t gather as much as we could before, with the Verminator on the prowl. Slowly but surely, we used cautious tactics–much to King’s and SC’s pleasure and Red’s and Gold’s chagrin–to fill the log more, so much so that it was practically bursting at the seams. It gave me a lot of pride being able to help the boys. I felt like I was a part of their family… and that meant a lot to me. The night before Vincent was coming for his dues, we realized there was one thing we were missing.

“Spuddies!” Blue cried. “We need Spuddies! How could we have overlooked it?”

“It’s not that, buddy.” Red assured him. “We couldn’t find any, that’s all.”

“How uncommon is this movie’s version of Springles?” Blue wanted to know. “Are they as hard to craft as a transformation potion?”

“Blue, Blue, relax, buddy.” Yellow consoled him. “We will locate the missing fried potato slices.”

“Red seems strangely calm, though.” SC noted.

“He has reason to be.” I assured them. “I think he and I both know where to get Spuddies. Our plan is coming together… I assure you guys.”

“Where, dude?” Green asked. “Where are the desired Spuddies?”

“Follow Candy and I.” Red assured us. I nodded, knowing what Red was planning.

“‘Me and Candy.’” Yellow corrected.

All nine of us trudged through the hedge, peeking out at the Verminator talking to Gladys.

“Can you install this one?” Gladys asked. “The Depelter Turbo?”

“That’s a contraband item, ma’am, as it is illegal in every state, except Texas.” the Verminator replied. Red gave his friends a smirk, as if to say, “I told you so.” It got a chuckle out of me.

“I don’t care if this thing is against the Geneva conventions. I want it!” Gladys insisted.

“I thought you would, which is why I took the liberty of installing it for you.” the Verminator said, turning a knob on a device which activated a laser grid across the lawn that would make a spy movie jealous. He tossed a stuffed bear into the line of sight to demonstrate, and it was instantly zapped, fried, and caged, much to Gladys’ surprise. The boys were also surprised, except for Red, who knew what was coming. We slowly and cautiously backed out of the hedge.

“So that’s where the Spuddies are?” Purple asked. “In there, the house with more traps than a hunting goods store?”

“I wouldn’t mind dodging and weaving through them.” Gold volunteered. “I bet I could navigate them.”

“Not happening, Goldy.” King immediately shot down. “You might have dodged getting electrocuted once, but not this time.”

“We can’t go in guns blazing.” Blue added. “It’s too dangerous and we have no way inside.”

“Au contraire, my friend.” I smiled. “Your golf bag has everything we need, and tomorrow night… once Gladys gets her shipment for her party, we’re breaking in and taking down all three villains in one fell swoop. Er, cage, I suppose.”

“I feel weird for wanting to cage a bear.” Red said, a little squeamish. “I can’t do that to any animal! They’re so cute!”

“How about Death?” I quipped. “Or Shen? Or Marmalade?”

“I could never cage Death, he’s too awesome and would just escape it anyway, but you do have a point.” Red admitted. “Let’s take Vincent and the others down!”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The following evening was the night of the heist. Red and I explained to the others the plan: Red was to fly across the yard and deactivate the lasers, more for my sake as well as the Tangos. We needed a kid’s toy for our plan to work, and the Tangos and I volunteered to bring it over. Relatively speaking, it was pretty big. Our key to the house was Gladys’ cat’s collar. The pet door opens only with said collar, and Red seemed like the best candidate to get it for us. If anyone can sweet talk a cat, it’s Red. He’s also got a fair bit of aggression, which I’m hoping the cat will respect. Considering how it went for the characters in the movie, we figured it would go similarly.

Once the lasers were off, the Tangos and I rejoined the Gang in a bush in the yard.

“We got the See-and-Say!” Gold squealed eagerly. “This is going perfectly!”

“Don’t jinx it, kiddo.” King insisted. “We still need the Spuddies, and that’s a long way off.”

“Anything is possible, Dad.” Purple assured him. “I’m confident we can do it.”

“Are we sure about Red doing this?” Blue asked. “Knowing him, he’ll probably want to pet this cat.”

“I have confidence Red can push through his urge to stroke the feline’s fur and complete the task at hand.” Yellow assured us.

“If anyone can tame a cat, it’d be him.” Green added. “Just keep your head in the game, bro.”

“You got this, little brother.” SC said, clapping a hand on Red’s shoulder. “We love ya, buddy.”

“I love you too, SC, guys.” Red replied, breathing deeply. “Phase 2, let’s get this started.”

“Alright, boys, set it to ‘cat’ and activate it.” I ordered. “Red, my shining Stella, you ready?”

“I’m not a fan of playing Stella’s role…” He sighed, “but I’m willing to do this… for my family. You put the can in the hedge, I assume.”

“Yep, our ‘speed boost’ is waiting for us.” I assured him. “Ready to ‘ham’ up my role as the hyperactive squirrel.” Red chuckled.

“I’m just thankful I don’t have makeup on my butt, dude.” He said. “Or a cork.” I chuckled, and he ventured out of the bush. Gold pulled the lever on the See-and-Say and it played the sound of a cat meowing. This caught the attention of Gladys’ cat–soon to be nicknamed Tiger–and he ventured outside through his pet door.

“Halt! Who goes there?” Tiger demanded.

“Another cat.” Red replied. “Meow.”

“Ugh, get away from here, I do not associate with common strays.” Tiger scoffed pompously, sneezing.

“Common strays?” Red repeated, his temper rising. “Common strays?”

“Oh jeez, should we get out there?” SC asked.

“No, he’s got this.” I assured him.

“You have no idea what it took for me to get here,” Red continued, “and I didn’t come all this way for some pompous puffball to kick me out of the porch. You will let me in and you are going to like it!”

Even from a distance, I could see a look of guilt in his eyes. It clearly broke him to talk to a cat that way, and I could tell he had to refrain himself from petting Tiger’s fluffy fur. But, props to him, he maintained his stern facade and glared at Tiger in the eyes.

“Stop!” Tiger bellowed. “No one has talked to me that way.” The boys gasped, but I silently ordered them to keep quiet. “It is bold. I like it.” Tiger continued.

Red glanced over his shoulder at us and gave us a smile and a wink.

“Well, if it’s that you want, I got a lot more of it, puffball.” Red said, leading Tiger away from the pet door, allowing us to leave our hiding spot. We bolted for the door, but we still needed the collar. Thankfully, Red tossed it over to us in mere seconds and we snuck into the house. With Gladys still sleeping, we sticks had free reign in the house.

“OK, Blue, was there anything else that Vincent needed of you?” King asked.

“Spuddies were the main thing…” Blue recalled. “Let’s go for those. I think we should have enough to satisfy him.”

“Candy, do you know where the Spuddies are?” SC asked.

“Up there, on the shelf above the wine bottles.” I explained. “They’re behind a box, just waiting to be found.”

“Let’s make this quick. We can’t get caught.” Green advised. “That would produce several sour notes.”

“I’ll grab the Spuddies, guys.” SC said.

“Should one of us keep an eye on the stairs? Make sure we’re not spotted and whatnot?” Gold asked.

“That’s… not a bad idea, big brother.” Purple agreed. “We should have an escape route planned. The pet door, I’d imagine?”

“Yep.” I confirmed. “I just hope this goes the way I think it will…”

Blue did as ordered, the Tangos kept an eye on the stairs, and SC grabbed the Spuddies by flying up there with his wings while the rest of us watched from below. It was going smoothly, and SC grabbed the can. We were home free, I thought, until I heard the coffee machine bubbling and perking. Were we really taking that long or was this just DreamWorks’ weird time acceleration? Whatever the cause, time was expiring rapidly.

“Tango clan, we’re gonna have to go!” I exclaimed. “Gladys will be up any minute!”

“You don’t have to tell us twice!” King called back. “She’s coming, guys! Grab it and go!”

But it was too late. I heard Gladys scream and a dull thud. I raced over to what happened, and it turned out Purple had taken the brunt of a bunny-slippered kick from Gladys. Our cover was blown, the Verminator was likely on his way, but I was more concerned for Purple at the time. King and Gold were already kneeling over him.

“Purple!” I heard Gold yell. “Are you OK?”

“Yeah…” Purple said breathlessly. “I just… need… to catch… my breath…” He wheezed.

“Oh Purple…” King said sorrowfully.

“I’m OK, Dad… Just give me a minute…” Purple insisted.

“Candy, tell the others to get out of here.” King ordered. “Load up the wagon and deliver it to Vincent. Gold and I will get Purple out of here.”

“No one is getting left behind, King!” I exclaimed. The boys ran up behind me as well, and just in time to see Purple rise to his feet, albeit on shaky legs.

“We have obtained possession of the Spuddies.” Yellow said. “I suggest we make our getaway before Gladys returns, or an even more inferior outcome arises…”

“Purple, are you sure you’re OK?” King asked.

“I can still fly.” Purple said. “Plus, I’ve been through worse.”

We make a break for the pet door. We still had the collar with us, so it was easy to escape, but our worst case scenario was bursting through the door. The Verminator must’ve caught wind of us, probably got a call from Gladys, and cocked his net gun, preparing to capture us.

“Let’s party!” He exclaimed. This, however, was a party we wanted no part of. We proverbially grabbed Reddy Bear, who was still outside distracting Tiger, and made a break for the hedge, only to have both the Verminator, now wielding a shock stick, and Gladys and her weed whacker behind us.

“The hedge! Get through the hedge!” I ordered. “These two want nothing more than us dealt with… as inhumanely as possible.”

We burst through the hedge into the other side, what we thought was our safe side, our respite, but it turned out to be quite the opposite. Vincent the Bear was waiting for us, woken up from his hibernation and demanding blood. Specifically… Blue’s blood. I encountered him first, with the boys right behind me, and Blue began sweating bullets.

“Vincent…” He gasped.

“I expected my stuff to be right back where it was.” Vincent growled. “You can imagine my disappointment when it wasn’t there…”

“Vincent, I have everything! It’s in the log!” Blue frantically insisted.

“That wasn’t the deal.” Vincent said. “You’re dead, Blue! And your friends are next!”

“Move! MOVE!” I shouted, and we retreated into the hedge, all three villains surrounding us, taking jabs and swipes into the hedge in an attempt to kill us. Even the reckless Gold was terrified, and King was hugging him tightly.

“What do we do now, guys?!” Purple asked desperately.

“It’s me Vincent wants!” Blue insisted. “I’ll distract him. You guys get out of here!”

“True Blue, I am incapable of allowing you to take that course of action!” Yellow exclaimed. “There must be an alternative solution!”

“I think it’s time for our secret weapon.” Red said coolly. “Candy, are you ready?”

“Yes. Blue’s set with his armor, it’s time to use the ace up our sleeve.” I answered.

“What are you two planning?” SC wondered.

“A Stripe going Sonic… with no potions necessary.” Red explained, pulling out a caffeinated energy drink named Mach6 and a silver gleaming piece of armor. “Blue, put the chestplate on.” Red ordered. “And, Candy… You know what to do.” I nodded in agreement.

“Wait! Candy, caffeine can have immensely negative side effects, especially for someone like you, who is underage.” Yellow insisted.

“Candy, we’re not losing you.” King insisted. “This might be too great of a risk.”

“If I don’t, we’re meeting our ends anyway.” I said tersely. “This is our last shot. I need to do this… for you all and what you’ve done for me.”

“Dudes, we don’t have time to discuss this!” Green shouted. I knew he was right. While Blue played the decoy, Red cracked open the can and I chugged it as fast as I possibly could. I felt the caffeine enter my system and I felt invigorated, energized, a super-sonic force I have never felt before. It was as if the world was momentarily paused, like the globe stopped spinning where it stood, and I was the only one moving. My super speed had been dialed up to 100, speeds that even Flodge couldn’t replicate.

I strolled out of the hedge past Gladys and the Verminator and turned the Depelter Turbo back on, dialing it to its highest setting. My speed was so much it made even the laser beams seem slow by comparison, but I knew it wasn’t going to last. After sneakily placing one of the Verminator’s traps next to him, I returned to the hedge, just in time to hear Blue taunting Vincent. The caffeine was wearing off.

“Hey Vincent! Want some Spuddies?” Blue mocked, chomping down on a chip. Furious, Vincent leapt at him and clamped his teeth around Blue’s midsection, unknowingly getting a mouthful of armor. Green quickly yanked Blue out of Vincent’s grasp with a fishing rod and Vincent was left falling on both the Verminator and Gladys, activating the lasers I turned on. The Depelter Turbo whirred into action.

“Is that…?” Gladys gasped.

“The Depelter Turbo.” the Verminator answered, wincing. “Prepare for a lot of stinging…”

We sticks watched with eye protection as the Depelter did its thing. A massive white beam shot into the air, creating a massive crater in the ground, and the three villains were caged up. We celebrated our success, another win over some incredible villains.

“We did it!” Gold exclaimed, high-fiving each of us.

“Congratulations, guys!” SC proclaimed.

“We’re one step closer to that Wishing Star!” Red added, leading us back to our side of the hedge. “And, Candy… You saved us!” He hugged me tightly. I hugged him back and we released each other.

“Indeed, young Candy, you were quite heroic back there.” King confirmed. I felt myself blush.

“Thanks, guys.” I said shyly. “I’m just happy to return the favor to you guys after you all saved my life.”

“If you weren’t already welcomed, you certainly are now. Welcome to the family, Candy.” Purple proclaimed, wrapping an arm around me. “Shall we celebrate with as many snacks we can stuff our faces with?”

Blue’s stomach growled in that instant. “Yeah… I’d like that very much.” He admitted sheepishly. We laughed, and Yellow hugged his dear friend.

“Green, you preserved my bestie’s life.” Yellow confessed. “I am deeply in your debt.”

“Anything for my family, dudes.” Green replied. “You may be nerds, but you’re MY nerds.”

We feasted on the snacks we stole while the villains were arrested or, in Vincent’s case, taken to the Smoky Mountains by animal control. As we ate, we laughed, joked, teased, and just enjoyed each other’s company. It truly made me feel like a part of the guys, but those doubts flared up again. Red must’ve noticed my distant gaze.

“Candy? You OK?” He asked. “Something on your mind?” I sighed deeply.

“I’m just…” I began, “so grateful to be part of your family. The only family I know is at Tiger Tech, but even then we’re nothing like you guys.”

“What about your birth family?” Red asked gently.

“I don’t remember them.” I confessed. “When Flodge converted me to a Stripe, gave me my powers, I lost prior memories. It’s how she manipulated sticks like me: practically remade us into her image, balls of clay that she could shape into whatever she wanted. All I can remember from my youth is a love for movies… and a few other things. It’s little more than a blur.” I paused. “I don’t even know if Candy is even my real name, but that's all I know.”

“Oh, Candy…” Red said sweetly, tears filling his eyes. “I’m so, so sorry…”

“I appreciate it, Reddy Bear.” I replied. “I’m just grateful to have met you guys. I doubt my birth family could hold a candle to you.”

“Don’t say that, Candy.” Purple insisted. “You know what I would give to see my mom again? Almost anything… I’m sure your family were great people. At least… I hope…”

“Maybe we could find them!” Gold suggested. “We’d love to help you, Candy.”

“Let me think about it… After we get outta here.” I insisted. “But I do appreciate the offer. Thanks, guys.”

“We love you, Candy.” Red added.

“I love you guys, too.” I replied, wiping tears from my eyes.

At that moment, we found ourselves flying back through the black hole to our next movie.

“Where to next, Red?” Purple asked.

“I’d imagine The Bee Movie. I vividly remember Ken among the villains.” Red answered.

“It’s a wild movie, and pretty funny as well.” I explained. “Oooh, we’re one step closer to Kung Fu Panda!”

“I know you’re eager for that, Candy.” Red said. I nodded in agreement.

“Stay together, kids!” King exclaimed. “We’re almost there!”

“THIS IS AWESOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOME!” Gold yelled.

A white hole became brighter and brighter, and we fell through it. We reached the next movie, and boy, I was surprised… But it was a welcome surprise nonetheless.

Third Person POV

Back in the Hall of Villains, Death returned to his throne, scowling at the remaining villains lined in front of him. He was far from happy with the latest performance, even with his help, but even with a powerful bear, the sticks were still alive.

“Bring me Vincent!” Death ordered. The massive black bear stepped out of line. “Idiotas… Ustedes son idiotas…” Death shook his head in frustration. “You had him in your grasp, Vincent. Twice. I broke Gold mentally, brought him to tears, to his knees… And yet you couldn’t finish the job.”

Vincent had no answer. Even he was terrified to step out of line. Death’s piercing red eyes stared a proverbial hole through him, he lifted his sickle and gestured for Vincent to get out, to start running while he still could. Vincent took off in response.

“Brute force… Magic powers… Let’s see if controlled fury can make it happen… Tai Lung!” Death bellowed. “Show those sticks the power of kung fu. And, to all of you, don’t make me do this myself.” The other villains nodded, including Tai Lung.

“The real Dragon Warrior is coming home.” He breathed, departing from the Hall.

“You are all dismissed.” Death growled. Everyone left, except for Ken from The Bee Movie.

“Uh, Sir…” Ken sheepishly said. Death breathed deeply.

“Kenneth… I expect nothing from you. You are nothing other than comedy relief. You’re not worth my time. Now get out of here while you still can.” Ken turned to leave, muttering to himself.

“Talking snow leopards, no yogurt night, my nerves are fried from riding on this emotional roller coaster!”

A sickle zipped mere inches by Ken’s head, getting stuck in a wall.

“That was a warning, Ken.” Death said coldly. “Next time, I won’t miss.”

Ken nodded, understanding, and bolted, intriguing Death, who thought he was going to have one last smart remark for him. The Wolf shrugged if off, rose and regained his sickle, glancing at nine circles on his blade. Seven were crossed out, as seven of them had eluded the Wolf before, but two were not. One was red-and-white striped, but he wasn’t interested in her. He put a sharp claw above the other uncrossed circle, this one a dull yellow.

“Run, run, Gold… All you stick figures. You all will pay for cheating me.”

Chapter 19: A Painful Split

Purple

After falling through the familiar black hole, I landed on my back with a thud on a wooden floor. I rubbed my head, sore and stiff from the fall, but soon regained my vision and examined my surroundings. It looked like I was in a bedroom, posters of animals in martial arts poses covered the walls and even a drawing of a bull was on there, seemingly a sort of dartboard, except for shurikens. A beam of sunlight shone through an open window, illuminating everything.

“Is this… What I think it is?” I said to myself as I rose to my feet. There was one way to find out: check the windowsill. I did and sure enough, my suspicions were correct. I found five hand-crafted figurines, one of each a monkey, a praying mantis, a crane, a snake, and a tiger. “No way! It’s the Furious Five!” I squealed with excitement. “Monkey, Mantis, Crane, Viper, Tigress!” I mimicked a tiger roar, making awkward eye contact with a neighbor. Embarrassed, I retreated into my room so I could continue geeking out. “We’re in Kung Fu Panda! We’re in China! Oooooh, I love this series! Not as much as Candy, but still…”

“Purple? Is that you?” A voice asked from downstairs.

“Dad?” I replied, racing down the stairs so fast I almost stumbled down them until I reached the bottom floor. Sure enough, there was Dad serving bowls of noodle soup to a variety of cute animals, mostly bunnies, pigs, and the occasional duck. “Dad!”

“My little Prince!” Dad raced over and hugged me. I hugged him back. “I’m so glad to see you’re OK!”

“Same to you, Dad.” I admitted. We released each other. “Hey, where are the others?”

“I’m not sure.” Dad answered. “When I fell through the black hole, this is where I ended up. Next thing I know, people are asking me for bowls of noodle soup and dumplings. I put two and two together and decided to give it a shot.”

“You always have been a great cook, Dad.”

“Thanks, Purple, though I must admit, Chinese isn’t my specialty.”

“Your customers seem to like it, though.” I pointed out. Indeed, the customers were slurping up Dad’s cooking and greatly enjoying it.

“Yeah…” Dad said distantly. “I could live without that. I’m more concerned about the kids. Where could they be?” He began to gaze into the sky. “Where’s Goldy? Him being alone doesn’t bode well.”

“I’m sure the guys are with him.” I assured him. “They’ll make sure Gold doesn’t get in trouble.” I too looked toward the sky, eventually noticing a building on a mountaintop. “The Jade Palace… That might be where they are!”

“The Jade Palace?” Dad repeated. “I suppose we could fly up there, but there’s no way they’d just let us waltz in, right?”

At that moment, Dad and I heard the clang of a gong and saw someone hanging up a poster on the wall. We stepped outside and took a closer look at it.

“Master Oogway is going to choose the Dragon Warrior! Today!” I exclaimed. “At the Jade Palace!”

“OK, so maybe they will let us waltz in.” Dad joked. “You really think the kids are up there?”

“Only one way to find out.” I answered. “Shall we fly?” I put my wings on, and Dad did as well.

“Sounds a lot more convenient than climbing approximately 50,000 stairs.” I laughed, and the two of us took off into the sky, eager to see who got Po the Panda’s role… or, even better, maybe even see Po himself.

The Second Coming

After exiting the black hole, I found myself in a massive courtyard of sorts, the guys surrounding me. I took a quick look at my surroundings, the most striking thing being a massive palace that resembled something out of China. It was brightly colored with greens, reds, and shining golds, and it took my breath away. Even then, I had to get the guys up. Red and Candy were first. I figured they’d have more to say about this.

“Reddy Bear…” I said, gently prodding him. “We have arrived.”

“Ow…” Red moaned, rubbing his head. “Where are we?”

“Look behind you.” I pointed. Red turned around and his jaw dropped.

“C- Candy…” Red stuttered, nudging her. “You’re gonna want to see this.” The rest of the guys rose soon after, Candy was among them.

“Hey there Red. Where-” Candy stopped herself upon seeing the palace. “Wait… The Jade Palace! Are we… We are… Oh my… I cannot find the words…”

“Where are we, guys?” Green asked.

“Judging by the massive palace before us,” Yellow began, “I’d have to guess China.”

“China?” Blue asked. “Whoa… The cuisines! The sights! The smells! Can we indulge in something sooner rather than later?”

“Refrain yourself, buddy.” Yellow insisted. “What movie is this?”

“Kung Fu Panda!” Candy exclaimed, finally finding the words. “Oh my gosh oh my gosh oh my gosh we’re here! My favorite franchise! Maybe I can meet Tigress! And Po! And the Furious Five! Oh my gosh I feel like I’m going to explode!” She zipped around wildly and recklessly with her super speed. We all laughed at her antics, especially Red, but he was also very eager. He joined Candy in a massive sprint around the courtyard, laughing and giggling like little kids. It was kinda sweet seeing the two of them together. “We’re here, Reddy Bear! I can’t believe we’re finally here! Look! We can see the Valley of Peace from up here!” She grabbed and hugged him, squeezing him like a sponge.

“I’m so glad you’re excited, Candy.” Red confessed. “You have no idea how excited I am, too.”

“I have an idea.” Candy joked as she let go of him, and the two of them laughed.

“Is everyone here?” I asked. We all took stock.

“We’re missing two.” Gold answered. “My dad and brother. Where could they be?”

“You don’t think they’re… playing the role of the titular panda and his adoptive father?” Yellow reasoned. “It makes logical sense considering their relationship.”

“I hope that’s the case. Because at least it means they’re OK.” Gold said, sighing deeply.

“They’ll be fine, I’m sure, Goldy.” I said comfortingly. “Do you want to look for them?”

At that moment, the doors of the Jade Palace burst open, catching us all off-guard. We turned and saw Master Shifu, the red panda, stepping through the doors and walking toward us. Candy gasped, and it looked like she was going to pass out. Red rubbed her back to soothe her, and she was barely able to collect herself.

“Oh… my… gosh… It’s the legendary Master Shifu!” She squealed. “I think I’m gonna pass out…”

“Calm down, Candy.” Red said. “Breathe… inhale… exhale…” Candy slowly regained her breath and stood up straight.

“Students… Leave me and The Second Coming in peace.” Shifu ordered.

“Me?” I asked, bewildered. I was even more taken aback by the use of my full name.

“Yes, Master Shifu.” Candy agreed, putting her fist in her palm in a sort of greeting. Red did the same, and the guys followed suit, retreating into the Palace. Once it was just me and Shifu, he sat down under a tree, pulled out a flute and began playing it. I joined in with my own instrument, my makeshift flute made out of a candle and stick, that I made to soothe the Warden, and we played together. It was very calming, the most relaxing thing I’ve done during this adventure, until I heard rustling in the bushes.

I glanced around, a little unsure of what was going to happen, when Shifu and I were suddenly ambushed by everyone. Shifu, however, seemed prepared for it. His eyes snapped open and he countered each one of my friends with incredible skill and technique in martial arts. I was more watching in awe on the sidelines, but still, seeing Shifu whip out some impressive moves to take down all six of them earned my respect.

“Well done, students,” Shifu began. Each of my friends did the similar, “fist-in-the-palm” greeting or salute, “if you were trying to disappoint me. Candy you need for ferocity, Blue, greater speed, Red, height, Yellow, subtlety, Green-”

“Master Shifu?” Gold’s small voice asked.

“What?!” Shifu demanded. Gold yelped, startled, but explained.

“Master Oogway, he wants to see you… and SC.”

I was surprised once again, but followed Shifu back into the Palace, Gold tagging along because he begged. Once we arrived, we met the legendary tortoise, Master Oogway, inside. After Shifu extinguished all of Oogway’s meditation candles at once–a relief to me because Oogway was doing them one at a time and there must’ve been hundreds of them–the two of them got to talking.

“I have had a vision.” Oogway began, “Tai Lung will return.”

Gold and I glanced at each other and exchanged nervous looks. I was surprised to see Gold a little anxious about it, considering how adventurous he is, but I guess he knew what a threat Tai Lung was. I personally didn’t know Tai Lung’s danger level, but Shifu’s expression upon hearing the news gave me enough info to realize… Crap was about to go down.

“That is impossible! He is in prison!” Shifu insisted.

“Nothing is impossible.” Oogway replied. Shifu, in a panic, ran to Gold.

“Gold! Fly to Chorh-Gom prison and tell them to double the guards, double the weapons, double everything!” He ordered. “Tai Lung does not leave that prison!”

“Yes, Master Shifu!” Gold answered, putting on his wings and flying away.

“If this Tai Lung is a severe danger,” I reasoned, “we should brace for impact. Surely someone can defeat him, some way, some… thing…”

“Your mind is like this pool, my friend.” Oogway said to me. I gave him a puzzled look. “Let it calm and the answer becomes clear.” He used his staff to still the water, and I saw a reflection of a tube in the teeth of a massive gold dragon statue on the ceiling. Shifu and I looked up.

“The Dragon Scroll!” Shifu gasped.

“It is time.” Oogway said.

“But who? Who is worthy of receiving the secret to limitless power?” Shifu asked. After a pause, Oogway replied,

“I don’t know.”

I quietly slunk out of the Palace and returned to the guys, who were waiting outside.

“Guys, I fear our greatest challenge is coming.” I told them.

“Tai Lung.” Red and Candy said in unison.

“Tai Lung?” Yellow repeated. “Isn’t that Great Dragon in Cantonese?”

“Whoa whoa whoa, dude… You know Cantonese?” Green asked.

“I know lots of things, Green.” Yellow smirked. “For example, Shifu translates to ‘Master’ in Chinese. There’s no limit to my language knowledge.”

“Except the language of victory, dude.” Green shot back.

“Victory? Or cheating? Need I remind you of our Redstone build-off?” Yellow retaliated.

“Guys guys…” Blue said, stepping between them. “Wait… where’s Gold?”

“Shifu sent him to Chorh-Gom prison to warn the guards about it.” I answered.

“He’ll be OK, though, right?” Green asked.

“He should be fine.” Candy assured him. “If he is the duck messenger Zeng, he’ll make it there without a problem.”

“Sooo… What’s next?” Blue asked.

“Now… We learn who will be chosen as the Dragon Warrior.” Red explained.

“I wonder if we can meet Tigress.” Candy dreamed.

“Judging by what happened thus far, Candy… I think you are Tigress.” Red explained. Candy gasped.

“My dream has come true…” She moaned dreamily.

“Students!” Master Shifu bellowed from behind us. We all turned around. “Master Oogway will be choosing one of you to be the Dragon Warrior. Get yourselves ready. The selection will be made shortly.”

“Yes, Master Shifu.” We said in unison. He returned into the Palace, and Red and Candy led us to the Training Hall, a massive room with all sorts of martial arts training weapons, tools, and things of that nature. We were all in awe. We don’t have anything nearly as nice on ALANSPC, so this… for fighters like us, it was like Heaven. We trained ourselves with it as much as we could until Shifu called us down for the ceremony. I felt a lot of pressure on my shoulders, but it was it. Sadly, I wasn’t among the five selected–the Furious Five, as Red explained–but Candy, Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue were. It was only a matter of time before one of them was selected… or so I thought.

Purple

Dad and I flew up the side of the mountain together, toward the lower courtyard of the Jade Palace. The celebration inside was a sight to behold. Confetti flew through the air, music played, people celebrated, it was like a festival in the relatively small courtyard. It was a lot of fun to watch, and having Dad with me made it all the more exciting.

“This is quite the spectacle.” I pointed out. “Are you enjoying it, Dad?”

“Indeed I am, Purple. I just wish I knew where Gold was.” Dad sighed. “What kind of father am I, letting his son wander off like this?”

“Dad, he’s 17, going on 18. Heck, so am I, so it’s weird that he calls me his ‘baby brother.’ Regardless, you can’t hold on to us forever.” I admitted. “Someday, we’ll have to leave the nest.”

“I know, I know… I just don’t want that day to be now. I love you dearly and can’t imagine my life without you.”

“Aww. I love you too, Dad. But, we’ll find Gold. I promise. It is my brother we’re talking about. I love him, too.”

“It warms my heart to hear that, Purple. I’m so glad you two get along.” Dad replied.

“Thanks, Dad, but I think the main show is about to begin.”

“Citizens of the Valley of Peace,” Shifu proclaimed, “it is my great honor to present to you… Candy! Yellow! Red! Blue! Green! The Furious Five!”

“Wait, what?” I wondered. I looked down at the courtyard, and there were my friends. “Dad, look! Candy and the FSF!”

“And not only that. Look who’s next to Shifu.” Dad pointed out. I saw SC standing next to him, like an aide of sorts.

“It’s SC!” I gasped. “Well, there’s one problem solved. Maybe they know where Gold is!”

“We’ll have to ask them.” Dad said. We got up, as Gold’s well-being was top priority, but we were stopped from just barging onto the courtyard to meet back up with our friends. Frustrated, we returned to our seats and watched as Red showed off his stuff against the Thousand Tongues of Fire, as it’s called. One by one, each member of the FSF performed, but before Candy could take her turn, Master Oogway held up his hand.

“What’s going on?” Dad asked. Candy ushered the FSF to line up, and they stood in formation.

“Citizens of the Valley, Master Oogway will now choose the Dragon Warrior!” Shifu proclaimed.

“There’s your answer, Dad.” I said. “Hang on, I’m gonna try to get a better view.” I put my wings on and grabbed a firework.

“With fireworks, kiddo? Is that safe?”

“I’ve done this millions of times.” I shrugged. “I’ll be OK.”

I carefully ignited it and shot myself into the air. It was an incredible view… but I overestimated how long fireworks last before they explode. Without warning, the firework exploded in a powerful green blast, sending me spiraling toward the ground. I couldn’t regain my composure in time and I landed hard on the ground… right in front of the guys.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

“Purple! Buddy! Are you OK?”

“I feel his pulse in his wrist. I believe he has nothing more than a slight concussion. He shall experience a slight daze, but he will recover shortly.”

“I can patch him up with a potion, if need be.”

“King, you came in clutch with those hay bales, dude.”

“Indeed, your love for your son is apparent.”

“It’s what a father should be.”

“Shh! Shh! Boys, I think he’s waking up!”

I didn’t remember much after I blacked out, outside of my family talking over me. I recognized their voices, and I opened my eyes. There they were, standing over me, looking at me with shocked expressions on their faces. When I turned around, I saw Oogway pointing at me.

“Oh my gosh, Master Oogway, I am so sorry. I- I just wanted a better view.” I confessed.

“How interesting.” Oogway said, raising my arm with his staff. “The universe has brought us the Dragon Warrior!”

This news stunned me.

“What?” Was all I could say.

“What?!” Shifu shouted.

“What?” Dad said.

I heard a gong, and suddenly everyone who was watching was celebrating me, not just my friends, but the entire crowd. Red hugged me tightly, and the rest of the guys gathered around and began celebrating with the crowd. I was still too shocked to find the words to describe how I was feeling, but the guys were ecstatic.

“Purple! You’re the Dragon Warrior!” Red exclaimed.

“We might as well start calling you ‘Po-ple.’” Candy joked.

“I- I don’t know what to say…” I gasped finally. I then turned and saw Dad behind me. “Dad…”

“Purple… Does this mean…” He asked slowly. Candy must’ve noticed our expressions.

“Purple, King, this might be where your paths split for a while.” She admitted worriedly. “In the movie, Po begins his training, and his dad returns to his noodle shop.” I walked up to Dad.

“Dad… I need to start my training here… I need it to defeat Tai Lung.” I started tearing up, and Dad was as well. “I’m sorry, Dad! I’m so, so sorry!”

“Don’t apologize, my little Prince. This is the way it has to be.” Dad said, hugging me and stroking my back to comfort me. “You said it yourself, there comes a time when the birds leave the nest.”

“I’m not leaving permanently.” I insisted. “I promise… I will return… or die trying.”

“Oh, Purple…” Dad said, looking me in the eyes. “I will be waiting for you with open arms.”

I hugged him again, tears flowing down my face, and we exchanged kisses as well.

“I love you, Dad.”

“I love you too.”

“Oh, kids… Where’s Goldy?” Dad asked.

“He’s off to Chorh-Gom prison.” SC said flatly.

“Oh jeez…” Dad said. He didn’t seem surprised, somehow. “What has he done now?”

“No no no, it's not like that, King, I swear,” Red explained. “He’s only delivering a message from Master Shifu.” Dad sighed deeply.

“That’s a relief.” He said. “He’ll be OK, right?”

“He shall return unharmed,” Candy answered. “I know this movie inside and out. I am sure he will be OK.”

“When he does… Tell him to find me at my noodle shop.” Dad ordered. “I’m worried about him.”

“We will, King.” Green promised.

“The exact moment we reunite with him.” Yellow added.

“And tell him to bring us some noodles.” Blue insisted. “I love me some good Chinese.” Yellow jokingly elbowed him, and we laughed.

A small group of ducks approached, about to carry me like royalty into the Hall of Warriors. Before they took me off, though, Dad stopped me one last time.

“Purple, my dear, beloved little Prince…”

“Daaad, not in front of the guys…” I moaned, embarrassed. The guys giggled.

“Let them hear. You don’t mind.” I had to admit, I didn’t, not too much. “Stay safe in there, kiddo. Kick some butt.” I laughed.

“I will.”

“And remember your faith.” Dad advised. “I know these movies are embedded in Chinese philosophy. Just remember where our power and strength lies.” He put a hand over my heart.

“I will. I’ve come too far to turn back now.”

He gave me one last kiss on the head and the ducks carried me off on a cart… of sorts… I’m not fully sure what to call it… Candy and the guys right behind me, still celebrating my new title. I heard Shifu protest to Oogway behind me.

“There’s no way that… stick figure is the answer to our problems. You were about to point at Candy when… that thing fell in front of her! That was just an accident!”

“There are no accidents.” Oogway replied.

I had seen Kung Fu Panda with Red and the guys before, so this interaction wasn’t a surprise to me, but it was a little disappointing. It reminded me of Navy, how I never could meet his expectations. At least I knew Dad and the guys had confidence in me. That’s all that mattered to me. As I went, I saw Dad watching me go, waving me good-bye. I waved back.

‘I love you, Dad.’ I thought to myself. ‘I won’t let Shifu break me… I hope…”

Chapter 20: Breaking Down and Breaking Out

Purple

With the Gang plus Candy right behind me, I was carried into the palace. It felt weird going on an adventure without Dad. I haven’t been away from Dad’s side since… before my adoption, I think. Through thick and thin we’ve been together, but if I am Po in this universe, then Dad is Mr. Ping, and he doesn’t do all too much… not until the end. I looked forward to that end. I made it my goal, my will to survive. I’m doing this for Dad, and for my big brother Goldy. This new determination in me, I was dumped inside the Hall of Warriors, and upon seeing it, I was amazed.

It was incredible, vibrant shades of green, blue, and teal covered the walls. All sorts of kung fu memorabilia were propped up like artifacts in a museum. I was in awe, as were most of the guys, but Red and Candy were practically going insane, more like Po rather than the Furious Five.

“The Hall of Warriors!” Candy gasped. “Oh… my… gosh! Oh my gosh oh my gosh I’m here! This is amazing! Incredible! I… I… I…”

“Candy, are you OK?” Red asked. I was also concerned, it looked like she was going to pass out. She took a deep breath.

“Sorry, boys. I’m just… a little crazy about Kung Fu Panda.” She explained.

“A little crazy?” Green joked.

“I have to show you guys everything!” Candy insisted, pointing out a set of rhino-shaped armor. “Master Flying Rhino’s armor…”

“With authentic battle damage!” Red and Candy said in unison. They looked at each other and laughed, and we had to as well.

“What’s that?” SC asked, pointing out a silver and jade colored sword. He stepped closer.

“That’s the Sword of Heroes!” Candy answered. “Rumored to be so sharp you can cut yourself just by-”

“Owww!” SC winced, grabbing his hand.

“SC! You OK?” I gasped, racing over to him.

“Just a small cut.” SC insisted. “I’ll be fine. What was that?”

“You can cut yourself just by looking at it.” Red finished.

“Is there supposed to be something here?” Blue asked, looking at two things holding up seemingly nothing.

“The Invisible Trident of Destiny!” Candy exclaimed.

“And you cannot forget this!” Red called. We turned and saw… “The legendary Urn of Whispering Warriors!”

“Wait… Do I have to break that?” I wondered. “Because I don’t think I’m that clumsy, am I?”

“No, certainly not, buddy.” Red assured me. “Just watch out for-”

“Master Shifu!” SC interrupted. Sure enough, the red panda was standing before us, looking very annoyed.

“Students, to the training hall.” He ordered. “I wish to speak with the ‘Dragon Warrior.’” The guys looked at each other, and then at Candy. She gestured for them to obey.

“Yes, Master Shifu.” She did the fist-palm thing and left. The Gang followed, and soon I was left alone with Shifu.

“So you’re the legendary Dragon Warrior, hmm?” Shifu quipped.

“I… guess so…” I answered. I wasn’t used to being put in this sort of position, but I do consider myself at least a capable fighter. I did take down SC and Red once before in a fight for the MGI, but I don’t think Shifu wanted my resume.

“WRONG!” He boomed. “You are NOT the Dragon Warrior! You will never be the Dragon Warrior until you have learned the secret of the Dragon Scroll.” He gestured to the scroll, caught in a gold dragon statue’s teeth high above us. “Something impossible for someone like you, with these pathetic arms and fat butt.”

“Fat butt?” I repeated. “I’m a stick figure!” I pointed at him. “Nothing about me is-” He cut me off by grabbing my pointer finger, putting me in a Wuxi (pronounced “woo-she”) Finger Hold. “Oh no… Not the Wuxi Finger Hold!”

“Ohhhhhh, so you know this hold.” Shifu said coolly.

“Yes, I am familiar with it. The Third Dynasty, I believe…”

“So you know what happens when I flex my pinky.”

“No, please…” I whimpered, not wanting to go to the Spirit Realm, this universe’s version of the afterlife.

“You wanna know the hardest part? The hardest part is cleaning up afterwards.” Shifu mocked.

“Please… Take it easy… I’ll do anything, just let me see my family again!”

“Now listen here, stick figure, Oogway might have chosen you, but after today, you’re going to wish he hadn’t! Are we clear?”

“Yes, Master Shifu, we are so clear.”

“Good. Now… Let’s get started.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Shifu led me to the training hall. It was massive, though not what I remembered from the movies. There were multiple different areas, six of them, each one seemed specially designed to train each of my friends in their expertise: Candy’s speed, Yellow’s calm, Blue’s marksmanship, Red’s aggression, Green’s versatility and SC’s… everything. He always was the best fighter out of all of us. It was cool seeing them, and I was partially eager to get myself in there. Once they finished, they walked up, and I raced over to greet them.

“Welcome to the training hall, Po-ple.” Candy said proudly.

“You did really well, I’m impressed.” I admitted.

“Thanks. I’m not the best fighter, but I think I’m getting better.” She replied.

“Your training has paid off.” Red said, wrapping an arm around her.

“That’s my line, Reddy Bear.” Candy teased.

“I know. That’s why I said it.”

Shifu then walked up to us and shot me a look.

“Go ahead, stick figure, show us what you can do.” He insisted. Candy looked at me with a concerned look.

“Are you aware of what happened…?” She asked cautiously.

“I am aware of how bad Po’s first session went.” I answered. “I have some fighting experience with Dad, and the guys have seen me before, so I’m not a complete novice like Po.”

“Be careful out there, dude.” Green ordered.

“I will.” I replied. “I promise.”

I stepped up to the proverbial plate, breathed deeply, took one last look at the guys–they gave me looks of love and support–and stepped into the “training” part of the training hall. I tried each of the six distinct sections, but found myself floundering right out the gate. Despite my own training and skills, I just don’t have what each of the guys have. I have wings, I’m the best flier on the Squad, but I couldn’t use them. I was getting blitzed too much by the training hall. By the time I finished, I was quite banged up and sore, nothing too serious, but it was rather embarrassing. The guys ran over to me as I dragged myself out of there.

“How did I do?” I asked Shifu.

“There is now… a level zero.” He answered.

“Purple!” Red shouted, hugging me. “Are you OK?”

“Yeah… I will be…” I winced. “I just… don’t have your skills. Even yours, Candy…”

“Don’t compare yourself to me, buddy.” Candy insisted. “I have super speed. That’s an unfair comparison.”

“Candy is correct.” Yellow confirmed. “You possess your own skills, Purple. You just need to hone them.”

“Let me help you up.” SC insisted, grabbing my hand and pulling me up. Green stood on the other side of me, being my other crutch.

“I got a healing potion in case you need it.” Blue offered.

“Thanks, buddy.” I said, grabbing a bottle from his hands and drinking its contents. “That makes me feel so much better… physically, at least.”

“Physically? What do you mean?” Red wondered.

“I… Need some time…” I insisted, racing out of the door, embarrassed, humiliated, and overwhelmed. The sun was sinking and I just needed some time to think. I had to get away, my anxious thoughts were overtaking me. I put my wings on and flew to a cliff overlooking the Valley of Peace. I gazed at the valley, watched the sunset, and saw the evening transition to night.

“Dad… Where are you when I need you most?” I wondered, tears filling my eyes. “I can’t quit… but… I just don’t know if I can handle this. This is Tai Lung we’re talking about… a kung fu master, one of the greatest… and yet I can’t even handle the training hall. Oh, Dad…” I was interrupted by a gentle voice.

“I see you have found the Sacred Peach Tree of Heavenly Wisdom.”

I turned around and saw Master Oogway behind me.

“Master Oogway!” I yelped. “I’m sorry… I… I just wanted to get away.”

“I see. You get away when you are upset.” I said nothing, just dried my eyes, allowing him to continue. “So why are you upset?” I sighed deeply.

“I… don’t feel like I can handle this. I mean, the Dragon Warrior? My friends are much better fighters than I am. They’re smarter, stronger… But I can’t quit… Can I? Maybe return to my dad’s noodle shop… But… Dad…”

“Quit, don’t quit…” Oogway began, “noodles, don’t noodles. You know, there’s a saying. Yesterday is history, tomorrow is a mystery, but today is a gift.” He lowered his voice to a whisper. “That is why it is called the present.” He left, knocking the tree trunk, dropping a peach into my hand. I looked at it, its orange shade reminded me of Dad.

‘I love you, Purple.’ I heard Dad’s voice in my head say. ‘I always will. Do your best, and remember where our strength comes from. With God, all things are possible.’

“Hey, Dad.” I said to the peach. “I know I’m making you proud. I know that whatever I do, you’ll be proud of me, but right now… I need you. I miss you dearly. I’m not ready for life without you. Right now… I could use a hug.”

“Well, I’m not your dad…” another voice said, startling me. I turned and saw SC approaching me. “But I’d be more than willing to wrap you in a warm embrace.”

“Hey there, SC… I’d like that very much.” I confessed. We hugged each other tightly, tears flowing down our faces, and then released.

“What’s up? Why’d you run off?” SC asked gently. I sighed.

“I got reminded… of my birth dad, Navy.” I confessed. “Mostly from Shifu. I mean, an older, male figure who wants nothing to do with me because he deems me as an incapable fighter, unable to live up to these massive expectations… I thought I pushed past it, that trauma, that stage of my life, but I feel like I’m back to square one.”

“Oh, Purple…” SC sympathized. “I can’t imagine what’s going through your head right now, but whatever lies are in there, find them and get rid of them. No matter what you’re telling yourself, I’ve seen a lot of growth in you. You were once a liar, a cheater, deeply broken because of Navy. That isn’t who you are any more. I’ve seen a remarkable metamorphosis, you’ve grown from caterpillar to butterfly and it’s been so beautiful to see. You’re a friend, you’re selfless and brave, strong and loyal, endlessly loving and… redeemed, from the inside out. You are loved, Purple, not just by us, your family, but by the One living inside of you. Never EVER forget that.” I looked at SC, and then started bawling, throwing my arms around him.

“Thanks, SC.” I cried, sniffling. “I greatly appreciate it. It’s exactly what Dad would’ve told me. You’re like my makeshift dad.” SC laughed.

“I could never live up to him… but I do appreciate the compliment.” SC said, blushing. I wiped my eyes. “Shall we return to our lofts?” SC asked.

“Yeah.”

“And… the peach in your hand?”

“I’ll hold onto it. It reminds me of Dad… It’s orange, round, and so, so sweet, just like Dad.” SC laughed. “And you as well, SC. I appreciate you taking the time to talk.”

“Anything for you, Purple. You deserve it after all you’ve been through.”

“In the morning… I’m gonna kick some butt.” I promised. “And I’m doing it for you, Dad.” I said to the peach. “You and my brother. Oh, I hope Gold’s doing well…”

Gold

I flew through frigid cold and snow toward the massive prison, imposing rhino guards flanking the door drew closer and closer as my nearly frozen elytra flapped quickly to throw the ice and snow off. I regretted not going with at least some layer of protection from the elements, but when Master Shifu yells at you to do something, you don’t take into account things like weather. I eventually managed to reach the door of the prison, and got weapons pointed at me.

“Wait, wait!” I pleaded. “I have a message from Master Shifu!”

Intrigued, the rhino guards allowed me inside. I was relieved to get protection from the cold, but seeing the numerous massive armed rhinos gave me concern. I handed the letter to Commander Vachir, the warden of the prison, and he read it.

“What?!” He bellowed. “‘Double the guards? Your prison may not be adequate?!’” He lowered to my level. “You doubt my prison’s security?” I wanted to fight back, but considering I was outnumbered and proverbially outgunned, I had no choice.

“No, no no no no no…” I insisted. “Shifu does, I’m just a messenger.” I gulped.

“I’ll give you a message for your Master Shifu, escape from Chorh-Gom Prison is impossible!” Vachir boasted. I looked over the edge of a bridge. The prison was essentially a deep hole, bridges leading back and forth lower and lower, Tai Lung at the very bottom, locked in chains. Vachir slapped me on the back, knocking something from my inventory… a feather… which slowly floated down… I didn’t notice at the time. It was so small and the prison was so dark.

“One way in, one way out, 1,000 guards and one prisoner.” Vachir continued as he led me to an elevator.

“Yes, but Tai Lung…” I squeaked. I’m not usually this afraid, but I didn’t want to be these rhinos’ next charging dummy or something like that. Vachir stepped on the elevator, and I followed.

“Take us down.” He ordered. We slowly descended to the bottom where we stopped. “Behold Tai Lung.” I gasped in shock. There before us was the imposing snow leopard. Even though he was subdued, held in chains and a tortoise shell-shaped piece of armor of sorts, being in his presence still sent a shiver up my spine. Though it was kinda cool to see him in person, I must admit. However, I knew of his power, his strength, his fury. He’s not one to be trifled with, but the arrogant commander thought otherwise.

“Crossbows at the ready!” Vachir thundered. Massive crossbows were lowered, pointed at the snow leopard. “Hey! Didn’t you hear?” Vachir mocked. “Oogway’s gonna choose the next Dragon Warrior and it’s not gonna be you.”

“Dude, you’re insane…” I gasped. “And I know insane. I live off of it, practically, but even for me, this is too much. You don’t poke a snow leopard! Especially one as powerful as Tai Lung…” I know a thing or two about large, predatory animals… especially after one incident at the zoo when I was younger. Let’s just say… I almost got an up-close look at the tiger enclosure. I would’ve if Dad didn’t grab me by the shirt and pull me back onto the right side of the railing. Signs be d****d, tigers are cool!

“I got him completely immobilized.” Vachir assured me, stepping on Tai Lung’s tail. “Awwww, did I step on the widdle kitty’s tail? Awwww…” He added, using baby talk to mock him.

“I… Think I should be going. Shifu is clearly overreacting and he’s got nothing to worry about.” I insisted.

“Good call.” Vachir quipped as we headed to the elevator. As we were carried back up, the feather that got knocked out of my inventory landed in front of Tai Lung…

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

As we rode the elevator back up and climbed the stairs and bridges to the main door, I thought I heard something… the sound of locks clicking and pressure points being activated. I peered over the edge of the bridge Vachir and I were on, and though it was difficult, I’m pretty sure I knew what was happening. Tai Lung was breaking free. The feather I dropped he picked up with his tail, and he used it to activate the pressure points in his shell-shaped prison. He breathed heavily, and soon broke free of it. By the time Vachir heard it… it was too late.

“Oh no!” He shouted.

“Tai Lung…” I breathed. All the rhino guards flooded down the bridges, but thankfully he was still chained down by massive boulders restraining his arms. He was freer, but he still couldn't move from his spot.

“Fire crossbows!” Vachir ordered.

“Fire!” Another rhino shouted. The crossbows were fired, but Tai Lung managed to dodge each shot, even using one to break one of his wrist cuffs. With one arm free, he broke his other restraint and growled loudly.

“Tai Lung’s free!” I gasped. I didn’t know how to feel, just a mix of emotions. Sure, watching him do this was really bad***, but I feared my family, heck the entire Valley of Peace, would be in danger because of him. “I got to warn Shifu!” I bolted, but Vachir grabbed me by the neck.

“You’re not going anywhere, and neither is he!”

“Let go of me!”

“Bring it up!” Vachir ordered. The elevator was pulled up, but as it turned out, he didn’t need it. He simply ripped the other crossbow bullets out of the ground around him and kicked them into the wall, making a sort of makeshift staircase. He used it to climb up to the elevator, protecting himself from a wave of arrows. Once he reached the top of the elevator, it was practically over. The one thousand weaponed guards Vachir bragged about were no match for Tai Lung and his incredible kung fu skills. Using everything at his disposal, from the rhinos' weapons to his claws, he only climbed higher and higher, soon resulting in a stand-off with Vachir in front of the door.

“Oh… my… gosh…” I whispered to myself. “Tai Lung… Live and in person…”

“Not for long.” Vachir quipped. “Now!”

A rhino armed with a bow and flaming arrow shot into the ceiling, igniting multiple explosives and sending practically the entire place crashing down on Tai Lung. He tried desperately to reach us, only to fall at the last moment. The rhinos thought he was done for. I knew better. Tai Lung leapt onto various pieces of debris, climbing them and eventually reaching the top, finding a stick of dynamite that was quickly burning out. He ripped it out of its place and flung it at us.

One massive explosion later, I was flung out the door onto my gut, gasping for breath. I wheezed and looked around. The rhinos around me were motionless, and the only thing left of Vachir was his horn protector. I put my wings on to fly away, but Tai Lung grabbed me by the next with his massive, clawed paw. I gulped hard, sweating bullets. For a moment, I thought he was going to kill me, but instead, he sighed deeply.

“Thanks for coming,” He mocked, stroking my hair with his free paw. “I was beginning to think I’d been forgotten. Fly back there and tell them… the real Dragon Warrior is coming home.”

I nodded, terrified, and he tossed me into the air. I regained my balance and flew into the air, looking back at Tai Lung as I flew away from him.

‘Guys… I hope you’re ready for this…’ I thought. ‘This is going to be insane…’

Chapter 21: Training Day

Purple

I woke up early the next morning and headed to the courtyard. I felt the crisp, morning air and examined the various training tools and things. I wanted to simply warm up, get some stretching in. I knew what was ahead of me. I had a long day of training and… I feared Tai Lung. If I wanted to do this, I needed to bring my A-game. I pulled the peach out of my inventory.

“For you, Dad.” I said to it. “I’m doing this for you.”

In the middle of my stretches and warming up, I heard the doors burst open behind me. Not surprisingly, there was Master Shifu, the Gang and Candy behind him.

“What are you doing?!” Shifu demanded.

“Good morning, Master!” I said, a little startled. I greeted him with the fist-in-palm thing. “I was just warming up.” I slipped the peach back into my inventory, but Shifu must’ve noticed it.

“Put that down!” He demanded. “The only souvenirs we collect here are bloody knuckles and broken bones.”

“I’d prefer not to have my bones broken…” I said weakly.

“Let’s get started.” Shifu said, breezing past me. Red and the others walked up to me.

“This isn’t gonna be pretty, buddy.” Red confessed. “Please… Don’t get hurt.”

“We’ll try to take it easy on you.” SC added.

“Guys, guys… I appreciate it, but I beg… Give me your best shot.”

“Purple, I can’t bear the thought of hurting you deliberately.” Blue admitted.

“I concur. I cannot inflict pain on a beloved friend of mine.” Yellow agreed.

“You can handle it, right, dude?” Green asked. I nodded yes in confirmation.

“Just don’t get thrown down the stairs, Po-ple.” Candy ordered. “Shifu can be ruthless.”

“My birth dad was abusive.” I stated bluntly. “Shifu’s got nothing on him.” My tone might’ve been firm, but my mind was not. Shifu was in fact reminding me of Navy, and the past trauma I endured, but seeing my friends, I remembered that they were in my corner, supporting me through these trying times.

“Students! Line up!” Shifu called. “Master Yellow will be the first to challenge our ‘Dragon Warrior.’”

“Yes, Master Shifu.” We all said in unison. The guys stepped to the side while Yellow and I sparred with each other. Dad has taught me a few things, and I was able to hold my own for a while, but Yellow eventually took me down. It was the same story for everyone else. Blue, Red, Candy, SC, and finally Green all flexed their fighting skills on me, but every time I wanted to back down, I remembered the peach in my inventory. I was not letting Dad down. Every defeat, I asked for more, and as morning turned to afternoon and then evening, Shifu only became more furious. Finally, after Green pinned me down, Shifu seemingly snapped.

“I’ve been taking it easy on you, stick figure, but no more! Your next opponent will be me.”

‘Oh jeez, this’ll be fun…’ I thought sarcastically to myself.

“Boys… brace the door.” Candy advised. “I don’t think anyone wants to see Po-ple fall down the stairs.” The guys nodded and walked to cover the door.

“Step forth.” Shifu ordered. I didn’t, just remained in my fighting stance, but Shifu quickly showed off why he has the title of Master, showing kung fu skills that I think even blew SC away. “The true path to victory is to find your opponent’s weakness and make him suffer for it!” Shifu said as he bent my arm behind my back painfully. I said nothing, I was in a lot of pain, allowing him to continue treating me like a punching bag, as I was unable to counter his attacks. “To take his strength and use it against him until he finally falls or quits.”

“A real warrior never quits,” I argued. “Master Shifu, I will never quit!” Furious, Shifu tossed me into the air and kicked me at the door. Incredibly, I didn’t fall down the stairs. The guys secured it well and I was collapsed in a heap in front of the door. Shifu scoffed and left, and the guys opened the door and saw my contorted body.

“Purple! Are you OK?!” Red gasped. I could see tears in his eyes.

“I’ve been better,” I winced painfully.

“Take him into the lofts.” SC ordered. “Carefully. Carry him with this.” SC placed a bed next to me, and the guys carefully lifted me onto it.

“Ow ow ow…” I groaned. “Now I understand Shifu’s ‘broken bones’ comment.”

“I can patch you up no problem.” Blue promised.

“Second Coming! Come with me!” Shifu called from a distance. “We need to meditate.” SC looked at us.

“We can bring Purple back.” Green assured him. “We can’t have Shifu do to you what he did to Purple.”

“Poor guy…” Candy sympathized, examining my twisted body. “SC, you’d better go.” SC sighed.

“I trust you guys.” He said. “Yes, Master Shifu. I’m coming.” He took off, leaving me, the FSF, and Candy.

“Keep the bed level, guys.” Yellow ordered. “A flat 180 degrees, parallel to the ground. Do not fret, Purple, you shall be mended before you are capable of acknowledging it.”

“Thanks, guys.” I replied. “I truly couldn’t ask for better friends.”

The FSF each grabbed a leg of the bed and slowly, carefully, lifted me up like an old-school gurney or something. Candy led the way to the lofts, showering me with her sympathies and apologies, practically begging if she could do anything. She has a genuinely soft heart at her core, but also some grit and determination… like Red. I was soon carried into the loft and set down in my bedroom, where Blue made and fed me a Regen potion.

“I got Awkward potions for days.” He explained. “Along with a brewing stand, blaze powder and all the ingredients I’ll ever need.”

“I got something for you, Purple.” Red said, pulling out a spawn egg and dropping it. Out popped a calico kitten that bounced around excitedly. “I know how much you love cats, so I thought you might like a fluffy friend, to comfort you while you heal.”

“I appreciate it, Red.” I admitted, tears filling my eyes. The cat leapt onto my sore body. I stroked its soft fur as I felt my bones knit. The soft kitten soothed me greatly, and its purring was even more soothing. “You guys are so good to me.”

“I can only speculate how difficult this stage must be for you.” Yellow sympathized. “All of these expectations, and without your dad alongside you.”

“Not to mention Shifu trying to force you to quit, dude…” Green began. “I just hope you’re not getting flashbacks of… well, you know…”

“I have been, Green.” I confessed. “Navy is trying to break me. But seeing you guys care for me so much… I cannot thank you guys enough. Plus, my true Dad’s still with me.”

“How so, Purple?” Candy asked.

“He’s with me in spirit.” I answered, pulling the peach out of my inventory. “I kept this peach. It’s a reminder of Dad… and to not quit.”

“Awwwww, how sweet!” Red gushed.

“Thanks, Reddy Bear. Thank all of you.” I replied.

“Wait… Peach… The peach tree!” Candy realized. “Oh my gosh it might be happening soon! I’m so sorry, Po-ple, do you mind…?”

“No no, go right ahead.”

“Thanks!” She bolted.

“Where’s she off to?” Blue asked.

“I think… She wants to see Oogway’s death.” I theorized. Red nodded in agreement. “While we’re here, Red, perhaps you could tell us about Tai Lung…” I curled up in my seat, my kitten in my lap purring gently. Red smiled and spun the tale.

“Shifu found him as a cub and he raised him as his son. And when the boy showed talent in kung fu, Shifu trained him. He believed in him, he told him he was destined for greatness. As Tai Lung grew older, he mastered the Thousand Scrolls of Kung Fu, the first ever to do so, but even after all that, it was never enough for him. He wanted the dragon scroll, but Oogway saw darkness in his heart and refused.

“This led Tai Lung down an even darker path. Outraged, he laid waste to the valley. He tried to take the scroll by force, and Shifu had to destroy what he had created… but seeing the boy he raised and loved like a son… how could he? Shifu’s moment of weakness was enough for Tai Lung to knock him aside. He leapt for the scroll, but Oogway used a special nerve attack to paralyze him… all as Shifu watched, helplessly unable to stop the boy he raised.

“Tai Lung was sent to Chorh-Gom Prison afterwards, but the scars ran deep for Shifu and they still do. He loved Tai Lung more than he had ever loved anyone before… or since, and as a result, he became a cold mentor and distant father figure for fear of a repeat of what happened to Tai Lung, and it affected poor Tigress, a student he taught and raised from childhood. Seeing her little tiger cub face at that moment, her eyes filling with tears… I wish I could’ve given her a hug at that moment. She needed it desperately.

“But that’s Tai Lung’s story, Purple,” Red finished, “the effects continue to be felt… even now.”

“Jeez, Red… I forgot how tragic Tai Lung’s story was.” I gasped. “I mean, his birth parents didn’t want him, his adopted father seemingly betrayed him… I can’t say I blame him for his reaction. I practically did the same thing.”

“It was more running away with a broken heart,” Green reasoned, “but yeah, destroying Minecraft, the Valley of Peace…”

“Comparable actions, I believe.” Yellow noted.

“But… How was Tai Lung defeated, Red?” Blue asked.

“The Wuxi Finger Hold sent him to the Spirit Realm.” Red answered. “You know how to do it, right, Purple? You might need it in the future.”

“I think so… Grab the opponent’s finger and raise and lower my pinky, right?” I guessed.

“Correct. And don’t forget to finish it off with a ‘Skadoosh.’” Red confirmed. We laughed. “Hey, speaking of which, what are you gonna name your new kitten?”

“Hmm… A cat that soothes me, like a therapy cat… Yellow, ‘Perrito’ is Spanish for ‘puppy,’ right?”

“Affirmative.” Yellow answered. “And ‘Gatito’ is Spanish for ‘kitten.’ ‘-ito’ at the end of a Spanish word implies small or a baby animal, like ‘Burrito’ is ‘little donkey,’ as well as a delicious entree.”

“Wait, really?” Blue asked.

“‘Burro’ is ‘donkey’ in Spanish.” Yellow answered. “I am dead serious my friend.”

“Well, I’m not going to name my little kitten here after a food.” I said. “Instead… I like Gatito. My little therapy kitten and sweetest furry friend… Assuming Dad lets me keep you, of course. I’m kinda skeptical. I mean, raising two kids is tough enough. A cat… He doesn’t need a pet on top of that.”

“If nothing else, Purple, I’ll take care of him once we get outta here.” Red promised.

“Thanks, Reddy Bear. I appreciate it.” The guys surrounded and hugged me, even more of a comfort than even little Gatito.

The Second Coming

Master Shifu took me inside the training hall. As night fell, he lit several candles and began meditating, trying to find his “inner peace.” While I didn’t meditate like him, I did take a moment to enjoy the quiet, to think… to reflect… to pray for my friends. I knew Purple was going through it mentally and he seemed to be in bad shape physically after Shifu got through with him. The worst of both worlds. As I quietly lifted Purple up in prayer, Shifu seemed to hear something with his large ears.

“Would whoever is making that flapping sound quiet down?!” He shouted. I returned to my thoughts, and so did Shifu… that is, until someone slammed into the floor from above with a thud.

“Ow…” Said a familiar voice. “I need to work on my landings. Good job, Ace Pilot…”

Shifu and I turned around. There, before us, was Gold, his wings looking like they got some good wear and tear on them.

“Oh, Gold, I’m glad you’re back. I could use some good news right now.” Shifu began.

Gold paused for a second before he let slip, “Uhhh…. Tai Lung is free… and he’s coming back.”

Shifu’s face went from comfort to horror and he bolted for the door. After a moment of shock, I raced down to Gold.

“Goldy!” I exclaimed, hugging him. “I’m glad to see you’re OK.”

“Of course, dude, why wouldn’t I be?” Gold quipped. “But I am glad to see you too. Where’s Purple? And, while I’m at it, what’d I miss?”

“First off, Purple’s in the lofts. He got his butt kicked by Shifu and was left in a bad way. The guys are helping him out.”

“Oh no… He’ll be OK, right?”

“Knowing Blue, he’ll be fine. Blue has so many healing potions he could put hospitals out of business.” Gold laughed.

“Can I see him?”

“Of course! Why not?”

“I don’t know…” Gold shrugged. “Thanks, SC.”

“Oh, before you go, your dad wants you back at the noodle shop in the valley. I think Mr. Ping has become Mr. King.” Gold laughed again.

“He worries too much…”

“Can you blame him?”

“No… Let me say hi to my baby bro and I’ll be there. As much as I crave independence… I still love Dad.”

“And he loves you too.” I replied. “Have fun! I need to find Shifu.”

I followed Shifu outside into the night, the moon illuminating my surroundings. I didn’t know fully where Shifu was, but I had seen the movie before. I racked my brain for what happened next, and a faint flicker of something came to mind…

Peach petals…

Pink peach petals…

“The peach tree!”

I flew over to the peach tree. Sure enough, there were Shifu and Oogway, talking. As I drew closer, I spotted Candy on the ground in front of me. I lowered and approached Candy.

“Candy! I didn’t expect to see you here.”

“Hey, SC. I just wanted to see this moment.”

“What’s been happening?” I asked.

“The two masters have been discussing Purple… and their philosophies.” I didn’t hear their entire conversation, but I pieced together that Shifu was skeptical about Purple’s ability to defeat Tai Lung, while Oogway was confident in that, using a peach as a metaphor for Purple.

“But a peach cannot defeat Tai Lung!” Shifu protested to Oogway.

“Maybe it can… If you are willing to guide it. To nurture it. To believe in it.”

“But how? How?! I need your help, Master.” Shifu begged.

“No, you just need to believe. Promise me, Shifu, promise me you will believe.”

“I… I will… try…”

“Mm, good.” Oogway said, a light breeze stirring the petals. “My time has come… You must continue your journey without me.” He handed his staff to Shifu, who stuttered in shock. Candy and I watched in awe as Oogway was surrounded by peach petals, floating into the air. Shortly after, the turtle master of kung fu disappeared, the petals drifting into the air on a slight breeze. Candy wiped tears from her eyes.

“It’s such a beautiful moment…” She wept.

“But… Now what?” I asked.

“Now… We return to the kitchen in the loft.” Candy said. “I suspect it’s almost time for the Furious Five to intercept Tai Lung.”

Chapter 22: Tai Lung vs. FSF (Candy)

SC and I returned to the loft, where we found the boys in the kitchen. Purple was feeling better thanks to Blue’s potion and wanted to repay us with some cooking. I never knew Purple was interested in cooking, but he claimed that he and his dad do this every now and then. It’s another way they spend time together. Once Purple finished, he served each of us and we all dug in.

“Dang, Purple, this is delicious.” Green commented.

“I agree, the spice blend you used is aromatic.” Yellow added.

“It’s just a few herbs I found in the cabinets.” Purple explained. His cat leapt onto the table and sniffed around our bowls. “Aww… Come here, Gatito.” Purple gently called. The kitten strolled over and Purple stroked its fur. “You’re so cute, aren’t ya?”

“He really seems to like you, Purple.” Red noted.

“Who doesn’t love Po-ple?” I asked. We laughed.

“Blue, does this meet your standards?” SC asked.

“It does… and it satisfies my craving for Chinese.” Blue answered, rubbing his belly. “Mmmmm! It’s wonderful! Now all it needs is a little diced Netherwart.”

“Really, buddy?” Yellow wondered. “You nearly got devoured by a bear because of Netherwart.”

“You try it once… You’ll love it for life…” Blue said dreamily. As we ate, talked, laughed, and joked, we were suddenly visited by Shifu.

“Tai Lung has escaped from prison and you are acting like children!” He demanded. He then turned to Purple. “He is after the Dragon Scroll and you are the only one who can stop him!”

He all froze, looking at Purple. He seemed to be nervous, and understandably so. After a pause, Purple spoke up.

“I- I can’t! I don’t have the skills!” He protested. I felt compelled to do something. Seeing Purple so panicked made me want to get out there and fight. Besides, I know this movie very well. It was almost time for the Furious Five–Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, and myself–to intervene.

“Master, please, let us stop Tai Lung!” I insisted.

“No! It is not your destiny to stop Tai Lung, it is his!” He gestured to where Purple was, only to find him gone. “Where’d he go?” He left to look for him. I was about to bolt, but I was stopped.

“Wait, what?” Green asked. “What do you mean ‘We,’ Candy?”

“It’s how the movie goes. The Furious Five try to stop him.” I explained.

“Candy, you know they were unsuccessful.” Red said. “Tai Lung nearly killed them. Er, us.”

“If nothing else, we need to buy time for Shifu to train Purple.” I figured. “But I have to see something. I’ll be right back.”

I bolted with my speed, leaping and scaling to the roof just in time to see Purple breaking for the stairs and Shifu landing in front of him, stopping him in his tracks.

“You cannot leave!” Shifu shouted. “A real warrior never quits!”

“C’mon!” Purple moaned. “How am I supposed to beat Tai Lung? I can’t even beat you to the stairs!”

“You will beat him because you are the Dragon Warrior!” Shifu argued, poking Purple in the gut with his staff.

“Ow! You never believed that! Ever since day one, you’ve wanted me gone!” Purple argued. “You never had any faith in me.”

“Yes,” Shifu retaliated, tripping Purple up, “but now I ask you to trust in your master just as I have come to trust in mine.” Shifu fought back.

“Master Shifu…” Purple began, sighing deeply. “I’m not the Dragon Warrior.”

“Then why didn’t you quit? You knew I was trying to get rid of you, yet you stayed!”

“I didn’t quit… because I want to make my father proud.” Purple explained. “I never could do that for my birth father, and I can’t relive that pain again now that I have a second chance. I can’t fail another stern, male, authority figure, one who demeans me because I can’t live up to these crushing expectations.”

There was a long pause. Even watching from afar, I could feel the passion and hurt in Purple’s voice, the pain he must’ve been feeling confessing all this to Shifu. He told me his birth dad was abusive, and it took me by surprise. Was he seeing his birth dad again in Shifu? I could feel my heart shatter for him. Purple, along with Red, was one of the first people to believe in me, even when I wasn’t worth fighting for, when I was working for Flodge. He stood up for me… I just wanted to stand up for him. Before I could make a move, though, Purple resumed.

“I want to trust you,” He continued, “I want to believe there’s a worthy mentor in there, but I just don’t know how I can. I mean, how can you turn me into the Dragon Warrior? Huh?”

Shifu paused, unable to answer, but Purple demanded one.

“How?” … “How?!” … “HOW?!?”

“I don’t know!” Shifu shouted. “I don’t know…”

Purple sighed, but then pulled out the peach from his pocket.

“I’m willing to try, though… If you’re willing to teach me.” He glanced into the sky. I think I saw him lock eyes with me before returning to Shifu. “I can’t quit on my family… They’ve done too much for me to turn back now.”

“Good going, Purple.” I said to myself, wiping tears from my eyes. “You got a pretty good teacher.” I turned around and saw the Gang behind me, startling me. I was not expecting them to be there. “Jeez, boys, don’t do that.”

“Sorry, Candy.” Red apologized.

“SC, I need you to remain behind.” I explained. “Purple’s gonna need all the support he can get, and from how Red speaks of you, you are the best fighter among you five.”

“Got it, Candy.” SC said, nodding.

“The rest of you… Don’t try and stop me. I’m going to slow down Tai Lung.” Before I could bolt, Red grabbed me by the hand.

“We’re not trying to stop you.” He said. “We’re coming with you.” I could see tears in his eyes, and it was making me tear up as well. I smiled at him, nodded, and leapt off the roof toward the Valley below. Red with his wings caught me and put me on the ground on my feet.

“Keep up, boys!” I shouted, bolting with my speed.

“I’d like to see you keep up, Candy!” Red teased. I chuckled as we raced to intercept the incoming snow leopard.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The FSF–as the boys say–and I raced through the night into the day, Red and I taking the lead, until we got to a rickety rope bridge connecting the mainland and a random spire. Across the bridge was the one and only Tai Lung. He growled at me, I returned the favor the best I could. I had to inwardly contain my enthusiasm and excitement. Sure, Tai Lung is the main villain, but this is my favorite movie franchise we’re talking about. And Tai Lung is just a total bad***. With one loud roar, he stormed across the bridge.

“Cut it!” I shouted. Immediately, the boys grabbed swords and cut the ropes holding the bridge up, but Tai Lung was too fast. He leapt at us, so I retaliated not with a back flip like Tigress, but with a jump and an uppercut to the jaw. The FSF grabbed the rope, keeping the bridge up, leaving me in a duel with Tai Lung.

“Where’s the Dragon Warrior?” He mocked.

“How do you know you’re not looking at her?” Tai Lung laughed at my reply.

“You think I’m a fool? I know you’re not the Dragon Warrior. None of you! I heard how he fell out of the sky in a ball of fire. About how he’s a warrior the world has never seen…” He paused for a moment. “He is a worthy opponent! Our battle will be legendary!”

With my speed, I bolted, punching and kicking with whatever fighting skills I could muster. However, he seemed to block and counter each of my strikes, launching me upwards–making me land so hard I broke one of the bridge planks–and then kicking me through dozens more boards. He twisted the ropes, choking me, until Yellow intervened on my behalf.

Yellow swooped in and socked Tai Lung in the face, causing him to untwist the bridge. I was freed, but in a freefall as well. I owe Red, he swooped in and saved me, but Yellow… His neck was in the grip of Tai Lung’s paw.

“Blue!” He cried out.

“Go!” Green assured him. Blue handed him the rope and charged onto the bridge. With help from a strength potion, he clocked Tai Lung, freeing Yellow and knocking him back toward where I was, but he retained his balance on the dilapidated bridge. Quickly recovering, Tai Lung charged toward the FSF. I knew I had to do something.

“Green!” I shouted. “Give Tai Lung some whiplash!”

“You got it, dude!” Green shouted, raising and quickly lowering the rope, causing a ripple-like effect to course through it. Yellow and Blue leapt to avoid the whip, but Tai Lung was not as lucky. When Red dropped me back on the bridge, I knew we needed one last hurrah.

“Now!” I shouted. The Primaries and I charged at Tai Lung, Blue was first to reach him. He delivered a quick hit, and Yellow quickly followed, knocking him into the air. Red, with his wings, sliced a piece of bridge with his sword and tied Tai Lung up with it, and I finished him off with one final whack. I cut the bridge with a slice from Red’s sword, trapping Tai Lung on one side, while Green yanked us back onto solid ground safely on the other side.

“We did it!” Blue exclaimed, high-fiving Yellow and Green. Red and I, however, knew the battle wasn’t over yet.

“Don’t get too excited.” I ordered. “I fear…”

As I was speaking, somehow, the bridge where Red tied up Tai Lung began swinging… and then whipped into the air. Suddenly, Tai Lung landed with a powerful BOOM behind us, and we all turned around in surprise.

“Shifu taught you well…” Tai Lung began, hitting Blue with his infamous nerve strike, essentially paralyzing him. We gasped in horror. “But he didn’t teach you everything.”

That’s all I remember before he paralyzed me as well.

Chapter 23: Kingly Advice (Purple)

I awoke early the next morning after my talk with Shifu the night before and made it to the training hall to practice my skills a bit more. SC, strangely enough, was there waiting for me.

“Morning Purple!” SC greeted cheerily.

“Morning, SC. I’m surprised to see you up this early.” I confessed.

“Yeah, Candy wanted me to hang back with you, and I figured you’d want to warm up.”

“I do. I have a lot on my plate,” I began, feeling the butterflies in my stomach, “but speaking of Candy, where is she? And the guys?”

“They are off trying to hold back Tai Lung.”

“By themselves?” I gasped. “And you didn’t go with them?”

“Candy wanted me to remain with you.” SC confessed. “I let her take the reins because she knows this movie better than I do. Kung Fu Panda is to her what The Last Wish is to Red, I’m sure you’re aware.” I nodded, confirming this. SC continued, “Plus, I have to agree with her. You need the support. Without your dad for the first time in years, it’s a massive change.”

“It’s been hard, I’ll admit, and Shifu hasn’t been helping.” I confessed. “I was telling the guys about it while in the lofts the other night, but Shifu’s reminding me of my birth dad. I mean, an older, male authority figure who wants nothing to do with me because he deems me incapable of fighting? I’ve heard this story before, and it’s a story I never wanted to relive…” Tears filled my eyes. SC walked over and put a hand on my shoulder.

“You know, at one point, Alan wanted me gone, too.” He admitted. “He tried deleting me from existence. All I was doing was having fun with my friends, the guys. I meant him no harm, but when he erased the others, I had to act.”

“Really?” I gasped. “Wow… I never knew…”

“I don’t often tell that story. It’s just water under the bridge to me, the guys, and Alan. We’ve put it behind us and get along great now, though I think we do annoy him at times.” I chuckled. “Regardless, I know how you feel. I know that pain of losing everything, everyone close to me. My advice for you and Shifu… He’ll come around. I promise. I saw him under the peach tree. He was willing to try to train you, and if you are Po in this universe, as Candy likes to call you, then your relationship will mend.” I nodded in agreement and looked at SC’s emerald green eyes.

“Thanks, SC.” I hugged him.

“You’re welcome.” We released. “Shall we spar?”

“I’d like that a lot. Thanks… ‘Dad.’” SC chuckled.

“I could never live up to King’s shadow…”

“A wise, older, orange stick who loves and supports me? Who is there when I need it?” I asked. “You’re exactly like him, SC, and I greatly appreciate it.” SC smiled back at me, wiping tears from his eyes. “Let’s get to training.”

We sparred together for a little while. Playing with him reminded me of how fierce of a fighter he is, and looking back, I have no idea how I managed to steal the MGI from him and Red, the two best fighters in the Gang. He didn’t hold back, but neither did I, using my wings to my advantage. As we sparred, we were stopped by Shifu, who ushered us to join him. We agreed and followed.

Shifu led us to the Pool of Sacred Tears, the birthplace of Kung Fu, and he vowed to train me in the art of kung fu, with SC promising to teach and support me on the way. With SC in my corner, my pseudo father figure while Dad was gone, I trained under Shifu, learning balance, strength, and how to counter my opponent’s attacks. It was hard, and when that fear arose again, I looked at SC’s orange shade. He reminded me of Dad… and reminded me of how far I’ve come. I pushed through, and even had a chance to show off my skills when I defeated Shifu and SC in an intense and drawn-out dumpling battle. I didn’t want the prize dumpling, though. It was bouncing off everything and didn’t seem sanitary.

As we returned back to the Jade Palace, the sun setting in the distance, I felt a lot more confident in my abilities. Even more so, I felt like I had made Dad proud, and I told SC as much.

“Purple, you’re already making him proud. You know that. I know it.” SC insisted.

“I know, but I still don’t want to let him down.” I said. “I want to do my best… for you… for my family, my dad and my brothers.”

“That’s understandable, but if you ask me, you have done… awesome.” SC complimented. “Like really awesome. Did you see how you fought me and Shifu? You showed off moves I’ve never seen from you!”

“Thanks, SC.” I felt myself blush.

“And you used your wings and your environment to your benefit, too.” SC added. “Even from our first fight, you always have had a skill at using anything you can, especially your wings.”

“It’s my fighting style, one Navy cultivated.” I explained. “‘Be ruthless,’ he always told me. ‘You can’t hold back. Use anything you can. We both know how pathetic you are…’”

“Oh jeez…” SC said sorrowfully.

“I wish I didn’t remember it, to be honest, but when it’s all you hear for a decade plus, it becomes ingrained in you.”

“I can imagine.” SC sympathized. “Must’ve been hard growing up with him.”

“Imagine Shifu… just without any redeeming qualities.” I said, lowering my voice so that Shifu couldn’t hear me. “If nothing else, that whole experience has made me all the more grateful for you guys: Dad, my brother, you five… You don’t appreciate the light until you’ve lived in darkness, as I have, for so many years.”

“That’s pretty deep, young one.” SC commented, wrapping an arm around my shoulder. “I would have to agree with it, too.”

“Thanks, SC. Thank you so much for your love and acceptance. You and the guys have been… some of the greatest things that have ever happened to me.”

“You’re welcome, Prince.” SC replied, tearing up. “But the guys… I hope they’re OK.”

At that moment, I heard something behind me, some… flapping of sorts. I recognized it instantly, it was the flap of elytra, and upon turning around, I saw Red flying toward us, struggling under the weight of… something. He crash-landed in front of us, Blue, Yellow, Green and Candy as stiff as boards.

“GUYS!” I yelled, racing over to them. SC and Shifu joined me. “What happened? Are you OK?”

“We were no match for his nerve attack.” Red explained breathlessly.

“He has gotten stronger,” Shifu muttered, poking Green until he became unfrozen. He did the same for Blue and then Candy, who was extremely disappointed with herself.

“I thought we could stop him.” She confessed.

“He could have killed you.” Shifu reprimanded, walking over to Yellow.

“Why didn’t he?” Green wondered.

“Because he thought he could strike fear into our hearts but it won’t work!” Shifu answered, stretching and twisting Yellow until he was back to normal. Admittedly, my confidence was quickly evaporating seeing what he did to Candy and the FSF, but Shifu guided all of us into the Jade Palace, promising to reward me with the supposed secret to limitless power: the Dragon Scroll.

Once inside, we all gazed up at the dragon statue hanging on the ceiling–the scroll loosely gripped in its teeth–above a pool of water with peach petals floating in it. With Oogway’s–now his–staff, Shifu waved some peach petals into the air, a single one landing on the scroll and causing it to lose its perfect balance. It fell toward the pool, only for Shifu to use his staff to catch it at the last moment, barely touching the water, and handed me the scroll. When I finally got it open, I carefully unrolled it to reveal a shiny gold paper… except…

“It’s blank.” I said. There was nothing written on it.

“What?” Shifu demanded. I showed it to him, and he took it from me, absolutely bewildered. “Blank? … I don’t… I don’t understand…”

My self-doubts were welling up inside me again, and Red must’ve sensed it. He walked up to me and put a gentle hand on my shoulder, Blue right behind him.

“Purple… You OK, buddy?” Red asked gently.

“My self-confidence is shot.” I confessed. “I mean, if the Furious Five couldn’t stop him, what can I do?”

“Don’t say that, Purple.” Blue insisted. “You’re an incredible fighter. You’ve done amazing things. You can do it again.”

“You have new strength, Purple.” Candy added. “At this point, you’re trained, I’d imagine. You can do this.”

“We love ya, dude.” Green said. “We have all the confidence that you will succeed.”

“Infinitely so.” Yellow elaborated. “Do not let those doubts overtake you, because those skepticisms are simply incorrect.”

“I’ve seen how skilled you’ve become.” SC added. “Please… Don’t give in to those toxic mindsets. Not again…”

“But, what about the valley?” I asked him. “Tai Lung is still on his way.” SC didn’t need to answer, as Shifu did it for him.

“We must protect the villagers from Tai Lung’s rage.”

“And what about you, Shifu?” Candy asked.

“I will fight him.”

“But Shifu… He’ll kill you…” I argued weakly.

“Then I finally will have paid for my mistake.” He insisted.

“Shifu… I’m fighting with you.” SC promised. “If you can buy some time for them, I can buy some more.” Shifu looked at him and nodded.

“SC, we can’t let you!” Red insisted, running up to him.

“I’m not risking you guys.” SC said tersely. “You guys are in no shape to fight. Tai Lung might have spared you once… I doubt he’ll spare you again. Just… Promise me if I don’t make it out alive… you’ll protect each other.” We sighed deeply.

“We promise.” We said in unison.

“Evacuate the valley.” Shifu ordered. “Keep everyone safe. And as for you all… I am proud to have been your master.”

We gave Shifu the fist-in-the-palm-bow thing and left the Palace. By the time we reached the bottom of the stairs, it was dark. Candy and the FSF split up to round up the villagers, while I slowly made my trek to Dad’s noodle shop. I felt disappointed, like I let Dad down. I feared I couldn’t stop Tai Lung, like I couldn’t save my family… the same fear I felt when Navy left me and Mom. I reached the circle-shaped doorway of Dad’s noodle shop, where Dad and Gold were packing up.

“Hey, Dad…” I said sheepishly. Dad turned around, and Gold popped his head out from behind the pack, and so did my kitten, Gatito.

“Purple!” Dad exclaimed, racing over and hugging me. “I’m so glad you’re home!”

“Me too.” I said distantly. “Hi, Goldy.”

“Welcome home, Purple!” He exclaimed eagerly.

“Are you OK, my little Prince?” Dad asked. “You seem distracted.”

“I’ve been going through a lot, Dad.” I confessed. “Memories of Navy, fears of letting you down, these expectations I have to live up to… things of that nature.”

“Oh, Purple…” Dad cried, hugging me even tighter. Gold joined him and squeezed me tightly.

“I’m so sorry to hear that, my baby brother.” Gold sympathized.

“Thanks, Golden Oldie.” I joked. Gold released me and shot me a look. “Hey, you need a joking nickname too.”

“Talk to me, Purple… If you want. I’m here to listen.” Dad said.

“I just don’t know if I can do this. I mean… Tai Lung is one of the most powerful kung fu masters out there, and I can’t even beat you in a one-v-one. I’m just so afraid of letting you down, of being unable to stop him from wrecking the valley… and my family…”

“Oh, Purple… You haven’t let me down. In fact, I am prouder of you than ever.” Dad praised, wiping tears from his eyes. “You’ve been through training, right? You pushed through? You didn’t quit?” I nodded, confirming this. “Then that is worthy of praise. Few people can do what you did.”

“But what if I can’t defeat Tai Lung?” I asked.

“You can.” Dad insisted. “And you know why? Because you have power, true power, amazing, incredible, wonder-working power. And it’s not found in how many cool kung fu moves you know or any magic writing on any Dragon Scroll. There’s no ‘secret ingredient’ to it. True strength comes from the One living inside of us, inside our hearts. It’s found when we’re at our weakest. Jesus Christ is the one who is our strength. ‘He gives strength to the weary, and to the one who lacks might He increases power. Though youths grow weary and tired, and vigorous young men stumble badly, yet those who wait for the Lord will gain new strength; they will mount up with wings like eagles, they will run and not get tired, they will walk and not become weary.’” Dad’s words struck a chord with me.

“You remembered my favorite Bible passage, Dad.” I said, looking up at him. “From Isaiah chapter 40.”

“Yep.” Dad confirmed. “I committed it to memory when you told me how much you loved it. We all need those reminders, Purple, even me. Remember our faith, and never forget it. Though It’s easy to, I will admit, but that’s what friends and family are for.”

I looked at the Dragon Scroll and opened it. In it was my reflection, my golden reflection, and in that, I saw more than myself. I saw a brother, a son, a friend, and a fighter. I didn’t see a quitter, someone who lies down in the face of trouble, I saw someone who got through to Dad, then King, someone who saved his friends from Vic, and even worse, a black hole beam, someone who overcame impossible odds with help from his newfound family and his even newer faith. I saw… the face of someone redeemed by Christ, resurrected from the grave of self-doubt and crushing expectations. I looked up at Dad’s gentle amber eyes through my own tear-stained eyes and started bawling again, throwing my arms around him.

“Thanks, Dad.” I wept. “I really needed that right about now.”

“We love you, Purple.” Gold said. “And we know you’ll kick some snow leopard butt.” I couldn’t help but laugh through my tears. I released Dad and looked at my family.

“Thank you both. Now… Please… Get to safety. I’m not putting your lives on the line.” I ordered. “The Dragon Warrior has to at least try to save you both.” Dad sighed deeply.

“I trust you, Purple.” He said. “Please… come home.”

“I will… Else I’ll die trying.” I promised, putting my wings on. I saw the storm clouds over the Jade Palace and lightning cracking in the sky. “It’s time for me to soar on eagle’s wings, and it’s time for Tai Lung to get skadooshed.”

Chapter 24: Father vs. Son (The Second Coming)

Shifu and I watched from the top of the mountain stairs as a stream of light slowly disappeared into the distant horizon. The village was being evacuated in preparation for Tai Lung’s rage, and I hoped that the guys were safe, especially after their close call with the impending snow leopard. As if the threat of a powerful, evil, kung fu warrior wasn’t threatening enough, literal storm clouds were brewing over us. Lightning cracked and thunder boomed above us, fitting for one final battle between us, though I would be lying if I said I wasn’t at least a little bit nervous.

“Stand strong, The Second Coming.” Shifu insisted. “Remember our training.”

“Yes, Master Shifu.”

With that, I looked up and there was Tai Lung, standing on the stairs directly in front of us. He was big, and tall, his imposing nature apparent. He towered over me and Shifu, and glared at us with shining, amber eyes.

“I’ve come home, Master.” Tai Lung breathed.

‘Master?’ I thought. ‘Oh yeah, Tai Lung was Shifu’s student at one point.’ I recalled it from watching it with Red on occasion.

“This is no longer your home and I am no longer your master.” Shifu replied tersely.

“Ah, yes, you have a new favorite.” Tai Lung said slowly. “So where is this… student of yours?” He chuckled. “Did I scare him off?”

“This battle is between you and me.”

“And me too.” I added, backing up Shifu.

“So… That is how it’s going to be.” Tai Lung replied.

“That is how it must be.” Shifu assumed a defensive stance. I did as well, raising my fists. Tai Lung turned around, seemingly to leave, only to leap into the air and slamming a kick so hard onto the ground he broke the ground. Shifu and I leapt back in response, and I quickly realized this fight would be one we would have a hard time winning. Tai Lung picked up a massive boulder and kicked it at us, but Shifu broke it with his hand. As it shattered, Tai Lung leapt through the debris, catching both of us off guard, and knocked us into the Hall of Warriors. I scrambled to my feet and regained a fighting stance.

“I rotted in jail for 20 years because of your weakness!” Tai Lung bellowed.

“Obeying your master is not weakness!” Shifu retaliated.

“You knew I was the Dragon Warrior! You always knew… but when Oogway said otherwise, what did you do?”

I gasped and glanced at Shifu. There was no way he just left his prized student, someone he raised from infancy–I think, my memory about this is fuzzy and the red sticks were helping evacuate the village–out to dry in the face of Master Oogway. It hit different.

As the leader of the Gang, I know what it’s like to be in Shifu’s situation, in a sense. He is the master of the Furious Five, I’m the leader of the FSF. But I couldn’t imagine leaving any of the guys like that, especially Purple when he needed it most, but Shifu… he did exactly that. Perhaps the scorned son had a point. Knowing Purple’s story, his desire for a father figure, I know how much male authority figures can build up, like King… or in some tragic cases, tear down, like Navy.

“What did you do?!” Tai Lung repeated, more angrily this time. “Nothing!” He answered his own question, clenching his fist in anger.

“You were not meant to be the Dragon Warrior! That was not my fault!” Shifu shouted.

“Not your fault?” Tai Lung demanded, stepping toward Shifu. “Who filled my head with dreams?” He tossed a rack of objects over, almost hitting Shifu. “Who drove me to train until my bones cracked?” He grabbed a shield and threw it at both of us, but we swerved out of the way. “Who denied me my DESTINY?!?” He grabbed a rack of sharp swords and tossed them at us all at once. I dodged and swerved, while Shifu deflected them off his hands. For one more strike, Tai Lung tossed and kicked a more massive blade at us, only for Shifu to catch it with his bare hands and drive it into the floor.

“It was never my decision to make!” Shifu shouted. Tai Lung growled and approached Shifu’s staff.

“Get away from that!” I shouted. I don’t know fully why, but I leapt into action. I charged at him, but he coolly turned around, staff in hand, and grabbed me by the neck with his free paw. I felt his claws sink into my body, and the oxygen slowly drained from my throat.

“Pathetic stick figure…” He growled, tossing me into the air and kicking me almost out the door. I gasped for breath, my body scarred and stained crimson red from his claws cutting into my skin, and looked up in time to see Shifu try to retaliate, only for Tai Lung to pin him down with the staff, trapping it on the red panda’s throat.

“Give… me… the scroll!” Tai Lung demanded.

“I’d rather die.” Shifu replied, grasping at the staff. Tai Lung only pressed the staff harder and harder, until it finally cracked, splitting in two near the top. Shifu looked devastated, but Tai Lung was ruthless, kicking Shifu into a wall and scrunching him down like a spring. I staggered to my feet and returned in time to watch Shifu and Tai Lung bounce around the columns in the room and eventually into the air to continue their fight.

“I gotta help him. He’s not gonna make it.” I determined, putting my wings on and flying into the air. Up there, Shifu and Tai Lung traded blows, until Shifu seemed to get the advantage when he began driving Tai Lung into the roof face first. Tai Lung, however, grabbed Shifu off his back and aimed him to take the brunt of the fall. When I tried fighting back, punching and kicking with all my might, Tai Lung blocked my attacks with one paw and slashed my wings, sending me free falling into the roof, through it, and back into the Hall of Warriors, where Tai Lung delivered me and Shifu a hard kick to the face. We were flung back into different columns, and though I felt several bones of mine break, I knew I had to fight.

Somehow, Tai Lung knocked over a blue fiery torch thing and leapt through it, igniting his paws in a ferocious blue flame. He charged Shifu specifically and began swinging punches at him. Even from a slight distance, I could see Shifu was starting to wear down from the fight. Even he was no match for Tai Lung’s ferocity and relentlessness.

“All I ever did, I did to make you proud!” Tai Lung screamed. “Tell me how proud you are, Shifu!” Shifu said nothing. He couldn’t say anything. He was preoccupied blocking Tai Lung’s attacks. “Tell me!” Tai Lung demanded. Shifu couldn’t reply once again. “TELL MEEEEEEEEEE!” He screamed, knocking Shifu hard with one powerful punch over to the edge of the pool under where the Dragon Scroll was.

“Master Shifu!” I shouted, limping over to him. I bent down to see if he was OK, wincing from my own pain. “You monster!” I shouted, just in time to see Tai Lung extinguish the flames on his paws. Shifu raised his hand to me, silently implying to me to be quiet.

“Stand down, The Second Coming…” Shifu gasped weakly, returning his attention to Tai Lung. “I’ve always been… proud of you… From the very first moment I’ve been… proud of you… And it was my pride… that blinded me… I loved you too much to see what you were becoming… I’m s-... I’m sorry.”

Tai Lung paused for a moment, seemingly taken aback by Shifu’s apology. He seemed genuinely grateful for it, and for a split second, I thought Shifu had gotten through to Tai Lung, just as Purple did for King. However, that dream quickly fizzled out when Tai Lung growled and grabbed Shifu by the neck. I ducked out of the way, unable to get out fully as I was too crippled from the fight.

“I don’t want your apology.” He growled. “I want my scroll!” He picked up Shifu in his massive paw and raised him toward the ceiling, in the direction of where the Dragon Scroll was. I suddenly remembered, the scroll wasn’t there. Purple had it, and there was no way Tai Lung wasn’t going to realize it. Sure enough, I was right.

“WHERE IS IT?!” Tai Lung demanded, slamming Shifu onto the ground, onto me, so hard it made a crack in the ground. I felt my already banged up body fracture like glass, and I was literally left gasping for breath, being both crushed and somehow suffocated.

‘This is it…’ I feared. ‘I fought a good fight, I finished the race… Protect each other, guys… I love you…’

“Dragon Warrior has taken scroll halfway across China by now.” Shifu choked, straining out every word with Tai Lung’s paw gripped around his throat. “You will never see that scroll, Tai Lung…” Tai Lung bared his claws, prepared to murder Shifu, maybe even me as well. “Never!” Shifu choked out. “Never…”

I could hear the air start to leave Shifu’s lungs as Tai Lung nearly choked him completely. I thought for sure he would’ve… if not for a well-timed arrival from…

“HEY!” shouted a familiar voice. Tai Lung turned, and so did I. There, in the broken doorway, was a stick-shaped silhouette against a sunrise sky. The voice told me who it was… It was Purple.

“I don’t appreciate people attacking my family!” Purple thundered. “Now… back off… or else face the might of the Dragon Warrior!”

Chapter 25: Purple's Power

Purple

I flew to the top of the mountain, to the Jade Palace, and I arrived at the perfect time, too. From a distance, it looked like Tai Lung was choking Master Shifu out, and was that SC underneath him? I couldn’t tell, but one thing I did know: I had to do something.

“HEY!” I shouted. Tai Lung turned around, and stared at me with his piercing yellow eyes. “I don’t appreciate people attacking my family! Now… back off… or else face the might of the Dragon Warrior!”

“You?” Tai Lung mocked, tossing Shifu down like a ragdoll and turning to him. “Him? He’s a stick figure,” he turned back to me, “you’re a stick figure. What are you gonna do, little guy? Draw on me?”

“I’m willing to try.” I replied. “Now, I’m going to use this.” I whipped out the Dragon Scroll, but before I could react, Tai Lung knocked me into a column and I lost my grip on the scroll. Weirdly, though, I bounced off of it as Tai Lung caught the scroll.

“Finally.” He said as I knocked him into another column and regained the scroll.

“Wait, did I just do that?” I wondered, my confidence slowly growing. “OK, OK… Bring it on, Tai Lung!”

I didn’t need to tell him, evidently. He charged me on all fours and leapt at me, knocking us both toward the lower courtyard and eventually down the stairs, punching and kicking me in the face. I, however, tried keeping my focus and drove his head into the stairs as we bounced down them like rubber balls, using my supposed “fat butt,” as Shifu called it, to squash his head as often as I could. However, he was more interested in the scroll than me, and what followed was the most intense game of Keep Away I’ve ever played.

After we reached the valley at the foot of the mountain, the scroll was still up for grabs. I landed in a cart, the scroll bouncing on roofs above me, but the quick Tai Lung leapt for it. I grabbed him, pulled him down–a move I used on Shifu during our dumpling battle–and slammed him on the other side of the cart, sending me flying through the air into a bamboo patch, and I emerged with makeshift bamboo stilts. The scroll was still loose, but by now, it was on the ground, and Tai Lung pounced in front of it. I was too far to make a move for it, but I saw several cooking pots on the ground below me. Thinking quickly, I threw a pot at Tai Lung, hitting him in the face so hard his face made a literal imprint in the pot. By the time he pulled it off, I covered the scroll with another pot and tossed several more around–all with my bamboo stilts–and shuffled them around like a memory game, another move I learned from Shifu.

“Lightning!” I exclaimed. I was honestly having a little fun with it, but Tai Lung was having none of it. He swept all the pots away, revealing the scroll between my bamboo stilts. I turned and twisted them, trying to keep Tai Lung’s paws off the scroll, until he pushed them apart. I lost my grip and fell right on top of the snow leopard, using an anvil to deliver an extra ounce of power, and the scroll bounced down the street.

Tai Lung knocked me off his back and charged for it, but I got flung into a booth of sorts filled with fireworks. Remembering my escapade that inadvertently earned me the Dragon Warrior title, I ignited the fireworks and shot after Tai Lung like a rocket, blowing through him and grabbing the scroll. The only problem, it’s impossible to control that many fireworks and I slammed into a building, the scroll getting stuck in a ledge above me. I quickly recovered and scaled the wall, hearing Tai Lung’s racing furiously behind me.

“The scroll has given him power!” He shouted. “NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!”

He kicked the building so powerfully it began to crumble. I scrambled to climb it as it collapsed and for a moment, I secured the scroll, but only for a fleeting moment. Mere seconds after I grabbed it, Tai Lung leapt up from behind me and kicked me directly into the ground so hard I made a small crater in it.

I lay there, wounded, beaten, and bruised, out of breath and out of energy as Tai Lung stepped over to the scroll.

“Finally…” He said, “the secret of the Dragon Scroll is.. MINE!” He opened the scroll, only to be shocked to find out… “It’s nothing!” I woozily staggered to my feet.

“Don’t worry, it took me a minute to understand, too.” I explained weakly.

“What?”

“There is no secret ingredient.” I said. “True power doesn’t come from outside.” Tai Lung threw the scroll down between us in fury. “It comes from within.” I gazed at my reflection and smiled at myself, but Tai Lung was furious and he lashed out, trying his nerve strike on me, except for whatever reason, it didn’t work. I did drop to the ground, but rather than being paralyzed, it kinda tickled, and I couldn’t help but laugh. He tried this again and again, with the same results: nothing but tickling. As I rose to my feet, still giggling like a little kid, he yelled and tried one final time, only for me to retaliate and punch him back, knocking him through a building.

“Wait, I did that?” I wondered, looking at my fists. “I did that!” I cheered. Tai Lung quickly returned and what followed was a clean one-v-one: Tai Lung and myself using our kung fu skills to try and defeat each other, but I could tell I was getting an advantage. As he tried punching and kicking, I grabbed his tail.

“Heads or tails, Tai Lung?” I joked, pulling his tail to keep him off-balance while I countered his attacks. When he lashed out and tried biting me, I held up his tail and he got nothing but a mouthful of pain.

“Sounds like both.” I quipped. As he recoiled, I put my wings on and took off with him, dragging and twisting him along the ground, soon throwing him into a building, where he broke through a wall so hard it made me wince. He, however, wasn’t done yet.

I returned to the crater I made and prepared for a charge. He bolted at me on all fours, so I took on a fighting stance, grabbed a slime block from my inventory and uppercutted him with it, sending him flying into the air so high I lost track of him. I got reminded of when I capped SC with the Windows start menu during the fight for the MGI. My resourcefulness is my greatest ally, but soon, Tai Lung came falling down at what looked like terminal velocity and slammed into the ground so hard he made a snow leopard-shaped hole in the ground. But even after all that… he was still fighting.

“You… can’t defeat me…” He claimed, climbing out of the hole. “You’re just a small… purple… stick figure.” He tried landing a punch, but I caught him by the finger.

“I’m not a small, purple stick figure.” I said. “I’m THE small, purple, stick figure.” I raised my pinky finger, and Tai Lung instantly knew what I was going to do to him.

“The Wuxi Finger Hold…” He gasped.

“Oh you know this hold?”

“You’re bluffing. You’re bluffing! Shifu didn’t teach you that.”

“Nope. I figured it out.” I lowered my pinky with one final, “Skadoosh.” Tai Lung winced and suddenly disappeared in a massive ball of golden yellow light that only got bigger as it expanded, nearly blinding even me in the process. When I opened my eyes again, Tai Lung had vanished.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I wasn’t fully sure what I did at the time, I just remember a ball of light and a cloud of dust around me, but I do remember hearing something… random voices in the distance.

“Look! It’s the Dragon Warrior!” Someone said. Eventually, the cloud of dust drifted away and through a slight coughing fit, I saw the animal inhabitants of the Valley in front of me. After a brief pause, they cheered me on, chanting, “Dragon Warrior! Dragon Warrior!” I didn’t know how to react. I had done it. I defeated Tai Lung. I was just so grateful, but fighting through the crowd, I saw Dad and Gold.

“That’s my son!” He exclaimed. “That amazing, lovable purple stick is my son!”

“You did it, Prince! You did it!” Gold proclaimed excitedly.

I raced up to them and threw my arms around them, crying tears of joy.

“Thanks, Dad. Brother.” I said tearfully. “I love you both.”

“We love you too.” Dad and Goldy replied in unison. Once we separated, I saw the others, the FSF and Candy… the Furious Five.

“Guys!” I exclaimed.

“You did it, Purple!” Green shouted, racing over to me. Red hugged me tighter than he ever has.

“You’re a hero, Purple! You skadooshed Tai Lung!” He exclaimed. Blue and Yellow ran up and flanked me, cheering me on.

“Purple, you did it!” Blue proclaimed. “You made your father immensely proud, and us as well.”

“I am in agreement, my royalty-colored amigo.” Yellow confirmed. “You saved China, you saved the day… I’m struggling to locate the words to describe my joy and excitement for you, Purple! You’re extraordinary!”

“Thanks, guys.” I replied humbly. Candy, however, walked up to me and did the fist-in-the-palm-bow greeting.

“Master.” She said.

“Candy, please, don’t.” I insisted. “Don’t bow to me, but to the God I love and serve. I have faith that it is Him who gave me strength.”

“Faith?” Candy repeated, turning to Red. “The same faith you mentioned, Reddy Bear?”

“The same, Candy.” Red answered. “Most of us, we’re Christians, and we believe our strength comes from above.” Candy nodded, looking intrigued and genuinely curious about it.

“Well done, Purple.” Dad praised. “I am so proud of you.” I felt tears well up in my eyes.

“Thanks, Dad.” I cried. “Wait… SC!”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I flew up the stairs to the Jade Palace and there were SC and Shifu, lying there, broken and motionless. I bolted toward them, terrified for their lives.

“SC! Shifu!” I shouted, reaching SC first. “SC, are you OK? Please! Tell me you’re OK!”

“Purple… You’re OK…” SC breathed. “I knew you could do it.”

“Don’t worry, SC! We’ll get you help! Blue is coming with the potions! You and Shifu will be patched up in no time.”

“You have brought peace… to the Valley…” Shifu started to say. I didn’t expect him to talk, but my attention was suddenly directed at him. “And to me…” He seemed to drift off.

“No, no NO! Don’t die, Shifu! Please!”

“I’m not dying, you idiot! Uh, Dragon Warrior. I am simply at peace.”

I breathed a sigh of relief, but I was more concerned for SC. He seemed more banged up than Shifu. Scratches and bruises covered his body, along with I can only imagine broken bones, maybe even organs.

“Where are you, Blue…?” I wondered worriedly. Thankfully, right after I said that, Blue appeared on the horizon, the guys right behind him.

“Purple!” He exclaimed. “I got it! Splash potions typically take a bit longer, but this should work just fine. Gather round, guys, squeeze in as much as possible. We can all get a piece of this.”

The guys gathered around me, SC, and Shifu. Blue stood in the center and slammed a Regen splash potion on the ground. Instantly, I could see SC’s wounds mend, and the blood staining his body seemed to disappear. As the potion did its thing, SC slowly rose to his feet.

“SC!” I exclaimed. “Are you OK?”

“I will be… now.” SC answered. “My spine was shattered like glass, but I think it’s healing up now. Thank you, dear Purple. Thank you so, so much.”

“No, thank you, SC… And thank you all for the support.”

“I have to know, Purple, how did you survive Tai Lung’s nerve attack?” Candy wondered.

“You think Purple has plot relevance or something?” Red guessed. “Like maybe we’re part of a larger story and the writer–who just so happens to love Purple–needs him alive to continue the story.”

“You’re speaking about the cinematic trilogy, right, Reddy Bear?” Yellow asked, looking bewildered. “Because that theory is baffling even yours truly.”

“Of course, what else would I be talking about?” Red asked. We paused, not having an answer to that.

“But to answer your question, Candy, I don’t know.” I answered. “When he tried it, all it did was tickle me.”

“Ooooh, my baby bro is ticklish?” Gold asked sinisterly, trying to poke me in the ribs. I giggled and knocked his hand away.

“Keep that up and I’ll send you to the Spirit Realm, Golden Oldie.” I threatened.

“You don’t even believe in the Spirit Realm.” Gold retaliated.

“Maybe not, but in the Kung Fu Panda universe, it’s very real.”

“Kids, kids…” Dad said, sighing deeply. “I’m so glad you are all OK. And Purple… You did it. I am so proud of you, Purple.” I felt tears well up in my eyes.

“I couldn’t have done it without you, Dad.” I answered, hugging him. “You… and this reminder of you.” I pulled out the peach I had been using as a reminder of him. “Just like this peach, you’re sweet, soft, kind… and orange.” We laughed, but Candy was looking deep in thought.

“A peach?” Candy wondered. “Was that from the Sacred Tree of Heavenly Wisdom?”

“Yeah.”

“That must’ve been what saved you.” She reasoned. “That tree has powerful properties.”

“Maybe a peach can defeat Tai Lung…” SC recalled. “Wow… Oogway was right.”

“That’s pretty deep, bro.” Green noted.

“Hey guys, you wanna get something to eat?” Blue asked, his stomach growling. “I’m a little bit hungry.”

“I’m willing to cook.” Dad offered.

“Yeah… I’d like that a lot.”

Dad made us a great meal and the nine of us slurped it up hungrily. It felt amazing to have a nice warm meal, especially after all I went through. Being with my family, the whole family, once again, it felt so much sweeter, especially being apart from Dad and Gold for a few days. I missed them dearly, so being together again was just what I needed. Even Shifu joined us for a few dumplings. It was all so incredible. As we polished up the last of our meal, we found ourselves barreling through the black hole once more.

“I love you, Kung Fu Panda!!” Candy cried. “I’ll miss you!”

“I’ll miss it, too.” Red admitted. “It was a lot of fun, but we’ll be back.”

“In the meantime, what location are we approaching next, Red?” Yellow wondered.

“I’m not sure. I can’t remember fully who we saw.” Red confessed.

“Tighten was there. The dirtbag kidnapped me.” Candy said spitefully.

“Ooh, you’re right. Metro City is an option…” Red considered.

“I guess we’ll see soon!” Gold yelled.

“Stay together, kids!” Dad ordered. “We’re not separating! Not again…”

“Let’s GOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!” SC yelled, and we soon were in our next location.

Third Person

Death was growing increasingly angry, but he kept his cool. In the Hall of Villains, the still remaining evil-doers filed in and lined up in chronological order in front of the Wolf, all of them sweating bullets for what he might do. He did nothing… not as first, just clean his blade of another red stain on it. Once he finished, he growled a low growl.

“Being me Tai Lung.” Death demanded. The snow leopard stepped out of line and stood before Death. “My patience is wavering, you all, and Tai Lung has been the biggest, most powerful threat thus far. If I can’t rely on him… How am I going to expect you idiotas against these sticks?”

“Sir, please… I had them right where I wanted them…” Tai Lung pleaded.

“So why didn’t you exterminate them?” Death growled.

“I wanted the Dragon Warrior.” Tai Lung answered. “I figured showing him my strength would scare him into an easy victory for me. Er, us.”

“Idiot!” Death thundered, rising and shaking the room before he sat back down, sighing and regaining his cool. “You were defeated by a broken stick with daddy issues. No… mercy… I expect you all to show no mercy to any of them. When you wound your prey, you sink your teeth into them. Slay them where they stand! Speaking of prey…” Death’s eyes met Tai Lung’s, instilling a deep fear into the leopard. “You’d better run for it.”

Tai Lung did so without saying another word.

“Rise, Red Death. Rise.” Death ordered. A massive, gray dragon extended her wings. “I am your Alpha. I control you. And you will make a meal out of these sticks… Else you will die trying. You all are dismissed! I’m starting a skinned rug collection… and my bear needs company.”

The other villains left, unsure if Death was being serious or not, but one thing they were sure of: Fail him, meet their fate. Death remained behind… giving them one final whistle to intimidate them before taking off for his newest hunt.

Chapter 26: A Land of Dragons (Red)

We got ejected from the black hole once again, and when I arose soon after, I found myself on a massive island late at night, a full moon shining down on me and my family. The air was very cold, and after my eyes became accustomed to the dim light, I quickly realized that the Metro City guess Candy and I had was completely wrong. We weren’t in the modern day. The houses were more like huts, built out of stone and wood rather than modern brick or wooden planks. I didn’t have time to fully investigate it, though. I needed to make sure we were all together.

“Guys!” I shouted. I looked around, and a few of us were scattered on the ground, rising one at a time. These black hole transports don’t do us any favors when it comes to smooth landings.

“Ooooh…” Yellow groaned. He was the first to rise. “Oh, hey there, Red. Are you well?”

“Yeah, I’m fine. How are you?” I asked.

“I’m good.” Blue answered, also rising. “Where are we, Red?”

“Judging by the architecture…” Yellow noted, “coupled with the environment, I’d have to guess we landed in the land of Vikings.”

“Vikings?” Gold asked eagerly, sitting upright. “Wait… Are we in Berk?”

“It appears so.” Candy confirmed.

“Candy! You’re OK!” I raced over and hugged her.

“Good to see you too, Reddy Bear.” She said. I released her. “Is everyone here?”

“I made it safely, dudes.” Green confirmed.

“King and I reporting in.” SC added.

“Where’s Purple?” King asked.

“Over here, Dad!” Purple called, racing up to us, Gatito in his arms. “I landed a bit further away. I’m glad I found you guys. Where are we, Red?”

“It looks like…” I began, but before I could answer, we all heard an ear-splitting screech.

“Did- Did you hear that?” Purple asked. “That wasn’t just me, right?”

“No… I heard it distinctly.” SC confirmed.

“That confirms it.” Candy said. “We’ve arrived in How to Train Your Dragon.”

“Oh… my… gosh!” Gold squealed. “I LOVE this franchise!” He took off.

“Goldy, wait!” King shouted, taking off after him. “What am I gonna do with him?” He muttered under his breath. We followed, but we didn’t get too far. Gold stopped in his tracks when he saw dragons flying in the sky and descending on the village, causing havoc and mayhem for the viking inhabitants.

“Guys, we gotta do something!” Blue insisted.

“I think the vikings got it covered.” Green observed, watching the vikings charge and yell, weapons in hand, battling the dragons in a fierce and fiery battle.

“NO!” I cried out. “Don’t hurt them!” I watched the battle commence, and Candy walked up to me, wrapping an arm around me. I looked at her gentle, pink eyes. “Blue’s right… We gotta do something… Yellow, Blue, I need you two to follow me! I need your craftsmanship and accuracy skills desperately.”

“Affirmative, Red, we will obey your every word.” Yellow promised. Blue nodded in agreement.

“Can I join you guys?” Gold wondered eagerly.

“If it’s OK with your dad.” I answered. Gold looked up at his father.

“Go for it, son, just so long as it’s safe.” King said.

“We’ll watch over him.” Blue promised.

“As for the rest of you… Help the vikings. Raise the torches, extinguish the flames! Each dragon has a specific ability or skill that makes it a threat in its own right, so you’ll have to learn on the fly.”

“Picking up new skills is what we do best.” Green said confidently.

“I can fill them in with as much detail as I can.” Candy promised.

“Thank you, Candy.” I replied. “Are we all set?” We all nodded. “OK boys… and girl… stay safe out there! Go, go, GO!”

We split, Candy and the Secondaries raced to the burning village while Blue, Yellow, Gold, and I broke for the shop of Gobber, a blacksmith with interchangeable limbs, namely his left arm. We soon arrived and met the giant, albeit friendly, viking.

“Ah, Red, you’ve arrived, and you brought friends. Can they lift a hammer or swing an ax?” Gobber asked.

“Actually, yes, but they have even more than that.” I answered. “Yellow, Blue, Gold, say hi to Gobber. Gobber, my friends, Yellow, Blue, and Gold. They’re fierce fighters, valuable assets to the team.” Gobber nodded, not saying anything as there was a line of vikings at his shop requesting weapons. I led the guys to the back of the shop and a giant weapon meant to down dragons by flinging a net at them.

“Yellow, you think you can make this work?” I asked.

“A bit prehistoric for my tastes, but I believe I can make this functional.” Yellow reasoned. “Blue, care to offer assistance?”

“Absolutely, buddy. Let’s get to work!” Yellow and Blue leapt on the net launcher.

“What shall we do, Red?” Gold’s small voice asked.

“Keep an eye on the sky, and watch out for other dragons.” I ordered.

“Can we ride one?” Gold asked. “Maybe Toothless…?”

“We need Yellow and Blue to get the net launcher up and running before we can get that up and running.” I answered. “In the meantime… Let’s protect the village!”

I whipped out my sword, and Gold grabbed a water bucket for the fires burning the buildings. I scanned the clear sky and heard the screech of a Nightfury, the most powerful, deadly, and mysterious of all dragon species.

“Nightfury…” I said to myself. “Toothless… I’m sorry I have to do this… Please, don’t make me do this…”

I grabbed a bucket of water as well and helped Gold with managing the fires. I would’ve helped the Vikings in other ways, but I couldn’t bring myself to capture or even hurt these dragons. My heart wouldn’t allow me. Soon enough, Yellow and Blue were finished with the contraption, and they found me.

“We got it, Red.” Blue said.

“It should be working at 100% capacity.” Yellow added.

“Perfect. Thanks, guys.” I said, hearing another screech and seeing a powerful blast that took out a tower. “That’s our target, guys. A Nightfury… Blue, you think you can down it without harming it… too much?”

“I can shoot anything out of the sky, Red.” Blue said confidently. “Whether it gets harmed or not… I make no promises.” I sighed deeply.

“I know. Just… don’t harm him too badly. This dragon will prove to be one of the best friends in all of DreamWorks.” I explained.

“Really?” Blue asked. “Sounds like fun. I’ll do what I can.”

“We will.” Yellow added. “I too can help, Blue. I’ll be your scope.”

“Get the net shooter.” I said. “I don’t know how many more times the Nightfury is gonna pass.”

Blue and Yellow nodded and rolled the net launcher into position, pointing it toward the sky. The two of them scanned the skies while Gold and I continued to try dousing the flames. As I extinguished a burning house, I saw a dragon in the corner of my eye behind Gold.

“Gold, look out!” I cried, grabbing a shield and blocking a dragon’s wall of flames.

“Thanks, Reddy Bear.” Gold said, relieved. His eyes then grew wide. “Red, move!”

He grabbed my arm and yanked me out of the way of green gas. Flammable green gas, and just in time. A two-headed dragon ignited the gas and it all went up in flames.

“Thank you back, Gold.” I said gratefully, scrambling to my feet and using my shield to beat the dragon back. Gold doused it with his water bucket, smiled at me and nodded, but then… we heard it again. The Nightfury’s cry.

“Here he comes…” Gold said to me. I nodded and we returned to Yellow and Blue.

“I believe I have located it, Blue.” Yellow said, pointing. “It’s coming…”

“I see it, too.” Blue confirmed. “Waiting… waiting…”

The Nightfury soared across the sky, and Blue took his shot. We all watched as the net collided with the dragon, restricting his wings and obstructing him from flying. He divebombed into the ground a ways from where we were, landing with a loud crash.

“We did it.” I said, breathing deeply.

“Great shot, Blue!” Yellow exclaimed.

“Thanks, buddy.” Blue replied. “Red, are you OK?”

“Yeah, we had to do it… Though I’m far from happy about it…” I admitted. “You know me…”

“Yeah, and we adore you for it.” Yellow said soothingly. I looked up at him.

“Thanks, big brother.”

“You’re welcome, little brother.”

The sun rose shortly after, and the dragon attack ended. With the threat gone, we sticks reunited, meeting back up in front of the main character, Hiccup’s house.

“How’d it go, kids?” King asked. “No burn marks on Gold, that’s a good sign.”

“We defended the village!” Gold proclaimed. “And Blue here took down a dragon!”

“The Nightfury?” Candy asked. “Toothless?” I nodded, confirming this.

“I was planning on investigating the crash.” I told the others. “See if I can find him.”

“Ooooooh, Reddy Bear, can I come? Please? PLEEEEEEEEEEASE?” Gold pleaded. “I want to fly! You have no idea how badly I want to fly!”

“Gold, I’ve never seen you so giddy before.” I noted.

“He loves dragons, ever since he was a kid.” King explained. “It’s been a passion of his for years.”

“They’re so cool!” Gold gushed. “They fly, they breathe fire, what’s not to love about them?”

“If it’s fine with your dad, then I’d love for you to join me.” I said. Gold looked at his father.

“Go ahead, Goldy.” King assured him. “I trust you’ll keep him safe, Red?”

“Daaad, I don’t need a babysitter.” Gold moaned. “Especially one younger than me.”

“I worry, especially in a land with dangerous dragons…” King explained. “Gold, I’ve seen the damage they can do. They’re fearsome beasts! I know you love them, but… they’re a legitimate threat, and I don’t want to see you get hurt.”

“Dad, you can’t protect us forever.” Purple said gently.

“I know…” King sighed. “But I can try… Can’t I? I care deeply about you, about you all. I don’t want to put you in danger. I did that once, and I lost you. I can’t do it again.”

“I promise I’ll be careful.” Gold insisted.

“I know these movies. I’ll be sure to keep him safe.” I swore. “I shall die before something happens to Gold.” King gave it thought.

“OK, OK… Go get ‘em, Goldy!” King said.

“Thank you, Dad! Thank you thank you thank you!” Gold exclaimed, hugging his dad tightly. King hugged him back, and the sweet scene brought a tear to my eyes. After they released, Gobber walked up to us.

“Gobber?” Candy gasped. “Cooool…”

“King, a word?” He asked. “We need to talk about the… situation.”

“Me? Why me?” King asked.

“You’re our chief.”

“Chief?” King repeated, looking at me and Candy for guidance.

“You must be Stoick in this universe.” Candy reasoned. “Go with him, King. I can join if you want me to. I know how this movie goes.”

“No no, Candy, I think I can handle this.” King insisted. “OK, then. Lead the way. Kids… Watch out for each other.”

“We will.” We promised in unison. Gobber led King away to the meeting hall while I led Gold through the other side of the island, in the direction of the Nightfury’s crash the night prior. As we walked, Gold struck up a conversation.

“Dad sure is overprotective, isn’t he?”

“Can you blame him?” I asked. “Gold, losing you broke him so deeply, ruptured his heart to the very core.”

“I can’t say I fault him. I just wish I had a little more independence, that’s all. Like, I’m 17, not seven anymore. I’m almost an adult. I can handle myself.”

“That’s understandable, and I get your point, but I’d imagine your dad doesn’t want to feel that pain again. He was so decimated, so consumed by revenge that he was willing to destroy worlds, destroy us, to avenge you.” I replied. “You were still in there, you saw it firsthand, just as we did.”

“I did… I still remember that… It’s how I pieced myself back together. But what have I done since then?”

“Wh- What do you mean?”

“I know what Purple has done, helped you defeat two villains, got himself a girlfriend, he’s seemingly Dad’s favorite. I mean, did you hear Dad praise him after he defeated Tai Lung?”

“Goldy, I know King, and I know he doesn’t play favorites.” I insisted. “He loves you so much that he was willing to summon a literal black hole to avenge you. How many kids can say, ‘My dad almost destroyed the world when he thought I died?’” Gold laughed a bit before getting serious.

“He even said he was willing to put his life on the line for me…”

“THAT’S how much he loves you, Goldy. That’s how highly he thinks of you.”

“... I guess I just want to be a better son… To prove I can be responsible… to make him proud. I know I’m reckless, it’s who I am. I live for the thrill, I love excitement, but I know it doesn’t help Dad’s nerves. He still worries, like I can’t handle myself on my own… Hey, maybe training a dragon would be the perfect opportunity to… prove that I can, that I am old enough and mature enough to be independent.”

“You don’t need to prove anything to anyone, Goldy.” I stated. “Your dad loves you and is so proud of you. No magic or dragon training required.” We stopped and Gold smiled at me. “But… I mean… if you WANTED to train a dragon, we do need to keep the movie going.”

“Ooooh, you’re right!” Gold remembered, his excitement suddenly palpable. “This is so EXCITING! I’m gonna meet Toothless!”

“I’m hyped too, Gold.” I replied. “I wonder where he could- Whoa!” I lost my footing and stepped into a massive rut, like something big dragged itself along the ground.

“Red! You OK?”

“Yeah, I’m fine, just stumbled, that’s all.” I replied. “Look…” I pointed at the rut, a massive line of dirt that extended over a cliff, even splitting a tree in half. I gasped in shock. I had seen this before, but it was a lot more insane seeing it in person. I looked around. Even more trees were split in half.

“Only one thing could’ve caused this type of destruction.” Gold pointed out. We looked at each other.

“Toothless.” We said in unison.

We followed the rut over the edge of the cliff, up a small hill, and peeked over it. There, lying in defeat, trapped in the net, was the legendary dragon, Toothless the Nightfury.

Chapter 27: The Nightfury

Gold

Red and I gasped in amazement. There it was… in real life… right before our eyes… the legendary dragon, Toothless the nightfury. I’ve always loved dragons, it’s a somewhat secret passion of mine. Anything I could fly, I dreamed of flying on it. It’s why I still aspire to be a pilot. Even despite this, Red was a bit nervous to approach. I was more or less in awe.

“It… It’s real…” I said silently. “We got an actual dragon.”

“And not just any dragon, a Nightfury.” Red noted. “These things are super rare, super powerful, super dangerous, and super mysterious.”

“I know, Red. I’m a bit of a dragon nerd myself…” I confessed, embarrassed.

“Really?”

“I love flying.”

“OK, now that makes sense.”

“We gotta free him, right?” I wondered. “I can’t bear to keep this majestic beast lying here, and I know you can’t, either.”

“My heart is breaking looking at Toothless just lying here… but what if this goes haywire?” Red feared.

“Red, you surprise me. You never have struck me as fearful.”

“I’m not, not usually, and I love animals, but… I can’t say I’ve ever trained a dragon before.”

“Shall we try?” I asked, venturing out behind our shelter. Red slowly followed me. “Wow!” I gasped. “What a beautiful beast!” The Nightfury was jet black, as fast and powerful as a jet too, though when tied up in a net, that speed and power was diminished. His eyes were bright green, and it looked at us with an expression that screamed to me, “This is the end. Kill me now.” I wanted to touch it, to feel its scales, but Red stopped me.

“Careful, Gold.” He warned. “We don’t want to upset him.”

“Fair enough.” I agreed. “I just… I want to savor this. I’ve never been this close to a dragon before! I’m in awe…”

“I must agree, I’m freaking out on the inside.” Red replied. “Oh my gosh this is so cool! But we must do something! If we don’t, he’s not going to survive. Someone else will find him, someone who isn’t as sympathetic to dragons as we are.”

“You’re right. Can you cut the ropes?”

“Can I cut the ropes?” Red repeated. “Goldy, I never leave home without my diamond sword. Let’s get to cutting!”

Red sliced the ropes carefully so as to not harm the majestic beast. I watched from behind Red as the dragon slowly became freer and freer until Red cut the last rope. Immediately, we were pinned down by the dragon, stuck in its claws. I felt myself sweat, panic welling up inside me, but thankfully, he didn’t attack. One blow from him would’ve killed both of us instantly. Instead, he roared a deafening roar directly in our faces before flapping away into the distance. I sat upright, freaking out.

“No! Toothless!” I cried out.

“What?!” Red shouted. “Sorry, his cry nearly shattered my eardrums!”

“Mine too!” I shouted back. “Give me a minute!”

We both paused to regain our hearing. It made me think… How did the main character in the movie not have to deal with any sort of hearing loss in the movie? Cartoon logic, I guess, plus plot relevance.

“Goldy, are you OK?” Red asked, his voice slightly quieter.

“Yeah, how about you?”

“My hearing is returning, so that’s a positive.” Red replied, standing up. “I am also unharmed.”

“Same, dude.” I said. “I saw it! I saw a Nightfury! An actual Nightfury! Oh my gosh oh my gosh oh my gosh this is awesome!”

“Welcome to a dream come true… For the most part.” Red said, wrapping an arm around me.

“Thanks, Reddy Bear. Here’s hoping we can meet him again.”

“If this movie plays out the way I think it will… We will meet him again and again and again. We soon shall build a friendship that is the strongest in all of DreamWorks, depending on who you ask. I personally am more of a cat and his puppy type of guy.”

“I love the chemistry Hiccup and Toothless have in this movie personally.” I said. “I guess we all have our favorites.”

“I’m sure Candy would argue Po and Tigress have the best friendship.” Red chuckled. “Shall we head back? No doubt your dad is eager to see you again, and you need to start your training.”

“Training?” I repeated. “Oh wait… I think I remember now…”

“If you are Hiccup, the main character, then you’re getting some training, too.” Red figured. “Maybe even the rest of us, too. We’ll all learn how to defend ourselves against the dragons, and even learn a bit more about them. How cool is that?!”

“That’s pretty cool.” I agreed. “OK, let’s do this thing."

King

The viking whom Candy called Gobber–knowing Candy, I’d imagine that’s his name–led me to a massive meeting hall. Lots of other vikings were waiting for me there, and all of them seemed eager to solve the problem that was the dragon invasions. The logical option to me was to find their nest… and disrupt it, and I told them as much. The vikings seemed excited by this plan, though I was a little unsure about killing a mass of dragons, more for Gold than anything else. He loves dragons, and I wanted to keep them alive, if only for his sake.

With the plan set, the rest of the vikings left to prepare the boats. We were to take another journey to find this mysterious dragon nest while we still could. Considering how cold it was, I couldn’t imagine it was long before the ocean freezes over. Perhaps I was getting this chief thing down. I am familiar with leadership titles, being King of the Piglins in a former life, so this felt like I was back there in my Bastion, just without a tyrannical rule. After everyone left, only Gobber remained.

“Why are you hanging back?” I asked.

“I need to stay and train some new recruits.” He answered. “What’s on your mind? Is it Gold?” I didn’t know how he knew about Gold, but I nodded yes.

‘Gobber and I must be good friends in this universe.’ I figured.

“I just wonder what I’m going to do with him, Gobber, and if I’m needed on this journey, I’m not gonna be here to guide him.”

“Well… you could put him in training with others.”

“Get serious.” I replied.

“I am.”

“He could never harm a dragon, not deliberately. Plus, I’m not putting my son in harm’s way. I’ve seen what the dragons can do.” I insisted. “These beasts could kill him.”

“You don’t know that.” Gobber said, waving his hand. We argued for a bit before I stopped it.

“Gold… He’s a good fighter, but not dragon-levels of fighting.”

“You can’t stop him, King, you can only prepare him.” Gobber said. “You’re not always going to be around to protect him. He’s going to get out there again. He probably already is.”

I gave it thought. Gobber seemed genuine, and he would be there helping with the dragon training. There would even be more fighters that could take some of the heat off of Gold, but then I wondered who these “others” would be. Considering Gold would be one of them, I feared the kids would be there as well, and I’m not signing them up for something that could kill them. That’s a mistake I refuse to make again.

“Let me talk to my son about it.” I told him, rising from my chair. “No doubt he’ll have something to say about it.”

I got up and left, my brain overflowing with thoughts. Outside, in a grassy field, I met the kids, everyone except Gold and Red, sparring. Purple’s kitten Gatito watched nearby.

“Kids!” I called, waving. They stopped and turned.

“Hey, King!” They replied in unison, except for Purple, who called me Dad.

“What’s going on?” Purple asked.

“Well, my little Prince, I wanted to run this by you all, especially you, Candy. Does dragon training mean anything to you?”

“Training how to fight the varying species of dragons.” Candy answered. “It’s a pivotal part of the movie.”

“OK, good.” I sighed, relieved. “Because your friend back there, Gobber, suggested it while the other vikings and I look for the nest.”

“Dang, King, I didn’t realize you knew the movie so well.” Candy noted.

“A bit more than others, though it’s fuzzy.” I answered. “Gold loves dragons, so when he discovered this franchise, he begged me for it on DVD. I still remember movie nights with him when he was younger, but I more remember snuggling up with Gold than the movie itself.”

“Aww, that’s kinda cute.” Blue noted. “It’s nice doing something with family.”

“Definitely.” I confirmed. “Anyway, I wanted to know… does dragon training entice you, kids? Are you all down for this? Because I’m not doing this voluntarily. I made that mistake once…” SC put a hand on my back.

“Don’t worry, King, we can watch out for ourselves.” SC assured me. “Guys? Are we doing this?”

“Candy, we need to keep the movie going, right?” Green asked. “And training is part of the movie?”

“You are right on both fronts.” Candy confirmed.

“I pick up everything easily. This should be no different.” Green said confidently.

“We require the Wishing Star.” Yellow reminded us. “We must continue the story.”

“I’m with Yellow. This sounds… definitely interesting.” Blue added.

“I’m eager to see more dragons.” Candy squealed. “It’ll be really awesome! I’m in!”

“Purple?” I gently asked.

“Put me in, Dad.” He replied. “I can handle Tai Lung, I can handle dragons, too.”

“So it’s settled.” SC confirmed. “WE are all starting our training.”

“Well…” I said distantly. “We’re missing two… No doubt those two will have something to say about it.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I returned to my house, Purple and Gatito in tow, and started a fire while the kids settled into their own houses. Purple and I waited anxiously for Red and Goldy, and I wondered what Gold thought about dragon training. I doubted he could kill his favorite animal, and I know Red wouldn’t harm so much as a gnat. What would they think of training to fight dragons?

I soon got my answer when the door opened and both sticks walked inside. Purple rose quickly.

“Goldy!” He exclaimed, running and hugging his brother. “It’s so good to see you home safely! And you as well, Reddy Bear!”

“It’s so good to see you too, baby bro.” Gold replied. I walked over to them. “Hey, Dad.”

“Welcome home. Did you find the dragon you shot down?” I asked.

“We sure did!” Red said eagerly. “He was amazing and gorgeous and so cute!”

“We couldn’t kill him, though.” Gold confessed. “Red freed him and he flew off.”

“He likely got stuck in a canyon.” Red explained.

“A canyon?” Purple asked. “Will he be OK?”

“He will be.” Red said confidently.

“Goldy, Reddy Bear, I wanted to ask you guys something.” I began.

“What is it, Dad?” Gold asked.

“Gobber suggested you two get enrolled in dragon training.”

“Dragon training?” Red and Gold repeated in unison.

“I was just wondering… are you kids down for it?” I asked. “The other kids agreed to it, but I wanted to get your approval as well.”

Red and Gold looked at each other, and then back at me.

“We won’t have to… kill the dragons… will we?” Gold asked uneasily. “Because I can’t! I can’t do it, Dad! I don’t have the heart to do it! I’m sorry, Dad!” He dropped to his knees, bawling his eyes out. I was shocked by his sudden outburst, but I did what any father should do: comfort his son. I dropped to my knees and put a hand on his shoulder, Gatito strolled over to him and started purring softly to calm him down.

“Goldy, it’s OK, it’s OK…” I said comfortingly. “You don’t have to if you don’t want to.” Purple and Red also lowered and they hugged Gold tightly.

“Don’t worry, Gold, we won’t be killing them. I promise.” Red said assuredly. “I can’t kill them, either, but it’ll be OK.”

“Where did this come from, Goldy?” Purple asked gently.

“I… can’t say…” Gold said through tears. “I just don’t want to kill my favorite animal, one I’ve fantasized of owning, especially since Dad never let me get a dog.”

“You won’t, Goldy. Trust me.” Red said assuredly. “On the contrary… Something revolutionary will happen, and we’ll be at the center of it.”

“Whatdaya say, Oldie Goldy?” Purple asked. Gold chuckled at his nickname.

“Thanks, baby bro, I needed that.” Gold said, rising and wiping the tears from his eyes. “Dad… count me in.”

“And me as well.” Red insisted. “This is gonna be so cool!”

“So it’s settled.” I reasoned. “It starts tomorrow morning. The viking clan needs me to lead another exhibition to find the nest. I’m hoping I can draw the dragons out and away, not kill them, to be clear.”

“Dang, King, you got your role down.” Red chuckled.

“Dad was King of the Piglins at one time.” Purple said. “I imagine this is similar.”

“Just without the tyranny I used to command them… and you…” I said, adding that last bit distantly. “Kids, we’d better get to bed. We all have a big day tomorrow in our own ways.”

“That’s fair.” Red agreed, heading for the door. “Good night, Tango clan. Love you guys.”

“Good night, Reddy Bear.” We said in unison.

“Love you, too.” Purple called as Red left. I debated whether or not to keep the fire blazing, but I decided against it as a precaution. With the fire out and the three of us–and Gatito–snuggled up in our blankets, we dozed off, a big day in front of us.

Chapter 28: Dragon Training (Gold)

Purple and I were woken up early the next morning by Dad, who reminded me of training that day. I was excited to meet these dragons, but also nervous as well. I didn’t want to harm them, but I didn’t want to get killed either. I know how powerful these dragons are, it’s what drew me to love them when I was a kid, but I never thought I would be fighting them for real. I could only imagine how Dad was taking all this, but he seemed strangely calm.

“You got this, Goldy.” He assured me.

“Dad, you seem pretty relaxed about this.”

“Relaxed? Gold, I’ll be honest, I’m freaking out. But you got your friends protecting you. Besides, freaking out on the outside isn’t gonna help your nerves, either.” Dad knows me well, being able to sense my panic about this task.

“I think it was Po who said, ‘I’m not freaking out… I’m freaking IN.’” Purple added. “It’s not only a funny line, but it may also be some sound advice if spun in a certain direction.”

“Only in a certain direction, dude.” I replied. “It still makes me chuckle more than anything.”

“Purple, Gold, be sure to protect each other… and the rest of the Squad with you.” Dad ordered. “You fight as one, one united family.”

“We will.” Purple and I promised. Dad bent down to one knee.

“Come here, kiddos.” We hugged him tightly. “I’m off to find the nest, but I’ll be back, one way or the other. But before I go… I love you both, so, so much.”

“We love you too, Dad.” Purple and I said in unison. We exchanged kisses with Dad and we stepped outside, where Red was waiting for us.

“Morning, Tango family!” He said cheerfully. “How is everyone this fine day?”

“We’re well,” I answered. “Is training day today?”

“Yep…” Red answered, his cheerful attitude fading. “I’m eager to fight, I just can’t harm these beasts.”

“Don’t worry, Red, we won’t.” Purple promised.

“Hey, where are the others?” Dad asked.

“Candy’s leading them to the training dome.” Red explained. “Purple, Gold, I can take you there as well. King, the harbor is down there. Best wishes on your journey.”

“And to your training.” Dad replied. “Keep each other safe while I’m gone.”

“Our safety is our top priority.” Red assured him. “We got this.”

Dad gave one final long breath and looked at us, pain in his gentle, yellow eyes.

“Love you all, but I’d better head out before the cold sets in. I’ll miss you guys.”

“We’ll be OK.” Purple promised, sighing deeply. “I love you too.”

“I love you more.” I teased, Purple shot me a look. “Bye, Dad!”

“Bye, kids!”

We waved Dad good-bye and Red led us to the dome. Thoughts flooded my mind, a lot of them anxious, but a few of them were overflowing with excitement about seeing all these cool dragons. I was eager, but I was a little uneasy. I tried summoning the courage I had when I did some of my stunts, and I think it helped. See a new challenge, go for it head on. As we approached, I saw the rest of the guys, and that immediately relaxed my mind.

“Red! Tangos!” SC called, waving. “Good to see you guys again!”

“Good to see you too, SC.” Purple replied. “You as well, guys.”

“It is perpetually a pleasure to be reunited with the remainder of my companions.” Yellow said.

“I’m kinda excited for this. I’ve never done anything like this before.” Blue admitted.

“I am determined to be the best.” Green said.

“Just, please… don’t kill them.” I begged. Green sighed, but nodded in agreement.

“Candy, great to see you!” Red gushed.

“Morning, Reddy Bear. Good to see you too.” Candy replied. “I’d imagine King’s off to find the dragon nest?”

“Yep. It’s just us eight.” Red confirmed. “And we protect each other.”

“No doubt about that.” SC confirmed. “Guys, be careful. Remember our training, and watch out for each other.”

We all nodded, confirming this. I didn’t notice it at first, but there were weapons and shields scattered around for our use, and I immediately planned to grab a shield. Gobber, the overseer of this training, soon arrived, and released the first dragon, a Gronkle species. It was relatively small with even tinier wings, but it was the dragon version of a tank, with thick scales, a big head and a club-like tail. It was surprisingly nimble in the air, though it didn’t get high off the ground, and it could shoot fireballs. No easy feat for the first dragon.

All eight of us grabbed shields first and quickly paired up. Strength in numbers, SC claimed. Red and Candy were a pair, Yellow and Blue as well. Green and SC partnered up and Purple and I made the last pair. Despite our limited experience with dragons, Red and Candy were quick to explain strategies, like make noise to distract them and stay alert. They have a limited number of shots, so if they could be exhausted without casualty, the job will essentially be done.

Despite our skill and fighting prowess, not all of us were as adept as others. Yellow got his shield blown away and was called out by Gobber. Blue took a proverbial bullet for Purple and I soon afterwards, even though I had my shield at the ready. Blue claimed he didn’t want to continue without Yellow by his side. Green got his shield hit too, knocking him out earlier than I expected, and the two red sticks got a good chuckle out of it. Once the Gronkle’s shot counter was down to one after a couple of misses aimed at SC, it approached Purple and I and began charging up its final shot, but Gobber hooked it and redirected its shot away from me and my brother.

“And that makes six.” He muttered, six being the number of shots this dragon species has. “In you go, you overgrown sausage.” He shoved it behind the door and locked it back up. Once that was done, he gave a stern warning to all of us. “Dragons always go for the kill.”

We were dismissed, our day of training over. I was relieved to have survived, but Gobber’s last bit of advice got me thinking. If dragons always go for the kill, why did Toothless spare me and Red the other day? I was extremely curious and I wanted to know more, and I knew just the person who could help me in this quest.

“Red! Red, wait up!” I shouted, chasing him down once we finished. Red stopped and turned around.

“Hey, Gold. What’s up?”

“Did you want to… go visit Toothless again? I’m itching to see him! He’s so cool!”

“Oooooh, I’d love that, too! Let’s go! Let’s go!” Red squealed excitedly.

“What are you two up to now?” SC asked. He must’ve overheard us and wanted to know.

“Gold and I are going to find Toothless, the Nightfury we shot down.” Red explained. “Eugh, I hate putting it like that. Makes me queasy thinking I might be responsible for that.”

“Do you want us to come along?” SC wondered.

“I doubt Toothless would appreciate more sticks like us joining.” I figured. “We’re on opposite sides as of now.”

“Yeah, we gotta build this friendship slowly. We gotta gain his trust first, but soon. I promise.” Red swore.

“OK, guys. Take care of yourselves.”

“We will.” We promised. We took off for the woods.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We followed Toothless’s trail deeper into the forest, soon stumbling upon a pit of sorts, a massive, wide, cylindrical area where Toothless found himself in. We had found our future friend, but we had to stay quiet. We were unsure how he would react to seeing us again.

“Poor guy…” Red said quietly to me. “I wish I could help him out…”

“We can, we will.” I assured him. “I’d imagine you remember what’s ailing him.”

“His tail got ripped off. Look.” Red pointed out. Sure enough, he only had half his tail still on, unable to fly or control himself without essentially his rudder.

“Well, now we know what we have to do to patch him up.” I reasoned. “That part hasn’t changed.”

“I’ll bet Yellow could make a new tail for him, but he’ll probably need measurements…” Red said thoughtfully. “I might be able to deliver them.”

“Maybe we should’ve brought Yellow with us.”

“That probably would’ve been the right call, but at least we can see him. Live and in person!” Red quietly snapped some pictures with his phone. “Hopefully Yellow can use some of these. Goodness knows the book of dragons isn’t much help.”

“Oh, I forgot about that.” I realized, suddenly noticing the sinking sun. “It’s getting late. We should get back. The guys are probably worrying.” Red nodded in agreement.

We returned to the village, weary and a little tired, and made it to the great hall. The guys were finishing up dinner, and Gobber dropped the book of dragons on the table with them. Yellow was instantly intrigued, probably because it was reading material, but I saw Candy’s and Red’s eyes widen with excitement. We took a seat with the guys.

“How was seeing Toothless, guys?” SC asked.

“He’s amazing!” I praised. “It was incredible!”

“He’s hurt, and he needs help.” Red said solemnly. “I just hope we can do something.”

“We can, I’m sure of it.” Blue assured him. “That’s how the movie goes, right?”

“Yeah, but I can’t do it alone.” Red said. “I’ll need Yellow’s help with this task.”

“Certainly, Red, I would be delighted to assist in any possible measure.” Yellow confirmed.

“Thanks, Yellow. It’s nice knowing someone as mechanically-minded as you.” Red said gratefully.

“What’s in that book, dudes?” Green wondered. “Book of Dragons?”

“It has info on every dragon they know of.” Candy explained. “It’s fascinating, some of this stuff I forgot about. There are so many.” I got up and looked over her shoulder, reading the book.

“Awesome!” I gasped. “So many dragons, so much info about them, it’s amazing…”

“Care to join us, boys?” Candy offered. “Never know what you might learn about these beasts.”

“I’m interested.” SC confirmed. “Guys?”

The others nodded and we scanned the pages of the book. There were vivid depictions and descriptions of dozens of species of dragons: Thunderdrums, Timberjacks, Scauldrons, everything was in there. I even got to finally find out which species turns its victims inside out. That repulsed most of us, even Red and Candy seeing the illustrations. There was everything… except for any information about Nightfuries.

“‘Speed: Unknown,’” Yellow read aloud. “‘Size: Unknown. The unholy offspring of lightning and death itself. Never engage this dragon. Your only chance, hide and pray it does not find you.’”

“The offspring of death?” I repeated, shuddering. “That sentence has a whole new meaning to me…” I shivered again, the memories of the Wolf still fresh in my mind. I didn’t want to imagine if he could possibly have a child. Purple stroked my back to calm me down.

“It’s OK, Gold.” He said soothingly.

“Wait, a Nightfury?” Blue realized. “Wasn’t that the species you were targeting, Red?”

“Don’t remind me…” He said shakily. “Yes, Blue, that’s what started this whole adventure.”

“You and Gold… tried finding it, right?” SC asked, concerned. “You survived?”

“We did find it.” I confirmed. “We freed it, too, though it’s stuck in a canyon.”

“Poor guy’s wounded.” Red added. “That’s why we need your help, Yellow. His tail will never be the same. I was hoping your mechanical know-how could make a new tail.”

“I’d have to know the measurements to devise a blueprint of the schematics.” Yellow replied.

“I have a few photos. I’m not sure if you can use them.” Red said. “If not, I’ll try to measure it myself. I plan on returning tomorrow.”

“You’re going back?” Green asked, bewildered. “Why, dude? It could kill you.”

“Toothless spared us for a reason.” I figured. “Besides… I want to train a dragon.”

“We need to… if we want to get outta here.” Red added. “Recall our final destination: The Wishing Star. We can’t get there unless we get outta here.”

“Do we have to go?” I whined. “I love it too much here!” I got looks from the others, and I read the room. “Sorry, I just love dragons.”

“Red’s right, we have a bigger mission at play here.” SC said, rising to his feet. “And by the sounds of it, we got another long, exciting day ahead of us. We still got dragon training, and no doubt a trek through the woods will be exhausting for you, Reddy Bear… and Gold. No doubt you’ll embark with him on his journey.” I nodded, sharing my intentions to do so. “But none of us can do anything without a good night’s sleep.” He yawned. “It’s late, fellas, I say it’s time we hit the hay.”

We nodded in agreement and headed to our homes. Purple and I entered our hut and snuggled into our beds, but Dad wasn’t home yet. As I killed the lights, I couldn’t help but ask Purple about it.

“Hey, Purple… You think Dad’s OK?” He sighed deeply.

“I hope he is, I truly do, but I think it’ll take more than a few dragons to keep him away from us for prolonged periods.”

“You’re right. I just… worry about him.”

“Now you sound like your dad.” We laughed.

“Our dad, Purple. We’re still brothers, after all.”

“And I wouldn’t have it any other way.” Purple replied sweetly. “I miss him too, but I’m sure he’ll come home safely.”

“He will… You’re right, he will…” I said. “Thanks, Baby Bro. I love you dearly.”

“I love you too, Oldie Goldy. I’m so blessed to have a family like you and Dad.”

I smiled and snuggled up deeper under the blankets, Purple’s assurance comforting me, and soon dozed off, another long eventful day soon to be ahead of me.

Chapter 29: Tails and Trials (Red)

I was up the next morning and reached the dragon ring for another round of training. The ring was different, instead of an open ring, there was a maze made out of tall wooden boards. Soon enough, the rest of the guys were there as well and our next dragon was released. It was a Deadly Nadder, a fleet-footed dragon that isn’t nearly as tanky as our last one, but makes up for it with speed and agility, as well as deadly tail spikes it can throw at us. We broke into our teams from yesterday and, with our newfound knowledge of nearly every species, we were able to hold our own for a lot longer, even despite the confusing maze surrounding us. As Candy and I weaved through the maze, we stumbled onto the Tango kids, asking Gobber something.

“I noticed that the book didn’t have anything on Nightfuries…” Gold noted a little anxiously.

“No one’s ever met one and lived to tell the tale, now get out there!” Gobber replied. Gold obeyed and disappeared in the maze. Candy and I looked at each other.

“Should we tell him?” I asked. “Because we both know that someone has met a Nightfury… and killed it where it stood.”

“No. Best not to get ahead of ourselves, and the movie in general.” Candy answered. “He probably wouldn’t believe us anyway.”

I had to agree. We returned to the heart of the maze, barely escaping the Nadder’s spikes from time to time, until the training was finished. Green had a newfound determination to bounce back from his early exit yesterday, and he lasted a lot longer today, all the way to the end even despite several close calls. Once our training ended, Gold caught up with me.

“Red! Reddy Bear!” He called.

“Hey, Gold, what’s up?”

“Let’s visit Toothless again!” He begged.

“Oooooh, I’d love that!” I agreed. “But… We need a third to join us. I have an idea how we can make it work. Yellow! Blue!” I shouted. “Guys!” My fellow Primaries stopped and turned around.

“You exclaimed, younger brother?” Yellow inquired.

“What can we do for you two crazy kids?” Blue teased.

“Yellow, you claimed you needed a closer look to make Toothless’s tail, correct?” I asked. Yellow nodded. “Well, I think I know how to make that happen. Blue, you’ve got some invis potions, right?” The two of them instantly saw what my plan was.

“I can perceive your plan, Red, but are you positive that your dragon companion will be unable to locate me?” Yellow wondered.

“If you can keep quiet, yes.” Gold confirmed. “He has good hearing, but we’ll be there with you, distracting him with some tasty fish. Not only will you get a good look at him, but we’ll be building a level of trust between us. Two birds with one stone.”

“Please, Gold, don’t use that expression.” I said uneasily. “I don’t like the thought of killing birds with a rock… or killing any animal, while we think of it.”

“So what do you prefer saying?” Gold quipped.

“Two snuggles for one dog owner.” I answered. “That provides a much sweeter mental image for me.” Gold chuckled.

“You’re ridiculous, dude, but I love it.”

“I got the invis potion ready, Yellow.” Blue said, standing over a brewing stand and handing Yellow a potion. “I extended it to last eight minutes, that should be more than enough time for you to get the measurements you need.”

“Thanks, buddy.” He took the potion and pocketed it. “Red, Gold, bring me to your dragon. I’m actually slightly eager to gaze upon him for myself.”

“Oh, Blue, I need you to hold onto my sword for me.” I said, handing him my blade. “Toothless isn’t gonna appreciate me coming armed.”

“Gotcha.” Blue replied, taking my sword. “Stay safe out there.”

“Thanks, buddy.” Gold called. We took off for the forest.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We led Yellow through the woods and finally to the ravine where Toothless was stuck and looked out into it. Yellow gasped in awe upon seeing him for the first time, but remained mostly quiet. He chugged the potion, turning him invisible, and Gold and I slid down into it, cautiously approaching the dragon. We offered him a fish and he quickly ate it, soon wanting more, but we had to confess that we didn’t have any more. Seeing this, he regurgitated half a fish and spit it out into our hands. We looked at each other, disgusted.

“I think he wants you to eat it.” I said.

“Me? Why me?” Gold protested.

“I’m vegetarian. I don’t eat fish. Not any more, at least.” I explained. Not to mention it was covered in dragon spit, but I doubted Gold wanted to eat it either.

“The things I do for my favorite animal.” He sighed, taking a bite out of it and swallowing it hard. His expression was priceless, and I had to contain my laughter, but it looked like he wanted to throw up. We looked at Toothless and smiled at him, and he tried smiling back, but when we tried touching him, he bounded away. Clearly we didn’t have that level of trust as of yet, but we hoped that it was slowly building.

After Toothless ran away from us, Gold and I flew out of the pit.

“Yellow!” I called. “Yellow?”

“I’m to your immediate right, little brother.” Yellow said, catching us off-guard. He was still invisible, but I could make out bubbles emanating from him.

“Did you get what you needed?” Gold asked.

“And then some. I got a plethora of useful information thanks to your distraction. Thank you, both.” Yellow answered gratefully. “I will be able to patch him up with a makeshift tail fin, but with the ancient technology at my disposal, I question how long it will take me to complete it.”

“Take your time, Yellow.” I insisted. “I’m just glad that you can do it, and I trust you’ll be able to make it happen. Knowing your skills in inventing, there’s nothing you can’t create.”

Yellow turned visible in time for me to see him turn a shade of orange with shyness.

“Thanks, buddy. That means a great multitude to me.”

We trudged through the forest back to the village, where Yellow began working on our project. I didn’t know how long it was going to take, but knowing Yellow, he probably didn’t want to be disturbed. I told Gold not to bother him and let him make magic happen. I was eager for him to finish, but until then… I had to contain my excitement.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Later that evening, Gold and I returned to Toothless once more, drawing a picture of him in the dirt. Toothless saw this and tried mimicking it by drawing a squiggly line around us with a massive tree limb. It was sweet seeing him try to mimic us, and I was hoping we were rubbing off on him.

“Careful, Goldy,” I advised. “Don’t step on the line. It makes him mad.”

“Sounds easy enough.” Gold shrugged, watching his step. I followed suit until we made it out of the maze of lines, gently bumping into Toothless. He looked at us with his big, emerald eyes and we froze in place for a moment. Gold held his breath in awe, but I knew… this was the time.

“Hold out your hand, Goldy,” I ordered. “And don’t look at him. He’s still a little nervous.”

Gold nodded at me and extended his hand. I watched, motionless, trying to be invisible to calm Toothless’s nerves, as the dragon gently pressed his nose against Gold’s hand. Gold winced, but then looked at Toothless, shocked. He was touching a dragon, and I could tell a bond was forming between the two. When Toothless opened his eyes, he snorted and bounded off once more. Once the shock wore off, Gold squealed excitedly.

“I did it, Red! Toothless let me touch him!”

“Congrats, Gold!” I praised. “Maybe soon enough, he’ll let us even ride him.”

We returned home and turned in for the night, another eventful day ahead of us.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The next morning, Gold and I met back up and checked in on Yellow for progress on Toothless’s new tail fin. To my surprise, it was done, but it made more sense when we realized that Yellow had a bit of help with this. When we picked it up from the blacksmith shop, we encountered all the guys, not just Yellow.

“I figured around this time you were making the tail.” Candy explained. “Don’t ever forget, Red, I’m your equal when it comes to love for these movies.” We laughed.

“Candy called us all together and she and Yellow took the lead on this project.” SC explained.

“Not too shabby, if I do say so myself.” Green added.

“How’s it looking, Red?” Blue asked.

“Does it meet your expectations and requirements for being a dragon’s tail fin?” Yellow asked. I took a look at it. Not surprisingly, it looked incredible, authentic to the movie.

“It looks perfect. Thanks, thank you all.” I said tearfully.

“Anything for a brother.” Purple replied. “Speaking of, Goldy, watch yourself out there.”

“Thanks, Baby Bro. I will.”

Gold and I returned to where Toothless was stuck, carrying a basket of fish and the makeshift tail. Gold used the fish to distract Toothless, tossing an eel away when Toothless took offense to it, and the dragon devoured them swiftly. While Toothless’s nose was in the basket and he was gulping down those fishies–much to my disgust, but I guess carnivores gonna carnivore–I snuck behind him and strapped the makeshift tail fin onto him. While I did, Gold walked over and spoke up.

“You excited to fly?” Gold asked.

“I am, and I know you are as well.” I answered. “I just hope this goes better than in the movie when this tail gets strapped on.”

“If it doesn’t, then hold on tightly, Red.” Gold suggested. “I’ve enjoyed hanging out with you and Toothless, I’ll be honest.”

“Awww, that’s sweet. I love you too.”

“I didn’t say that!”

“You implied it.” I replied cheekily, strapping the tail to Toothless. The dragon raised his head, shook his tail, and without warning took off into the air, taking me with him. Panicked, I frantically tried opening his makeshift tail and was able to just in time before he divebombed into the ground, me with him. He began soaring, and for a brief moment, I believed that we had success for a fleeting moment, until Toothless saw me on his tail and promptly flung me off of him. I landed in the pool of water in the cove Toothless was trapped in, and he himself–without me operating his tail–also crash-landed in the cove, back to where he was. I swam to the surface and, after recovering, saw Gold racing toward me.

“Red! Are you OK?”

“Yeah, I’m fine,” I replied as I swam toward the ground, shaking myself like a puppy to dry myself off. “Did you see that? It was working! IT WORKED!” I screamed.

“It was AWESOME, dude!” Gold agreed. “It might need some work, though.”

“Yellow did a good job, for sure, but this isn’t sustainable.” I confessed. “We can’t train him like this.”

“We’ll all help you in your endeavor, Red.” Gold promised. “I’ll do whatever I can for this. One way or another… We’re going to soar.”

Chapter 30: First Flight (Gold)

We were so close! Red had managed to ride Toothless for a few fleeting seconds, though it seemed like Toothless didn’t appreciate having a stick figure riding him. However, Red proved essential for flight, and after Red was flung off, Toothless fell as well, but progress was being made. After Red’s first test run, he dried off from a tumble into a pool of water, and we returned to the village. On the way back, we struck up a conversation.

“Yellow did a great job, didn’t he?” Red asked.

“I’m amazed. His intelligence is uncanny.” I agreed.

“Yeah… It’s something I’ve always admired about my big brother… and to be honest, I’ve always been slightly jealous of him for it. He’s just so smart and mature…”

“Hey hey, you’re smart in your own right.” I assured him. “You’re smart enough to ride a dragon, tame him… and your DreamWorks knowledge puts Yellow’s to shame. We all have our own quirks, and to be honest, Red, I wouldn’t have you any other way.” Red looked at me and smiled.

“Thanks, buddy. I appreciate it.”

We soon arrived in the village and told Yellow about the tail and Red’s first test run. It worked, but the problem was it wouldn’t stay open. Thankfully, the combination of Yellow, Red, and Candy had an idea of what to do.

“Yellow, do you think you can make, like, a petal of sorts to control the openness and angle of the tail?” Candy asked.

“Oooh, a contraption!” Yellow squealed. “At this moment you are speaking my mother tongue. I would love to complete that task.”

“We’ll help you if you need it.” I assured him. “We have DreamWorks knowledge, we know the gameplan.”

“Much appreciated, Gold, I would happily accept your assistance.” Yellow replied.

We agreed to it and over the course of the next few days, after Dragon Training, Red and I visited Toothless, feeding him, slowly building up our trust, and even practicing flight on occasion. We soon found various quirks about him that applied to all other dragons. That eel he found disgusting, it turns out other dragons are also scared of them and I used it to shoo a Zippleback back into its cage. Using other tactics like rubbing grass on a sweet spot and pointing light on the ground like a laser beam, Red and I subdued two more dragons the next couple days. It turns out dragons are kinda cat-like, and that was so cute and endearing to Red.

One day, as we were leaving Dragon Training to visit Toothless again, Candy raced up and stopped us.

“Red! Gold! Wait!” She called. We turned around and there she was. “You two have been spending a lot of time together.”

“We… have a shared love of dragons, evidently.” I explained.

“Candy, you know this movie as well as I do. We’ve been visiting Toothless.” Red added.

“I figured as much.” She said. “Are you off again?”

“Yeah.” I answered. “That’s the plan, at least. We’re hoping he’ll let us ride him.”

“Sounds like fun.” Candy agreed, albeit distantly. “Be careful, boys.”

“We will.” Red promised.

Candy left, Red gave me a confused and concerned look, but I didn’t have answers for him. I shrugged and we returned to the cove. Red and I descended down the small cliff and slowly approached Toothless. Everything was set up, it was just a matter of an actual test run.

“So… who wants to ride him?” I asked.

“I got the first run. I’d say it’s your turn.” Red answered. I smiled.

“Thanks, Red.”

I carefully climbed onto the seat, got myself settled in, and once ready, I eased myself upwards.

“OK there, bud, we’re gonna take this nice and slow.” I said. Red and I had been alternating riding him during our practices, and I felt confident that I could manage. Between watching and actual riding, I felt good about it, but only time would tell.

The first flight started out smooth sailing, literally, and I tested different things with his tail, turning him left, right, high, and low. I could hear the music in my head… Dunnnn… dunnnn… dun…. Dun dun… It was awesome, and I had to contain my overflowing excitement. Despite running into a few things, getting myself a slap from Toothless, I steadied him and we took off high into the air.

“This is amazing!” I proclaimed, but we proverbially flew too close to the sun. I momentarily lost control and fell off Toothless, and we both were freefalling toward the ocean. Thinking quickly, I put my elytra on and flew over to him, narrowly avoiding his tail, and resecured myself to him. I pulled him up just in time to avoid a big crash and, relying on nothing but my instincts, we weaved through a dangerous maze of rock spires, a task made all the harder by clouds obstructing my view. However, we emerged unscathed, and after being in the clear, I had to let my excitement out.

“We did it, bud!” I exclaimed. “YEAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHHHHHHHH! I’m riding a dragon! I’m actually riding a dragon! Oh my gosh this is the best day of my life!”

Toothless shot a celebratory burst of flame in front of us and flew through it, slightly burning me in the process, but after this success, I figured Toothless needed a reward. I was feeling hungry myself, so I piloted us to an island and we ate some fish together. Some other, smaller dragons named Terrible Terrors were eager to get a piece of Toothless’s lunch, but he retaliated by shooting a small fireball into them, causing them to cough and run away.

“Not so fireproof on the inside are you?” I figured. “Here ya go, little guy. I’m not finishing mine.” I tossed it my partially-finished fish and it immediately devoured it. Once Toothless finished, I returned us back to our cove, where Red was waiting.

“Good flying, bud.” I said to Toothless. “We’ll have to do more tomorrow.”

“How’d it go, Gold?!” Red asked. “Oh my gosh I’ve been so excited for you to come back!”

“It was AMAZING, Red!” I exclaimed. “This is probably the best day of my life!”

“You rode a dragon, Gold.” Red said. “Congratulations! I know this will be the start of a powerful friendship.”

“Yeah! Oooooh, I can’t wait to share this news with the guys!” I proclaimed. “Maybe even Dad…”

“He’ll be so happy for you.” Red replied. “I’m sure of it.”

“Let’s head back.” I insisted. “We’ve got a lot ahead of us…”

Red nodded and we returned to the village, still overflowing with excitement for the progress we made.

Chapter 31: New Heights, New Lows (Third Person)

After Red and Gold left Candy for Toothless, Candy felt a wave of curiosity wash over her. She began becoming eager to meet Toothless for the first time, though she couldn’t explain why. The best she could come up with was an urge to be with Red again. He had been spending all his time with Gold, after all, and she felt like she was being put on the back burner in favor of him. She was feeling… a little jealous.

Candy carried these feelings through the night and to the next morning, where there was more training as per usual, and Red and Gold taking off to revisit Toothless again. Candy, however, was curious to follow, so she did. She stealthily followed the two of them to the ravine, and once there, she confronted them.

“Reddy Bear!” She called. Red and Gold flinched, startled, and turned around instantly.

“Candy!” Red gasped. “What are you doing here?”

“Well, you and Gold have been hanging out a lot and I was wondering where you were going.” She answered.

“I’d imagine you know… We’re visiting-” Gold began, but was interrupted by Toothless bounding over.

“Toothless!” Red finished, surprised. The dragon growled at Candy, and she backed up fearfully.

“Toothless stand down.” Gold insisted. “Stand down, bud.”

“Uh… Candy, meet Toothless.” Red introduced. “Toothless, she’s a friend.”

Candy was more shocked and slightly terrified than anything. With her speed, she took off, leaving Red and Gold in the dust.

“Da da da, we’re dead.” Red quipped.

“Red, come on!” Gold ordered, climbing onto Toothless’s back. “You know what happens next.”

“I’d rather not dangle my crush in a tree…” Red confessed, joining Gold. Toothless took off into the air and reached Candy, who had stopped in the forest. The dragon picked her up, much to her surprise and panic, and left her clinging onto a tree.

“Are you two crazy?” Candy asked desperately.

“Yeah, we kinda are.” Gold confirmed.

“Candy… Do you care for a ride?” Red gently asked, offering his hand. “Please…?”

Candy looked at Red’s extended hand and quickly took hold of it. Red cautiously pulled her onto Toothless’s back.

“This is gonna get wild, Candy.” Red informed her. “Hold on tight to my waist.”

“To be honest, there are few other people I’d rather hold.” Candy professed. Red blushed deeply.

“Toothless, down… Gently.” Gold ordered, gently urging Toothless down, only for him to take off into the air, flying circles high in the air. Candy was freaking out, frantically begging Toothless to stop, but luckily for her, he did. He began gliding smoothly in the air, even above the clouds, allowing the three sticks to see an incredible light show of aura borealis for them to see. Candy calmed down and Red turned back around to face her, grinning shyly.

“Alright, I’ll admit it, this is pretty cool.” Candy confessed. “And… I confess, Red, I’ve been feeling… a little bit jealous. You and Gold have spent so much time together… I’ve barely hung out with you these past few days.”

“Oh my gosh, Candy, I am so sorry!” Red apologized frantically. “I didn’t realize! I-” He sighed deeply. “I have no excuses. Yes, Gold and my boy Toothless here have proven very distracting, and I’m deeply sorry for ignoring you like I did. I should’ve at least extended an invitation, something… Maybe just some down time between the two of us.”

“I appreciate it, Red.” Candy said. “Your heart shines through yet again. I’m sorry I’ve been jealous. I know your love for animals. I guess a part of me just… missed you. A lot. You know how I feel about you…”

“And I you.” Red said sweetly.

“Ooooooh, young love!” Gold teased.

“Knock it off and drive.” Red hissed, socking Gold in the arm. “We… do have feelings for each other… but for now… we’ve agreed to be friends. The very bestest of friends.”

“Po and Tigress.” Candy explained. “Some people may ship us, but we’re not like that.”

“Kitty and Perrito.” Red corrected. The three sticks laughed.

Just then, Toothless began to get some sort of… feeling, some sense only he felt, and he took off into the night.

“Toothless, what’s wrong?” Gold asked. Toothless just flew through the sky, following his instincts, and he wasn’t the only dragon to do so. Flocks of different species of dragons accompanied Toothless and the sticks joined them into a massive island, a land unknown to the other Vikings back on Berk. The sticks immediately knew where they were: the Queen’s Nest.

The dozens, if not hundreds, of other dragons dropped various meat sources down a seemingly bottomless pit, from live sheep to fish. The sticks were in awe, amazed by seeing so many dragons all in one location, but what really got their attention was one dragon with a meager offering, dropping a tiny fish down the pit. Suddenly, something at the bottom of the pit growled, seemingly unimpressed with the sacrifice, and that had deadly consequences. The dragon that made this offering was promptly devoured by a ginormous beast, the Red Death, the Queen of the dragons who ruled with a tyrannical rule.

“OK, Toothless, we got to go!” Gold urged, spurring Toothless on. After a long moment, Gold did it again. “Now!” He exclaimed.

Toothless took off, barely avoiding the Red Death’s jaws, and flew into the air, all the other dragons following, flowing out of the top of the mountain like lava shooting out of a volcano. That night, they returned to the island of Berk, simultaneously in awe and also somewhat shaken by the whole thing, even Gold.

“Dude… I almost got eaten alive.” Gold said shakily.

“At least we made it safely.” Red sighed.

“It’s like a beehive.” Candy theorized. “They’re the workers and that’s their queen.”

“You know it, Candy…” Red confirmed. “And we’re gonna have to somehow defeat that thing.”

“We have to… kill a dragon?” Gold said fearfully.

“It almost killed you, Goldy.” Red stated bluntly. “Plus, if we don’t, we can’t get home.”

“Do we have to go home? I love it too much.” Gold whined, garnering looks from the two red sticks. “OK, OK… I get it. We need to get home…”

“Not just that, but Dragon training.” Candy noted. “Gold, you’re gonna have to… kill a dragon…”

“Don’t remind us.” Red said. “I don’t want to think about it. I just want to go home and get some sleep.”

“You’re right.” Gold agreed. “Toothless, go get some rest, and stay safe, bud.” Toothless nodded and took off into the sky, managing to fly in spurts with the help from his prosthetic tail. “I’ll see you guys tomorrow.”

“Bye, Gold!” Red and Candy called as they went toward their houses, ready for a long night of rest, but Gold had a bit more in store for him.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Earlier that day, while Gold, Red, and Candy were on their joyride, King returned with his fleet of ships wrecked and nearly destroyed. Each of his leads led to nothing except getting shot at by fire-breathing dragons. His ships battered but still afloat, he made it to the pier. Gobber was waiting for him.

“I trust you’ve found the nest.” Gobber figured.

“Not even close.” King replied. “How was dragon training?”

“Oh, your parenting troubles are over.” Gobber replied.

“Wh- What do you mean?” King wondered. “Gold? What happened to him?”

“He’s doing excellent. He has this way with the beasts.” Gobber praised.

“He has always loved dragons,” King noted, “but… He’s not actively seeking them out… is he? Those beasts are dangerous, they could legitimately kill him.”

“Why don’t you ask him yourself?” Gobber suggested. King thought it was a good idea, but he didn’t know where Gold was. He figured his best course of action would be to ask the others. He soon found them sparring in an open field.

“Kids!” He called. “Kids!” They stopped sparring and noticed King approaching.

“Dad!” Purple cried, running up to him and hugging him. “I’m so glad you’re OK!”

“Good to see you too, kiddo. It’s been too long.” King confessed.

“What’s up, dude?” Green greeted.

“Welcome back, King.” SC said.

“We are over the moon with excitement upon seeing you arrive intact.” Yellow added.

“I’m glad you made it home safely as well.” Blue confirmed.

“Thank you, kids.” King replied. “Where are Red, Candy… and Gold?”

“I’d theorize… visiting their dragon companion.” Yellow guessed.

“Dragon companion?” King repeated.

“Red and Gold asked me to devise a contraption that helps a user ride on one of these beasts.” Yellow explained. “I reason that is what they are doing at this current moment in time.”

“Oh jeez…” King muttered. “Does he not know how dangerous they are? He could be putting himself at risk…”

“He has shown to be capable when it comes to taming them.” SC elaborated. “He’s been excelling in our dragon training.”

“Even more than I have, dude.” Green quipped. “It’s impressive.”

“Still, I don’t like the idea of him befriending a dragon. What if it goes haywire?” King feared. “I need to talk to him. He’s gonna have to return home. I’ll wait for him there. Thanks, kids.”

King took off for his home away from home waiting for Gold to return. He had to wait an unexpectedly long time, so long that even Purple returned before Gold did, but eventually Gold did come back, and in one piece. Gold, upon seeing his father back, dropped everything and ran over to him excitedly.

“Dad!” Gold exclaimed, hugging him.

“Son!” King replied, hugging him back. “You’re OK!”

“Of course, why wouldn’t I be?”

“I heard from the kids that you were friends with a dragon.”

“You… know about that?” Gold asked carefully.

“Yeah…” King answered. “I’m glad to see you’re OK, Goldy, but I’m just concerned about you. These dragons are dangerous, I’ve seen them myself. They almost completely destroyed my ships while I went looking for their nest. We lost several Vikings because of it. I can’t see you meet the same fate.”

“Dad, dragons are greatly misunderstood.” Gold argued. “They’re calm, docile, and great friends.”

“I find that hard to believe.”

“It’s true!”

“Then explain the burn marks on your arms.” King pointed out. Gold glanced at the red marks on his arms, gifts from when Toothless shot a fireball in front of them and soared through it… with Gold still on him.

“We’re still… building our friendship…” Gold sheepishly explained.

“Dad, listen to him.” Purple intervened, leaping to his brother’s defense. “I think he’s being legit.”

“Purple, these dragons could kill him, and I’m not putting him at risk. Not again.” King sighed. “What’s on the docket tomorrow?”

“The final round of dragon training,” Gold explained, “one of us will succeed and…” He swallowed hard, “will kill a dragon.” King nodded, understanding.

“At least dead ones can’t kill my sons.”

“Dad, I refuse to kill one of them!” Gold protested. “I… I can’t. You won’t make me… will you?”

“That depends.” King said. “If you’re in danger, I’ll do something about it myself. Until then… let’s get some sleep. It’s late and I’m kinda tired. Sleeping on a boat for days isn’t beneficial to one’s health.”

“Dad… please… don’t make him kill one of these dragons.” Purple protested. King looked at his sons and could see the pain in their eyes. He sighed deeply.

“I won’t make you kill a dragon.” He relented. “Can you tame them?”

“Yeah.” Gold said as confidently as he could.

“Good.” King replied. “Let’s see if these beasts are all you claim they are.”

“They are!” Gold argued. “I promise!”

“We can talk about it tomorrow.” King sighed. “I need some sleep…”

The three Tangos went to bed, but Gold couldn’t sleep. The thought of killing a dragon kept nagging at him and he could only sleep in spurts. He didn’t want to, he couldn’t, he didn’t have the stomach to do it. He feared what his dad would do as well to these dragons. The two of them clearly didn’t see eye-to-eye about the subject, probably due to their different experiences with the beasts. Gold had to prove he could tame them, else the consequences might be substantial.

Chapter 32: A King and the Queen (Third Person)

The next day was a big day for Gold: The final challenge. The best of the sticks would have to kill a dragon. The whole island of vikings were there, including King, who was watching from above. The sticks were tasked with facing a Gronkle, the first dragon species they fought, the one built like a tank but had surprising speed. They got in teams of two and took it on, but Gold felt extra pressure. He had to prove to King that these dragons weren’t what he thought they were. I had to tame them.

‘No pressure… None at all…’ Gold thought. ‘Just do what you’ve been doing.’

He did exactly that. Before anyone could land a blow, he tamed it. The others surrounded and congratulated him, but he was feeling queasy. He had to get out of there.

“If you don’t mind… I must be going…” Gold said.

“Where to?” Blue asked.

“I… just don’t want to be here for the next bit, that’s all…” Gold explained. However, there was no getting out of this one.

“The Elder has decided!” King proclaimed. The Elder–as the name suggests–was an elderly woman, and she chose the winner of this whole thing. Unfortunately for Gold, it was him. He was the one chosen. Gobber, who was still supervising the events, was ecstatic.

“You did it, Gold! You did it! You get to kill a dragon!” He exclaimed.

There was no getting out of this one. There were too many people, but even then, he couldn’t. He couldn’t kill his favorite animal. He had to speak out. He had to voice my complaints. It was King who was in charge of all this. He could put a stop to this. Before he could, though, Candy walked up to me.

“Be careful about the dragon.” She said to Gold.

“It’s not the dragon I’m worried about…” He sighed. Not long after, a Monstrous Nightmare, a massive red dragon known for setting itself on fire, was released. He crawled toward Gold, and he approached it, his hand extended in an attempt to soothe it.

“What’s he doing?” King said.

“You need to see this.” Gold insisted. “Don’t worry, buddy… I’m not one of them.” It was working. The Nightmare wasn’t attacking. It was docile at first, but King seeing his son come face-to-face with a fierce dragon prompted him to do something… quickly.

“Stop the fight!” King exclaimed.

Pandemonium ensued. The Nightmare, understandably fearing for its life, panicked and attacked, its “fight or flight” response kicking into action. King bolted into the ring, Candy as well, and the guys also rushed to Gold’s aid, urging him to the exit. He zigzagged in multiple directions, hoping to dodge the Nightmare’s attacks and he did… for a while. However, the dragon was too fast and he was stuck under its claws.

“GOLD!” King exclaimed. He thought he was done for, but the commotion reached Toothless’s sharp ears. Frantic, the Nightfury climbed his way out of the cove, inch by inch, until he clawed his way out of it. Toothless arrived just in time and attacked the Nightmare, driving it off of Gold.

“Nightfury!” Gobber exclaimed. With Gold free, Purple charged in to save his brother.

“Gold, come on!” Purple urged, extending his hand. “We gotta get outta here!”

That snapped Gold out of his shock, but when he saw Toothless get swarmed by vikings, he had to do something.

“No!” He protested, rising to his feet. “He won’t hurt you!”

“He’s right!” Red insisted. “Don’t hurt him! Please!”

“He’s tame! Just… drop your weapons.” Candy added. King, though, wasn’t impressed.

“Put him with the others.” He ordered as Toothless got pinned down.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Gold finally met back up with King in the meeting hall after the whole ordeal was calmed down. Gold was heartbroken, deeply fearing what was going to happen to Toothless, but even more so, this seemed like the first time he and King didn’t see eye-to-eye. Gold understood King’s extreme reaction. Ever since he came home, King’s been deeply protective of his biological son, but Gold was hoping King would give him a chance.

“Dad, I’m sorry.” Gold apologized. “Just don’t hurt Toothless. He’s my friend, he’s a great friend, and if anything else happens to him…”

“Gold, I’m just trying to protect you.” King replied. “I can’t lose you again.”

“I know, but there’s more to these dragons. Just give me a chance… I can show you!”

“I’m not putting you in harm's way again, and these dragons are dangerous.”

“So that’s it? You’re going to heartlessly kill them?” Gold demanded. King sighed.

“I’m not going to, if only for you.” He confessed. “Driving them off is the next best thing… They have to have a nest, somewhere. Maybe…” Gold saw the wheels turning in King’s mind.

“No, please, Dad… Don’t do this…” Gold begged. “Toothless did nothing to me!”

“Then explain the burn marks on your arms.” King said, pointing out the red scars on Gold’s yellow tone. Gold could say nothing in response. “Your dragon friend knows where the nest is… Load up the ships! We have our ticket.”

“Dad, please!” Gold begged.

“I can’t put you in danger!” King protested. “Not again…”

Gold remained behind as King left for the harbor. Despite King’s determined appearance, he was deeply hurting. He felt like a bad father for allowing his son to be this close to death… again… but he assured himself that this was for the best. He wasn’t usually this reckless, but when it came to his son, all bets are off. King, however, didn’t plan on killing them, just finding the nest… and destroying it. Without a home, the dragons would be gone. His family would be safe from the beasts.

Gold, however, was even more devastated. He and his dad hadn’t fought like that ever before. Not to mention that his dream was being crushed. He got to live it for a few fleeting moments, but now it was over. The dragon nest was going, King and the other vikings had the map to it in Toothless. Gold could do nothing but drop to his knees and cry.

King set sail, Toothless in chains, leaving the other sticks behind. King refused to put them in danger again, so with his army of vikings, he took off for the nest while Gold was helpless to stop him. As Gold bawled his eyes out, the other sticks found him.

“Goldy!” Purple exclaimed, running up to him and throwing his arms around him. “What happened? Are you OK?” Candy and Red were next to arrive at Gold’s side.

“I’d imagine King has set off to find the dragon nest.” Red figured.

“After a fierce argument with his dad.” Candy added. “Oh, Gold, I’m so sorry…”

“Surely there’s something we can do.” SC wondered. “King’s reasonable.

Surely one of us can get through to him.”

“SC, you know what lengths Dad would do for us kids?” Purple asked. “Most of us have seen what he’s capable of.” The Gang nodded in confirmation, their first adventure with King–or rather, against him–still fresh in their minds.

“Well, this means a lot to Gold.” Blue reasoned. “We can’t let King do this.”

“But the majority of the fleet of ships is in use by King and the vikings.” Yellow noted. “We are incapable of sailing there.”

“It’s all my fault!” Gold cried. “If I had just left him there, none of this would’ve happened. If I had known this would cause a rift between me and Dad, I never would’ve done any of this.”

“Gold, this isn’t all on you.” Red said soothingly. “I was there with you. I am to blame.”

“It’s no one’s fault, guys.” Candy insisted. “I don’t think any of us could’ve murdered a living, breathing dragon in cold blood, right?” The entire Squad had to agree. They weren’t killers, they were fighters… for the most part.

“There is time to make it right.” She continued. “But Red, Gold, we need your help.”

“What’s the plan, Candy?” SC asked. Gold dried his eyes and rose to his feet.

“We’re going to ride into battle.” Gold explained, trying to choke down his emotions and sound courageous. “On our own dragons. Let’s do something crazy!”

“There’s the Goldy I know and love!” Purple praised. “Are you guys in?”

The entire Squad nodded in agreement, and Gold and Red led the others to the arena and showed them how to tame a dragon. Red and Gold extended their hands, and the Nightmare from earlier approached gently. While Red kept the dragon at bay, Gold told Green and SC to follow suit.

“OK, dude…” Green said, a little shakily. He and SC slowly stepped up to the Nightmare.

“Stay calm, buddy.” Gold advised. “Relax. This big guy’s calm.”

Green and SC gently placed their hands on the Monstrous Nightmare’s nose. At first, they were inwardly terrified, but their fear soon melted away upon seeing how chill the dragon was.

“Hey, that’s a good dragon.” Green said. “Thanks for not biting my head off, dude.”

“You’re a gentle guy, aren’t ya?” SC asked. “Yeah you are. Thanks, buddy.”

“Who’s next?” Red asked his friends, a couple other dragons out of their cages. Gold and Red showed the others how to tame the other dragons, and with Candy’s advice, each one claimed a dragon to ride. Yellow took on the Gronkle, the small, armored tank. Blue and Purple took on a two-headed dragon called a Zippleback, a dragon with one head that breathes gas, and the second one lights it. Gold and the two red sticks rode the back of a Nadder, a nimble dragon whose best asset is its speed.

“Ready, everyone?” Gold asked.

“As ready as we can be, Gold.” SC confirmed.

“Rainbow Squad…" Gold began, "It’s time to fly!”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

King led the fleet through the icy waters, Toothless with him, in chains, being his guide to the nest. As he sailed, he felt a large amount of unease. He knew how much dragons meant to Gold, and he was far from comfortable killing any of these dragons. However, he knew what they were capable of, and he wasn’t putting anyone in danger. Not again. Losing Gold broke him once, he was determined to not let it happen again.

They soon made it to the island, the home of the nest. After docking their boats, King and the vikings left, and Gobber caught up with King.

“Listen, King,” Gobber began, “I was overhearing some of the men just now and, well, some of them are wondering what it is we're up to here-- not me of course, I know you're always the man with the plan-- but some, not me, are wondering if there is in fact a plan at all, what it might be?”

“Drive the dragons out.” King explained. “But don’t kill them. I refuse to have anyone kill them. Got it?” The vikings nodded. “Good.” King sighed deeply. “Once we crack this mountain open… all heck is gonna break loose. Who knows how many dragons are in there, or how they’ll react to us.”

“Good thing I brought extra undies.” Gobber noted.

The catapults sent a barrage of rocks at the mountain’s side, eventually cracking it open. With the hole created, the dragons hiding inside flew out, harmlessly flying into the air, not even bothering to deal with King or the vikings. King saw this as a victory. The dragons were gone and no longer could they harm the kids… or so he thought.

The mountain began shaking from the inside out, and the celebration ceased instantly. Out from the crumbling mountain came a massive gray dragon, the Red Death, a beast the size of a mountain, far bigger and more dangerous than almost anything King had ever seen before. It unleashed a powerful roar and with one long, fiery blow, set the ships ablaze in a stream of fire.

“Oh… my… gosh…” King gasped. “What have I done?” He soon realized he had to do something, quickly. “Get to the other side of the island!” He ordered to his men. “Go! GO! I refuse to lose anyone! Gobber, go with them.”

“I think I'll stay, just in case you're thinking of doing something crazy.” Gobber insisted.

“I can buy them time if I give that thing something to hunt.” King reasoned desperately. Gobber grabbed King’s hand.

“Then I can double that time.”

The two of them tried distracting the Red Death from their low vantage point, waving and taking swipes at the beast with their weapons while the other vikings escaped. They could do no damage against her, the Red Death was too massive and powerful to be affected by the two of them, but the distraction seemed to work, if only temporarily. As they played the decoy, they were caught off-guard by the loud cry… of dragons.

Chapter 33: Black Dragon, Red Death

Gold

With my friends behind me, and in front of me, in Candy’s and Red’s cases, we flew into battle on our own dragons. It was amazing, I was flying on a dragon again! It might not have been a Nightfury, but riding with my friends made it all worth it. Following Candy’s dragon’s instinct, we zoomed through the clouds to witness the Red Death, the final boss of all dragons, and truly deserving of the name.

“Holy cow…” Red gasped.

“The Red Death…” Candy said, in awe.

“It’s incredible.” I said, in shock. “But we gotta take it down.” I turned to the guys behind me. “Alright, guys, that behemoth is our target.”

“That thing?” SC wondered, in shock. “How are we supposed to take it down?”

“Follow our lead.” I replied confidently. “Red, Candy, shall we fly?”

“Let’s do it, buddy.” Red replied. Candy urged her dragon forward and it took a shot at the Red Death, the guys following suit.

“Purple, Blue, watch each other’s backs.” I shouted. “Yellow, what do you think?”

“Judging by what I read, it relies on its hearing and smell. Heavily armored skull and tail used for bashing, stay clear of both!” Yellow informed us.

“I could’ve told us that…” Red muttered.

“Let Yellow have this one.” Candy insisted. “You get to ride Toothless. That alone makes you the envy of everyone.”

“Yeah, that’s fair.” Red admitted.

“Yellow, Green, SC, make noise, stay alert, and stay out of sight!” I ordered. “It might confuse her! Blue, Purple, make it mad, and be careful! It might have a shot limit.”

“You got it, brother!” Purple called.

“Nothing like making it shoot blanks.” Blue added.

The guys followed my orders like the well-orchestrated team we are, all being very careful to avoid getting whacked by the monstrous beast. When Candy swung me and Red back around, I spotted something amidst the flaming boats.

“There!” I shouted. Red must’ve seen it too.

“Toothless! Candy-”

“I’m on it!” Candy interrupted, turning us around and descending to Toothless, who was still in chains. Red and I hopped off.

“Go help the others!” We ordered in unison. Candy flew off, and we began working on the chains. However, we couldn’t do much to them, and the Red Death swung around, knocking a burning mast over almost on top of us, and stomped on the boat, destroying it and causing Toothless to sink lower and lower.

Without hesitation, Red and I leapt into the water and continued struggling with the chains, only to find ourselves unable to break them. As our oxygen level depleted and all hope seemed to end… We were grabbed at the last second and returned to the surface. Dad had leapt in after us and rescued us, dragging us to land, where I hacked up some of the water in my lungs.

“Dad?” I gasped, looking up in time to see him leaping into the water. Red and I bolted over to the edge and peered into it, just in time to see Dad whipping out a diamond ax, breaking the wooden frame holding Toothless, and the two of them flying out of the water, Toothless carrying Dad to the land. The dragon urged us to ride him.

“Say less, bud.” I said, racing to him. Red followed me and we leapt onto his back. Toothless roared, but before we could take off, Dad stopped us.

“Goldy!” He exclaimed, grabbing me by the wrist. I looked at him and could see tears in his eyes. Or perhaps that was just the water, I’m not sure.

“I’m sorry… For everything…”

“I am as well.”

“Please… don’t go up there.” Dad insisted.

“We have to.” Red said tersely. “We’re the Rainbow Squad. It’s an occupational hazard, beating monsters like this.”

“I’m proud to call you my son.” Dad said to me. I could feel the tears of joy in my eyes.

“Thanks, Dad.” I replied.

“Before you go…” Dad said, “take this.” He handed Red a Splash potion. “Seeing this beast and what it can do, it might be useful to you two.”

“We might indeed have some use for it.” Red noted, examining the bottle. “Gold, we know what to do.”

I nodded and Toothless took off into the sky. Before long, Red and I noticed that while the guys were doing their best, the Red Death was not going down so easily, not to mention Green and SC were stuck on her. Either the noise got to their dragon or the Red Death herself knocked them off. But regardless, we had to rescue them.

“Blue, Purple, get Green and SC!” Red ordered as Blue and Purple flew by.

“Got it, guys!” Blue said.

“Go buddy, go!” Purple urged, soon rescuing the two trapped sticks. The Red Death was not happy and began flapping her massive wings.

“She has wings.” I noted. “OK, let’s see if she can use them!” Candy and her dragon suddenly appeared next to us.

“Get the others to the ground, Candy.” Red demanded. “This battle is between us.”

“Got it, Red.” Candy said, nodding. “Go…”

We nodded back and soared higher into the clouds, taking various shots at her with Toothless’s powerful blasts and using the dark clouds to stay hidden from her view. After each shot we took, she got more and more angry, until she roared and bellowed a massive stream of fire from her mouth. It was a literal cloud of flames erupting out of her like a volcano, spewing in every direction, and we couldn’t avoid them. Toothless’s makeshift tail caught fire.

“OK, Red, playtime’s over!” I shouted.

“I agree. As much as it pains me to do this, let’s give her the world’s worst case of heartburn ever.” Red said.

I reared Toothless back around right in front of the Red Death. She saw us and tried eating us, but she missed and we dive bombed, the Red Death following. I knew we didn’t have much time, and she was drawing closer.

“Hang in there, bud!” I shouted. “A little bit longer!”

“Gold, you’d better know what you’re doing!” Red exclaimed as she opened her mouth again to fire at us.

“Hold, Toothless…” I said. As I heard her prepare a final blast, I shouted, “NOW!”

Toothless turned around and shot a blast into her mouth, essentially lighting her insides on fire. The burning flames consumed her insides, her wings got holes burned into them, she lost control of herself, and dove headfirst into the island like an olympic diver, except instead of a watery splash, she met a fiery explosion reminiscent of a nuke. I tried guiding Toothless away from the wave of flames, but his makeshift tail completely burned and fell off. We couldn’t steer and we crashed into her mace-like tail, knocking both Red and I off of Toothless.

Somehow, we were able to hold onto each other as Red pulled something out. The potion.

“It’s what your Dad gave us!” He shouted. “It’s now or never!”

I nodded and he slammed it against us, the bubbles covered both of us as we fell into the flames. Toothless, though, saw us and selflessly dove after us. That’s all I remember seeing before I blacked out.

King

As the smoke cleared and the dust settled, I forged my way through the dense fog, calling and screaming my son’s name.

“Gold! GOLD! SON!”

I was desperately looking for him, any trace of him, or Red. I had to know if they were OK, but after seeing the lights flash and hearing things like explosions and crackling flames, my fear meter was off the charts. However, in the middle of it all, I saw Gold’s pet dragon, the one he called Toothless.

“Gold…”

I raced over to him. The dragon was breathing, but there was no trace of either rider, just a busted tail on Toothless. I dropped to my knees in despair, fearing I had lost him again.

“Gold… I’m sorry… I did this…”

The other vikings, and sticks, emerged behind me, Candy squeezing through the mess. She too looked on in despair, and Toothless woke up and looked at me with his bright green eyes. What had I done? If I hadn’t done this…

“I’m so sorry, buddy…” I cried. “I never should’ve done what I did…”

Toothless didn’t say anything, he just opened his wings to reveal Red and Gold clutching his body.

“Goldy!” I exclaimed, running to him. I picked him up and tested… a pulse… a heartbeat… He was alive.

“He’s alive! You saved him…” I cried again. The sticks raced up to me, Candy was first, and she hugged Red, checking his vitals.

“I think I feel a pulse, as well.” She noted. Yellow joined her.

“I feel it too. It’s faint, but it exists.” He confirmed.

“He’s got that fighter’s blood,” Purple said, “so much so that even it fights to keep him alive.”

“I’m amazed they didn’t suffer a single burn mark.” Green pointed out. “Dude, how was that possible?”

“The dragon here must be fireproof.” SC reasoned. “It makes the most sense.”

“Wait, what’s this?” Yellow observed, pointing out pieces of glass. “Fractured glass? With bits of orange liquid on it?”

“I know that orange tint.” Blue explained. “That’s the unmistakable Potion of Fire Resistance.”

“Fire resistance?” Candy repeated.

“The user is immune to fire and lava damage for a short time.” Blue explained.

“That explains how Red is still in one piece.” Candy gasped. “I thought he’d be missing a leg, like in the movie.”

“Candy, my friend, I will die before I let that happen to any of you eight.” I promised. “Now… Let’s get these guys home. They’ve been through a lot, I’d say.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We brought Gold and Red home. Blue whipped up some potions to help them heal, and even Purple’s kitten Gatito arrived to provide some comfort. I, however, was more concerned about Gold, and I remained kneeled over him, even after Red woke up.

“Ow… My… Everything…” He groaned. He looked around. “Purple? King?”

“You’re up. Thank goodness.” Purple sighed, relieved. Gatito leapt up onto Red’s chest.

“Hey there, little kitten. Awww, you’re a sweet thing aren’t you?” Red said as he sat upright. “And… Toothless? You’re here…”

The energetic dragon bounced around and nuzzled Red. He couldn’t help but laugh, albeit weakly, slowly rising to his feet.

“Where’s Gold?”

“He’s over here.” I answered. Red joined us just in time for Gold to wake up.

“Dad?” He said weakly. “Baby bro?”

“I have never been so happy to hear that irritating nickname, dude.” Purple confessed. Toothless bounded over and investigated Gold.

“Hey there, Toothless.” Gold pet him on the head. “It’s good to see you, too, but… what are you doing here? In my house?”

“He saved your life, Gold.” I explained. “It was the least I could do to return the favor.”

Gold slowly rose to his feet.

“Does this mean…?” He asked.

“Let’s see, shall we?” Red replied. Purple and I nodded and led them outside, out into our dragon paradise. Gold clearly could not believe his eyes, and I doubt Red could either.

“I knew it. I’m dead. I’m dead, aren’t I?” Gold gasped.

“Nope.” I replied. “You are very much alive and well.” The other sticks ran up to us.

“Gold!” SC exclaimed. “Red!” They practically tackled Red in a joyous outburst.

“Don’t ever do that again, dude!” Green exclaimed.

“Falling into the equivalent of a nuclear bomb?” Yellow asked. “Don’t scare me in that manner! I could’ve had an anxiety attack.”

“You did have an anxiety attack, Mellow Yellow.” Blue joked.

“I too was freaking out, Reddy Bear!” Candy exclaimed. “Please… don’t do that to me.”

“Guys, guys,” Red said, wiping tears from his eyes. “Thanks. It means the world to me, and I love you all more than you can possibly know. Especially you, Candy. I’m sorry if I ignored you in favor of Gold.” Candy blushed and gave him a sock in the arm.

“It’s fine, but that’s for freaking me out and nearly dying.” She reprimanded, but soon gave him a quick kiss on the cheek. Red’s face turned a shade of pink that matched Candy’s eyes. “And that was for the ride of a lifetime. I love you, Reddy Bear… as a dear, dear friend.”

“In a friendly way… I love you too.” I watched as the Gang and Candy hugged each other tightly.

“Listen, Goldy, do you have a minute?”

“Of course.”

“I’m sorry for… how I reacted. I just get so fearful when I think of losing you again. I lost you once, I lost your mother forever… I just can’t lose you again.” Gold sighed.

“I appreciate it, Dad. I do love being independent, but it really is good to know that someone is looking out for me, and maybe I am a bit overaggressive.”

“A bit?” Purple teased.

“No, Gold, this is on me. Again, I apologize. Maybe I could tone down my protectiveness…”

“No, Dad please… That potion you gave us might’ve saved our lives.” Gold replied. “Besides… I can’t imagine you not going over the top for me.”

“Hey, shall we celebrate?” Purple asked. “We took down another villain! My brother’s a hero!” Purple grabbed Gold by the shoulders and playfully shook him. “Dad, can we go for a ride?”

“Please, Dad?” Gold begged. I smiled at them both.

“Just don’t think I’m going without you both.” I chuckled.

The rest of our time there was spent soaring through the sky on our dragons, and I have to admit, knowing how tame they truly are, it was a lot of fun. Best of all, I got to see Gold and Purple having so much fun, and that made my heart leap with joy. However, it was only a matter of time before we were on to our next movie. The black hole suddenly surrounded us and we were free falling to our next location.

Third Person

Death sat in his throne, scowling sinisterly, as the remaining villains filed into the hall. He could not understand how some of the greatest villains in DreamWorks arsenal couldn’t handle nine pathetic sticks. He whistled, retaining his cool.

“Well well, if it isn’t the Red Death himself…” Death growled. The other villains turned around to see the massive dragon behind them. “I had such high hopes for you. Not only are you physically imposing, but your name has Death in it. You can devour dragons, but a bunch of toothpicks you can’t handle? Idiota…” Death muttered. “Leave. I intend to make that fiery explosion you endured look like child’s play.”

The Red Death flew away. Death rose from his throne.

“I will give you all one last chance.” Death threatened. “If the person I choose fails me, I will make my next appearance, since clearly you need my help to take them down. Tighten! It’s time to see if a super villain can deliver.”

“I’m gonna be a villain!” He proclaimed, taking off.

“The rest of you, get out of my sight.” Death ordered. “It’s time for the Red Death to meet Death. Straight up.”

Chapter 34: Welcome to Metro City

The sticks fell through the familiar black hole, landing in their next movie. However, they were not all together. Three of them landed with a thud in a large domed room of sorts, various technologies–mostly computer screens–off to the side. Red was the first to recover.

“Where are we now?” He wondered. “Large dome… advanced tech… Yep, I figured as much.” He saw Yellow and Blue nearby. “Yellow! Blue! Are you guys OK?” He shook the two of them awake.

“Ow… I believe I am intact.” Yellow replied. “Where’s True Blue?”

“Over here, buddy.” Blue called. “I’m OK. Where are we, Red?”

“We are in Megamind.” Red answered. “Metro City… Say, Yellow, how’d you like to become an evil genius?”

“Me? Red, you have vastly more knowledge of this movie than I do.” Yellow replied.

“But you do have more technological knowledge than I could ever have.” Red said. “Maybe we three Primaries can play the role of Megamind and his right hand man, Minion. Yellow, you’re the brains, Blue’s the sidekick–and best friend mind you. I can guide us through it.”

“OK…” Blue said slowly. “So we’re evil geniuses?”

“Supervillains, essentially.” Red answered. “Desperate to defeat a superhero, like in a comic book.”

“It sounds intriguing, I’ll be blunt.” Yellow noted. “OK, Red, we’re supervillains? Do we commit crimes and similar actions?”

“Yeah, pretty much. And our first stunt… after breaking out of jail… is kidnapping someone to draw the superhero–Metroman–out into a death trap.” Red explained. “Don’t worry, Yellow… He doesn’t die. This is still a movie that can be enjoyed by kids.”

“So… Who do we kidnap? Who’s our target?” Blue wondered. “We gotta get this movie off the ground if we want the Wishing Star…”

“I hope this isn’t the case… But I’m fearing it might be Candy.” Red worried. “Considering how the main villain eyed her when we first met him in the first Shrek movie, I’m worried she has the reporter Roxanne’s role.”

“And if it isn’t Candy?” Yellow asked.

“We are the main characters. If it isn’t Candy, I’d be happy, but it probably is.” Red replied. “Blue, get in the invisible car and drive to Metro City. She should be there reporting on a new museum dedicated to Metroman.”

“Gotcha.” Blue replied.

“Just… don’t harm her.” Red begged. “She knows this movie. Maybe she’ll make it look realistic… and go quietly. If not, then use this.” He tossed him a can of spray that knocks people unconscious. “It’s what Megamind used in the movie.”

“On it.” Blue said, taking off.

“As for us, Yellow…” Red began, “time to practice our evil laughter.” He chuckled.

“A super smart supervillain…” Yellow began distantly. “I’m willing to play this role and play it to the best of my ability.”

“It honestly kinda suits you, buddy.” Red snickered.

“Extremely humorous, petite male sibling.” Yellow quipped. Even despite the verbal jab, he couldn’t help but smile at Red. “This will be exhilarating, I am positive about that fact.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

As for the other sticks, they landed in a massive crowd of people celebrating the dedication to Metroman’s museum. It took a little while for them to recover, but they soon did. Green, SC, the Tango family, and Candy were all there, rising to their feet next to a news truck.

“Where are we now?” SC asked.

“A crowd of people!” Green exclaimed.

“But what movie?” King asked. Candy scanned the surroundings.

“It’s hard for me to see! I’m short…” She confessed. “Wait… the news truck… the crowd of people… Can you guys see some sort of celebration happening?”

“Yeah, it looks like an unveiling of sorts!” Purple answered.

“Like a hero’s commemoration or something like that.” Gold added.

“Yep, this is Megamind.” Candy confirmed. “And I’d imagine I’m Roxanne.” She zipped into the news van, the others followed.

“Hey, where are the Primaries?” SC asked.

“I… have no idea.” Green answered. “I haven’t seen the dudes yet.”

“Candy, do you have an idea where the Primaries are?” King called. Candy paused in her search for a microphone.

“I’m guessing they’re the main characters: Megamind and Minion.” Candy answered. “I’d imagine Red’s there to guide them.”

“Yellow is arguably the smartest among us.” Purple figured. “He’d be perfect.”

“And Blue’s his best friend, right? The two of them are locked in as Megamind and his sidekick.” Gold figured. “The fish guy.”

“Minion is his name.” Candy said, stepping out of the van with a microphone in her hand. “Time for me to embrace my role. That might mean I disappear for a little while. If this goes the way I think it will, I’m gonna be gone. Just wait here, you’ll be able to see everything, and I’ll be OK. I may not be the best fighter, but I can fend for myself.”

“Candy, I beg to differ. About you not being the best fighter, that is.” Green argued. “You fought Tai Lung with incredible skill a couple movies ago. Confidence, dude.”

“Thanks, Green. I appreciate that.” Candy smiled at him, and he returned a confident nod.

Candy then reported on the unveiling of Metroman’s museum, with a cameraman named Hal recording her. Once they finished, Hal made passing comments toward Candy that made her roll her eyes in both disgust and annoyance. SC, however, his short fuse burned out quickly, but Candy held him back.

“Don’t do anything to him… yet.” She ordered. “You’ll get your chance.”

Soon afterwards, Blue arrived in the invisible car and rolled up to Candy. Blue was anxious about doing this, but Candy insisted that this was the plan and faked getting kidnapped. The guys knew her well enough to know she was faking, and seeing Blue through the car’s open window gave them more ease. Blue drove off and returned to his hideout, escorting Candy inside.

“Candy, this feels so weird I’m doing this.” Blue confessed. “I mean, kidnapping you?”

“It’s how the movie goes.” Candy said flatly. “I’m ready for this.”

Inside, Red and Yellow were waiting. Blue led Candy into the dome.

“My worst fears…” Red said, swallowing hard. “Candy…”

“She’s ready for this.” Blue said to him. He sat Candy down on a chair, while Yellow rounded it and tied her up.

“I do despise doing this, especially to a dear friend, Candy.” Yellow confessed.

“I know there’s nothing personal, it’s what a supervillain does.” Candy replied. Yellow secured her and Red walked up.

“Let’s call your boyfriend in tights, shall we?” He joked.

“Reddy Bear… You’re the only one for me.” Candy gushed. Red blushed.

“Yellow, Blue, time for our dramatic entrance!” Red ordered. “Remember, we’re supervillains. Time to embrace our villainy.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Back at the grand unveiling of Metroman’s museum was a grand, festive time. The superhero Metroman opened the museum and showed off some of his super abilities, like flight, laser vision, and super strength by bursting through a wall. The Secondaries–and Gold–watched from down below, impressed with his abilities, though how he used them drew some suspicions from them.

“Is it just me… or is this guy kinda a showboat?” Purple asked.

“More so than you are, Green.” SC joked.

“Ha ha, very funny.” Green mocked. “But I would agree.”

“Is he juggling babies?” King wondered. “And the parents are OK with that? Oh my gosh…”

“I know you would never allow that, Dad.” Gold noted. “And I’m kinda glad, I’ll admit.” King nodded and smiled, confirming this.

As Metroman was delivering a speech to his loving audience, a black cloud swarmed the museum. It was so big it cast a massive shadow on the entire scene. The crowd, the museum, everything was overshadowed by this cloud, and drones flew into the air. Metroman turned around and shot a scowl toward a couple of large screens projecting Yellow.

“Guys, look!” Purple pointed.

“Yellow!” SC gasped.

“Well, at least he’s OK.” Green sighed. Yellow whipped out his best evil laugh.

“Yellow!” Metroman scowled.

“Greetings, Metroman.” Yellow replied. The crowd booed, except for the sticks. Yellow just shrugged it off.

“Should’ve known you’d try to crash the party.” Metroman retaliated.

“Oh, I have far grander plans.” Yellow replied.

“We all know how this ends: With you behind bars!”

“Oh you had better evacuate, or else say adios to one Candy Kane!” Yellow pressed a button, and one screen showed Candy tied up.

“Candy!” Gold gasped.

“She told us she’d be fine.” King said calmly. “It’s all part of the plan.”

“Don’t panic, Candy, I’m on my way.” Metroman promised.

“I’m not panicking.” She replied. “We’re in the abandoned observatory.”

Yellow quickly cut off her feed, and Metroman took off into the sky. He soon spotted the observatory and flew into it, breaking the old telescope pointing at the sky. The gap closed behind him, and he suddenly knew something was amiss.

“Hold on a second…” He paused. He was standing on a large red X, but the sticks were nowhere around.

“We made a fake observatory for this?” Blue wondered. “Evil genius, right here.” He clasped Yellow by the shoulders.

“Time to fire up the death ray.” Red said, pulling a lever. “Don’t worry… Like I said, no one dies in this movie. Yellow, crank up your evilness. You’re doing great so far!”

“Much appreciated, Reddy Bear.” Yellow replied. “Metroman, you are trapped.”

“You can’t trap justice.” Metroman countered. “It’s an idea, a belief!”

“But even the most heartfelt belief can be corroded over time.” Yellow shot back.

What followed was a humorous back and forth battle of wits between the two, culminating in the death ray powering up and, with the power of the sun, it shot the observatory, Metroman still inside. The blast was so powerful it blew the Primaries back, nearly blinding them. When the dust settled, they rose to their feet.

“Did that do it?” Yellow asked. “Nothing could have possibly survived that blast.”

“Yellow, look!” Blue pointed at the sky. “Something’s coming!”

Blue was right. Something was coming. They didn’t know, but it collided with Yellow, knocking him over. It was Metroman’s cape, and upon further inspection, Metroman wasn’t there. All that remained… was his cape on a skeleton.

Chapter 35: The Plan Takes Shape (Yellow)

I was flabbergasted by this dramatic turn of events. Was this how the cinema proceeded? The “evil genius,” in Red’s words, succeeds in his goals and defeats his opponent? Red assured us that no one ceased to be alive in this cinema, but I found this unfathomable in that moment.

“You did it, Yellow.” Red said.

“Wh- What have I accomplished?” I demanded.

“Don’t worry, Yellow.” Candy replied assuredly. “He is not dead, it’s simply a ploy.”

“He flew out of there with his super speed.” Red continued. “That’s just a prop, I promise. But safe to say, he’s out of the picture for a while.”

“Sooo… What does that mean for Yellow and I?” Blue asked.

“‘Me and Yellow,’ Blue.” I corrected. “Grammar, bestie. Incorrect uses of it drive me insane.”

“Sorry, buddy.” Blue said.

“To answer your question, Blue… You and Yellow get to rule Metro City, as any supervillain dreams of.” Red answered.

“Unchecked mayhem and evil-ness.” Candy added, her use of a word that doesn’t exist slightly irritating me. “Let that mad scientist flow.”

I had to confess… that proposition intrigued me greatly. I have perpetually wondered what it would be like to be a stereotypical “mad scientist,” and now I possessed the opportunity to do so. Even better, I had my two best friends, Blue and Red, by my side. It’s time to coat the town with our primary colors.

Candy was released soon after and that night, Blue, Red, and I strolled into the City Hall, facing literally no resistance from the police officers surrounding it. They were clearly intimidated by me. I defeated their hero, after all. What could they do? With my friends tailing, I took my place at the podium. Candy, holding a microphone, was quick to speak up.

“What do you plan on doing with the city?” She questioned. I saw her, and my companions behind her. Time to embrace the dark side.

“Conceive the most evil thing you possibly can inside your mind.” I answered. “I plan to enact something exponentially worse! But for my friends, do not fret. This is all part of the plan.” I gave them a subtle nod. SC nodded and returned it.

“Blue, Red, shall we?” I asked. My primary-colored counterparts nodded and I led them into City Hall. I took residence within the mayor’s office.

“Yellow, I must admit, you’re really embracing this evil genius role.” Blue confessed.

“Perhaps he is the baddest of them all.” Red teased.

“Cease with the jokes, Red. I’m still myself.” I insisted. “I just need to play my part and do it believably, correct? This is, ironically, for the greater good: Our escape.” Red and Blue nodded in agreement. “Sooo, Red, you’re the DreamWorks expert here. What events will proceed following the capture of City Hall?”

“With Megamind getting everything he wanted,” Red explained, “he soon finds himself without a purpose.”

“Wait, really?” Blue wondered. Red nodded.

“Yep. What is a supervillain with no hero to oppose him?”

“A Yin with no Yang.” I figured.

“Exactly, big brother.” Red confirmed. “So Megamind takes it upon himself to make a new hero, after a talk from the reporter, Roxanne. Or, Candy, in this case. But, for now… Shall we celebrate our victory?”

I was eager to, and for the next few days, we did, causing organized chaos. Blue and Red were more reckless, but I preferred doing personal pet peeves, like leaving a gallon of milk in the bread aisle of the grocery store. People who do that drive me up the wall…

Once our euphoria ceased, Red informed me to head to the museum. It was about time for Megamind’s identity crisis of sorts.

“This is in a cinema made for children?” I asked Red.

“It’s not made for kids.” Red argued. “It’s made for adults but can be enjoyed by kids.”

“He’s got you there, Yellow.” Blue noted. I rolled my eyes, but smiled at Reddy Bear.

“OK, OK, I’ll let you have this.” I conceded. “I should be heading out now.”

“Hold on, Yellow.” Red insisted. “I’m surprised you’re going to me for advice. I mean, you’re the smart one. You know so much about… everything, practically.”

“Reddy Bear, you know as well as I do that I cannot comprehend everything.” I said gently.

“I know, I know…” Red replied, “I’ll be honest, I look up to you. Your intelligence, your calm, your maturity… I’m a little jealous of you.” He shuffled his feet nervously. Even I could sense it was hard for him to confess this to me.

“Oh, Red…” I sympathized. “You know, little buddy, I admire you too. You’re such a great friend, selfless, caring, willing to die for us. You remind me that it’s OK to be a kid sometimes, and I can’t imagine you any other way.”

“I couldn’t either, Red.” Blue added. “You keep us all young, and no matter what, we’re the Primaries. Nothing you could ever do can change that.”

“Except maybe change your color in Alan’s animation software.” I teased. Red chuckled and playfully slugged me in the femur. “Thanks for being honest, Red, I do appreciate it.”

“You’re welcome, Yellow, but you’d better be off.” Red said. I had to agree. “Oh, one more thing. If you do see Candy… Tell her to be careful.”

“I will.” I swore.

I left City Hall and made my way to Metroman’s museum, climbing to the rafters to the statue of the hero. While there, I spotted a familiar shade of red-and-white. It was Candy. Perfect. She was the one I was supposed to see, Red explained.

“Candy!” I called. She located me and bolted nearer to me.

“Hey there, Yellow.” She replied. “I’d imagine Red told you about what happens next.”

“Yeah, although he didn’t tell me how.” I confessed. “Where are SC, Green, and the Tangos?”

“They’re back at my apartment. There are not many major roles in this movie, so I imagine they are background characters at best.”

“I see.” I noted, nodding understandably. “Just so long as they’re well.”

“They are.” She confirmed. “So, are you planning on making the new ‘hero’?” She made air-quotes with her hands.

“This goes haywire, doesn’t it?” I feared.

“You might say that.” She answered. “The new hero is a massive incel, a ‘nice guy,’ so to speak. You saw the cameraman who was recording me, right?” I nodded. “It’s him. To put it simply… He’s creepy. SC nearly came to blows with him to protect me.”

“SC always has had a temper on him.” I noted. “Candy, must I do this task? I can’t put you at risk.”

“I may not have your fighting skill, but I can fend for myself.” Candy promised. “I’m not the type to lie down. I am pretty hardcore.”

“But do you laugh in the face of death?” I teased, borrowing a page from Red’s book. She laughed.

“No, I’m not that arrogant.” She answered, chuckling. “Do it, Yellow. I can handle myself, I promise. Plus, it’s the only way to get the Wishing Star. We have to defeat these villains, it’s the only way to proceed.”

“You’re accurate in that statement. Thanks, Candy.”

“No problem.”

“Oh, one more thing… Red wanted me to tell you to be careful.” Candy shook her head.

“He’s such a sweet and gentle guy.” She sighed. “Tell him that I will.”

“He worries, that’s all. I imagine you mean a great deal to him.”

“He means a lot to me as well,” She admitted, “We’ll always be the best of friends.”

“Just… friends?” I wondered. “Forgive me if I am misplaced, but you two seem to have some real romantic attraction with each other.”

“We do… He’s just not… ready for a full commitment.” She confessed. “Maybe someday soon.”

“Seeing your chemistry together… I am positive you two will get together.” Candy smiled at me, blushing.

“Thanks, Yellow.” She paused. “Hey, random question: Do the guys ever find it hard to understand your extensive vocabulary?”

“Sometimes.” I confessed. “But living with them for such an extensive time, a decade and a half at the minimum, they’ve grown accustomed to it.”

“It might take me that long to understand you fully.” Candy joked. I chuckled.

“I will make it my primary task if need be, but I’m sure you will succeed.”

“Thanks, Yellow. But… speaking of tasks…”

“Right, right…” I sighed, “I should get to… making the villain.”

“And WE will get to defeating him.” She clasped her hand in mine in a brotherly handshake.

“Love the confidence, Candy. Let’s get it done.”

Chapter 36: Creating a Villain (Third Person)

Yellow returned to the lair and, the next day, with Red’s guidance and Blue’s support, got to creating a serum to implant Metroman’s powers into someone. Yellow knew fully well who was going to get them, Candy having explained it to him the night prior, but even despite that, he still had his doubts. However, he had Candy’s assurance and this was, in some sense, for the greater good. They had to escape, and there was no other way to do so other than go along with the movie.

As for Candy, she went home for the night and the next morning, she, the cameraman Hal, the Tango clan, SC, and Green made their way to the Primaries’ hideout. The sticks ventured closer, though SC and King were a bit concerned about their next course of action.

“I know this is part of the plan, Candy, but I just wish there was another way of doing this.” King confessed.

“I would agree. Hal gives off major toxic vibes…” SC noted.

“Trust me on this, guys.” Candy said confidently. “If it fails, I’ll take the blame for it.”

“We just don’t like the idea of putting you in danger.” Purple said worriedly.

“I would agree.” Green confirmed. “Candy, dude, you’re a great friend.”

“Is it worth the risk?” Gold wondered. “We have to escape, I think it might be.”

“It is. Besides… I REALLY want to get to the next movie!” Candy squealed. “OK, OK, let’s do this. Boys, stay away from any open pipes, just in case. Time to make our presence known.”

She pulled out her phone and gave Red a call.

Inside, the three Primaries were all set. The power was loaded into a giant syringe-looking gun and Yellow was ready to make the shot. Blue and Red were with him, going over game plans when Red heard his phone ring. It was Candy.

“Ooooh, I’ve always wanted to say this!” He squealed when he saw the caller ID. He answered, putting the phone on speaker. “Olo.” He said, snickering.

“It’s ‘hello,’ Red.” Blue corrected, stifling a laugh.

“Oh!” Red replied, feigning surprise. “Hello?”

“Reddy Bear! It’s Candy. Are you, Blue, and Yellow ready?”

“Affirmative, Candy.” Yellow answered. “Where is my target?”

“He’s still outside,” Candy answered, glancing back at Hal, “looking lost, but he’s almost in position. Find an empty open pipe. The shot should bounce through that to the outside.”

“Sounds complicated.” Blue noted. “But I love long-range trick shots.”

“Fan out, guys. We don’t have much time!” Red ordered. The three of them split, examining the walls of the hideout when Red stumbled upon something: A door with a lit EXIT sign above it. Remembering what it was, he bounced with excitement.

“Ooooh, Yellow, look!” Red exclaimed. Yellow ran up to him.

“That reads, ‘EXIT,’ Red.”

“That’s short for ‘Exciting.’” Red laughed. Yellow rolled his eyes.

“Focus, Red.” He ordered.

“Yes! Sorry! I… just love that joke.” Red confessed.

“Red! Yellow! Over here!” Blue called from another side of the room. Yellow and Red ran over to him. “Does this look like it, Red?”

“Yep.” Red confirmed.

“But at what moment do I make the shot?” Yellow asked.

“Do it now, Yellow.” Candy said over the phone. Red didn’t hang up to keep the communication open.

“Here we go, guys.” Yellow said, aiming the gun at the open pipe and firing it. The solidified serum bounced through the pipe until it reached the other side, hitting an unsuspecting Hal in the face.

“OWWWW!” He yelled, so loud the Primaries could hear it through the pipe.

“Mission accomplished, guys.” Blue said, high-fiving Yellow and Red.

“Candy should be over there to help.” Red figured.

“And our proceeding task?” Yellow wondered.

“Code: Get the car.” Red joked. “Yellow and Blue, you’ve made a hero. His name is Hal Stewart. It’s time to train him in the ways of heroism, for once you do, good and evil shall battle once more.”

“Except this so-called ‘hero’ will be the villain, right?” Blue guessed.

“Yeah, he’s still a dirtbag.” Red confessed. “But he’ll never go along with the villains. Yellow, check your watch. You can use it to disguise yourself by twisting it. One of many incredible inventions by the main character.”

“Ooh, fascinating!” Yellow said.

“Hal will be so excited to be a hero he won’t question it.” Red continued. “Let’s just say… you’re his space dad and Blue, you’re his space stepmom. I know, it’s weird, but it’s still a comedy movie.”

“Do I have a cool disguise machine, too?” Blue wondered.

“A wig and apron should do.” Red answered. “Just embrace your feminine side, I guess.” He shrugged.

“Not a problem, Red.” Blue replied. “This should be interesting, to say the least.”

“I’m intrigued also.” Yellow agreed. “We know how to proceed, Red. Thanks.”

“Let’s do this thing.” Red said, pounding his fist into his palm.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Yellow and Blue got into the invisible car and drove to Hal’s apartment. After they parked, they watched the clumsy cameraman flop across the front hood of the invisible car and fall onto the ground before picking himself up and returning to his apartment building. Yellow and Blue looked at each other, exchanging looks of, “This is never gonna work.”

“This is the supposed ‘hero’ that Megamind chose.” Blue said skeptically.

“I suppose so.” Yellow shrugged. “We’re simply following Red’s lead, you recall.”

“Yeah… I guess…” Blue agreed. “I’m just waiting for this to backfire epically.”

“Let’s get this superhero training underway and then we’ll see how the proceeding events unfold.” Yellow reasoned, twisting his watch to turn his disguise on. Blue put on his wig and apron and the two of them climbed to Hal’s apartment, breaking the door down and bursting into the room, knocking the fold-up bed into the wall, Hal still inside of it. The two of them looked around.

“Where is he?” Yellow asked. Blue shrugged, but then something began happening. Blue sniffed the air.

“I smell something burning.” He noted. “It’s coming from… the bed!”

He and Yellow didn’t have to wait to pull the bed down. Hal pushed it down himself, his body suddenly looking as muscular as a fitness freak. Metroman’s superpowers were instilled inside of him.

“Arise, my creation, arise!” Yellow called. Hal looked at him and Blue, confused.

“Who are you?” He asked.

“I’m your space dad.” Yellow answered.

“And I’m your space stepmom.” Blue added.

“You have been given unfathomable power.” Yellow explained.

“What kind of power?” Hal asked.

“Unfathomable. To put it simply, it means, ‘impossible to imagine.’” Yellow said. “You have the power of Metroman, and you shall face the threat of Yellow and Blue…”

“No freakin’ way!” Hal exclaimed, accidentally shooting himself backwards out of his apartment with his newfound flight. “I’m gonna be a hero! I’m gonna be a hero!” He chanted. Yellow and Blue gazed at him and exchanged a look.

“I still have my doubts, Yellow.” Blue confessed quietly.

“I do also, but I am intrigued by the idea of normal people getting superpowers. You know my adoration of experimental projects.”

“I suppose you got me there.” Blue shrugged. “Let’s get to the training, I guess.”

Yellow and Blue set up various training methods to hone Hal’s new powers: Flight, laser vision, speed, strength, things of that nature. It took a while, but as time passed, he managed to perfect his various powers and how to use them. From there, it was time for his transition from Hal to his superhero persona: Tighten. One evening, Yellow handed him a stretchy outfit and the plan was set. He was set to fight Yellow the following day and the battle between good and evil was to resume.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

In another part of the city, the remaining members of the Squad were hanging out at Candy’s apartment, chatting, mingling, and discussing what was going to happen next. That discussion led to them doing extensive research on Tighten, hanging papers from the ceiling to navigate their notes better, though it was still very messy.

“This is getting kinda boring, Dad.” Gold moaned. “Can we explore? Please? We’re inside a movie! And we’ve spent most of it cooped up inside. That’s no fun.”

“Don’t worry, my First Prize. I have a feeling that things will pick up soon.” King assured him, examining the notes.

“What do you mean, King?” SC asked.

“Look at it, but don’t look at the small things, look at the big picture…” King suggested.

“The big picture?” Green repeated. “Bro, what are you talking about?”

“No no, King’s right.” Red pointed out. Candy nodded in agreement.

“Step back.” She instructed. The members of the Squad stepped back, outside onto a patio, and from there, the pieces fell into place, somewhat literally. The many notes made the name and shape of Tighten.

“‘Tighten’?” Purple read. “What’s that mean, Candy?”

“You’ll find out shortly…” Candy answered. At that moment, the ‘hero’ flew up behind them.

“My super ears are burrr-ninnnnng.” He said in a sing-songy voice. They all leapt back in surprise. “Hey, Candy, I didn’t know what flowers you like, so I just got them all for you.” He offered Candy a street vendor’s flower cart.

“I’m not a flower girl.” Candy said tersely.

“Back off!” Red argued. Tighten, however, paid him no mind.

“OK, no flowers. I should probably save you a few times first.” He, somewhat literally, whipped Candy off her feet and soared into the air with her, catching the Squad members by surprise.

“We got to help her!” Purple exclaimed.

“My powers… Why can’t I use my powers…?” SC muttered frustratedly.

“Use your wings, bro!” Green ordered.

“Tai Lung shredded them.” SC moped.

“Guys, stand down.” Red ordered, putting his wings on. “I’m going after her.” With that, he took off into the night sky.

Tighten, meanwhile, took Candy on a dangerous joyride, constantly putting her in danger and saving her from said danger. Candy, however, was freaking out, not enjoying this in the slightest, though Tighten was hoping that this was his ticket to her, so to speak. They stopped on top of a tall spire of a building.

“Are you crazy?!” Candy demanded, knowing full well he was.

“I suppose I am crazy, about you.” Tighten said. He took off his mask, revealing himself to be Hal.

“Hal…” Candy muttered.

“Yeah!” He laughed. “Isn’t this great? Now there’s nothing stopping us apart!”

“No, this is not great.”

“Wow, our first fight. This is so us! We’re like an old married couple.”

“Look, there is no us, there will never be an ‘us’.” Candy said flatly. “My heart belongs to someone else.” With that, Tighten seemed to snap. His entire motivation to be a hero came crashing down.

“But… I have powers. I have a cape, I’m a good guy!” He drew closer to Candy, and she backed away, nearly falling off the spire if she didn’t grab Tighten’s suit before she did.

‘You sure about that?’ Candy thought. ‘Good guys don’t put other people in this kind of situation.’

“This isn’t right! You’re supposed to be with me!” Tighten yelled.

In a fit of rage, he soared into the air, his thrust so powerful it shattered the windows of the building, leaving Candy alone. Without her own wings, she was stuck up there, with seemingly no way of getting down. That is… until her rescuer came around.

Chapter 37: Red Romance (Red)

I followed Tighten through the streets, bobbing and weaving my way around the tall buildings, determined to keep him in view. I flapped my wings as hard as I could, shooting fireworks and going as fast as possible. No one does that to my friends… especially Candy. Tighten was going to pay for this.

However, it wasn’t long before his speed overpowered mine, and I lost track of him through the maze that is Metro City. I stopped in the air and recollected my thoughts. I know DreamWorks, and with that knowledge, I pieced it together. Tighten probably left Candy on a tall building, just like the movie. I still don’t know how the character got down, but I knew how Candy was getting saved: By me.

I flew up, higher and higher, up the tallest building in the city, soon finding her stranded on the spire.

“Candy!” I cried.

“Reddy Bear!” She exclaimed. “I’m so glad to see you.”

“Take my hand, Candy. I’ll get you down from here.” I promised, extending my hand. She took it and I descended to the ground.

“Thanks, Red.” She said gratefully.

“Anything for my friends… My family.” I replied sheepishly. I then heard my stomach growl. “Are you hungry? I feel as starved as a hyena.”

“I could eat as well.” Candy agreed. “Want to try to find something?”

“Absolutely.”

We looked around and soon settled on a relatively nice restaurant. It wasn’t high-end, but it wasn’t anything like fast food, either. We quickly got seated and placed our orders, I made sure to get something vegetarian. Thank goodness for meat-free options. While we waited, we got to talking.

During our talk, I shared a bit more of myself with Candy, that is to say… my beliefs with her, just as I promised her I would. She seemed really intrigued, and though I don’t consider myself as well-versed in it as my older, wiser brothers, she seemed to be grateful regardless. I felt myself draw even closer to her as we talked, and eventually… It got back around to her.

“And what about you?” I asked after I finished. “What’s your opinion on… life, I guess?” Candy sighed deeply.

“Most of my views were planted by Flodge.” She answered. “When I became a Stripe, Flodge’s device took some of my memories, just how she wanted it. I have most basic things, like a love for DreamWorks and basic functions, but who I was, where I came from, my old identity… it’s fuzzy at best. She wanted me to be a blank slate, and that’s what she got. I believed those toxic ideologies for years… until you came along and turned them upside-down.”

“Must’ve been a shock…” I figured.

“It was. Experiencing mercy for the first time… I couldn’t understand it. A part of me still doesn’t, I’ll admit, and it made me realize… maybe my loyalty should be questioned. Ever since that day, I’ve been looking for something new, some new philosophy that I can call my own. That’s probably why I want to make Tiger Tech as open a community as possible… I’m still looking for that philosophy.”

“Whatever you choose, I’m sure you’ll make the right call.” I assured her.

“Thanks, Red, but I’m cautious. I mean, think about it. Imagine that everything you believed in turned out to be a lie, everyone you trusted turned out to be untrustworthy. Everything I thought came crashing down like a cannon on Lord Shen.” I chuckled at her reference. “Nowadays, my employees all have their own perspectives, they’ve found something for themselves, but where’s mine?”

I felt Candy’s pain in her voice, and I was shocked to learn this. This outwardly hardcore stick who is determined she can handle herself had a soft and broken heart. Admittedly, it hit me right in my feels, and I felt compelled to do something, to say something. She was my best friend, after all, and my feelings for her were well-known.

“I’m so sorry to hear that, Candy, but I promise you this: the guys and I will help you any way we can.” I held her hand gently, and she looked up at me. “And no matter what, I promise, we’ll always be the bestest of friends, closer than Puss and Perrito. Maybe even something more than that…”

“Thanks, Red. It means a lot to me to have someone who cares as much as you do.” I felt myself blush.

“You’re welcome, Candy.”

“You’ve given me a lot to think about, shown me ideas I’ve never heard of before… But I need time to digest them. I imagine lots of people are passionate about their ideologies… Flodge certainly was… I just want to find the right one for me.”

“I respect that. It’s a big decision, one that can’t be made overnight. Whatever you need from us, be it support or space, I… well, we… will do what we can. I promise.”

“I appreciate it.” Candy said. “Ya know, Red, you’re a lot more mature than you get credit for.”

“Hmm…” I pondered, “maybe there’s hope for me yet.” At that moment, our meals arrived, mine with my drink selection being chocolate milk. We both glanced at it. “On second thought, I’m a kid for life, and I’m proud of it.” We chuckled.

“I can’t imagine you any other way.”

We ate our meal together and enjoyed each other’s company. It’s always nice spending time with Candy, and to be honest, my love for her only grew during the course of the night, but I had to contain myself. I had some hope that things might work between us, but I couldn’t rush things. She was going through a lot, I had to give her time.

In the meantime, though… There were bigger things to deal with… Namely Tighten. After Candy and I bid each other good-bye, I flew back to the hideout. Sure enough, Yellow and Blue were waiting there, looking a little sleepy, but they were still up examining some of the weapons Megamind used in the movie. Blue was the first to notice me.

“Red!” Blue exclaimed, running up and hugging me.

“Blue! It’s so good to see you!” I replied. “Yellow! Hi!”

“I am greatly over the moon to set my gaze upon you, Red!” Yellow exclaimed.

“Me as well, Yellow.” I agreed.

“Yellow and I were going over gameplans, looking at weapons and whatnot.” Blue said.

“But we figured you would possess superior plans to us.” Yellow added. “You know these movies far better than us.” I felt myself blush. Yellow calling me smart is high praise.

“I appreciate it, buddy.” I said. “Well, I figure Tighten has started his villain arc. Did you find a gun that can dehydrate things at will and turn them into cubes?”

“Yeah, we did.” Blue confirmed.

“Along with a giant mech that I can control by moving around within its cockpit.” Yellow replied.

“We’re gonna need that.” I said. “Tomorrow is the ultimate battle… good and evil, except now, we’re the good guys. We’re going to confront Tighten and the battle is gonna be waged.”

“I perceive that as a plan.” Yellow said.

“We’re not gonna be able to talk this out, are we?” Blue offered. I shook my head no. Blue sighed. “Alright then. If it’s a battle we want, it’s a battle we’re gonna get.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The next morning, Yellow, Blue, and I got up and, inside Yellow’s mech, we made it to Tighten’s apartment. Bursting through a wall, we strolled inside. Tighten was there, playing video games, surrounded by lots of expensive stuff. I remained a bit behind–I figured Tighten wouldn’t want to see me as of yet–while Yellow and Blue confronted Tighten.

“Hey, Yellow! You’re actually the guy I wanted to see. Also, there’s a door here.” Tighten said, gesturing to the door.

“Wait… what’s this?” Blue asked.

“A stack of cash and other expensive items.” Yellow answered.

“It doesn’t belong to me.” Tighten loudly whispered. “Pretty cool right?”

“You’re supposed to be a hero.” Yellow argued.

“Being a hero is for losers!” Tighten retaliated. “It’s work, work, work 24/7 and for what? I only took the gig to get the girl and it turns out, Candy doesn’t want anything to do with me.” He burned a catalog with a picture of Metroman carrying Candy with his laser vision.

“Candy Kane?” Blue wondered.

“Yeah, Candy Kane! I saw her having dinner and making googly-eyes with some puny red stick!” Tighten exclaimed. “Who needs all that noise? That’s why I think we should team up!”

“Nevermore.” Yellow protested. “No one disrespects my friend Reddy Bear like that.” I leapt into view.

“And no one…” I said tersely. “Messes with my family.”

“You!” Tighten exclaimed, clenching his fists.

“Yellow, Blue, get into the mech.” I ordered. “Keep him busy while I get the others. We’re gonna need a full team for this.”

“No need to tell me twice!” Blue said, bolting. Yellow followed.

“When I get my hands on you, I’m gonna…” Tighten said furiously.

“You’re gonna have to catch me first!” I said, cheekily, putting my wings on and taking off, and just like that, the battle was on.

Chapter 38: The Damage Reversed

Yellow

Red soared into the sky, Tighten’s gaze followed him before he locked eyes with me. Red instructed me and Blue to serve as the decoy while he fetched the rest of the guys, but I will be honest, I was partially skeptical as to whether we could buy enough time. I have seen Tighten and his powers, and he is extremely overpowered. Blue must’ve sensed my anxieties.

“You OK, Yellow?” He asked.

“Surprisingly… I’m freaking out.” I answered.

“Yeah, I get that.” Blue sympathized. “Just buy time until Red arrives with the guys. All of us together, we’re truly unstoppable.” I looked at him and smiled.

“Thanks, Blue. You perpetually know the exact thing I need to hear.”

“You’re welcome, Yellow, now look out!”

Tighten clocked us, knocking us and the robot off our feet and into a highway support column. I quickly got up and retaliated, keeping him off-balance. Every time he tried going for Red, I landed a blow, and soon his primary target was me. We got ourselves into a fencing duel with light poles before he picked us up and slammed us through a building, smashing through the glass protecting us and grabbing both of us in his fists.

“OK, OK, take it easy!” Blue begged. “You’ve won! You’ve won! Take us to jail now!”

“Ohhhhhh, no. I was thinking more like the morgue.” Tighten threatened, his laser vision powering up. “Game over.”

I flinched, preparing for impact, when I suddenly was swept away from Tighten’s grip in a cloud of dust. When it settled, I found myself and Blue in the hands of Candy.

“Yellow! Blue! You two OK?” She asked.

“We’re alive, thanks to you.” Blue sighed.

“Indeed, you rescued us.” I said, relieved.

“Just returning the favor you guys did for me.” She smirked. Red flew down, Green, the Tango family and SC on a new pair of wings right behind him.

“Tighten never knew what hit ‘im.” Red said, pounding his fist into his palm.

“It’s about time we got into the action!” Gold said eagerly.

“No one messes with the Rainbow Squad.” Purple added.

“Anyone that does should be worried.” King said. “They have no idea what we’re capable of.”

“OK, Red, Candy, what’s the plan?” SC asked.

“How do we defeat this dude?” Green asked.

Before either of them could answer, though, Tighten landed in front of us with a loud, powerful thud, glaring at us, specifically Candy. Candy glared back, Red stepping up to her side. The rest of us joined him.

“You mess with any of us,” I shouted, “you mess with all of us.”

“This town isn’t big enough for two supervillains!” Tighten thundered.

“Oh you’re a villain, alright, just not a ‘super’ one.” Red mocked.

“What’s the difference?” Tighten asked. Candy spun around us to kick up some dust, and we each took on a fighting pose.

“Presentation!” Candy exclaimed. Green began blaring Welcome to the Jungle over his phone, we all put on our wings and took off into the sky in teams of two–or three in the Tango clan’s case.

“We must devise a plan to defeat him.” I said to Blue, my flying partner.

“You’re smart, Yellow. If anyone can, it’d be you.” Blue complimented. I gave it some thought when an idea came to me.

“I was the one who gave him his powers.” I recalled. “Perhaps I can take them away using the same method.”

“That makes sense.” Blue agreed. “Where’s the diffuser?”

“I think it’s back at the hideout.” I said. “I need to fly back and get it, just so long as you guys will be able to keep Tighten off my back.”

“Leave it to us, Yellow.” Blue said, clasping his hand in mine. I looked Blue in his eyes, and at my wrist. There was the watch. I took it off and handed it to Blue.

“Perhaps you could perceive this as necessary.” I noted. “Hold onto this.”

“Thanks, Yellow.” He took the watch. “You might need this.” He handed me an invis potion.

“Thanks, True Blue. Buy me time!” I ordered. “And stay safe.”

“We keep each other safe.” Blue replied. “As always.”

I nodded and took off toward the lab, only to be stopped by Tighten.

“You’re not going anywhere.” He growled. I put my wings away.

“Try to catch… what you can’t see!” I quickly chugged the potion, and instantly, I vanished. Tighten looked bewildered as I slipped away, Gold and Purple taking swipes at Tighten.

“Does Yellow know the plan?” I heard Purple ask.

“He’s smart, he’ll figure something out.” Gold answered. “Go, bro! GO!”

The two of them leapt into the air, giving me the time to put my wings on and return to the lab, all before my invis potion ran out. I quickly grabbed the diffuser and I raced back as fast as I possibly could. I had no idea how long the guys could hold their own against an individual as powerful as SC’s brother, Chosen, and that added urgency carried into my flight pattern. I zipped to the lab as quickly as I could and sure enough, the diffuser was in there. I quickly grabbed it, put it in my inventory, and soared back to my family as rapidly as my wings could flap and my fireworks could fly. By the time I returned, I saw the guys were slowly but surely getting overwhelmed by Tighten’s sure power and ferocity. I was forced to intervene.

“HEY!” I yelled. Tighten turned around and faced me. I locked eyes with him and we slowly descended to the ground. “Stay away from my family! I will not tolerate you attacking my dear companions!”

Tighten gave me a confused look, glancing at something nearby. I followed his gaze and noticed something… someone… A stick figure pinned against a fountain by a massive spire, but it wasn’t any stick figure. His hue was my shade of yellow. Squinting through my glasses, I saw the watch on his arm. Instantly I realized who it was.

“Blue!” I gasped, racing over to him. I bent down and checked his pulse, twisting the watch in the process to return his dodger blue shade. He was alive, albeit very weak and banged up. I felt tears fill my eyes, but I had to choke them back. Tighten needed to be taken down. I stood up and glared at him.

“You monster!” I exclaimed. Tighten zoomed over to me with his flight and grabbed me.

“Yellow!” I heard my friends call. I could see them running toward me, but I waved with my arm, trying to tell them to escape.

“This is the last time you make a fool out of me!” Tighten shouted.

“I created you to exist as a hero.” I choked out. “You created the fool out of yourself.”

Furious, Tighten ripped my wings off and threw me into the air. Without wings, I couldn’t fly, and I soon found myself free falling, approaching terminal velocity. I thought I was finished, but I saw my trajectory.

“My friends…”

Below me, I saw the others backing up from Tighten, who was floating toward them imposingly. However, the main focus was Candy and Red, both of whom were being backed into the fountain where Blue was.

“The fountain… That’s it!”

I tossed the diffuser into the air and whipped out the dehydration gun, zapping myself with it. I turned myself into a cube just in time to hear Tighten.

“Say ‘bye-bye,’ Candy.” Tighten seethed. I in my cube form suddenly landed in the fountain, instantly rehydrating myself, and with my foresight, I knew that my diffuser was about to land right in my hands, which is exactly what it did.

“Greetings, adversary.” I said, sticking the diffuser up his nose and pulling the trigger. He began glowing in a weird yellow light as I drained his powers from him. Once I finished, he collapsed in a heap on the ground. “If there’s one thing I know about villains: They are perpetually defeated by the protagonists!”

Tighten groaned in pain, and suddenly, I was surrounded by people cheering me on. Tighten was taken away in handcuffs by police, presumably for an extended period, and my friends also raced up to me and embraced me, but Red and Candy were first.

“You did it, Yellow!” Red exclaimed. “You have become the ultimate hero!”

“You saved my life, Yellow. Thank you.” Candy added gratefully. I smiled at her.

“You’re welcome, Candy.” I replied. “Wait, Blue!” I broke away and raced to Blue, my friends right behind me.

“Is he OK?” SC asked.

“He rescued us with the help of potions.” Gold said. “He’s a hero, too.” I checked his pulse once more.

“His heart’s beating.” I answered. “He’ll need time to recover, though.”

“How long will it take to heal?” Purple asked, concerned.

“I don’t fully know the extent of his injuries.” I answered. “It could be within a few minutes, or days, but if I had to guess, I’d imagine the latter.”

“I know how to wake him up.” Green said, pulling out something from his inventory.

“Wait, is that…?” King asked.

“It’s Netherwart!” I gasped. “Oh Green, thank you!” I quickly swiped it from his hand and held it under my bestie’s nose, hoping it would awaken him. After a long, tense moment, I heard him sniffing quickly and deeply.

“Is that…” He moaned painfully, “my beloved… Netherwart…?” He opened his eyes. “It is! Gimmie gimmie gimmie!” He ate it right out of my hand like a tiger. I quickly retracted my hand due to his surprise reaction. As he savored and swallowed it, he suddenly realized that we were all standing over him. His face turned purple with embarrassment. “Oh my gosh, did you guys see that?”

“Every second, Blue.” SC teased. We all died laughing as I helped Blue to his feet and hugged him.

“Oh Blue, I’m immensely overjoyed to see you are alive and well!” I exclaimed, tears flowing down my face.

“I’m glad to see you too, Yellow.” Blue replied. “Did you win?”

“We triumphed, buddy. We all did.”

“Hey Green, what were you doing with Netherwart in your inventory?” Red asked suspiciously. “You’re the one who’s always telling Blue he’s obsessed with it. How come YOU have it?”

The usually cool, cocky, and confident Green suddenly got a nervous look, and he shuffled his feet shyly before he finally came up with an answer.

“I… gotta have it on hand in case something happens to Blue.” He finally answered. “He… means a lot to me and I don’t want to lose him.”

The guys and I glanced at each other.

“Extend your hand into the air if you perceive his explanation as accurate,” I ordered. Outside of Green, none of us did so, not even Candy. “Extend your hand if you perceive it as inaccurate.” I then said. Every one of our hands went up, except for Green’s, obviously.

“It’s true!” Green protested.

“Suuuuuure it is, Green.” Candy teased.

“Whatever the reason, it doesn’t matter.” Red insisted. “We defeated another villain! We did it, guys! This is worthy of celebration! Let’s head back to Metroman’s museum! I have a feeling that they’re going to be dedicating something for you, Yellow.”

“Wait, really?” I asked. “Wow, I… I’m honored.”

I grabbed my wings and the guys and I returned to Metroman’s museum, except I was opening a museum dedicated to me. I broke through a wall in my own special way, by lining up a trail of redstone to a TNT, which exploded. I strolled through it and cut the ribbon. Behind me, a massive statue of me holding up the Earth was unveiled, similar to what Metroman had before me. I felt rather embarrassed, I’ve never dreamed of this type of publicity, nor have I ever wanted it. My friends are more than sufficient for me.

“Go on, Yellow!” Blue urged. “Let’s celebrate!”

I looked at him and the rest of my friends and nodded. Green played Michael Stickson’s Bad over a boombox and we celebrated in front of a massive group as the new heroes of Stick City. I was just excited to see my family all united together again. We did it, we took down a literal super supervillain. By the time Green’s song ended, we soon found ourselves in the black hole once again.

“One more movie down!” King exclaimed. “Red, Candy, where to next?”

Candy grinned like a little kid, and Red did as well.

“Oooooooh, I think I know!” Candy shouted.

“One of our personal favorites!” Red added.

“We’re going to Kung Fu Panda 2!” the two red sticks cheered in unison.

“I am SO EXCITED!” Candy squealed. “I LOVE this movie! It’s my all-time favorite!”

“Hey baby bro, you might be reprising your role as Po-ple again.” Gold teased.

“I actually found his story in the movie quite relatable, so it would be fitting for me.” Purple shrugged. “Get ready, guys. This villain is no joke.”

“Lord Shen…” Candy said. “Ooooh, I cannot wait to get my hands on him!”

“You won’t have to wait long!” SC shouted. “Here we goooooooooooooo!”

We fell through the other side of the hole, and found ourselves in the world of the second Kung Fu Panda cinema.

Third Person

Back in the Hall of Villains, Death sat on his throne, his bright red eyes seemed to shine even brighter and pierce even harder through his adversaries. The remaining villains filed into the room in single file, lining up in front of the massive Wolf.

“Tighten, step forward.” Death growled. Tighten did so, prompting Death to rise from his throne, dragging his sickles on the ground, sending sparks through the air. “Supervillain. You are a supervillain. And yet, you couldn’t handle nine measly sticks.” He growled deeply, his snout mere inches from Tighten’s face. Tighten himself was crouching in fear, so badly one would think Death was Metroman. “You are pathetic, get out of my sight before I take you out. Permanently.”

Tighten nodded and flew off.

“I gave you all one last chance… and you failed me. It’s time to bring out the big guns. Bring me Lord Shen!” The fearsome, imposing, genocidal peacock stepped out of line and stood in front of Death. “Lord Shen, you’ve given me a lot of work over the years, those pandas you slain were powerful and their souls were tasty. You have no excuses. Strike these sticks down where they stand.”

“The Year of the Peacock begins now!” Shen exclaimed, about to take off.

“And to make sure you do your job… I will be joining you on this.” Death growled. “And that goes for all of you. I will be assisting in the chase, breaking them down bit by bit. You have them in your grasp. If you fail me, you won’t live long enough to regret it.” The villains nodded, understanding. “You are dismissed. Lord Shen… Show no mercy. The chase truly begins now.”

Chapter 39: Haunting Memories (Purple)

We landed in our next movie, one of my personal favorites I might add: Kung Fu Panda 2. The reason I love it so much is its message about family, and how Po eventually came to terms with his past and recognized his adopted father as his true father, as I have… for the most part.

There are times when I’ve thought of my old home. I still make sure to visit Mom’s grave every once in a while to pay my respects. But it’s not uncommon for those… nightmares… to flare up. Memories of Navy are seared into my mind even years later. You can’t forget your past, only come to terms with it, learn from it, and move on. I just hoped that those traumas didn’t repeat themselves for me as they did for Po in the movie.

But that had to wait. After I landed on the floor of the training hall, I sat myself up, and the guys were quick to follow suit.

“Is everyone here?” Red asked.

“A headcount is required.” Yellow replied. “Red, I see you’re here.”

“I have arrived, my dudes.” Green said, rising to his feet.

“True Blue checking in.” Blue added.

“Master Tigress… er, Candy… is here.” Candy said. “Oooooooh, we’re here! In Kung Fu Panda 2! This is my favorite movie of all time!” She squealed, zipping around everywhere with her speed. “Reddy Bear, you’re here too! This is gonna be awesome!!”

“I’m stoked for it as well.” Red admitted. “I’m eager to do battle with Lord Shen. He’s one of the greatest villains in all of DreamWorks arsenal! I cannot WAIT!”

“Who’s missing?” I asked.

“If I’m not mistaken…” Yellow theorized, “Gold and the pair of oranges, and that includes your father, Purple.”

“Just like the first Kung Fu Panda.” I noted. “Dad should be at the noodle shop, but I wonder where SC and Gold are…”

“I have some ideas…” Candy began, “but I guess we’ll see if my theory is correct.”

“Soooo… What do we do now?” Green asked.

“I spy a bowl of bean buns.” Blue pointed out, gesturing to a table behind me. We all looked at it.

“Hey Purple, I bet you can’t fit five of those in your mouth.” Red teased. I looked at the bean buns.

“Judging by the size of them, Purple should be able to fit eight at the minimum into his mouth.” Yellow reasoned.

“Shall we try?” I asked. The guys, and Candy, nodded yes. Much to my friends surprise, and mine as well, I topped out at fitting 10 of them in my mouth. They weren’t very big after all. Red congratulated me and Candy claimed that my training had paid off. We all had a lot of fun with each other until I was told that Shifu wanted to see me in a mountain cave. I realized what I had to do, so I apologized to the guys and took off.

I put my wings on and flew to the mountain where Shifu was. Upon landing, I put my wings away and clambered to a small cave inside the mountain. Inside I saw Shifu meditating on a small rock surrounded by a small spring of water.

“Inner peace…” Shifu said calmly and quietly. “Inner peace…”

“Master!” I called out. “Master Shifu! You wanted to see me?” I paused for a moment before continuing. “What’s going on? What are you doing?”

“One of Master Oogway’s final teachings.” Shifu answered. I watched as he positioned his feet, waved his arms, and caught a drop of water dripping down from above on his hand. He redirected it from one hand to the other without breaking it before letting it slide onto a small plant. The plant dropped it into the pool around him.

“That… is really cool.” I gasped. “How did you do that?”

“Inner peace.” Shifu answered.

“Inner peace…” I repeated slowly.

“It is the next phase of your training.” Shifu told me, disappearing and reappearing in random places around me as he spoke. “Every master must find his path to inner peace. Some choose to meditate for 50 years in a cave like this without the slightest taste of food or water.”

“I’d… rather not…” I confessed. “I don’t think I have the resilience for that.”

“Some find it through pain and suffering as I did.” He continued. “Purple, the day you were chosen as Dragon Warrior... was the worst day of my life.” I rolled my eyes, annoyed. “By far. Nothing else came close. It was the worst, most painful mind-destroying, horrible, moment–I have ever experienced.” He shuddered before continuing. “But once I realized the problem was not you, but within me, I found inner peace, and was able to harness the flow of the universe.”

‘The flow of the universe…’ I thought, not really buying this. ‘Sure, Master, but I guess I’ll play along.’

“Gotcha, gotcha…” I said. “Sooo… I’ve already been through a lot of pain and suffering. Is there a chance that-?” I started asking before getting cut off.

“Po-ple!” exclaimed a voice behind me. I turned around and Candy. “Bandits! Approaching the musician’s village!”

“Sounds exciting.” I noted. “Shall we save the day?”

“You know it.” Candy replied. “And no snack stops this time.”

“Never, my friend.” I confirmed, putting my wings on and soaring into the sky. Time for the first epic fight scene of the movie.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

I flew to the musicians village, meeting up with the guys on the way there, and with Candy speeding along below us, I knew these bandits didn’t know what they had coming. With my friends flanking me on both sides, we landed in the village, the sun to our backs, striking a powerful pose. The bunny and pig villagers cheered for us and our arrival, but the bandits also saw us and stopped their thievery instantly. The bandits were a pack of wolves, led by one wolf who had one eye, the Boss Wolf.

“A purple stick figure?” Boss Wolf demanded. “That’s impossible!”

“My fist hungers for justice!” I proclaimed.

“Get him!” Boss Wolf ordered.

“Let’s do this, guys!” I exclaimed, charging into battle, the FSF and Candy followed suit, using their unique skills and fighting styles to fight back against the wolves. Even better, we had each other’s backs, like a true family.

“Purple, behind you!” Green exclaimed, throwing a shield to cover my back from arrows.

“Thanks, Green.” I said gratefully. “Candy, let’s unite.”

“Double death strike time!” Candy exclaimed, swinging me in a circle at a high speed. I kicked any wolves around us in the face both on the ground and in the air with help from my wings. When I landed, the guys and I used our teamwork and coordination to beat back the robber’s attack and eventually, the Boss Wolf howled. Strangely enough, the wolves didn’t seem interested in money, valuables, or the citizens of the village, but the metal instruments they were playing. After Boss Wolf howled, the instruments were hauled up.

“Reddy Bear-” I shouted, but it turns out Red was a step ahead.

“Already on it, Purple!” Red replied, soaring into the air with his wings. He whipped out his sword and sliced the ropes holding the instruments. It was at that moment that I saw a small pig hiding inside a large bell that the wolves collected… and he was freefalling. I exhaled sharply, put my wings back on and flew into the air, grabbing the ropes holding the mass of metal together and holding onto it as much as I could. The FSF joined me and, between the five of us, we rescued the pig inside and repulsed the bandits.

“Is everyone OK?” I asked. Judging by their cheers, everyone was, but the Boss Wolf wasn’t done yet. He charged at me with a large hammer in hand.

“I got this one.” I said confidently, but as the Boss Wolf raised his arm to swing his hammer, I saw something on his arm that caused me to freeze. I saw a simple shape, a small circle… but it wasn’t the shape of it that caused me to freeze, it was the color of it. It was an eye-catching blue, but not just any blue, it was the exact shade of blue of my birth father, Navy. As soon as I saw it, I got flashbacks of… something I had thought I forgot. I saw mass destruction, fires, mayhem, sticks screaming… and my birth dad Navy heartlessly yelling at me to hurry up. It was like a momentary flashback that completely paused me.

“Purple!” Candy exclaimed, grabbing me, but I was in too much of a shock to react. The Wolf Boss smacked me in the face with his hammer, knocking us all over.

“Chew on that, stick figure!” He exclaimed before he got pulled away on one of the ropes of metal. I woozily grabbed my head and sat upright, my mind spinning like a tornado. The guys quickly surrounded me.

“Purple!” Red exclaimed. “Are you OK, buddy?”

“What happened, buddy?” Blue asked, concerned. “You just… froze…”

“It seemed as if you were in some sort of… trance.” Yellow pointed out.

“I’ve never seen you just… stop like that, dude.” Green observed. “Did… did you see…”

“I fear he might have…” Candy answered. “Purple, please…”

“I think I saw…” I gasped, my mind still racing a mile a minute, “I think… I saw someone I never wanted to see again…”

“You don’t mean…” Green began.

“Yes, Green.” I confessed. “Listen, I- I got to find Dad, and I have to find him now.”

I put on my wings and took off into the air, leaving the guys behind. If anyone could understand me, it’s my adoptive father. I just hoped he was where I thought he was: The noodle shop. With no other leads, I flew there, hoping to find some calm and comfort from him after… whatever it was I just saw.

Chapter 40: Getting it Together (Third Person)

Purple hurriedly soared through the sky, his mind still racing from the flashback he saw. He wasn’t sure how he could tell the guys about it, it was just really personal… and painful. Not to mention they didn’t have to experience the pain and loss of a family member like his dad did. Surely he would understand. He was the one who knew Purple the best. But… how to tell him?

Was Purple relapsing? Was Purple going back to who he was? Surely not, he still remembered how desperate and hopeless he was, and he wasn’t back at that point… Purple just thought he was past all that. He thought he had pushed through it with his family’s help… he wasn’t going back… was he?

‘No,’ he assured himself. ‘I’m not who I was. But still… Where’s Dad?’

It did not take him long to return to the Valley of Peace. He made sure to fly there as quickly as he possibly could. He needed to talk to someone sooner rather than later, as he could feel himself slowly becoming overwhelmed with thoughts of his birth father. He collected himself in the air and flew down to King’s noodle shop, where he was met with awe from the customers.

“The Dragon Warrior!” Some of them gasped.

“Awesome!” A bunny said. The reactions got King’s attention, and he proverbially dropped his work.

“Purple?” King asked. “Purple!” He ran out to hug his son, and Purple hugged him back.

“Hey, Dad. I’m so glad to see you.”

“No more than I am to see you.” King praised. “Where are the others?”

“They’re safe… for the most part. I still don’t know where SC and Gold are…” Purple answered distantly. King noticed Purple’s tone.

“You OK, Purple?” He gently asked. Purple sighed deeply.

“I’m not, Dad… I’m not…” He answered remorsefully.

“Do you want to talk about it?”

“Maybe over some of your delicious cooking.” Purple said, flashing a small smile.

“You got it, kiddo.” King replied, quickly tossing some noodles into a pot. He didn’t take long to serve up noodles for himself and Purple and the two of them headed back upstairs for a little privacy. Gatito was up there, and he leapt into Purple’s lap. Purple stroked his fur, and that seemed to relax him, at least enough to collect his thoughts.

“What’s on your mind?” King asked.

“Well… Me and the guys, we were fighting off some bandits, you know, typical stuff for us, nothing too dangerous when… near the end… I saw this sort of… flashback… of something I thought I had long forgotten.”

“Can you describe it?” King asked.

“It’s fuzzy… but I recall… mass destruction, wreckage… voices of sticks screaming and fleeing… But what I distinctly remember seeing is Navy. Dad, I saw him. I saw him and Mom. Vividly. My mind has been spinning ever since… Dad, I feel something welling up inside of me, something toxic… something I hoped was long buried after Green chased me down and you adopted me. It feels like…”

“A relapse?” King guessed, slurping up some noodles with his chopsticks.

“Yeah, something from my past rearing its ugly head.” Purple answered. “Dad, I don’t want to go back there! I can’t go back there!” He set his bowl to the side and threw his arms around his adoptive father, quietly crying. Gatito leapt off his lap and stood nearby. “I’m not who I was…” He wept. “Right? I’m not a Seal… Please tell me I’m not a Seal!” “Seal” being Purple’s birth name, Navy’s last name.

“Absolutely not, Purple.” King answered comfortingly. “I’ve seen it. You’re so much happier, more joyful, you’re a brand-new person from when you were on my doorstep following my every whim. You’re not who you were, you’re so much more than that, you’re just going through a tough time, that’s all. Sometimes the emotions just hit you all at once. I know, I’m proof of that.”

“Yeah…” Purple replied, racking his brain. He soon uncovered a memory from a couple of years ago… while King was still in the process of adopting him. His mind raced back to that time… and he soon recalled it.

Purple was chilling in his room when he heard the sound of fists banging against a wall coming from the living room. Curious, he stepped outside to investigate, and found King punching the wall in desperation.

“It should’ve been me!” King wailed. “Why? Why did it have to be my Golden Boy?! WHY?!?”

King dropped to his knees helplessly. It was one of those days when everything was crashing down on him all at once. Even despite having been forgiven by the Gang and living with Purple for a little while now, he still deeply missed his biological son and blamed himself for the loss. Heartbroken, Purple slowly walked up to him and put a gentle hand on his shoulder. Unsure of what to say, he said what his mom would often tell him after long, arduous days of training.

“It’s gonna be OK.” He said. “This pain shall pass.”

King looked back up at him through his tear-stained eyes and the two hugged each other tightly, crying quietly and rubbing each other’s backs to sooth each other.

“Thank you… Son.” King said through his tears. Purple was shocked to be called, “son,” a name he hadn’t been called since Pink was alive. It broke his heart in all the best of ways. He had found a father again, even during the adoption process, and it confirmed once again to him how genuine and loving King was. Purple recalled that vividly before snapping back to the present. He released King and looked at King’s gentle eyes.

“We managed those times… with each other.” Purple pointed out. “We found peace, even then.”

“And now, my little Prince, we have the Prince of Peace living inside of us." King added. “Don’t ever forget that, kiddo. I know you’ll have trying times ahead. We all will, but do not fear. You have your friends, you have me, you have your faith. You’ve got everything you need to overcome this… and I strongly believe that you can.”

“Not by myself… But with my allies by my side.” Purple agreed.

“You got it, kiddo.” King praised. “Our best weapon is each other. Your friends will always be there, even when I’m not.”

“Don’t say that, Dad.” Purple argued gently. “You will always be with me… in my mind and heart.”

“Aww, I love you too, son.” The two of them hugged again for a moment. “You will always be a Tango.”

During their embrace, Gatito walked up and rubbed his head around and between Purple’s legs, as cats do. Purple chuckled, feeling the soft fur around him, when they got a visit from the Stripe herself, Candy.

“Knock knock. Anyone home?” She called.

“Up here, Candy.” Purple called. Candy climbed the stairs.

“I hope this isn’t a bad time…” She said sheepishly, “I just wanted to make sure you’re OK, Purple. I know how much trauma Po experienced in the movie, and with you taking his role…”

“I appreciate it, Candy.” Purple said gratefully. “I’m doing better now. Dad’s helping me through it.”

“That’s good to hear.” Candy said. King nodded in agreement.

“Oh, Candy, have you seen Gold?” King asked. “I’ve been worried about him and my little Prince here…”

“No, I’m afraid I haven’t… But I have a theory as to where he is.” Candy explained. “Gongmen City.”

“Gongmen City?” The two Tangos repeated.

“What’s he doing there?” King asked.

“If he is who I think he is… He and SC are part of the Masters Council.” Candy continued. “They’re Masters Ox and Croc… and I fear Lord Shen is going to give them an explosive greeting… Po-ple, we should probably be heading back. We’re going to need you in peak form in order to take him down.”

“I’m ready.” Purple said determinedly. “Dad?” King sighed deeply.

“Just promise you’ll come back to me.”

“We’ll bring him back before you can say, ‘noodles.’” Candy swore.

“Oh, Dad…” Purple began. “Thanks.” The two Tangos exchanged hugs and kisses.

“Anything for you, Purple.” King said. “Now go… Save the world… you, your brother, the rest of the Rainbow Squad… I’ll be waiting for you. I’ll be a broken mess, but I’ll still be waiting for you.” The three sticks laughed and Purple left, following Candy out of the restaurant.

“I know it’s hard, Purple…” Candy sympathized, “but it’ll be OK.”

“It will be.” Purple agreed. “You know, Candy, I appreciate you coming for me, checking in on me. It means a lot.”

“Like I said, I know how much turmoil Po goes through. I just hope you’re not going through that as well.”

“Thanks.” Purple replied. “Ya know, you might act all tough at times, but I know you’ve got a soft heart underneath all that Tigress-esque exterior.”

“Don’t let it get out.” Candy snickered.

“I don’t need to. It shines through regardless.” The two of them smiled at each other, Purple put his wings on, gave one last wave to King, who waved back, and took off into the air toward the Jade Palace, soon to get some news that would shake all of the Furious Five to their core.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Far away, in a place called Gongmen City, SC and Gold were teleported from their black hole transport. They landed in the shadow of a massive palace, a tower of a building reminiscent of a skyscraper. Standing over them was Master Thundering Rhino, a legendary kung fu master and the son of another legendary kung fu master, Master Flying Rhino, and to their side was a soothsayer, an elderly female goat with a history with Shen and his parents.

“Ow…” SC moaned, rubbing his head as he got up. “Where… Where am I?”

“It looks like… Kung Fu Panda 2.” Gold figured. “I bet Candy’s going crazy with excitement right about now.”

“I agree.” SC confirmed. “But where is Candy? And the rest of the guys for that matter?”

“The Valley of Peace, I’d figure. Recall how they are Po and the Furious Five.”

“You think they retained their roles from the first?”

“I don’t see why not.” Gold reasoned. Suddenly, Master Thundering Rhino lifted and lowered his hammer, interrupting their conversation.

“Master SC, Master Gold,” he said in a loud, thundering voice, “show me your skills.” SC and Gold looked at each other.

“Come at me, dude.” Gold challenged.

“You don’t want any of me, Goldy. Trust me.”

The two of them sparred with each other, SC easily overpowering Gold at first, but Gold soon found his footing and while he wasn’t on SC’s level, he did find himself capable of holding his own against the orange Hollow-Head as the day wore on. As afternoon turned to evening and the sky turned a blood red, they were interrupted by an unexpected visitor: the sinister white-and-gray peacock known as Lord Shen.

“Shen?” They all gasped. SC and Gold held their ground.

“Good afternoon, gentlemen.” Shen said coolly. “Now that we have the pleasantries out of the way, please leave my house.”

“Your house?” SC asked.

“Yes, didn’t you see the peacock on the front door?” Shen mocked, approaching the soothsayer. “Ah, there you are, soothsayer. It appears your fortune-telling skills are not as good as you thought.” The soothsayer glared at him. In the movie, it was her who predicted that Shen would be defeated by a warrior of black and white, leading Shen to commit mass genocide on the panda race, killing Po’s mom in the process… while Po was still a baby.

“We shall see, Shen.” She scowled.

“No you shall see, old goat.” Shen retaliated. “Where were we?”

“What do you want, Shen?” Thundering Rhino demanded.

“What is rightfully mine: Gongmen City!”

“Gongmen is under the stewardship of the Masters Council, and we will protect it. Even from you!” Thundering Rhino retaliated. Shen chuckled.

“I am so glad you feel that way.” He began, several wolves dragging a massive box with him. “Otherwise, I'd have dragged that here for nothing.”

“What's in the box, Shen?” SC asked, slightly worried.

“You want to see?” Shen asked. “It's a gift. It's your parting gift. In that, it will ‘part’ you. Part of you here, part of you there, and part of you way over there staining the wall!” His red eyes grew wide and more crazy and sinister.

“Oh, you’re going down!” Gold proclaimed, leaping into a duel with him. SC joined and while Shen was able to keep the two sticks off his back, Master Rhino managed to subdue him, beating him back by swinging and pointing his hammer at him. Shen skidded backwards, his metallic talons leaving scratch marks in the ground.

“Show-off.” Shen mocked.

“That was a warning.” Thundering Rhino said coldly. “You are no match for our kung fu.”

“I agree… but this is.”

Shen flew backwards and opened the box, unveiling a giant cannon and pointing it at Thundering Rhino. The rhinoceros assumed a defensive pose, the peacock used his talons to ignite the cannon’s already short fuse and it shot a fiery cannonball almost immediately after.

And in almost an instant… Thundering Rhino was no more.

Chapter 41: Noodles (Purple)

Candy and I returned to the Jade Palace after my visit with Dad. With those newfound words of encouragement from both of them, I felt reinvigorated, at least a little bit. I knew I had my dad–my real dad–supporting me, my friends right beside me, and with them, I know we’re unstoppable. But I was still concerned about Gold. I just hoped he was OK… wherever he was, and the news that was about to break only made my concern greater.

We made it to the top of the stairs, where Shifu and my friends were waiting.

“Are you familiar with the Master of Gongmen City?” Shifu asked.

“Master Thundering Rhino?” Candy guessed. “Son of legendary Flying Rhino Slayer of the 10,000 serpents in the Valley of Woe?”

“He’s dead.”

“Whoa…” I gasped. The guys also were taken aback in shock.

“That’s impossible.” Red protested.

“Rhino's horn defense is impervious to any technique.” Candy suggested.

“This was no technique.” Shifu argued. “Lord Shen had created a weapon, one that breathes fire and spits metal. Unless he is stopped, this could be the end... of kung fu.”

“But I just got kung fu!” I exclaimed. “Well, maybe not ‘just,’ I’ve been fighting for years now…” I muttered under my breath.”

“And now, you must save it!” Shifu ordered. “Go! Destroy this weapon and bring Lord Shen to justice!”

I looked at the guys. We nodded in agreement. We had to do this, even if I wasn’t fully sure how. I don’t have this movie memorized the way Candy and probably Red do, but I wanted to trust in my friends. Together, we could do anything. We took down a massive dragon, a full-fledged supervillain, what could stand against us? I started to take off, but Shifu stopped me before I could get too far.

“Remember, Dragon Warrior: Anything is possible... when you have inner peace.”

“Inner peace…” I noted. “Gotcha.”

I put my wings on and flew down the stairs… after flying up them, but I didn’t care all too much. I love flying with my friends, and I don’t even need fireworks to fly down, so it’s even better. On the way down, my friends spoke up.

“You feeling OK, Purple?” Blue asked.

“You just took off, dude, without telling us.” Green added.

“I needed a moment… Just me and Dad.” I explained. “I saw Navy’s color on the Wolf Boss’s arm, and it just gave me flashbacks.”

“My word.” Yellow gasped. “I can only speculate how much mental turmoil you must’ve experienced at that moment.”

“I felt it… I really did…” I confessed. “But Dad helped me through it.”

“Speaking of your dad…” Red said. “Is that him down there?” He pointed down at the ground. Sure enough, there he was, standing on the street looking up at us.

“It is.” I answered, flying down to meet back up with him. “Dad, what are you doing here?”

“I…” Dad began, sighing deeply. “Like I told you, I’d be a broken mess. Heck, I already am. I’m freaking out about Gold and you’re off to face another villain… without me…”

“You’re not coming?”

“I know my role: Mr. Ping. He doesn’t partake in the fight scenes.” Dad answered. “Besides… I need to learn to let my kids leave the nest and fly. But make no mistake… I’ll always be with you, in your heart.” He put a gentle hand over my chest. I started tearing up.

“Thanks, Dad.”

“And remember our faith, my little Prince.” He continued. “Remember where we find our peace.”

“I will.”

We exchanged hugs and kisses before we separated.

“Keep him safe, kids. Keep each other safe.” Dad said. “And while you’re out there… find my son. I’m freaking out on the inside, and…” His voice trailed off for a moment, “and I can’t lose him again. I can’t lose any of you, you’re like sons–and a daughter–to me.”

“We’ll bring him home.” I promised. “We’ll all come home. The entire Rainbow Squad, we leave no one behind.”

“Purple… I’m sorry to interrupt… but we gotta get going.” Red gently said. “Shen’s probably preparing for us as we speak.”

“He’s right, kiddo. Don’t let me hold you back.” Dad said kindly.

“You only build me up…” I insisted, lightly crying, “but… OK. I love you, Dad. With every ounce in my body.”

“I love you too, kiddo, to the ends of the universe and back.” Dad replied.

“The universe doesn’t end, King.” Yellow pointed out. “So your analogy is somewhat misleading.”

“Lay off, Yellow.” Blue insisted, gently nudging him with his elbow. I smiled at them, and then at Dad, who returned a kind smile and a soft look from his tear-filled eyes. Even without him saying a word, I knew it was time. I had to go. I waved good-bye to him, and he waved back, but before I got too far, I heard Red behind me.

“I’m sure Candy told you this… but we’ll have him back before you can say ‘noodles.’” Red said before taking off to join me, but before I got too far, I heard Dad quietly say to himself…

“Noodles.”

It’s even more heartbreaking in real life than it was in the movie.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The “Furious Five,” as Candy likes to call us, and I made our way through various biomes: Sandy deserts, rocky cliffs, even snowy mountains. Despite the arduous journey, we kept our good vibes, and we warmed up our kung fu skills on the way over there. It took a long time, even with our wings, and by the time we reached a river leading to Gongmen City, the sun was setting. We got ourselves a boat and floated down the calm river, all of us dozing off on the boat.

When we arrived the next morning, I leapt off the boat, excited for what was to come next, but what I saw I never could’ve expected. In the bright morning sunlight, I squinted and saw… another stick figure… one I’d never thought I’d see again.

“Mom?” I asked. “Is that you?”

Her shade of pink was unmistakable. She turned around and sure enough… it was her.

“Purple?”

“MOM!” I exclaimed, racing toward her, but before I could reach her, Navy stepped out from behind her.

“Hey there, Purple.” He scowled. I stopped in my tracks.

“What are you doing here, honey?” Mom asked.

“What are you doing with him?” I asked, seething. “He ruined our lives!”

“You finally grew a spine after all these years.” Navy scoffed. “You should’ve known.”

“Known what?”

“We replaced you, dear, with a radish.” Mom said, revealing a radish wrapped in a blanket.

“It’s strong, resilient, and frankly, does better kung fu.”

“No…” I gasped. I suddenly felt myself getting my butt kicked by a vegetable, unable to counter, about as powerless as I was when I was a kid fighting with Navy, and when the radish landed one final punch, I saw it all over again: Navy leaving, Mom dying, the years of struggle and turmoil I experienced after that… It was all so much to bear, but suddenly…

I woke up.

In the boat.

It was all a dream, but that didn’t calm my nerves. I was freaking out, wound up… I had to calm myself down somehow. I had to find that… peace.

I stepped out of the boat’s cabin, outside to get some fresh air. While on the boat, I was greeted by water dripping from the sail. I figured this might be a chance to try what Shifu did, the way he redirected the water droplet without breaking it. I had to admit, that was really cool, and I wanted to try it for myself.

‘Breathe…’ I thought to myself. ‘Inhale… exhale… Find that peace… Find that peace…’

I tried, but my mind was already going crazy and I ended up just frustrated. The dripping water was annoying and I lashed out on the mast, which led to me getting soaked with even more water. I quickly realized that I couldn’t calm myself down, and the guys wouldn’t be up until the morning, or so I thought. Candy cleared her throat while standing on the cabin’s roof, getting my attention.

“Oh, hi Candy.” I said sheepishly. “I couldn’t sleep, so I thought I'd warm up a bit more ahead of time.”

“The mast is not a worthy opponent.” Candy said, smiling. She jumped off the cabin and landed on the boat next to me, raising her hand. “I am ready.”

“Oh… OK… So serious…” I noted to myself, and I punched her in the hand as hard as I could. I didn’t realize how strong of a palm she has, and I recoiled slightly in pain. “Jeez, Candy… you’re stronger than you appear.”

“Hm, maybe I am Tigress, punching the ironwood trees outside the Jade Palace for 20 years… I do enjoy training my martial arts with Red, though.”

“That explains a lot. You’re not 20 years old, though.” I pointed out. “Heck, you’re a year younger than me, I think. 16, right?”

“Yeah.” Candy answered, regaining a fighting stance. “Again!” I complied and I warmed up, using her hand as essentially a target. She blocked my attacks with skill and quickness, but the sparring couldn’t clear my head. It only reminded me of Navy, how he used to train me to be a fighter. I wanted to get my mind away from it, but it only got worse.

My already frazzled mind was made even more so during the match. The memories of Navy, his abuse, his sky-high expectations, my pain and anger toward him, it formed a perfect storm. I could feel myself punching harder, losing control, the pain welling back up again. I wanted nothing to do with him, I thought I was past it, but it was returning with a vengeance…

And it broke me.

I couldn’t take it.

I froze… And broke down in tears, right then and there, in front of Candy. I fell to my knees and bawled my eyes out, it was all too much for me to bear. I then felt a hand on my shoulder. I looked up and saw Candy crouching over me.

“Shhh…” Candy said comfortingly. “It’s gonna be OK…”

Candy’s words reminded me of Mom… She would say the exact same thing when she tried to calm me down. I looked at her with tear-filled eyes and tried to collect myself.

“I’m sorry Candy… My mind is going a mile a minute right now.”

“Do you want to talk about it?”

“I should.” I answered. “When we were fighting those bandits… on the Wolf Boss’s arm… I saw a mark… a circle… It reminded me of my dad.”

“King?”

“No… my birth dad Navy… He was abusive…”

“Wait, you were serious?” Candy gasped. I nodded yes. “I half-thought you were joking when you said it earlier… At least, I was hoping.”

“Afraid not…” I answered. “Growing up with Navy was… painful, to say the least, but when he left and Mom passed, I spent a long time looking for him, longer than I’d like to admit. I did many things I’m not proud of in order to gain the approval of a man who never cared… and I feel like that is coming back… I fear the old Purple is trying to fight back… and I thought he was dead…”

“Purple, I… I never knew… I’m so sorry…” Candy sympathized.

“I appreciate it.” I said, swallowing hard. “It’s kinda hard to admit it, even now… I feel like I’m slipping back to my old ways…” Candy sighed deeply.

“I don’t know the old you, I probably never will, but I still think you’re a great guy. You’re kind, loving, gentle, and you can see the best in people… including me. You and Reddy Bear were the first two people to see something in me, even when I didn’t see it in myself. If that’s who you were, then yes, the old you is back. But if it’s not, then the old you is long gone, no matter what might be going on in that purple little head of yours.” I chuckled.

“Thanks, Candy.”

“Is that what’s been ailing ya, bro?” Said a voice behind us. I turned and saw the FSF behind me. It was Green who was talking, and he continued. “Why didn’t you tell us? We could’ve helped you.”

“I’m sorry, guys. I was… embarrassed… and to be honest, the wounds run deep.”

“I cannot fault him for concealing this secret.” Yellow sympathized. “Who enjoys the feeling of vulnerability and weakness?”

“I doubt anyone does, Yellow.” Blue noted. “It’s all too easy to hide.”

“You don’t have to hide any more, Purple.” Red said sweetly, hugging me. I hugged him back, he’s such a little brother to me. “We love you, and whatever is nagging at you, I will face them head-on if need be.”

“We all will, Purple.” Candy added. “Because we’re a family, and true family sticks together.”

“Thanks, guys.” I said gratefully. “It’s hard to find peace at times, I’m thankful to have you in my life.”

“Remember, bro, even in the madness there is peace drowning out the voices all around me,” Green sang. I picked it up and sang the second verse.

“Through all of this chaos, You are writing a symphony.

“A symphony-y.” Green and I sang in unison.

“Dang, Purple, you have a lovely singing voice.” Candy complimented.

“Thanks, but that might have to wait.” I pointed out. “We’re approaching Gongmen City.”

The sun was rising on a new day, and we floated down the river, approaching the massive city, and Lord Shen as well.

Chapter 42: Arrival at Gongmen

Third Person

Meanwhile, in Gongmen City, Shen took over the city. After the defeat of Thundering Rhino, SC and Gold could only stand in awe, frozen in shock until it was too late and they were surrounded by wolves. Gold wanted to fight back, but SC told him off, pointing out the fact that they were outnumbered and outgunned. The two sticks were promptly imprisoned by the pack of wolves and left to rot in Gongmen Jail.

As for Shen himself, he took up residence in his childhood palace, climbing the massive building while his gorilla guards carried the cannon with him. After reaching the top, Shen tossed his father’s throne out of a window, replacing it with his cannon, and sauntered over to the Soothsayer, who was already up there.

“Now, you old goat,” Shen began, “why don't you tell me my-"

“Fortune?” Soothsayer interrupted.

“F-future. I was going to say future. Look into your bowl, and tell me what glory awaits.” The Soothsayer complied, looking into her bowl.

“If you continue on your current path…” She began, inhaling deeply, “you will find yourself... at the bottom of the stairs.” Shen stops on the bottom of the stairs he was walking down. Annoyed, he closes in on the old goat, who plucks a feather from his wing and bites his silk robe, much to his frustration. Soothsayer puts the feather and piece of silk into the bowl.

“The most important time is now.” Soothsayer said. “But if you really want to see the future…” Glowing blue-white smoke rose from the bowl. Shen watched in awe.

“Oh, what do you see?” Shen asked eagerly as the smoke forms into a peacock.

“A peacock…” Soothsayer began, “...Is defeated by a warrior of blue and red.” The smoky peacock is eaten by a yin-yang symbol. “Nothing has changed.” Furious, Shen shattered the bowl with a feather-shaped blade and used his tail feathers to clear the smoke away.

“That's impossible.. and you know it!” Shen seethed.

“It is not impossible... and he knows it.” Soothsayer replied, gesturing toward the stairs.

“Who?” As if for an answer, Boss Wolf races up the stairs in a panic.

“Lord Shen!” Boss Wolf gasped, “I saw a purple stick figure!”

“A purple stick figure!?” Shen gasped, leaping at Boss Wolf and using his talons to pin the canine to the floor by the neck.

“A kung fu warrior... he fought like a demon!” Boss Wolf exclaimed. “Big and powerful... thin and bendy…” He growled. Shen glared into Boss Wolf's eyes, the peacock’s own eyes wide with insanity and fury.

“There are no more purple stick figures…” Shen breathed, his voice dripping with rage.

“Even with his poor eyesight, he can see the truth.” Soothsayer reprimanded, tapping the Wolf’s scarred eye. “Why is it that you cannot?”

“Find this stick figure, and bring him to me!” Shen ordered, tossing the Wolf to his feet.

“Yes, sir!” Boss Wolf replied, proverbially flying down the stairs. Shen glared at Soothsayer.

“So one purple stick figure still lives... that does not make you right.”

“You're right…” She replied smartly, “being right makes me right.” Shen turned away from her.

“Then I will kill him... and make you wrong!” Shen proclaims. He then heard chewing behind him as Soothsayer ate his robes again. “Will you STOP that!?” Shen demanded, pulling his robe away from her.

Purple

We had made it. Gongmen City was right before us, a massive city pressed against a vivid sunrise. As we approached, I mentally and physically prepared myself. I had to face another big challenge, one that seemed as daunting as Dad and the double MGI. I knew well how powerful and dangerous Lord Shen was, but I had something going for me. I had my friends in my corner, and I was confident that together, we could take him down. At least, I hoped.

After we arrived, we hopped off the boat and hid behind a stone bridge where we regrouped.

“OK, I’d imagine by now, Lord Shen has taken over his family’s throne.” Candy updated us. “Over there, in the tallest building in Gongmen City. And the Soothsayer has told him that nothing has changed.”

“He will be defeated by a warrior of black and white.” Red added.

“But… None of us is black and white.” I pointed out.

“Maybe not, but you are playing the panda’s role, Po-ple.” Candy figured. I found it hard to argue with that.

“Anyway, the Boss Wolf has probably told Shen about our arrival.” Red reasoned.

“A logical assumption, petite male sibling.” Yellow observed. “Observe the packs of canis lupus swarming in the boulevards.”

“Yo, you’re right… I think… This place is crawling with wolves.” Green noticed.

“We’re gonna have to use stealth.” Blue said. “Fortunately for us, I have the perfect thing to sneak by all those wolves. Get together, guys!”

We grouped around him, he whipped out a splash potion and slammed it on the bridge. Instantly, we were all invisible.

“This potion won’t last long. Move quickly and quietly.” Blue ordered.

“Got it.” We all said in unison. From there, I can only assume we began sneaking around, weaving through the streets, trying to be as stealthy as possible. I personally made it a solid distance before I noticed the potion was about to run out. Thinking fast, I found a dragon costume and hid myself in it, and just in time, too. I saw my hand return to view.

“Guys?” I quietly asked. “Guys?”

“We’re with ya, Purple.” Said a voice from behind me. I turned, a bit startled, but it was only Red.

“Jeez, Reddy Bear, don’t do that!” I said.

“Sorry, buddy.” Red apologized. “We’re all here, by the way.”

“That’s awesome, let’s just get to…” I paused when I noticed a wolf demanding a female sheep citizen for cooked rice, despite not having any pots, as Shen melted them all down for his weapons. I couldn’t stand for it, so I intervened, getting the wolf’s attention and then clocking him in the face. Using the costume, I “ate” the wolf and the rest of us used him as a punching bag, spitting him out of the “butt.”

“We’re here to take down Shen.” I said to the sheep.

“You will need help.” She insisted.

“What do you mean?”

“Masters SC and Gold, they’re in Gongmen Jail at Black Dragon Alley.”

“They’re alive!” I gasped, relieved before turning to the others. “Guys, we need a full team in order to take Shen down.”

“I agree wholeheartedly.” Candy confirmed. “We’d gotta go! Now!”

“Thank you, brave sheep.” I said to the sheep before leaving, but someone spotted us, probably another wolf, and sent the pack on us. What followed was a quick chase, which was made a lot harder since we were inside a costume. We took down a few wolves the same way but we soon found ourselves surrounded.

“What do we do now?” Blue asked.

“Time to make our getaway.” Candy answered.

We did so just in time, slipping into some barrels just before the wolves stabbed the costume with their swords, only getting cabbages instead of us sticks, much to their confusion.

“Spread out, search everywhere!” The Boss Wolf ordered. Using barrels as disguises, we slipped away and soon found where we wanted to be: Gongmen Jail. SC and Goldy were in there… We just had to find them…

‘I just hope they’re OK…’ I thought to myself.

Chapter 43: The Wolf's Return (The Second Coming)

Dead.

Master Thundering Rhino was instantly struck down by Lord Shen’s cannon, right before our eyes as we were helpless to prevent it. We could only look on in stunned silence as we were quickly swarmed by Shen’s wolves. While Gold wanted to fight, I convinced him otherwise. We were outnumbered, surrounded, and overmatched. I wanted to fight back as well, but I saw no chance of victory, so I opted for living to fight another day. Lord Shen took over Gongmen City, while Gold and I were quickly imprisoned by Shen’s pack of wolves, getting caged up in Gongmen Jail. Inside our cell, Gold was pacing and panicking.

“This is bad, SC… This is really bad.” He moaned.

“I know, buddy, I know.”

“There has to be a way out of here.”

“I have some tools.” I suggested. “I never leave home without a set of diamond tools.” I pulled out my diamond pickaxe.

“Perfect!” Gold cheered, pulling out his own pickax. “We can mine our way out!”

“If it works…” I said worriedly. There was only one way to find out. I took my pick and tried mining the bricks in the wall, but my efforts proved to be fruitless. Gold too had the same amount of luck, which is to say, none at all when he tried the opposite wall. We then switched, I tried breaking the door, he tried the wall behind us, but again, no dice.

“It’s no use, SC…” Gold moaned. “Our picks don’t seem to work here.”

“Don’t fret, Goldy. I’m sure the guys are devising a plan to free us.” I assured him.

“Yeah, you’re probably right.” Gold replied. “What do we do in the meantime?”

“I’ll check my inventory… And you check yours. Perhaps something else will come to me. It’s worth a shot, after all.” I shrugged.

As we rummaged through our inventories, I felt a chill rush over me, like a cold, stiff breeze even though there were no windows anywhere in the prison. I glanced over at Gold, and he froze and looked back at me with wide eyes.

“Did you feel that, too?” I asked.

“Yeah, what was that?” Gold wondered.

We didn’t have to wait long for the answer. Immediately after Gold asked his question, I heard something… someone whistling… It wasn’t an ordinary whistle, though, it was very eerie, sinister, and it sent a shiver up my spine. Gold must’ve also heard it, and his eyes grew even wider, somehow. I looked around in a panic.

“Do you hear that?” Gold asked, panicked.

“A whistle?” I guessed. Gold nodded frantically. “Yeah… I recognize it. I've seen The Last Wish with Red.”

“It’s the Wolf!” Gold gasped, retreating into the corner. “He’s coming to kill me!” He trembled so badly you’d think there was an earthquake happening. I whipped out my sword.

“Not if I can help it.” I determined. “I know you’re here! Show yourself, Wolf!”

Out of the shadows, he stepped out, the physical incarnation of Death itself. His sickles glinted in the flickering torchlight as he dragged them along the ground, sending sparks through the air. His red eyes shone brightly like rubies, and he smiled a sinister smile, like a lion about to pounce on an unsuspecting zebra.

“Well well, if it isn’t The Second Coming himself.” He chuckled. “It’s been a while since we last met, hasn’t it?”

“Wait… You know him?!” Gold gasped.

“No… What are you talking about?”

“Surely you remember.” Death mocked. “August 19th, 2018.”

“August 19-” I interrupted myself. “Wait… That’s the day…”

“What happened, SC?” Gold demanded. “What happened?!”

“My first encounter with The Dark Lord.” I answered.

“I was there to witness all of it.” Death mocked, raising one of his sickles. I looked closer at it. There were several circles printed upon it, each of us, with red X’s crossing out me, the FSF, King and Purple… all except Gold and Candy.

“Each… frivolous… end…” He continued. “I was there when Red, Green, Blue, and Yellow were killed, and you as well, but somehow… your soul eluded me… the one that got away.”

“I’m not the only one.” I protested. Death growled deeply, nearly getting face-to-face with me, his eyes narrowed. I’m sure he would’ve if not for the prison doors separating us. I felt myself shake, my sword trembling in my hands, but I held my ground.

“He never did escape me… No one does.” Death countered.

“Liar!” I shouted. Death ignored my proclamation.

“As much as I want to take you,” He said calmly, “as much as I hate your guts, as much as I would enjoy reaping your soul for the last time… I’m not here for you. You know what it means to truly live. No, I’m here for that arrogant little legend back there.”

“Gold?” I asked. “What do you want with him?!”

“Tsk tsk tsk, wouldn’t you like to know?” Death quipped.

“You want him, you’re gonna have to get through me.” I insisted.

“You say that like it’s a challenge.” The Wolf retaliated. “You forget that I’m Death. Straight up.”

“Why don’t you kill me now?!” Gold lashed out, catching me off guard. “End this torture now! Why must you torment me?”

“And ruin the hunt?” Death mocked, chuckling. “I’d rather you run for it. Makes it more fun for me, so no… I’ll keep you alive… Just so long as you know that I’m coming for you… and I won’t stop until you’re dead.” Gold retreated into his corner, hyperventilating and sweat pouring down his face.

“Whatever you claim, you’re not getting to him unless you kill us first.” I stated.

“Whatever it takes… La segunda venida.” He chuckled evilly. “In the meantime… I’ll enjoy the chase.” He backed away into the shadows, whistling his evil whistle as he disappeared, his red eyes finally disappearing. I panted heavily, shocked I managed to survive that interaction, but quickly returned to Gold’s side.

“Goldy! Are you OK?” I asked. The poor kid was curled up into a ball, so terrified he was crying, sweating, and shaking all at the same time. I could hear his heart practically pounding out of his chest, his shade of yellow was more pale than gold, and I’ve never seen him like that before.

“No… SC, I’m not OK…” Gold answered, crying. “This is it… I’m going to die and there’s nothing I can do about it! This torture, this torment, I can’t handle it! Why is he after me specifically? Why, SC?!”

“I’m not fully sure…” I confessed.

“I’m not dreaming, am I?” He asked. “This has to be a nightmare…”

“If it is, I’m having the exact same one.”

“I was afraid of that… Why me?”

Poor Gold was melting down faster than an ice cream in the Stick-hara Desert at noon. All I could do is try and soothe him. I bent down and rubbed my hand on his back as he wept into my shoulder. It felt weird, but he needed it, especially with King nowhere around. I’ve already been a father figure to one of the Tango kids, now it was time to be Gold’s de facto dad. I racked my brain, trying to come up with something to say, when I remembered something that happened earlier…

“Didn’t you have a nightmare about Death?” I gently asked. “You talked to your dad about it… and your brother and the two reds.”

“Yeah…” Gold sniffled.

“Did Red or Candy shed some light on the situation?”

“I- I can’t think right now.” Gold stuttered. “My mind is in shambles.”

“OK, OK, calm down. Deep breaths, Goldy. Deep breaths…” I insisted. Gold inhaled and exhaled deeply. As he tried collecting himself, I tried to remember… How did Death get defeated? How did Puss take him down?

‘Where’s Red or Candy when you need them?’ I thought. Even without them, I had a problem, and I had to solve it. I thought as hard as I could when I finally remembered a line of Death’s, part of which he mentioned just now.

‘I came here for an arrogant little legend who thought he was immortal.’

Perhaps Death was here for the same reason, but Gold wasn’t an arrogant little legend… was he? I was well aware of his adventurous nature, but mixed in with that love for adventure was a high dosage of recklessness. Gold loves taking risks, with little regard for the repercussions, and considering the way King describes Gold’s youth, it wouldn’t surprise me if there were other times he escaped death–like the Hang Gliding Incident–or when he emerged after getting deleted in Minecraft.

“I don’t know how much this will help, Goldy…” I began, “but I have a theory about Death’s… shall we say vendetta, against us.”

“‘Us’? Not just me?”

“If anyone messes with my friends, my family, they mess with me.” I answered. “But I think that Death isn’t happy with your lifestyle, your reckless nature.”

“How so?”

“If I recall correctly… Death was miffed at Puss for wasting his first eight lives. Does that ring a bell?”

“Yeah… Red and Candy were mentioning that earlier.” Gold pointed out. “But I value my life, I live it to the fullest.”

“Is it possible that you live for your adrenalin rush?” I asked softly. “You live more for the unknown adventure than your friends and family?”

Gold paused, clearly unsure with how to answer that. Perhaps my words resonated with him.

“I… suppose it is possible…” He answered. “Dad probably has sooooo many stories of what I did when I was younger…”

“Perhaps it’s time to re-evaluate what you are truly living for. Is it your family and friends? The things worth living for? Or is it for momentary hits of adrenalin?”

Gold thought it over. I could clearly see the gears turning in his mind, but he still seemed a little hesitant.

“How did you do it?”

“Do what?” I asked.

“How did you stand up to the Wolf like that? He’s the incarnation of Death! Weren’t you afraid of him?”

“I was… I truly was.” I admitted. “I’ve never felt so much fear in my life. But as the leader of the Rainbow Squad–probably along with your dad–I made myself the promise to protect my family a long time ago… even from the threat of Death itself. Goldy, I will fight for you and the others until my final breath. I will die before anyone else does, and nothing will change that.”

Gold’s heartbeat slowed down to a normal pace, and his hyperventilation decreased to a normal breathing pace. I hoped that my promise to protect him calmed him down, and it seemed to, at least temporarily. I could only imagine how scared he was, and to be honest, I was as well, but those fears quickly evaporated when I heard familiar voices and the sound of punches landing.

“We made it! Now to find SC and my brother…”

“Purple? Is that you?” I called out.

“SC?” Green’s voice said. “Bro, where are you?”

“Follow my voice!” I called. “Gold is here too, but he’s a little shaken. I need you guys here ASAP!” Almost immediately after I said this, Red ran up to us.

“SC! Gold!” He exclaimed. “Guys, over here!” The others were soon to follow.

“Oh I’m so glad to see you guys again!” Blue said, breathing a sigh of relief.

“How do we unlock the cell?” Yellow asked. “Wait, hang on… Let a man tinker.”

Yellow began working at the lock with a lever from his inventory, soon managing to unlock it and opening the door. Gold and I practically leapt out of the cell, hugging the others tightly.

“I’m so glad to see you guys!” I said tearfully.

“Not more than I am right now.” Gold confessed. “Purple, my dear baby bro…”

“Gold, you OK? You look like you just saw…” Purple stopped mid-sentence. “No… You couldn’t have…”

“We have, Purple.” I said. “We saw him. We saw Death… And he’s not happy with us, especially Gold. Guys, we need to get out of here… and fast.”

Chapter 44: Sticks vs. Shen (Purple)

We all looked at SC and Gold in shock, but none was more shocked than I was to learn that Gold had another encounter with Death. But it wasn’t just him, but SC as well, and not surprisingly, Gold was a mess. He was super excited to see us, me especially, but confronting one’s mortality repeatedly–and in physical form, no less–must’ve done a number on him. I had to console him, and the guys were right with me.

“Goldy, are you OK?”

“I will be… Now that you’re here…” Gold confessed. “SC calmed me down greatly, I appreciate it, but I’m still freaking out.”

“I cannot fault you.” Yellow sympathized. “Being confronted with Death itself would shake anyone’s psyche to its foundations.”

“I was freaking out.” SC confessed. “But he’s gone now, Goldy. He won’t harm you. Not if we have anything to say about it.”

“Take all the time you need, Goldy.” Blue said.

“No, no…” Gold insisted, inhaling and exhaling deeply. “I’m calm now… I think…”

“Are you sure?” Red asked. “Death is a frightening character…”

“A frightening concept as well.” Candy added.

“Yes.” Gold said confidently. “We need to get out of here, all of us. I don’t intend on holding you back.”

“Just as long as you’re 100% good.” I said. “We need all of us at peak form for us to escape.”

“I am, brother.” Gold insisted.

At that moment, the Wolf Boss barged into the room, a couple of his soldiers flanking him, catching us all off guard. We turned and glared at him, and he seemed shocked to see SC and Gold free. I stood front and center, staring directly at him.

“You’re mine.” I seethed.

“I’ll tell you what’s gonna be yours: My fist in your round, purple face!” The Wolf Boss growled. Red and Candy, however, were having none of it. They quickly took down the other two wolf lackeys, causing the boss to flee.

“After him!” I shouted.

We followed him as he got into a rickshaw and rolled away. I found my own and pursued him, with the guys on my tail. It was a hectic chase, we had to dodge obstacles the Wolf Boss threw in our way and rescue a family of small bunnies, also tossed by the Wolf Boss. His methods of slowing us down were rather effective, and I soon found myself far behind.

“Candy, I need a boost!” I exclaimed.

“You got it, Po-ple!” She shouted.

I braced myself with a slime block behind me and Candy, with her speed, bolted up to me, delivering a powerful shove to the slime block behind me. Between her speed and the slime’s bounce, I was rocketed forward at speeds my elytra can only dream of. I caught up to the Wolf Boss in an instant, launching myself onto his rickshaw, and a fight between us ensued.

“Is that all you got?” The Wolf Boss mocked. “Because it feels like I’m fighting a big, old, fluffy cloud!”

“Well this cloud is about to bring the thunder!” I retaliated, holding him up with my foot, causing him to bang his head on low-hanging signs we passed.

“Your turn!” The Wolf Boss shouted, pulling me forward into some more signs.

“Why… are… there… so… many… signs…?” I grunted after each one.

We then found ourselves on a flight of stairs, each one jolting the Wolf Boss upwards at me. I extended my fist and socked him in the face with each stair we bumped down, the two of us getting flung into the air upon reaching the bottom. Thinking quickly, I reached into my inventory for the heaviest thing I could find–which turned out to be a large, wooden barrel–and pressed it against the Wolf Boss.

“Get crushed!” I exclaimed, as we landed hard on the ground, the Wolf Boss taking the brunt of the impact. I got up triumphantly, the guys ran up behind me.

“Yeah! Next time you mess with a Tango, you’d better bring a whole ar…” I stopped mid-sentence when I realized where we were: the base of Shen’s tower, and surrounded by wolves. The Wolf Boss got up as well.

“I guess no one told you, you mess with the wolf, you get the fangs.” He retaliated, punching me across the face. “I’ve hit ya twice. What are you gonna do now?”

The sheer number of wolves gave me pause. I wanted to fight, to protect my family, but looking at them and their faces, they told me without words that we couldn’t win this. Candy and Red as well gave me a look that screamed, “Stand down. It’s the plan.”

“We surrender!” I exclaimed.

The eight of us were promptly put in shackles and escorted into the tower, led up a massive flight of stairs by the pack of wolves and several massive gorillas, until we finally reached the top. I was a bit worn out from climbing so many stairs–there’s a reason I love flying–but upon reaching the top, we met Lord Shen himself.

“Greetings, stick figure, we meet at-”

“Hey, how ya doing?” I quipped. I remembered that line because of how funny I found it, and still find it.

“H- Hey…” Shen muttered.

“Oh… my… gosh…” Candy said quietly. “It’s Lord Shen, the most bad*** villain in DreamWorks history! Live in the flesh! Right in front of us!”

“Death has him beat, but I’ll let you have this one.” Red whispered back.

“You’ve grown up bigger than I imagined.” The soothsayer said to me, poking around. “Strong, healthy.”

“Enough of this nonsense!” Shen ordered. “Bring the prisoners to me.”

We were promptly shoved to our knees in front of the sinister peacock himself, and his massive cannon. Shen lorded over us, staring at me with his piercing, red eyes. I overheard Yellow quietly picking Candy’s shackles.

“Do you really think this is the warrior destined to defeat me?” Shen quipped.

“I do not. I KNOW he is.” The soothsayer replied.

“Look at him, a lifetime to plan his revenge and he comes to me on his knees.” Shen mocked.

“Whoa whoa whoa, a lifetime? What are you talking about?” I asked.

I didn’t know, and Shen wasn’t giving me any answers. That was actually to my benefit, as Shen spared me because of my ignorance. He used much harsher words, but that’s the gist of it before finally ordering his gorilla soldiers…

“Take aim.”

The cannon was lowered, pointing right at us, and the Boss Wolf lit the fuse. As Shen laughed, he was soon infuriated to find that the cannon wasn’t firing.

“Well, light the… thing!”

“I did!” The Boss Wolf protested. After several more tries, he finally got kicked in the face by the nimble Green.

“Ender Pearls for the win!” He proclaimed, whipping out a pearl. I figured he used one to escape his chains, and soon after, Candy was freed from hers, and a few powerful punches with her enhanced speed later, so were the rest of us.

“Guys, get the guards!” Red ordered. “And the cannon!”

“We’re on it!” SC replied.

As they destroyed the cannon, kicking it through the floor down the massive building into the ground below, destroying it. While they took care of the cannon, I charged Shen. I pinned him down, and he raised his peacock tail feathers, revealing to me his color pattern: I saw the same shade of navy blue that the Wolf Boss wore, the same as my birth father, and it took me by surprise.

“No… It’s not true…”

“Yes. Yes it is.” Shen replied, bolting for an open window. I stood there frozen for a second until Candy snapped me from my trance.

“Purple, what happened?”

“I… I…” I stuttered.

Before I could answer, we all heard massive explosions from a distance. We didn’t need to be told what those were, Shen had more cannons, pointed right at the palace we were standing in. The impact of the first volley knocked us all off our feet.

“Ow!” Red cried. “My arm!”

“Reddy Bear!” Blue cried, running over to him. “Are you OK?”

“I’ve had worse injuries.” He shrugged. Candy zipped up to me.

“Po-ple, we need you to focus.” She urged, helping me up.

“You’re right, you’re right! Let’s go!” I ordered.

“What is our escape plan, Candy?” Yellow asked.

“We can’t escape through the bottom.” She reasoned. “The door will collapse on us. No, the only way out is up.”

She burst through a door, revealing a pack of wolves armed with bows and flaming arrows. Candy grabbed a wood plank and blocked several arrows before ducking back inside.

“Now’s our chance, boys!” She exclaimed. “Grab your wings, whatever you can! This palace is going down, we can’t go down with it!”

“No need to tell us twice!” Gold yelled, putting his wings on.

“Stay with me, Golden Oldie.” I insisted. “Dad will go into a frenzy if you’re not back safely.”

“You do the same, baby bro.”

Following Candy, we put our wings on, bolted outside and flew off, dodging and weaving a wave of flaming arrows and ducking into the dark alleys and streets of Gongmen city. Shen’s palace had collapsed, fallen on several wolves who were still trying to snipe us. We met back up after a narrow escape and took a quick headcount. We were all there, all alive, if only a little banged up and shaked up.

“Red, are you OK?” SC asked, concerned. “You’re favoring your arm.”

“The first blast shook me hard.” Red explained. “I’ll be OK.”

“We’re gonna need all of us at full strength.” Blue insisted, pulling out a potion. “Here ya go, buddy.” Red took it and drank it, gagging afterwards.

“Eugh, Blue, how do you choke these down so often?” Red asked.

“I think about the Netherwart I infuse in it.”

“Shh! Remain silent, my companions.” Yellow insisted. “There is a probability that members of Shen’s wolf pack are nearby, and with their sharp senses, we would be apprehended within milliseconds.”

“Yellow’s right, dudes.” Green noted. “Shen’s probably after us, especially you, Purple.”

“Yeah, bro, what happened, back there?” Gold asked gently. “I was watching, and you just… froze up.”

“I had Shen… And I let him go…” I realized. “Guys, I’m sorry. I just-”

“Wait, hang on.” Candy insisted, listening intensely. In the distance, I heard wolves howling. “Shen’s calling the wolves together. That’s perfect. Guys, follow me. We can get shelter from any lingering wolves.”

“Where at?” SC asked.

“Gongmen Jail.” Candy answered.

She led us through the narrow streets to the old jail. From there, I knew there was no hiding it. I had to share with the guys what happened… what I saw… I just hoped they would understand me. They always have, so why would this be different? It wouldn’t be different… right?

Chapter 45: Cannon Fodder (Third Person)

The Rainbow Squad raced toward Gongmen Jail to regroup and recover from a daring escape from Lord Shen’s collapsing tower, but they weren’t the only ones going at the highest possible speed. Purple’s mind was also going a mile a minute, trying to work out how to explain what he saw to his friends. It was hard enough expressing his pain to Green way back when on the mountaintop, and even retelling it to King for the first time brought him a wave of painful memories. How was he going to do it again?

He didn’t have much time to answer that question, as they reached the jail in record time. Catching their breath, it was SC who was the first to speak up.

“Purple, are you OK? You seem… distracted and distant.”

“You saw something up there.” Gold pointed out. “What was it?”

Purple sighed deeply. There was no other way to say it other than… just saying it.

“When I confronted Shen…” He began, “I saw markings on his tail feathers. Their color was navy blue, the exact same shade as my birth father, and it brought back a wave of toxic memories from my childhood. Things I thought I overcame with your guys’ help are coming back to haunt me.” He breathed deeply, barely able to stop himself from dropping to his knees and bawling. “I don’t want to be back there! Green, you saw how broken I was… You don’t understand, you wouldn’t know what it’s like… to lose a father figure…”

“Purple…” Green gasped. “Bro…”

Green stepped up and put a gentle hand on Purple’s back. Candy hugged him, and soon the rest of the guys followed suit, and Purple was surrounded in the tightest, warmest hug he had received since the hug he got from his father earlier. Purple could do nothing else but hug them back, weeping softly in their arms. When they eventually untangled themselves, Candy was quick to speak.

“We do understand…” She said quietly. “Because I have as well…”

Purple looked up at Candy, who herself was tearing up, and smiled at her. He remembered how much his friends, his family, were there for him.

“We may not have your story,” Red confessed, “but we do have each other.”

“And we will always be here for you, bro.” Gold added.

Purple was slowly collecting himself, but he quickly realized that he was in no shape mentally to help his friends. He would only be slowing them down, and Lord Shen’s weaponry was only getting more and more powerful. Time was not on their side, and he knew it.

“Guys… Thank you… But I need you to do something for me.”

“What is it, Purple?” Blue asked.

“Take down Shen and his army for me.” Purple answered. “I… I can’t right now…”

“Either the entire group of us will prevent Shen’s scheme, or none of us will.” Yellow determined. “Purple, we refuse to fight without you.”

“You don’t have time!” Purple exclaimed. “Save China. I will be fine… eventually…”

“We can’t leave you behind!” Green ordered. “Candy? Dude, this is your favorite movie, surely Purple can join us.”

“No… This is where we split.” Candy said sadly. “Because I can’t watch my friend be killed.”

“She’s right.” Red confirmed. “She even used the exact line Tigress did at this point. I hate to say this… but Purple, I just don’t like the thought of leaving you behind. Are you sure?”

“Yes, Red.” Purple insisted. “I just need some time… To regain my focus… I’ll be back as soon as I can…”

“But… Purple…” Candy gasped.

“I promise I will be there.” Purple said determinedly. “On my own time.”

“Will you be OK, buddy?” Blue asked, deeply concerned.

“Thanks to you guys… I will.” He answered, trying to sound more confident than he felt. “In all of this chaos, You are writing a symphony.”

“Don’t you forget those lyrics, bro.” Green said, beaming with pride.

“Go guys.” Purple ordered. “I’ll be there, but in the meantime, take them down.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

The Squad’s escape from the collapsing palace made Shen furious. Immediately after, he ordered his wolf pack back together, their plan of conquering China was to commence that very night. With so many cannons fully built and loaded, he was set to load them up onto a fleet of ships and sail through Gongmen City. As he gathered his army, and his weaponry, inside his dark, fiery factory, he and the Soothsayer got to talking.

“You were wrong, Soothsayer!” Lord Shen declared. “We sail to victory tonight... Your magic purple stick figure is clearly a fool!”

“Are you certain it is the stick figure who is the fool?” The old goat countered. “You just destroyed your ancestral home, Shen!”

“A trivial sacrifice... when all of China is my reward!” Shen quipped, holding a lance over a flame until it burned red hot and striking it into a map of China. He stuck it right into a symbol of his palace, burning it and the entire map with it.

“Then will you finally be satisfied?” The Soothsayer demanded. “Will the subjugation of the whole world finally make you feel better?”

“Hmmm, it's a start. I might also convert the basement into a dungeon.” He glared at the Soothsayer as he said this. She approached the sinister bird, standing at the balcony with his back to her.

“The cup you choose to fill has no bottom. It is time to stop this madness.”

“And why on earth would I do that?” Shen quipped.

“So your parents can rest in peace.” Shen paused, not expecting this answer.

“My parents... hated me.” Shen said distantly. “Do you understand? They wronged me. I... will make it right.”

“They loved you!” The old goat argued. “They loved you so much that having to send you away killed them.” After a pause, Shen responded.

“The dead exist in the past... and I must attend to the future.” The Soothsayer looks down, deeply saddened. She did what she could, but some peacocks are too set to change their destiny to change them. Shen continued, saying, “Set the Soothsayer free. She is of no use to me.” One of Shen’s gorillas approached to lead the Soothsayer out.

“Goodbye, Shen.” She said, “I wish you happiness.”

“Happiness must be taken... and I will take mine.”

The Soothsayer left without another word, the gorilla right behind her leading her out, while Shen lorded over his work from his vantage.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Outside, in the dead of night, the Gang, Candy, and Gold approached the firework factory, trying to remain hidden from the pack of wolves standing guard. Their thoughts still went out to Purple, who insisted he remained behind, but Candy and her leadership skills kept them focused on their current task at hand. Shen had to be stopped, for their sake and Purple’s as well.

They crouched down behind several barrels, able to get a view of the inside of the factory while the door was being closed.

“Did you witness that?” Yellow gasped. “They have cannons, a multitude of cannons.”

“If all those weapons leave the building, China will fall.” Candy realized.

“Let’s bring down the building!” Gold suggested.

“I like the way you think, Goldy.” Red complimented.

“Yellow, do you still have TNT on you?” SC asked.

“Certainly. I never exit our friendly confines without a stash of explosives.” Yellow confirmed.

“This will also help, dudes.” Green pointed out, examining the powder in the barrels in front of them. “This is gunpowder, and a LOT of it.”

“Time to make this building go boom.” Blue said, pulling out an enchanted bow. “Flaming arrows, anyone?”

“Alright, boys. Load up a wagon with this stuff.” Candy ordered. “Buuut… prepare to put it out. If Purple shows up, we can’t bring the building down on him as well.”

The boys nodded and quietly followed the Stripe’s orders, unaware of a stealthy stick sneaking around above them.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Purple remained behind for an extended time, left alone to himself and his thoughts. His mind was hectic, but he remembered his friends and his family. He didn’t want to let them down, not in the slightest, but he felt like he was unprepared to continue with his friends. He then thought back to his greatest moments of bravery. He stood up to King when he got blasted by a black hole beam, he took down Vic and deleted him for good, he helped destroy The Dark Lord and took down Tai Lung. No matter what his birth dad might have called him back then, one thing was for sure: Purple had proven his strength.

And he knew it.

But he couldn’t do it without his friends.

Luckily, he knew where the others were: The firework factory. But he had to confront Shen personally. He had to know why Navy’s shade of blue was on his feathers. He had to get answers. With a newfound fire in his heart, Purple put his wings on and flew to the factory, sneaking around and into the building.

“Move you dogs! Faster, faster!” Purple heard Shen thunder. “Load them all!”

Shen’s booming voice made Purple pause for a minute, but he continued deeper into the belly of the beast. While sneaking around, Purple unintentionally ran directly into the genocidal peacock himself.

“Greetings, stick figure.”

Shen descended from a cloud of red smoke, landing on the walkway in front of Purple, his tail feathers showing. Purple glared at Shen right in the eyes, avoiding looking at the shade of his abusive father.

“Tell me what happened!” He demanded.

“What happened?” Shen mocked.

“Yes, why do you have that shade of blue on your tail? How do you know Navy?”

“Yes, I was there.” Shen began slimily, “Yes, I watched as your parents abandoned you, it's a terrible thing. I believe it went something like this!”

Shen cut a chain, sending a large bucket into the walkway he and Purple were standing on, leaving him hanging from the bucket. At that moment, the rest of his friends burst through the door, a wagon of gunpowder in hand. Blue shot a flaming arrow into the mess, igniting it.

“I hope you like it,” Red exclaimed, “‘cause you can’t return it!” At that moment, Candy spotted Purple above them.

“Po-ple?” She gasped. She then saw the lit kegs of gunpowder. “Oh no… Boys, Purple is up there! Douse the flames, I’m going after him!”

“But the wolves!” SC feared.

“I can fend them off.” Candy assured him. “Remember my not-so-secret weapon.” She added, nodding. SC gave her a nod back and she zipped up the scaffolding while the others were preoccupied with the wolves. Eventually, she got stopped by a large gorilla, who roared at her. She growled back in response, reminiscent of her beloved Master Tigress.

Up above, Purple swung himself back onto a sturdy surface and confronted Shen.

“Are you willing to die to learn the truth?”

“I’d prefer not to…” Purple admitted, “but I am willing to die to keep my family safe!”

He leapt at Shen, but the quick peacock grabbed him, and countered with a quick sweep of his feathers, knocking Purple off his feet onto a conveyor belt leading to a massive vat of boiling, molten metal and lava. He was unable to outpace it and, as Shen looked on, he fell off, just barely able to put his elytra wings on and dodge a fiery death within inches of his life. He flew around Shen and landed behind him.

“Looking for me?”

Purple charged. Shen flew away to a higher spot, eluding him, and Purple was quickly swarmed by wolves. Candy managed to spot Purple’s predicament.

“Po-ple!” She exclaimed. In her tussle, she used her speed to knock the wolves off of him. “You OK?”

“Thanks to you.” Purple answered, rising to his feet. At that moment, the gorilla she was tussling with grabbed her. Purple, seeing Shen above him, glanced at Candy, who gave him a nod, as if to say, “Take him down.” Purple nodded back and confronted Shen, who tried to flee, only for Purple to whack a tuning fork with a wok he grabbed from the conveyor belt, the fork pinning Shen to a wooden wall.

“No more running, Shen!”

“So it seems.” Shen replied, removing the fork with his talons.

“Now... answers!” Purple demanded, spinning the wok around him.

“Oh, you want to know so badly? Think knowing will heal you, huh? Fill some... crater in your soul?” Shen breathed sinisterly. “Well here's your answer... your parents didn't love you.”

Purple froze. Shen hit him right where it hurt him most. He wanted to believe his birth father did love him, he thought that for most of his life before he learned what love truly is, before his redemption. He was sure that Navy didn’t love him at all, not now that he’s in a better state of mind, but Shen’s statement didn’t just include Navy, but Purple’s mom as well. Pink was one of very few lights in his rather dark and abusive childhood, and he couldn’t believe that Pink would do that to him.

“No… You- You’re lying…” Purple said feebly.

“But here…” Shen continued, “let me heal you.”

Shen leapt backwards, revealing an even larger cannon in the shape of a cylindrical dragon’s head, the mouth being the hole for a cannonball to shoot out. Purple gasped, now paralyzed with fear. Not even a cry from Candy could snap him out of it.

“Purple, get outta there!” She called.

Purple couldn’t. He couldn’t feel his legs for the seconds it took for Shen to strike his cannon, igniting its fuse. The others were pinned down by the pack of wolves, and Candy was in the grip of a gorilla many times her size. None of them could help, only watch helplessly as Purple pressed the wok against his chest to try and stop the cannonball.

It didn’t work.

“NO!” Candy cried.

Purple was launched through the air, out of the back of the factory, far into the distance, landing in a river. Lightning struck in the distance, and the entire event sent shockwaves through all of China, even to Shifu’s meditation cave. As if he felt a disturbance in the Force, Shifu gasped and fell to his knees in response, truly devastated.

But none more so than Purple’s friends…

Chapter 46: A Forgotten History (Purple)

Drip … drip … drip …

The constant repetition of water dripping on my forehead awakened me. A bit dazed, I found myself lying in a small house of sorts. Well, it was more of a hut or a makeshift shelter with only a couple of walls. I had no idea how I got there, or what happened to me after I got blasted by the cannonball. All I remember is using a wok to block the impact of it… only to get blasted through the back of the building.

That impact must’ve knocked me out cold.

I looked at my hands, shocked to still be alive, and saw bandages wrapped around my body, my hand. I had no idea how I got them, but I then noticed the Soothsayer nearby. She was seemingly distracted by… something. She must’ve patched me up, I figured.

But despite my injuries–at that moment, I felt like I could barely move–I remembered my friends… my family. They needed me, sooner than later. Shen was still out there and his weapons were ready. And I knew how powerful they were. My family wouldn’t be able to take multiple direct hits from them.

I tried shuffling away, out of the shelter, when the Soothsayer suddenly appeared next to me, catching me off guard. I flinched in response, she legitimately startled me, and then I winced in pain. When I opened my eyes again, she was offering me a mysterious drink.

“What even is tha-?”

I was interrupted when she stuck an acupuncture needle into my head. My body froze, she poured the drink into my mouth, and then took out the needle. I was able to move again and I swallowed the liquid, gagging in disgust.

“If I wanted you dead,” Soothsayer began, “I would’ve left you in that river.”

“So why save me?” I asked, slowly removing my bandages as my strength returned.

“So you can fulfill my destiny.”

“My destiny? What do you mean?” I asked. “And what is this place?”

I hadn’t taken a look at the whole location, the scenery, as of yet, but when I was able to get a good look at it, it seemed vaguely familiar. It resembled a rural village, not for pandas like in the movie, but for stick figures like myself… and it looked like it had just experienced a massive fire. I couldn’t understand why, but something about it clicked with me, and a past memory.

“I’m surprised you remember so little…” Soothsayer slowly explained, “but you’ve been through so much since it happened.”

Something then flashed through my mind, the recurring flashback of the world around me collapsing, burning, being destroyed. Voices were screaming, panicking, sticks of all shapes and sizes fleeing in every direction, desperately trying to escape. Soothsayer must’ve noticed me.

“Perhaps you do remember.”

“Remember what?” I asked. “It’s… still fuzzy…”

I looked into a small pool of water. I could see my reflection looking back at me, and then… suddenly… it all clicked. I saw myself, and the reflection changed. It looked like a younger me, surrounded by flames and destruction against an orange sky. I was running, sticks were panicking, screaming, and then I saw…

My parents.

Well, one of my parents. Navy was there too.

And he was urging me to hurry up.

I could hear his voice in my head…

“Hurry up, you little s***!” He exclaimed. “Or do you want us to die in a fiery explosion?”

“Dad, I… I can’t keep up! Help me!” I cried out.

“Move your a**, you lazy piece of s***!” Navy yelled. I couldn’t keep up. I tripped and fell to my knees.

“Purple!” I heard Mom’s voice say. “Are you OK?”

“Yeah. Thanks, Mom.” Navy then ran up, dragging me to my feet roughly.

“Move, or else we’re all going to get killed.” He seethed, yanking me by the arm over to a hole where other sticks were dropping though. We stepped through it and found ourselves in the Outernet, a new universe different from the home I grew up in. And yet… not everything changed with our new surroundings.

I had to stop there.

I knew what happened next.

But the Soothsayer gently continued.

“Stop fighting. Let it flow.” She said.

I breathed deeply and closed my eyes. I couldn’t bear to see myself any more, so I didn’t look, instead focusing my brain to remember what happened next. To help me focus, I tried mimicking Shifu’s movements from earlier, when he caught the water droplet on his hands, though I didn’t need to think that hard, as I was picking everything back up after Mom, Navy, and I were driven from our first home. As I caught a single drop of rain in my hand, rolling on around my hands and arms without breaking it, I remembered telling Green everything…

The entire event only caused Navy to go harder on me in my training. And by “going harder,” I mean he only got more abusive, except younger me didn’t realize it, obviously. I tried my hardest, but I could never meet his expectations. I did whatever I could, in everything. I tried to be perfect. I had to be perfect. I had to please Navy, but nothing I did could ever do that, until it all culminated in two of the most heartbreaking moments of my life: Navy leaving and Mom’s death shortly after.

I remembered my last moments with her…

And then I gently placed the water droplet onto a small sapling.

My eyes opened. I breathed heavily. I never wanted to relive those moments ever again, and even now, it’s so painful. I dropped to my knees and put my face in my hands, trying to fight back tears, but I couldn’t. I let a few tears flow from my eyes into my palms. I was so broken at the time and I never want to be there ever again. And that’s when the Soothsayer spoke up once again.

“Your story may not have such a happy beginning... but that does not make you who you are. It is the rest of your story... who you choose to be…”

I dried my tears. Something about her words hit different with me.

‘It doesn’t make me who I am. It is the rest of my story… who I choose to be…’

My brain raced until I remembered… everything after Mom passed. Becoming King of the Village, getting overthrown, getting revenge in League of Legends, meeting Dad for the first time, being his pawn, the second betrayal…

And then my upswing…

Receiving forgiveness from Green, being adopted by Dad, finding my new faith, bringing those beliefs to Dad, defeating Vic, helping take down The Dark Lord, finding a girlfriend, becoming a brother, taking down Tai Lung… That is what made me who I am.

I am a fighter, a flyer, a brother, a boyfriend, a lover… a son. A son of God, loved by Him, and I realized… Despite all of my past chaos… A symphony was written out of the cacophony of my life.

“So… Who are you, stick figure?” She asked.

I got to my feet, my knees muddy and dirty from sitting for too long.

“I am Purple. Purple Flamingo Tango…” I answered, “Flamingo” being the middle name I opted for since… that was Mom’s last name. “And with the Prince of Peace living inside of me… I’m going to save my family.”

Chapter 47: Purple's Return (Third Person)

Hopeless.

The Squad saw Purple take a point blank blast from Shen’s cannon, one bigger and more powerful than Shen’s other cannons, and could only watch in horror. Their friend was seemingly gone, and they were trapped by a pack of wolves. None of them could escape, not even Candy with her speed, as she was quickly grabbed as well by a massive gorilla.

Things were truly hopeless.

Red, Candy, SC, Gold, Yellow, Green, and Blue were promptly chained, only waking up when Shen held a lit torch over to them. Candy opened her eyes.

“Such sad, sad faces.” He mocked. “But now is a time only for joy. You are going to be part of something beautiful.”

“When I get free from these chains, I am going to make you pay.” Candy scowled. Shen shrugged the threat off.

“Once we reach the harbor, in front of all the world, you and your precious kung fu will die.” He continued. “Then China will know to bow before me. Set sail!”

The sticks were lifted into the air, still in their chains, and flowed down the canal with the rest of a massive fleet of ships equipped with cannons.

“Purple… my baby bro…” Gold cried quietly.

“We can’t give up.” Blue said. “If Purple is playing Po, then he might’ve survived… Right Candy?”

“I…” Candy began, unable to hold back tears. “Reddy Bear, hold me.”

“I would if I could.” Red replied.

One of Shen’s cannons took down a bridge spanning the canal, Shen refusing to let anyone stand in his way. It seemed as if no one could, until Yellow spotted something, or someone, standing on a tall building pressed against a dark, cloudy sky.

“Companions, look!” Yellow ordered, gesturing as well as he could in the direction. His friends followed suit and looked on in awe.

“Purple?” Green gasped.

It was none other than Purple, back at full strength. However, the remaining members of the Squad weren’t the only ones to notice him. Shen spotted him as well.

“How many times do I have to kill the same stinking stick figure?” He muttered furiously.

“Lord Shen,” Purple proclaimed, “you messed with my family. You messed with the lion. Now, you’re getting the claws.”

He put his wings on and leapt into the air, soaring back and forth quickly, using his speed and maneuverability to his advantage. The cannons were hard and slow to aim so none of the wolves manning them could get a clear shot on him. Purple drew closer and closer, descending lower and lower before grabbing and falling with an anvil, shaking a boat violently. Purple cleanly landed on top.

“Attack!” Shen ordered.

The wolves wasted no time, quickly swarming the younger Tango, but Purple fought them off, at least for a little while. However, that was enough time for him to toss a diamond ax to his friends. Green, thinking fast, grabbed his trusty fishing rod, hooked the flying ax, and used it to cut the chains, freeing himself, and his friends, who got the wolves off of Purple.

“Impressive, Dragon Warrior.” Candy complimented. “Now don’t scare me like that!”

“Sorry…” Purple replied sheepishly. “Now, it’s time to stop Shen!”

“Oooh, I’ve been eager for this!” Red squealed.

“Keep each other safe, guys.” SC ordered. “Watch your backs, sink their ships, whatever it takes… and take Shen down in the process!”

The other sticks nodded, teamed up, and with their unique skills they worked together to slowly beat back the wolves around them. Their progress was initially slow, but then they got support from a master of kung fu. Purple spotted him first.

“Master Shifu!” He exclaimed.

“Quickly! Use their boats to block the way!” Shifu ordered.

The sticks knew what to do. Using a heavy cannon, and a few anvils, the Squad tipped a boat forward, almost flipping it, but getting it stuck on a bridge in front of the harbor, effectively creating a traffic jam in the canal. Red used his own pair of elytra to further cause chaos, using the wings to make a burst of air to push the boats forward… and up into the boat blocking the way.

“What?!” Shen exclaimed.

The sticks–and Shifu–worked their way through the wolfpack closer and closer to Shen’s boat. Increasingly desperate, he played his last ace up his sleeve.

“Why aren’t we firing?!” Shen demanded.

“They’re taking out our gunners, sir! They’re getting close!” Boss Wolf answered.

Purple glared at Shen right in his piercing, red eyes.

“Fire. Fire! F-Fire at them!” Shen ordered.

“But sir, we’ll kill our own!” Boss Wolf said, hesitating.

“I said fire at them! FIRE!!!!” The Boss Wolf turned to face his master and tossed his torch away, uttering his final word.

“No.”

This insubordination would not stand. With a quick throw from a feather-shaped blade, Shen drilled Boss Wolf right in the heart, killing him instantly. The wolf’s body fell off the boat, but the ruthless, genocidal peacock leapt onto the cannon, pointing it directly at Purple. Shen smiled evilly as he ignited the fuse with his talons.

“Purple, look out!” Candy exclaimed, bolting to rescue her friend. She did just in time, but she couldn’t stop a massive explosion from rupturing through the barricade, almost blowing the sticks and Shifu out of existence. They couldn’t stop Shen in the canal, and his fleet of ships had made it to the harbor. The sticks were wounded, but alive… floating on random planks of driftwood in a massive sea.

Purple was the first to wake up, albeit a little dazed. He saw the massive fleet of ships emblazoned with Navy’s shade of blue on the sails. Except this time, he wasn’t seeing memories of his past. He was more concerned about his friends. He saw Candy nearby, deeply bruised and scarred. He swam over to her.

“Candy…” Purple said weakly. Candy lifted her head and looked at Purple. Purple felt himself start to cry, but Candy gave her best look of determination she could muster. She slowly looked over at Shen’s fleet and then back at Purple. Even without her saying a word, Purple knew what he had to do.

“I’m not losing you, Candy.” Purple whispered. “I’m not losing my family.”

He swam away toward an upside-down ship as Candy looked on.

“Get him, Po-ple.” She whispered to herself. “Take him down… for me… for all of us.”

As Purple made his way to the sunken ship, he spotted his friends: Red, SC, and Gold clinging to a piece of wood, and it broke his heart seeing his friends–and his older brother–half-conscious. He also spotted Shifu, along with Yellow, Green, and Blue not too far away, and a fire burned in his heart. Somehow, someway, Shen was going down. Purple staggered onto the top of the boat and glared at Shen’s ship.

“As you wish.” Shen muttered. “Let’s finish this.”

Purple wanted nothing more, and soon… it would be finished.

Chapter 48: Peaceful Prince

Purple

Morning broke after one of the darkest nights of my life. My friends were barely alive and Lord Shen was set to conquer China. Even more terrifying, I was the only one conscious enough to fight back against him. I had to do something, somehow. I was the Dragon Warrior… and I’m not letting my past define me.

I climbed onto an old, shattered, upside-down boat and stared at Shen from my vantage. He was hard to see from that far, but one thing I did see: His massive army of cannons… all of them pointed directly at me.

Despite the odds stacked against me… I remembered everything I went through: from abusive parents to the literal end of the world as I knew it. And I survived all of it… with help from my family. My mom back then, my adoptive father now… friends who inspired me, who helped me through all of it, and a new faith.

My source of peace is the Prince of Peace. And despite everything I’ve been through… Despite my tragic past…

“Through all of this chaos…” I said to myself, “You are writing a symphony.”

I did the same moves as Shifu did, when he caught the droplet, when I caught the raindrop earlier. Setting my stance, I glared at Shen, who ignited his cannon. It fired, and a cannonball came barreling toward me. Closing my eyes, I focused on those lyrics, ‘a symphony,’ ringing in my head like the best type of song. That was it.

My source of peace… it’s not a thing. He’s the writer of the symphony of my life.

Somehow, someway, I caught the cannonball in midair and yeeted it behind me, causing it to land harmlessly in the water. Shifu was in shock, Candy was in shock, but none more so than I was.

“Did… I just did that…” I gasped, before realizing my hand was on fire. I quickly dunked it in the water around me, wincing in pain.

“Again!” I heard Shen exclaim.

‘Here comes another volley.’ I thought.

Sure enough, another cannon was shot at me. I caught the cannonball, albeit struggling with the impact, before tossing it behind me. I dodged another cannonball shot at me. I could tell Shen was getting more and more angry and desperate.

“Kill him!” He yelled. “Somebody kill him!”

I caught another cannonball, throwing it away, and dodged two more by leaping. Then an idea came to me.

‘How about I destroy their weapons… with their own firepower?’

The cannonballs I caught were how I fought back. Each shot Shen took at me, I threw them back closer and closer toward the fleet, making sure to avoid my family, who were still floating around nearby. Eventually, I landed a direct hit.

“What?! No!” Shen shouted. I drilled another ship of Shen’s, and then I had my new target: Shen’s ship itself. Sink that, my family will be safe, and Shen will literally be going down with the ship.

“Keep firing! KEEP FIRING!!!!!” Shen exclaimed. His massive cannon, the one he used against me earlier, launched a powerful shot at me. I put my wings on, braced myself, and caught the cannonball in my hands, though the impact drove me almost off the ship I was standing on. I flapped my wings as hard as I could, the spinning cannonball still in my grip, until I took flight. I felt myself spinning, faster and faster, a circular flight path I used when showing off for Dad when I first met him. I felt some sort of power rush over me, until I finally landed. I wound my arm up like a baseball pitcher…

“Skadoosh.”

and I threw the cannonball directly back at Shen’s cannon, a straight line right toward him. He couldn’t dodge it in time and the cannonball drilled the cannon with a massive explosion, fire and smoke. I flew over with my wings to inspect the damage, and when I arrived and the smoke cleared, Shen’s cannon was destroyed, pointed diagonally upwards, only held up by a series of cords. Shen coughed and looked up at his annihilated weapon.

“H- How did you…?” Shen gasped. “How did you do it?”

“I’m not fully sure how to answer that…” I confessed, not knowing exactly how I did it myself.

“Not that. How did you find peace?” Shen gasped. “You lost your parents! Everything! You were scarred for life.”

“See, that's the thing, Shen. Scars heal.” I answered.

“No, they don't. Wounds heal.”

“OK, scars mostly heal… Right?”

“I don't care what scars do.”

“You should, Shen.” I insisted gently. “You gotta let go of that stuff from the past because it just doesn't matter. The only thing that matters is who you choose to be… and who the Prince of Peace says we are.”

“You're right.” Shen said. “Then I choose... THIS!!!!”

Without warning, he took a swipe at me with metallic, feather-shaped blades. I dodged it, but his aggression didn’t relent, taking more swipes at me, barely scratching my face. Ignoring the pain, I continued ducking and dodging as Shen tried slicing me to pieces with his sword. I bounced around with things like slime blocks and my wings to fly as he took massive swings. As he swung his sword, he unintentionally cut the cords holding his cannon up, until the last cord was sliced… and the cannon began to fall. My wings still on, I bolted as the cannon came crashing down on Shen in a giant explosion. The impact caused me to fly into the water, but I did manage to grab a plank of wood in the water.

Floating in the water, I saw Candy extending a striped hand toward me. I grabbed it and she pulled me up with impressive strength.

“That… was pretty hardcore.” She complimented.

“Thanks, Candy.” I replied, giving her a gentle hug. She returned the favor, before I realized… The guys were all watching. I quickly released her.

“She’s just a friend.” I immediately explained. “Not a word to Maggie.”

“Never, bro.” Green said. The rest of the guys immediately surrounded me, embracing me and cheering me on. I hugged them all, and they hugged me back.

“Thanks, guys. I love you all.” I said tearfully.

“Never do that again, buddy!” Red cried. “I thought I lost you…”

“The odds of survival were not in your favor.” Yellow confessed.

“You did it, Purple!” SC congratulated. “You’re a hero!”

“What a shot, Purple!” Blue added. “You’re amazing.”

“I couldn’t be prouder of my baby brother.” Gold teased. “Come here, you!” He gave me a soft noogie. I pushed him away.

“Thanks, Golden Oldie.” I then saw Shifu next to us.

“It seems that you have found inner peace…” Shifu noted. “And at such a young age.”

“I had a pretty good teacher.” I replied, hugging him as well, only for him to elude my grip and appear standing on a pillar nearby. All of us watched as fireworks shot from the remains of Shen’s ship, making the shape of a peacock for a moment, as well as one shaped like the Yin-Yang symbol. The guys and I beamed with pride.

“Speaking of good teachers,” SC began, “King’s waiting for us. Let’s head home.”

“No doubt Dad is falling apart at the seams waiting for us.” Gold pointed out. “Can’t give him an anxiety attack.”

“Any more so than usual.” I noted. “Let’s go home, guys.”

“Try to keep up!” Candy squealed, bolting away. We all put our wings on and leapt into the air, excited to head home to see Dad’s warm, friendly face.

King

Ever since Purple and the kids left, I’ve been a mess, and it translated to the noodle shop. I couldn’t work it, I’ve been too distracted, and more often than not, I’ve had to turn people away or take a lot less business so I can collect myself. My stomach was tied up in knots for days, I couldn’t eat, I’ve just been so worried for him, Goldy, the kids… No matter how much I told myself they’d be OK, I just wanted to see them again.

It all came to a head when a mother pig and son came, asking to see the Dragon Warrior.

“He’s not here…” I answered distantly.

“What do you mean he's not here?!” She demanded. “It's my son's birthday! All he wanted was to meet the Dragon Warrior!”

“I want to see him too… Just one more time…”

“You know what... we'll try again some other time. When do you think he'll be back?” That question broke me even more, shattering me to pieces.

“I don't know!” I cried. “OK, I DON'T KNOW! He might not! Nor might my other son! I mean, I worry, okay, I'm his dad... He’s my son… They’re my sons, I love them more than life itself!” I dropped to my knees at another table. “Why did he have to go and save China? I mean, I know why, but why?” I sniffled. “My little Prince… My First Prize…”

Before I knew it, I was breaking down in tears, but then I heard a couple of familiar voices behind me.

“Did someone call for me?”

“I think he did, baby bro.”

I turned around, wiping the tears from my face. Sure enough, there were my kids, Purple and Gold, standing before me.

“Kids?” I said. It didn’t fully sink in until a second later. “KIDDOS! MY SONS!”

I raced up to them and gave them the tightest hug I could’ve given them, tears streaming down my face. They hugged me back.

“Hey Dad.” Purple replied.

“I’ve missed you, Dad.” Gold confessed.

“I’ve missed you both, kiddos.” I released them and kissed them both. “I’ve been so, so worried.”

“It’ll take more than a genocidal peacock to keep us apart.” Purple replied.

“Nothing can keep the Tango family apart.” Gold added.

“Where are the others?” I asked, drying my eyes again. When I took a second look, I could see the Gang and Candy behind them.

“Kids, get in here.” I said. “I need this in the best of ways.”

“Bring it in, King!” Red gushed, racing up to us. The rest of them followed, and we Tangos were wrapped in a tight hug for a little while. After we released, Purple spoke up.

“Dad, do I have a story to tell you…” He began, “while on my journey, I found my old home. Where I grew up.”

“With Navy?” I asked.

“Yeah… I saw a lot of him, Dad… I saw a chapter of my life that I had long forgotten, and to be honest, it made me question a lot of things… But through it all, I remembered who I am.” I could see tears fill his eyes. None of us said a word, allowing Purple to continue.

“I’m your son.”

It’s even more sweetly heartbreaking hearing it from my adopted son. I embraced him tightly and warmly, and Gold joined me.

“I love you, Dad.” Purple said.

“I love you too, kiddos.” I replied. “I’m so proud of you both. You are the best sons a guy could ask for.” When we separated, I could hear my stomach growl. I hadn’t eaten for what seemed like days, and I had no doubt the kids were the same. “You must be hungry, let me cook something for you all. You saved China, you saved my family. It’s the least I could do.”

“Food is my love language, King.” Blue said, licking his lips. “I even got my secret ingredient with me.”

“Hold onto that, Blue.” Green teased. “King, dude, I’d love some of your cooking.”

“Make it meatless!” Red piped up.

“I would immensely savor your cuisine, eldest Tango.” Yellow added. I couldn’t help but chuckle.

“Fill us up, King. I could use a nap or something.” SC confessed.

“Let’s all breathe, we’ve all been through a lot.” Candy agreed. “Plus, I’d like a little more time in my beloved KFP2.”

“And I have to hear about your guys’ adventure.” I added. “Maybe over some good food.”

“I’d like that a lot, Dad.” Purple replied.

I made us all a large, buffet style meal and we all chowed down as quickly as we could. We didn’t know how much longer we had here, but we all figured it was only a matter of time before the next movie started. However, I was not prepared for the bombshell Gold was about to drop as we ate.

“Dad… There’s something you need to know…” He slowly began.

“What is it?” I asked.

“I saw him again… the Wolf…”

“Wait, what?” I gasped, dropping my chopsticks. “Oh no… No no no no no… Are you OK?”

“Yeah, I’m fine…” Gold answered. “He shook me to my core, but thankfully, SC was there to calm me down.” I breathed a heavy sigh, grateful to still have my eldest son in my life, but I’d be lying if I said I was relieved. The Wolf known as Death is still after us, and I doubt he’ll stop now.

“I should’ve been there…” I mumbled to myself.

“You couldn’t have known, King.” Candy sympathized.

“I’m a father, it’s my job to protect my kids… all of them…” I replied distantly. “That said… SC, from the bottom of my heart, thank you for being there when I couldn’t be.”

“I’m no stranger to a leadership role,” SC replied, “and I made myself a promise many years ago to protect my friends against anyone who threatens them. I would gladly lay down my life for anyone here at this table.”

“Wow, SC…” Candy gasped. “How do you manage that kind of bravery?”

“That’s what I’m wondering, too.” Gold added. “You were there, face-to-face with Death itself, and yet you still stood up for me.”

“‘Brave’?” SC repeated. “That wasn’t bravery. I was legitimately fearing for my life at that moment. But I made myself a promise: To protect my family until my very last breath. I intend on doing just that, even against the physical manifestation of Death itself.”

“But standing up to it like you did?” Gold wondered. “I can’t imagine… He could’ve killed you.”

“He very well could have.” SC admitted. “But I don’t believe death is the end. It’s only a new beginning, one that will provide an eternity in paradise.”

“Well said, SC.” I praised.

“You all believe that, Dad?” Gold asked.

“I know most of us do.” I answered. “Candy?”

“I’m… still looking…” She slowly confessed. “But this… it very much intrigues me…”

I smiled at her, happy to hear that she seemed interested in our faith, but whether she would accept it, that was a different conversation entirely. However, there was no time for that as we found ourselves in the black hole once again.

“Awww, we’re leaving?” Candy moaned, sighing deeply. “I’ll miss you, KFP2! I would’ve loved to face Shen myself, though…”

“I’m sorry you couldn’t, Candy…” Red said regretfully.

“Don’t be, Reddy Bear. I got to travel through my favorite movie with my favorite person. A dream of mine came true.” She said. Red smiled at her.

“Where to next, Red? Candy?” Purple asked.

“We’re going back to Berk.” Candy answered.

“The second How to Train Your Dragon is coming up!” Red exclaimed.

“Oooooh, I’m so excited to see Toothless again!” Gold squealed. “And ride him, too!”

“Just… be careful, Goldy.” I said.

“I make no promises, Dad.” He replied. I couldn’t help but chuckle.

“I know… but somehow… I wouldn’t have it any other way.”

Chapter 49: Return to Berk (Third Person)

Most of the Rainbow Squad landed hard back on the island of Berk, though most of them didn’t recognize it at first. Compared to the first time they were here, the island seemed transformed. The old rustic houses were built up bigger and better, dragons soared against the blue sky above them, there were even designed stables for dragons to stay. But the Squad’s first concern was themselves.

“Is everyone here?” King asked, quickly glancing around him.

“I’m here, Dad!” Purple called.

“Yo, King, it’s Green checking in.” Green said.

“Blue is present with me.” Yellow updated.

“I’m here, boys!” Candy exclaimed.

“I’ve made it in one piece.” SC said. “Where are Red and Gold?”

The seven sticks arose and looked around their immediate surroundings. There was no sign of Red or Gold anywhere around them.

“Perhaps they’re in the village?” Blue guessed. “Maybe they landed nearby and they’re looking for us.”

“Candy, you know these movies.” King pointed out. “Do you know where they could be?”

“I’d imagine… They’re flying with Toothless.” Candy theorized. “Exploring new lands, just like the beginning of the movie.”

“That doesn’t surprise me.” King sighed. “I just hope they’re OK.”

“Red’s with him.” SC assured him. “Red’s the type of guy to take a bullet for anyone, get up, and then take another five or six rounds until he physically can’t any more.” King chuckled.

“Not to mention Red has extensive knowledge of this series.” Yellow added. “He is fully aware of what is coming.”

“It’s not just him.” Purple pointed out. “Toothless is with him, too, and who’d dare mess with him? He took down a massive dragon! He’ll be safe with Toothless with him.”

“Yeah, you’re right, kiddo.” King said. “But it still makes me uneasy.”

“If you want, King, I can go try to find him.” Candy offered. “This movie takes place five years after the first.”

“That would explain the massive difference in the architecture.” Green observed.

“Yeah. A lot has changed, but one thing that has remained: We still have our dragons.” Candy said. “They should be in the stables. Follow me!”

Candy, without her speed, raced off toward the stables, the remaining members of the Squad following her. They soon arrived and met several familiar faces: the dragons they tamed earlier. Evidently they recognized them as well, as some of them nuzzled up against their riders, including Candy’s dragon, a female Nadder named Stormfly.

“Awww, who’s a good girl?” Candy gushed, giving her dragon some soft scratches. “Boys, meet your dragons: Hookfang, Meatlug, and the two-headed Barf and Belch. Not the names I would’ve chosen, but that’s what they respond to.”

“At least Hookfang sounds intimidating, dude.” Green considered. SC joined him and gave his and Green’s dragon soft pets on the nose.

“You’re not gonna bite my hand off, are ya, buddy?” He said cautiously.

“Not at all, they’re docile.” Candy assured him.

“Fascinating!” Yellow gasped, examining his dragon, Meatlug. “Five rotations around the sun drastically changes everything, doesn’t it?”

“Well, I’d imagine Gold and Red had something to do with it.” Blue said thoughtfully. “They were the first to find Toothless.”

“Speaking of… I wonder where they are.” King said. “Hey, Candy, do I have a dragon?”

“Absolutely.” Candy confirmed, walking over to a massive, red-and-green Rumblehorn dragon. It was big, built like a rhino, but with large wings and a spiky club for a tail. “Say ‘hi’ to Skullcrusher.”

“Now there’s an awesome name.” Green commented.

“Hey there, big guy.” King said slowly. Skullcrusher nuzzled his nose against King’s extended hand, and King’s nerves calmed down upon feeling his scales.

“Hey, you guys want to go riding?” Purple asked.

“Honestly, Purple, that sounds like fun.” SC said.

“Ever been dragon racing, boys?” Candy quipped.

That immediately got the kids hyped. King decided to sit it out and just watch, and Candy too refused to participate. She was off to find Red and Gold, and she knew with her knowledge of DreamWorks, she was the best candidate to find them. The boys carefully got their dragons out and up into the air, reminding themselves of how to ride a dragon, and Candy did the same, slowly flying Stormfly higher and higher to get her bearings.

“Alright, girl, let’s find some friends.” She said.

Stormfly nodded and took off into the sky.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

“WOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO-HOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!”

“THIS IS AWESOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOME!”

Gold and Red were having the time of their lives riding on Toothless through the pristine blue sky and fluffy white clouds. They even used their elytra and flew with Toothless, soaring through the air with the greatest of ease, even floating with the help of Toothless’s fireballs creating lift for them.

“I bet you can’t keep up with me, Goldy!” Red teased.

“Ohhhh, you don’t want a piece of me!” Gold retaliated.

The two excitable sticks soared further ahead, losing their visibility in a thick mist, unable to see several rock spires in front of them until they were coming in hot.

“Oh, jeez…” Red gasped.

“Toothless!” Gold exclaimed.

Suddenly, the jet black dragon shot the rock spires, providing enough room for the two sticks to fly through, but Toothless was not as lucky. His prosthetic tail made maneuvering difficult for him and he took a hard hit from the debris and tumbled downwards. Red and Gold were quick to react, zooming toward him, meeting up with him on a plateau that he crash landed on.

“Sorry about that, buddy.” Gold sympathized. “You OK?”

Toothless grumbled a bit.

“Aww, don’t worry. We’ll make it up to you, I promise.” Red insisted. “Do you want a widdle hug?” He threw his arms around Toothless’s neck, playfully teasing him. Gold joined him, and the massive dragon retaliated by flopping himself on the two sticks, licking them like an excitable puppy.

“Ha ha ha ha! Hey, hee hee! Cut it out, Toothless! Ha ha!” Red laughed. “That tickles!”

“Awww, eww! Dragon slobber!” Gold moaned, trying not to laugh. “Stop it, buddy!”

After a brief moment of playful licking from Toothless, he finally relented and allowed the two sticks to get up.

“I didn’t realize you were so ticklish, Red.” Gold teased. Red turned a shade of pink.

“Don’t let it get out.” He ordered. “Candy loves messing with me, and if she found that out, she would torture me relentlessly by taking jabs at my tummy.”

“Hey, don’t worry, I can keep a secret. Probably.” Gold said cheekily. Red gave him a look and a playful slug in the arm.

“Thanks a lot, buddy.” Red said sarcastically.

“Better watch it, or I’ll tickle you.” Gold threatened playfully. The two of them shared a laugh, before sighing deeply. They examined their surroundings, below them was a dense forest that extended into the horizon.

“What a view!” Red sighed. “I wonder what other creatures lie in those woods.”

“Of course you would be intrigued by the animals.” Gold teased.

“Animals are my life, Goldy.”

A few moments later, Candy arrived on Stormfly. Toothless instantly got excited to see his dragon friend again, and Red and Gold turned around to greet their striped friend.

“Candy!” Red exclaimed. “I’m so happy to see you’ve arrived safely.”

“Where’s Dad?” Gold asked. “And Purple? And the others, come to think of it…”

“They’re back at Berk with their own dragons.” Candy answered. “Safe and sound. I just came to find you two. King worries about you, Gold.”

“I am well aware. He can be a little overprotective, but I am glad to know that he has my back.”

“He loves you deeply, Goldy.” Red insisted. “He worries because he cares.”

“It’d probably be worse if he didn’t worry.” Candy agreed. “Goodness knows my old boss didn’t.”

“You’re right, you’re right…” Gold sighed. “I just enjoy being free, riding on Toothless…” His voice trailed off when he spotted something in the distance. “Is that… smoke?”

“It sure looks like it.” Red confirmed.

“You’re gonna check it out, aren’t you, Gold?” Candy guessed.

“Of course.” Gold answered. Toothless ran up to him, and Gold carefully mounted him. “Red, are you gonna join me?”

“I will, just on Stormfly.” Red answered. “I need to speak with Candy about something.”

“Your loss.” Gold shrugged before turning to Toothless. “Alright, bud, let’s fly.”

Toothless took off into the air. Candy and Red carefully mounted Stormfly and followed. As they flew, Candy spoke up.

“So, what did you want to talk about?”

“You remember what happens later on in this movie, right?” Red asked. “One of the most tragic events in any DreamWorks movie.”

After a moment of thought, Candy suddenly realized what Red was referring to.

“Oh my gosh you’re right!”

“We can’t let that happen.” Red insisted. “I’ll die before I let anyone else in my family meet that fate.”

“We need to bring it up to the others.” Candy noted. “I refuse to be the cause of losing a friend… permanently. One way or the other, we’re all getting home…”

“Or none of us are.” Red finished.

Chapter 50: Shocking News (Gold)

I flew Toothless in the direction of smoke in the distance, Red and Candy following right behind me on Candy’s Nadder, Stormfly. I was a bit curious as to why Red wanted to talk to Candy, but I figured I’d find out in time. In the meantime, there was something going on, and my adventurous nature drove me to it.

As we closed in on the pillar of billowing smoke, I got a closer look at what caused it: A massive, jagged shard of ice pierced through what looked like a fort, along with several boats. It was as if someone uppercutted it with knives made of ice, and seeing it in person made me gasp in awe.

“What could’ve done this?” I said to myself.

“Gold, look out!” Red yelled.

From below, I saw a net flying toward us from below. I swerved Toothless out of the way, and Candy did the same with Stormfly. Below, I saw several people shooting nets at us, no doubt trying to trap our dragons. I felt an urge to stop them. Who knows how many dragons they had already caught? And who knows what they did to them? No, that wasn’t gonna fly with me.

“Let’s head down, Toothless!” I ordered. “And be careful!”

He soared down with me, Candy and Red right behind me, and we all landed. Red whipped out his sword and ran a few steps in front of me, standing between me and the seeming leader of the small band of trappers. He was young, like me, but he clearly meant business.

“Soil my britches... that is a Night Fury.” He gasped. “Thought they were all gone for good. Looks like our luck's had a turn for the better, lads! Don't think Drago has one of those in his dragon army.”

“Dragon army?” I repeated. “Ohhhhh, no, I’m not letting that happen, not to these incredible beasts!”

“We don’t want any trouble,” Candy insisted, “and trust me, you don’t want it either.”

“You should've thought of that before you stole all of our dragons and blasted our fort to bits!” The lead trapper claimed. I couldn’t remember his name, it’s been years since I’ve seen the movie. I gazed at the wreckage around and above me. Did we really do this in the time since the first movie?

“We didn’t do this.” Red insisted.

“Dragon trapping is hard enough work as it is, without do-gooder dragon riders sneaking in to rescue them.” The trapper muttered. You may have an ice-spitting dragon on your side, but we still have a quota to fill. How do you suppose we explain this mess to Drago Bludvist?”

“Do-gooder dragon riders?” I repeated, glancing at Red and Candy. “Wait… hang on…”

“We don’t know anything about these supposed ‘do-gooders,’ nor your boss, Drago Bludvist.” Candy insisted, sounding convincing, but I knew she was lying. She knew these movies better than her own stripes, she has proven that repeatedly. “Now, release our dragons and we won’t cause any more trouble than you clearly already are in… Whoever you are.”

“Oh, where are my manners?” The trapper said. “I'm Eret. Son of Eret. Finest dragon trapper alive. After all, it's not just anyone who can capture a Night Fury.”

“Afraid you haven’t captured him.” I insisted. “Not if Red and I have anything to say about it.”

“We’ll be taking off now.” Red replied tersely.

“Heh. They all say that.” Eret laughed. “RUSH 'EM, LADS!”

Eret’s friends charged at us, but Red was quick to swoop in, his sword still drawn, and with his skills and weaponry, he beat a few of them back. Candy and I aided however we could, and with our combined efforts, we bought enough time for us to escape on our dragons, soaring back to Berk, though not without Eret shouting threats in our direction.

As we flew back, Red explained his intended rundown.

“Goldy, Candy and I… remembered something about this movie…” He explained slowly. “But I think it’s in our best interest that we all be there for this info.”

“Gotcha, Reddy Bear.” I nodded. Candy flew up beside us.

“Hey, Gold, this might be a random question but… Do you remember your mom at all?” She asked.

“She passed away almost immediately after I was born. Dad told me as much.” I explained. “Why? Is there something I should know?” Candy hesitated.

“Another thing to add to our agenda when we meet back up with the others.” Red said.

“If you must…” I sighed. “But I had better get some answers when we get back! You can’t just keep me in the dark like this.”

“Gold, we promise, you will know everything once we head back.” Candy swore.

“Assuming you can keep up with us!” Red teased. “Go, Toothless!” Toothless bolted faster like a rocket.

“No fair!” Candy moaned, urging Stormfly on behind us. She got a laugh out of both of us as we headed back.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We eventually returned to the island of Berk, landing and parking our dragons in a couple of empty stables. It felt nice being back, surrounded by dragons. Considering I’ve had a lifelong love of dragons, and just flying in general, I got a sense of feeling at home among them. The only thing that could make it better would be finding Dad and Purple, but we soon found them and everyone else not far from the stables.

“Goldy!” Purple exclaimed, running up to meet me. Dad was right behind him.

“Hey there, baby bro.” I teased. “Dad.”

“I’m glad to see you’re OK.” Purple gushed. “You as well, Reddy Bear.” The two of them exchanged a hug.

“It’s so good to see my family again,” Red replied.

“I’m glad to have you home, Goldy.” Dad said.

“Thanks, Dad.” I replied.

“Boys… Red and I remembered a couple of… developments… that happen later on in this movie.” Candy slowly explained. “You all should be told about them.”

“OK… We’re listening.” SC said. Red sighed deeply.

“The first thing you should know is probably the most tragic event I’ve seen in DreamWorks.” Red explained. “In the movie, Hiccup’s dad Stoick sacrifices himself to save Hiccup.”

“Wait, what?” Purple gasped. I too was caught off-guard by this information.

“Wh- Why? How? What happens?” I demanded.

“The main villain of this movie, Drago Bludvist, you heard his name, right Gold?” Candy asked. I nodded yes. “Well, he is building a dragon army, headed by the Alpha species.”

“Alpha…” Yellow noted. “That is the primary character of the Greek alphabet. That would imply he has the most powerful species.”

“I thought the Nightfury was the most powerful.” Blue pointed out. “They seem to have a reputation for… Yellow, how did the book put it?”

“‘The unholy offspring of lightning and death itself.’” Yellow recited.

“That’s pretty impressive, Yellow.” Candy complimented.

“Not to boast, but when it comes to written information, my mind absorbs it quickly and easily.” Yellow replied. “Aside from that… we have to go up against a species even stronger than Toothless?”

“Somehow… Yes.” Red answered. “Its power comes from its ability to essentially mind-control other dragons, even the most loyal.”

“That’s what caused Stoick’s death in the movie.” Candy elaborated. “The Alpha mind-controlled Toothless, forcing him to attack Hiccup, only for Stoick to take a blast for him.”

“I fear what that means for us…” Red worried. “Gold, you’re playing Hiccup’s role. We were the ones to find and train Toothless… And I fear what that will entail for you, King.”

“Hold up, dudes, to be clear… We might be losing King?” Green gasped. “Shot down by a Nightfury’s blast?”

“No. That’s not going to happen.” SC determined. “Red, Candy, something can be done, right?”

“We have altered the movies…” Candy noted. “We missed the entire van chase from Over the Hedge…”

“We will do something, guys.” Red promised. “I just don’t know what as of yet.”

“Dad… you’ve been quiet.” Purple pointed out. “What’s on your mind?”

“A lot of things…” Dad answered. “It’s a lot to take in.”

“I’m sorry, King, I didn’t want to drop this bombshell on you, but Candy and I thought it was necessary.” Red sympathized.

“No need to apologize, Red, I appreciate you telling me. Now we can plan and strategize.” Dad figured.

“You’re strangely calm about this, Dad.” I pointed out.

“‘Calm?’ Goldy, I’ll be honest, I’m freaking out.” Dad confessed. “I mean, Toothless getting hypnotized? I know what dragons can do, I’ve seen it… But I’m not losing any of you, even if that means sacrificing myself.”

“Dad, we’re not losing you, either.” I swore. “You mean the world to me…”

“I agree. Dad, you’ve done so, so much for me… I’m not sitting by and watching you get blasted.” Purple agreed.

“And I’m not gonna be sitting on the sidelines watching Gold get destroyed, either.” Dad said. “I’ve done that once, and it destroyed me. Nearly destroyed all of you, too.” Dad gestured to the Gang and my brother. “If I have the choice between losing my own life or losing Gold, I’m losing myself every time.”

I felt tears fill my eyes. I love Dad dearly, and the thought of losing him because of me shook me to my core. I couldn’t do anything except hug him, weeping into his side. Purple joined me, and I felt the entire Squad surround and embrace us. I wasn’t the only one crying, though. I could hear some others of us like Red, Purple, even Dad silently crying.

“I love you guys…” Dad said tearfully. “Never forget that. And never forget how proud of you I am.”

“Dad, don’t say that, please!” Purple begged. “You’re gonna make me cry harder than I already am.”

When we finally released, SC got us together.

“I do appreciate your words, King, they truly mean a lot, and we love you dearly, none more so than your kids, I’m sure.” He began. “However… we’re not losing anyone. None of us is dying here. I will make sure of it. Either we’re all getting out of here or none of us are. We know what’s coming, we have materials to combat it, we have each other to rely on and support. We will come up with something, we will get out of here without losing anyone.”

“But how?” Red wondered. “Drago didn’t stop until he saw Stoick dead.”

“I’m not sure as of yet,” SC admitted, “but I do know this: We’re escaping in one piece. We’re escaping as a family. No. Matter. What.”

Chapter 51: A New Dragon Rider (Gold)

We had just been hit with a bombshell of a new development, that being that my dad might be in danger. It shook me, it shook us all to our core, and all we could do was stand there in silence for a few moments after a passionate sentiment from SC. He insisted that none of us would be lost, and I could feel passion and determination in his voice. I could even see it in his bright green eyes, and it gave me a bit of confidence that we would escape. Still, the thought of losing Dad lingered. I may crave independence, but I still love Dad dearly and I don’t want to lose him, especially because of Toothless. We all paused and reflected for another second before Yellow spoke up.

“Candy, you previously mentioned a ‘couple’ of developments. There’s something additional that we should be aware of?”

“Yeah, there is.” Candy confirmed. “In the movie, Hiccup met his long lost mother, which makes me wonder…” Her voice trailed off.

“If Gold will meet his mom…” Red finished. “Or if it’ll just be the character, Valka.”

“It has to be the latter.” Dad insisted. “Neon passed away years ago…”

“But what if it isn’t, Dad?” Purple asked. “You could be reunited with her, the love of your life…”

“We can’t be speculating yet, Purple.” Dad said gently. “Besides, I’m more worried about… you know…”

“We all are.” SC said solemnly. “But we’ll find a way. Red, Candy, how much time do we have to come up with a plan?”

“There’s no telling, but I do know this: the longer we wait, the bigger Drago’s dragon army will be.” Red feared.

“We can’t let that happen.” Candy determined. “Else he’ll overpower us all with it.”

“He already commands a massive legion.” Red added. “If he grows much more powerful, none of us will be leaving Berk.”

“Commands… commands…” Yellow muttered under his breath.

“Yellow, your mind is going a mile a minute.” Blue observed.

“We all know that look of yours, dude.” Green pointed out. “What’s up?”

“A potential idea. I just hope it succeeds.” Yellow theorized. “But in order for that to happen, I need to speak with King privately.”

“What? Why?” Purple asked. “There are no secrets between us.”

“I wholeheartedly agree, and it won’t make sense in the moment, but if my plan is executed the way I believe it will, I will explain it fully.” Yellow promised. “You all trust me, right?”

“Yellow, buddy, of course.” Blue insisted.

“Then I require you all to do that once again right now.” Yellow confessed, sighing deeply. “King? Am I permitted to share my scheme with you?”

“I’m willing to listen, of course.” Dad replied. As Yellow led him away from the rest of us, we all exchanged unsure glances with each other.

“What do you think Yellow’s planning?” I asked.

“There’s no telling,” Blue answered, “but if I know Yellow, I know that his ideas usually work.”

“I know he’s super smart, but this could be a matter of life or death.” Purple feared. “I don’t want to lose Dad. I… don’t think I could cope…”

“I couldn’t either, Purple.” I sympathized. My younger brother looked up at me and we exchanged a hug. “Which is why we’re going to stop this before it starts.”

“What do you mean, Gold?” SC asked.

“What’s stopping us from confronting our enemy personally?” I wondered.

“Drago is not one to be trifled with.” Red warned. “He’s got a dragon army and a real army.”

“All the more reason to stop it before it starts.” I replied. “I love dragons,and I know you do as well, Red. I can’t sit by and wait while Drago collects more like trading cards. No doubt you and Candy both know what he does to them. And if we can prevent him from mind-controlling Toothless before he starts, then we won’t have to risk losing Dad. We save the dragons, we save Dad, and I’m not losing him…” My voice trailed off for a moment, my mind racing. I personally felt responsible for getting us all into this. I was there, urging Candy to make this a reality. If not for me, none of us might be at risk. I might be losing Dad… because of me and my stupid decisions.

How could I face the others if that happened?

How could I face my brother if that happened?

How could I live with myself if that happened?

I’m not sure if I could.

Dad’s done everything for me since I was born. His support, his protection, his love for me… And that’s not to mention he has supplied all my physical needs, like a roof over my head, food on the table, a stable education… What would I be without him? I didn’t know, and I didn’t want to find out.

I felt my eyes well with tears. All of this news, all the thoughts were just overwhelming me. I love taking risks, but I never thought that my own risks would put other people in danger, let alone my friends, my brother and my own father.

“You OK, Goldy?”

Purple’s soft voice snapped me out of my trance. I looked at his gentle, lavender eyes and swallowed hard.

“Yes.” I insisted as confidently as I could. “We’re not losing anyone. Tell Dad where I’ve gone, because I’m not standing by and letting this happen. Dad raised me to stand for what’s right. I intend to do just that.”

I turned to leave to get Toothless, when Red ran up to me.

“Goldy, wait!” He called, grabbing me. “I’m joining you. You need a guide for this. Plus… I just want an excuse to ride Toothless again.” I sighed.

“Fine.” I relented. “I just hope you know what you’re doing.”

“I do.” Red replied. “Guys, stay here. I have no doubt you’ll be joining us sooner rather than later, so just… sit tight.”

“What do you want us to do, dude?” Green asked.

“I’ll be your guide.” Candy answered. “Just follow my lead.” She turned to me and Red. “Oh, and one more thing, Gold. You might need something, let me go get it.”

She bolted away with her speed, returning a short moment later with something in her hand.

“It’s Hiccup’s weapon in the movie.” She explained, handing me what looked like a sword hilt without the blade. “One half shoots out flammable gas, the other half is a fiery blade. You might need it in the future.”

“Thanks, Candy.” I replied, taking it. “Red, shall we fly?”

“I thought you’d never ask.” Red replied, putting on a diamond helmet. “Guys, follow Candy. She’s a great leader. We’ll see you soon.”

“Be safe, Reddy Bear.” Candy said. Red looked back at her, tears in his eyes.

“You too, Candy.”

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

It was evening when Red and I mounted Toothless and took off into the sky. Thoughts swirled in my mind, most of them anxieties and worries, but I had to block them out. If this goes well, then Dad would be OK, but even if not, Yellow seems to have something planned. I know he’s really smart, and Dad’s up there with him. No doubt they had a great plan to avoid the worst-case scenario… I hoped.

“You OK, Goldy?”

Red’s question snapped me out of my trance.

“You’ve been quiet, even though you’re riding your favorite dragon.”

“My mind is somewhere else, Red.” I answered. “I’m sure you can imagine.”

“Yeah, I get that.” Red sympathized. “But Yellow has a plan, and his ideas have rarely let us down before. I trust that he’ll come in clutch.”

“I hope so.” I replied before turning my attention to Toothless. “C’mon, bud. The sun’s setting. We gotta make this fast.”

Toothless sped up, higher into cloud level, when a strange figure rose up next to us, seemingly standing on nothing. It caught me very off-guard, but Red was a lot calmer.

“Gold, look!” He pointed. After collecting myself, I stared at the figure.

“Wha-?” I asked. “Who are you? What are you?”

At that moment, Red and I were snatched up by a couple of dragons, knocking Red’s helmet off his head. This left Toothless unmounted, and without either of us to guide him, he plummeted toward the icy sea below us.

“Toothless!” I cried out. “Let me go! I have to save him!”

“Calm down, Gold.” Red, who was behind me, said. “This is all part of the movie.”

A bit confused, I figured I had to just roll with it. There wasn’t much I could do anyways, since my arms stuck in the claws of a massive dragon. Red and I were taken away into a massive… I don’t know what to call it, a home or a nest, I guess. Either way, it was filled with dragons, and we were placed in the middle of them. They stared at us with wide, curious eyes and bared their teeth slightly. I had no doubt they were suspicious of us, but Red was quick to speak up.

“OK, Gold,” Red said quietly to me, “time to whip out that firestarter.”

“Got it.”

I ignited my blade, which caught all the dragons by surprise, and held it above and around me. The dragons seemed to calm down, and Red stepped out from behind me, his hand extended in front of him.

“Easy there, buddy, we’re friends.”

He put his hand on a dragon’s nose, calming it down, when the figure from earlier stepped out from the middle of the dragon horde. Red stepped back, I raised my weapon in self-defense.

“Who are you?” I demanded to know. “Where’s Toothless? What have you done to him?”

At that moment, someone else led Toothless out from the mass of dragons.

“Toothless!” Red exclaimed, hugging him. “Are you OK?”

Toothless nuzzled up against Red and me.

“It’ll be OK, buddy.” I insisted. “We’re not gonna let them hurt ya.”

Several torches were lit up, shining a brighter light around us and the dragons. I could better see the figure better as it drew closer to me…

“Gold?” The figure said. It sounded like a woman’s voice, soft and gentle, and when she took off her mask, it confirmed it. But to my shock, and even Red’s, which was impressive, she wasn't a character from the movie, but a stick, like me and Red. She was a bright shade of green, a highlighter green of sorts, with green eyes behind a pair of glasses. I gasped in disbelief.

“How is this possible?” She asked.

“Wait… I’ve seen your picture…” I began. “I recognize you.”

“And I you.” She replied. “Because a mother never forgets.”

Chapter 52: The Dragon Sanctuary

Gold

Red and I stood motionless, staring in shock at this new development. I felt my heart skip several beats as well. Was this real? Was this actually happening? My mom, who had passed away shortly after I was born, was in front of us, alive and well… and surrounded by dragons, no less. For a long moment, no one moved or said a word, not even the dragons made a sound, just watching with amazed expressions on their faces. The only things moving were the flickering flames on the torches illuminating the area, but after the initial shock wore off, I finally squeaked a word out.

“Mom?”

“Son…” She replied.

“I- I- I can’t believe it! Is this real? This can’t be real. I’m dreaming. Red, am I dreaming?

“If you’re dreaming, I’m having the same dream.” Reddy Bear answered.

“OK, this is real…” I realized. “MOM!” I ran up and threw my arms around her, tears pouring down my face, and she hugged me back. I could hear Red sniffle behind me. Knowing him, he was probably quietly weeping into Toothless’s side or, at the very least, hugging him tightly.

“Oh son…” She replied. “It’s so good to see you again. You’ve grown up so much.”

“It’s been, like, 17 years…” I recalled, releasing her. “Oh, Mom, this is Red, a dear friend of mine, and Toothless as well.” Red quickly dried his tear-stained eyes and cheeks.

“Nice to meet you… Uh… Mrs. Tango?” Red guessed, a bit unsure. “I don’t really know what to call you.”

“Neon Yellow, but please call me Neon.”

“OK, Neon,” Red said. “It’s nice to meet you.”

“You as well, Red.” Mom replied. “Now come with me, I have a lot to show you, and Gold… we have a lot to catch up on.”

“Ooooooh, Mom, I can’t wait! So much has happened!” I squealed.

Mom led me, Red, and Toothless through a maze of rocks, and I told her about almost everything. Almost. I made sure to leave out Dad’s worst moments, which is to say, his rampage against Minecraft after my removal from existence. But most everything else, from my childhood to my new adopted brother, I mentioned. I figured Mom would find out soon anyways, so I might as well tell her now, and she seemed pretty excited about hearing about Purple. But talking about my family brought something to Red’s mind.

“Hey Goldy, how do you think King will react to seeing Neon again?” Red asked.

“King?” Mom repeated.

“Dad, it’s what my friends call him.” I explained.

“Knowing him since his college days, that kinda makes sense.” Mom replied. “Hang on, we’re almost there.”

“Almost where?” I asked.

“Prepare yourself, Goldy, for one of the most majestic things ever.” Red said quietly to me.

Even more excited, I followed Mom into a massive expanse. Dragons were everywhere as far as the eye could see. It was like a massive sanctuary, housing countless species of dragons. I gazed at the entire thing, breathless, my heart skipping even more beats. I probably would’ve passed out if not for Red.

“You OK, Gold?” He asked, snapping me out of my trance.

“Have I died and gone to Heaven?” I gasped. Red chuckled.

“Afraid not, but this is the next best place.” Red answered. “So many dragons, they’re so cute! Oh my gosh I want to hug them all! They’re too cute not to hug!”

A dragon slowly flew over to him, allowing him to wrap his arms around it. I had to agree, it was kinda cute, but I was still in awe that Mom was here… in a dragon sanctuary.

“Mom, I… I cannot find the words.” I gasped. “I never would’ve imagined I’d see you, let alone in the midst of my favorite animal, ones I’ve dreamed of riding since I was a kid.”

“It seems you’re living out your wildest dreams.” Mom pointed out, walking over to Toothless. “Who’s this majestic Nightfury?”

“His name’s Toothless.” I explained. Mom examined him as he purred lightly. “Red and I found him in the woods injured and nursed him back to health. We’ve been friends ever since.”

“That’s sweet.” Mom gushed. “I too have helped dragons who were injured, thanks to Cloudjumper over here.” She gestured to her dragon. “He carried me here, allowing me to meet… the Alpha.”

“The Alpha?” I repeated.

“A Bewilderbeast.” Red explained. “The king of all dragons…”

At that moment, a massive white dragon rose from the canyon below us, looking at us with blue eyes that shone like the sky. As if this whole scene couldn’t get any more incredible, I was gazing upon a dragon that made skyscrapers look small by comparison. It took my breath away. Red joined me as well, also seemingly breathless.

“He built our nest with his icy breath.” Mom elaborated. On cue, he breathed a chilly breath onto us, showering us with tiny icy fragments.

“Brrr!” Red shivered. “Th- That cold is intense!”

“That means he likes you.” Mom said, chuckling.

“But… speaking of kings…” Red said to me. “Goldy, we’ve got to tell your dad about this! Imagine his reaction!”

“Oh my gosh I almost forgot our mission!” I gasped. “Oh no oh no oh no…”

“Don’t worry,” Red said soothingly. “I’m sure Candy and the others are hot on our trail.”

King

“Sounds like a plan, Yellow.” I confirmed, sighing deeply. “I just hope it works, because my life is in your hands.”

“If nothing else, we always have our fallback option.” Yellow replied, handing me an enchanted Netherite chestplate. “It’s equipped with Protection IV, but I still question whether it’s resistant enough to withstand a Nightfury’s blast.”

“Here’s hoping we won’t have to find out.” I said. Yellow nodded in agreement.

“Not a word of it to the others.” Yellow reminded me.

“It will be revealed in time.” I agreed.

Yellow and I had been discussing his plan to prevent… well, my death. After going over several ideas, we both agreed that Yellow’s idea made the most sense. Considering everything we heard from Red and Candy about our adversary, and what we know about our current resources, we found something that we hoped would work. We returned to the others, who were still waiting outside for us.

“You’re back.” Green said.

“Yeah, we had a lot to talk about.” I replied, scanning the scene. It didn’t take me long to realize someone was missing. “Where’s Goldy?”

“He and Red flew off to take care of things themselves.” Candy answered. “But knowing this movie, I’m guessing they got sidetracked.”

“‘Sidetracked?’” Yellow repeated. “What is implied by that word, Candy?” She smiled at us.

“Mount your dragons, boys.” She commanded. “It’s about time to reunite with them.”

I was all for that. I had to know what happened to Gold, because this wasn’t the first time he’s run off like this. ‘I have to find him.’ I thought to myself. ‘This kid’s gonna get himself killed with all the crazy stunts he pulls.’ I love Gold with every ounce in my body, but at times, he’s… a lot to deal with. So excitable, so outgoing… so adventurous… I love him for it, but it doesn’t do well for my heart.

As we mounted our dragons and took off into the air, Candy leading the way, SC, who was flying next to me with Green, spoke up.

“You OK, King?”

“Yeah, I just wish Gold wouldn’t go running off like that.” I confessed.

“I get that, Dad.” Purple, who was flying on my other side, admitted. “But he’s doing it for you.”

“Yeah, bro, Gold figured he could save you if he took that… Drago… dude down.” Green added.

“Not to mention he claims you raised him to stand up for what’s right.” Blue chimed in from the other head of his and Purple’s two-headed dragon.

“No doubt he’d find someone capturing and enslaving dragons as nothing short of barbaric.” SC said. “Especially considering how much he loves dragons.”

“And Drago’s using them to make an army.” Candy called from in front of us.

“Yeah, that would definitely qualify as ‘barbaric,’ or in simpler terms, simply evil.” Yellow agreed. I had to give it to them, that is how I raised Gold.

“I guess I can’t fault him for listening to me.” I chuckled. “I just wish my mind and heart were more at peace about his misadventures. When he runs off like this, it raises my blood pressure.”

“I totally understand.” SC sympathized. “Being the big brother and leader of the FSF, my life is never boring, to say the least. However, I can rest easy knowing that we all have each other’s backs, because we’re family. There’s nothing that we can’t overcome, because we will always have each other.”

SC’s words put me at ease, at least partially. However, it’s times like these when I start to wonder things about myself… specifically, my parenting ability. It’s always been hard raising Gold as a single father, and a part of me says that I should discipline him for stuff like this, but at least in this instance, he was doing what I raised him to do, and I should be cultivating that kind of action, not killing it. However, I can’t have him running off like this. That shouldn’t be condoned. I was decisively split about it… So I had to ask.

“Hey Purple… Can I ask you something?”

“Of course, Dad. What is it?”

“Am I a good father?”

Purple looked surprised at my question, but after the shock wore off, he answered.

“Dad, of course! You’re everything I could’ve asked for as a dad. You’ve made my life infinitely better and I am truly blessed to be called your son, a Tango, like you.” His words gave me hope.

“I appreciate that.” I replied, sighing.

“Why do you ask?” Purple asked. “You’re not questioning your parenting ability, are you?” I sighed deeply again and spilled the beans.

“Yes, Purple. I am.” I confessed. “Whenever Gold runs off like this, it just makes me wonder, brings negative thoughts into my head, and I don’t like being in that state. I want to protect Gold, I want to keep him safe, but it’s hard when he’s off flying into the sunset on Toothless or doing who-knows-what.” I felt tears fill my eyes. “I just want to fulfill my promise I made to my late wife, that being that I raise him to the best of my ability. Perhaps I hold myself to too high of a standard…”

“King, I’m sure if Goldy was flying with us, he would agree with Purple.” SC said comfortingly. “You’re the same person who was willing to destroy entire worlds to avenge him.”

“Don’t remind me…” I replied. SC snickered.

“Sorry, King.” He apologized. “Regardless, I’ve seen it, I’ve seen how much he loves you, and you love him. You’re clearly doing something right if you have such a strong relationship.”

“I can confirm, not every bond between a birth father and his birth son can be as strong and healthy as yours is with Goldy.” Purple attested. “No parent is perfect, but that’s OK. I know for me at least, you mean everything to me.”

“I’ve seen how much Purple and Gold love you, dude.” Green added. “And we all do as well. You’re a father figure to all of us, and while I can’t speak for my fam, I personally would be proud to be called a Tango.”

I smiled at Green, and back at my little Prince, and looked at the others around me. They all nodded in agreement.

“Tangos for eternity.” Yellow confirmed, giving me a kind and gentle smile. Seeing the others around me put me at ease a bit more. Though the doubts lingered, they weren’t as strong as they were.

“Speaking of which…” Candy began, “we might be seeing Gold sooner than later.”

“What do you mean?” I asked.

“Down below!” Green exclaimed. “It’s a diamond helmet!”

“One Red was wearing when he took off.” Blue added. We all descended, I scooped up the helmet with a free hand.

“Can Skullcrusher track the scent?” I asked Candy.

“Give it a shot.” She answered cheekily. I followed her advice.

“Find him, big guy.” I said to Skullcrusher, the dragon I was riding. He sniffed it, evidently finding the scent, and took off, even passing Candy and her dragon, into the distance as I held on tighter.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

With Skullcrusher following Red’s scent, he guided us to a massive ice structure made of gigantic jagged shards of ice. It was massive, spiky, and icy. Even as we drew nearer, I could feel the cold intensify on my face and arms, though that might’ve been the temperature drop from the setting sun and the fact we were in a very cold part of the world.

“Is he in there, Skullcrusher?” I asked. Skullcrusher growled, which I assumed meant, “yes.”

“He certainly is, King.” Candy confirmed.

“How do we get inside?” SC asked.

“There should be some opening around here somewhere…” Candy theorized. “Fan out, boys, search high and low. We’re gonna need shelter from the cold.”

“Ah yes, let’s hide from the cold inside a spiky igloo… made of ice.” Green quipped.

“Just do it, Green.” Purple ordered. “My brother’s in there, too, ya know.”

We all spread out, flying around the massive structure until Yellow with his keen eyesight spotted a gap in the structure big enough for our dragons to get through. We all assembled around him, got off our dragons and wound through a maze of ice, looking for any trace of either Red or Gold. We followed the dragons, reasoning that their sharp sense of smell would be able to find them. I was in the back, in case anything tried sneaking up from behind.

But sure enough, we were right. The dragons led us straight to them.

“Guys, look!” Blue, who was near the front, exclaimed.

“Blue?” I heard Red’s voice ask from in front of us. “Guys!”

“Reddy Bear!” Candy bolted past us. “Gold! And… Who’s this?”

“You two made a-” SC began before cutting himself off. “Oh… my… word…”

“What? What happened?” I asked.

“King… You’re gonna want to see this…” SC gasped.

When I finally caught up with everyone, the first thing I saw took my breath away. It wasn’t my son, it wasn’t Red, it wasn’t the multitude of dragons around us. No… it was none other than my wife… Neon Yellow.

Chapter 53: Tango Family Reunion (King)

I stood there frozen in disbelief. There was no way this was real, right? This had to be just a simulation… right? This was a simulation… right? I was there, right next to Neon, when she passed, when her heart monitor flatlined. And yet somehow… She was here, standing in front of us. I rubbed my eyes, thinking I was seeing things, but nothing changed. There was no way. I think my heart stopped for a few seconds, I know I couldn’t even breathe, I was so shocked. The only thing that snapped me back into reality was her voice.

“Mango?”

I snapped out of my trance, my heart resuming its rhythmic beating.

“N- Neon?” I stammered. “I- Is this real?”

“It’s real, Dad.” I heard Gold squeak.

“H- How? How is this possible?” I gasped, walking toward her. She stepped toward me, and we held each other’s hands. It felt so real, it had to have been real.

“Neon? Is it really you?”

“It is, King of the Tango.” I gasped again. She used a nickname of mine I had during my college days, which is where we first met. It had to have been true, it had to be, and to confirm with myself, I hugged her. She was no mirage, no hallucination, nothing of the sort. She was really with me.

“Neon!” I cried, tears of joy flowing like a river. “I never thought this day would come!”

“Mango Tango…” She cried as well. “I never thought it would, either, but I’m so glad to see you.”

“I can’t believe it…” I wept. “The Tango family is whole once again!” I released her. “Goldy, Purple, get in here!”

“Dad…” Purple said tearfully, “I’d love to.”

The four members of my clan, the Tango clan, joined in a group hug, the warmest and sweetest hug I’ve been in. I could sense the kids watching, even the dragons around us seemed to stop to witness a glorious family reunion. When we finally separated, I could see Candy soothing a bawling Red, Blue and Yellow wiping away tears, Green softly humming and SC smiling sweetly at us.

“Oh, Neon, we added one more to our family.” I proclaimed excitedly. “Meet Purple, our adopted son.” Neon looked at my little Prince, smiling sweetly.

“Another beloved son.” She said, “Our family has grown.”

“Very much so.” I agreed. “And meet our friends, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Candy, and SC.”

“It’s nice to meet you.” SC said.

“You as well, kids.” Neon replied. “Mango, we have so much to catch up on.”

“We do, we truly do…” I agreed blissfully. “Kids, you all should get some rest. No doubt you guys are tired from flying here and whatnot.”

“What do you guys think?” SC asked.

“We have threats looming over us, like Drago and his legion.” Yellow warned. “We should be in the most superior states possible.”

“How much longer do we have, Red?” Blue asked. Red dried his eyes and face, collected himself as best he could, and answered.

“I can’t imagine too much longer.” He reasoned. “This island is where the battle takes place.”

“In that case, then I’m gonna prepare, bro!” Green proclaimed. “We need to be PEAK for what’s to come.”

“I need a short rest.” SC admitted. “Yellow, wake me after a half-hour. I need a power nap.”

“Affirmative, SC.” Yellow promised, pausing for a second. “Hmm… Perhaps I can see our adversaries on the horizon and better gauge how much time we possess. I have a telescope. I’ll investigate, and I shall return promptly.”

He put his wings on and took off upwards, following the dragons into the air. SC pulled out a bed and flopped onto it, falling asleep instantly, and the others began preparing with a round of sparring between them in a different room. We Tangos remained behind, with each other and the dragons.

“I… I can’t believe it…” Purple gasped. “I have a mother figure again… I haven’t had one since my birth mom passed.”

“You have a mom, Purple.” Neon confirmed. Knowing her love of kids, I knew she would accept Purple with open arms. “How did you meet Mango?”

“It’s a looooong story…” Purple sighed. “But, to put it simply, sometimes brokenness brings people together. I lost both my parents, my birth dad walked out on us and my mom… Well, I already said that. Dad became the parent, the father I needed.”

“Purple here became a beloved brother.” Gold added.

“And our family has only gotten stronger.” I finished. “I just wish you were here to see it blossom.”

“Better late than never, I guess.” Neon shrugged. “Besides, I get to see it alongside these beautiful dragons!”

Toothless sauntered over and nuzzled all four of us. Gold hugged him back and gave him some soft pets, and the rest of us joined him. This still felt surreal, I was with my wife and sons petting a dragon in a massive icy cavern, but I wasn’t about to question it. I was gonna savor it for as much time as I could.

Shortly after, Yellow returned, floating down with his wings.

“Yellow, you’re back.” I greeted him.

“Greetings, Tangos. I have returned with warnings.” He began. “Where are the others? They all should be present for this.”

“We’ll get them. You wake up SC.” I said. Yellow nodded and we gathered up the kids, who were still sparring. Yellow dragged a slightly sleepy SC behind him, not literally of course, and we all gathered together to hear Yellow’s news.

“We’re all here, buddy.” Blue said. “What’s the news?”

“I located flickering sparks of torches upon the horizon.” Yellow answered. “I can only presume they belong to Drago’s fleet.”

“They probably do.” Candy confirmed.

“I investigated wind speed and the ocean current, and I can confirm, the enemy fleet will arrive at our shore in the morning. We currently possess a few hours to prepare.” Yellow gave Green a smirk. “And you always mocked me for my extensive meteorology research, El Verde. Now, it’s proving vital in this current time.”

“Bro, now’s not the time…” Green muttered. Yellow snickered.

“Why don’t we just attack them now while we have the night advantage?” Purple suggested.

“They have traps and nets.” Red warned. “If our dragons go down, tied up in a net in the ocean, there will be no saving them.”

“And even if there was, having to rescue them would leave all of us vulnerable.” Candy considered. “At least on land, we don’t have to risk our dragons drowning.”

“I’m not doing that either.” Gold said determinedly. “I don’t want to lose anyone, be it dragon or stick alike.”

“Our best course of action is to hone our skills,” SC insisted. “Get the necessary rest, sharpen our craft, and take flight. We’ve got dragons, we’ve got skills, we’ve got each other. There’s nothing we can’t overcome, right guys? Now… let’s do this. For our family!”

“For our family!” The kids proclaimed in unison, taking off to practice their sparring with each other. My kids joined them, leaving me with Neon.

“You’ve found some great friends, Mango.”

“I can’t imagine my life without them.” I confessed. “They’ve been a big help to our family when we needed it most.”

“I’m happy to hear that, they seem to really love each other.”

“We’re a tight-knit group, a true family.” I agreed. “But… No one can replace you, my sweetheart.”

Neon smiled at me, and I smiled back, gazing deeply into her forest green eyes. I almost forgot how beautiful they are, and while seeing them in pictures is lovely, it’s not the same as seeing them again in person. And, even better, I could see them with the kids, my beloved family. I just hoped I would continue to see them once this morning’s battle ended.

Chapter 54: The Final Checkmate...? (Third Person)

The night wore on, and the sticks practiced relentlessly, the stakes constantly in their mind. They had to push back, they had to win this fight, else they might be losing more than the battle, they might be losing a dear friend and, in Gold’s and Purple’s cases, a beloved father. As for that father, King also joined in their practice sessions, proving quite the challenge for even the most skilled of them, SC, Red, and Green. Neon beamed with pride, seeing her family so good at this shared skill. Red even showed Gold a secret about Toothless: A special spot to press that made a line of fins pop up down Toothless’s back and tail, making the dragon bounce around excitedly. Eventually, their time expired and the dawn of a new day soon broke upon them.

“Everyone, assemble!” Yellow called. Everyone gathered around him. “If my calculations are correct, our adversary is reaching the shoreline as we speak. Now is our time to attack, before their army is fully mobilized.”

“They won’t know what hit them.” Red said, pounding his fist into his palm. “They’ll pay for threatening my family.”

“Our family, Reddy Bear.” Gold agreed. “Dad, I refuse to let anything happen to you.”

“Nor I you, kiddo.” King vowed. “Please, stay safe.”

“We have no more time to waste.” SC warned. “Mount your dragons, let's show these hunters what the Rainbow Squad can do!”

They all nodded in agreement and mounted their dragons, taking off into the air. When they left the icy cave, they saw an army flowing from the boats, still setting up traps and mounting net-shooting crossbows. With the army unprepared, Toothless and his dragon friends launched a wave of fireballs and flammable gases.

War had begun.

The trappers, after the initial volley from the sticks, quickly recovered and began fighting back, but leading them was none other than the infamous Drago Bludvist.

“CUT THEM DOWN!” He thundered. As the tide started to turn in the hunters’ favor, the Bewilderbeast–the Alpha species Red and Gold met earlier–emerged from his icy home, blowing a wave of ice upon Drago’s men.

“The Alpha!” Drago exclaimed. “Now we have a fight!”

“The Alpha!” Gold gasped from Toothless’s back. “Awesome!”

Everyone saw the Alpha entering the fray, and that included King. Seeing the Alpha gave him a burst of confidence, but even more so, his desire to protect his family urged him to do something. He lowered on Skullcrusher, dismounting his dragon in front of Drago himself. Being the former ruler of a massive army, he knew a tyrant when he saw one.

“We got this massive beast.” King seethed, his sword drawn. “Now… stay away from my family!”

“I brought a challenger.” Drago said calmly, screaming loudly and waving his bullhook in a circle. Emerging from the ocean was his own Bewilderbeast, this one a deep gray, catching everyone off-guard, except for the two reds.

“How are we gonna take that dude down?” Green–still riding Hookfang with SC–asked, shocked.

“My biggest worry is the Tango clan.” SC replied. “I just hope our big boy can handle him.”

Down below, King and Drago got into a heated fight, diamond sword clashing against bullhook so hard it sent sparks flying, but even despite King’s skills, he was overpowered. Drago knocked the sword from King’s hands and backed him into a corner, until Neon swooped in and rescued him. King looked up at his wife.

“Thanks, Neon.”

“No one messes with my hubby.”

As the battle wore on, the tide turned for the worse when Drago’s Bewilderbeast won the battle and drove its tusks into the sticks’ Bewilderbeast, swiftly and mercilessly killing it for everyone to see. Gold gasped in horror, Red looked on in sorrow, and Candy did as well from the back of Stormfly. Drago’s beast roared in triumph and then spewed its own icy wave at the sticks, nearly freezing the Tango parents in the process. Gold saw this… and refused to stand by.

“Red, I’m descending.” He said. “Toothless, let’s go.”

Red had to agree, at least partially. He was hoping to get Gold and himself out of there before things got bad, but he too wasn’t going to let someone attack his family. Toothless flew down in front of Drago, Gold and Red dismounted, Red drawing his sword in the process.

“Stay away from my parents!” Gold ordered, his fists raised in defense.

“This… is the great dragon master?” Drago mocked. “The son of Mango Tango? What shame he must feel.”

“Oh that is not gonna fly.” Red threatened. “Back off before you regret it, before I show you the true power of dragons.”

“NO!” Drago shouted. “Let ME show YOU.” He summoned the Alpha once again. “No dragon can resist the Alpha’s command. So he who controls the Alpha controls them all.”

“Oh no…” Red gasped. “Gold, we’ve gotta move!”

The pupils of Drago’s Bewilderbeast narrowed into slits like a cat’s, and he growled deeply. Toothless began scratching at his head, as if in pain or trying to fight with something. Gold saw him and tried intervening.

“Toothless… Wh- What’s going on?” He asked. “Buddy, snap out of it!”

It wasn’t just him. Most of the other dragons, including the ones being ridden on by the sticks, started behaving strangely. Neon and King quickly noticed, and King knew what was happening. He freed himself and sprinted, downright bolted, toward his son. He knew the risks, but his fatherly instincts took over and overrode everything else his mind was telling him.

‘Alright, Yellow…’ He thought, ‘I hope you’re ready.’

As for Yellow, he too knew what was happening. He leapt off his dragon to the ground, Blue, Purple, and Candy right with him.

“What’s going on?” Purple asked. “Our dragon has been behaving strangely.”

“We can’t seem to control its actions!” Blue gasped.

“Recall what Red warned us about.” Yellow explained. “It’s happening…”

“The Alpha’s control…” Candy feared. “Yellow, let me get there! I can save them with my speed!”

“Can you fight off the legions of soldiers between us to get to him?” Yellow asked. Candy paused, knowing that even for her, that would be a tough task. “I have a plot to save King, he knows it, I know it. Keep these villains off my back, I need a clear view for this to work… assuming you trust that I can do this.”

“Of course, buddy. We’ll follow your lead.” Blue promised, whipping out a bow and a quiver of arrows. Purple pulled a sword out, and Candy, while skeptical, reluctantly agreed. As for Yellow… He grabbed his secret weapon.

“Analytical skills, don’t fail me now.” He said to himself, placing a block on the ground.

As for the other dragons, they slowly succumbed to the Alpha’s control, including Gold’s beloved Toothless. Gold’s fear started to spike again, and Red too couldn’t bear to watch. Mounting whatever courage he could, he tried fighting the evil warlord, only for Drago to deliver a swift swipe with his bullhook, knocking him out cold.

“Witness true strength.” Drago began. “The strength of will over others. In the face of it, you are nothing!”

Despite Toothless’s best efforts, he couldn’t overpower the Alpha, and his pupils too went from large and cute to thin and terrifying, like an angry cat. Drago pointed his hook at Gold, and Toothless obeyed, stepping toward him like a cat stalking a mouse.

“Wh- What is going on?” Gold asked shakily. “Toothless?” He backed up away from his dragon, his fear rising and his heart rate spiking. “Buddy, c’mon! Snap out of it!” The poor stick was paralyzed with fear, unable to react or do anything as Toothless powered up his blast, until he heard…

“Son!”

“Dad, NO!”

At the last possible moment, King pushed Gold out of the way, quickly putting his armor on, but couldn’t escape the blast himself. One powerful explosion and a cloud of smoke later, King was lying motionless on the ground.

Chapter 55: Yellow's Scheme (Gold)

I didn’t know what happened at first, it all happened so quickly I couldn’t even comprehend it. All I know is I saw my dad’s shade of orange charging at me at full speed, a bright purple explosion and a cloud of smoke. I hacked and wheezed, the smoke blinding and partially choking me, but when it cleared, I saw him.

Dad.

Lying on the ground.

“DAD!”

I knelt over him. Was he even breathing? There was no way this was happening… all because of me…

“No… No no no no no, this can’t be happening…” I cried. “Dad…”

“Mango…”

I looked up and saw Mom running up to me. Behind her, I caught a glimpse of Toothless being dragged, restrained and ridden off by Drago, but at that point, I didn’t care. I was too shattered to care. My actions did this… My aggression, my recklessness…

I could do nothing else but bawl my eyes out. Through tear-stained eyes, I could see Blue and Purple, bubbles emanating from them, and Candy with them.

“Dad?” Purple gasped. “DAD!” He dropped to his knees in front of dad, pressing an ear to his chest. “I’m not sure if I can hear his heart, this chestplate is in the way.”

“Check for a pulse.” Candy suggested, worried.

“Where’s Yellow?” Blue asked. “He can do that better than I can.”

SC and Green were the next to arrive, and both of them gasped upon seeing the scene.

“King…” SC gasped. “Oh no… No no no… I- I failed my family…”

“We failed, SC.” Green said solemnly. “It’s not your fault.”

Red then woke up from his clash with Drago, a bit woozy, but collected enough to see what was happening.

“King?” He gasped, running up to us, tears filling his eyes. “KING! Oh my gosh oh my gosh oh my gosh no no no no no… This cannot be happening.”

“Papa…” I started slowly. “I did this. I’m sorry… I never should’ve done this, I- I-” I stammered, unable to find the words, other than, “I love you,” which I squeaked out with whatever voice I could muster.

“I love you, Dad.” Purple said quietly.

“We love you… Dad…” The Gang said in unison, all of them in tears and kneeling around him. It was at this point that Yellow ran up.

“King!” He gasped, running up to him. He quickly checked Dad’s wrist, sitting there for a few moments before rising, sighing the deepest, heaviest sigh I’ve ever heard.

“He’s alive…” Yellow said quietly. “Thank goodness. My plan worked. You may cease the charade, Majesty.”

“Wait, what?” I gasped. “Th- There’s no way.”

“It’ll take more than a dragon’s blast to keep us apart.” Said a voice I never would’ve expected. We all looked at Dad, and he was sitting upright without a scratch on him.

“Dad?” I gasped, unable to believe it.

“Come here, kiddo.” He said gently. I didn’t need to hear any more, I threw my arms around him, and Purple and Mom were quick to follow. We all exchanged hugs and kisses, tears flowing down all of our faces. Once we finally released and got to our feet, we all looked at Yellow.

“Your plan worked, Yellow, very impressive.” Dad added.

“Much appreciated, Majesty.” Yellow replied humbly.

“B- B- But how? What were you planning?” Purple stammered. “I couldn’t even see or hear you breathe!”

“The chestplate kinda does that.” Dad joked. “I also inhaled as little as possible.” As for Yellow, he simply took a few steps to his left.

“First of all, I want to apologize for doing that to you all. I required it to be believable so that Drago would believe he delivered a fatal blow and leave, and I reasoned that if you all believed it, Drago would as well, but in the aftermath… I realize it was cruel at best.” Yellow sighed. “Second, as for answering your question, Purple…” He pulled out something from his back.

“Is that…?” SC asked.

“A Command block, yes.” Yellow answered, hitting seemingly nothing in the air. Instantly, floating “NO” symbols appeared in the air. “Before Toothless’s blast, I placed this and summoned Barrier blocks to obstruct the projectile’s path. Nothing can penetrate a Barrier block, not even a dragon’s fiery blast.”

“Yellow… You saved my dad’s life.” I squeaked. “Thank you.”

“Thank you, Yellow.” Dad confirmed. “I don’t think neither me nor Gold would’ve survived that blast.”

“I would perform any task for my family, Tango clan.” Yellow confirmed. “I’m more relieved than anything, I will admit.”

“Yellow, bestie, you never cease to amaze me.” Blue praised.

“Dude, you are GOATED with that block!” Green exclaimed. “Just… don’t do something like that again.”

“Yes, I don’t think my heart could take it.” Red agreed.

“No more fake deaths, especially since I can’t rely on my powers…” SC agreed.

“I wholeheartedly agree, and I deeply apologize again for putting you all through that fear.” Yellow said. “Perhaps I should’ve informed you all ahead of time…”

“No no no, Yellow, this is on me.” Dad interrupted. “I agreed to this and to keep it under wraps. I should’ve said something, I should’ve spoken up…” He paused for a moment “Neon, kiddos, my dear friends, I apologize for what I pulled, and what I did to you.” He sighed deeply. “What kind of person am I?”

“Dad, Dad, it’s OK…” Purple insisted. “I promise you, it’s OK.”

“We forgive you, Dad.” I added. “I know you only did it to protect us, as you always do.”

“We love you, we truly do, and nothing will ever change that.” Purple added.

“I love you more than Purple does.” I joked tearfully. Dad chuckled.

“Thanks, kiddos.” Dad wrapped us in his arms. “Neon?”

“Oh course I forgive you.” Mom replied. “That college-aged party animal is still alive and well.”

Dad chuckled, and all four of us Tangos embraced. We were soon joined by the others, the Gang, who embraced all of us in a warm, tear-filled hug.

“I’m so, so sorry, everyone…” Dad cried.

“Apology accepted, King.” SC said. “Trust us, we’ve forgiven you for a lot worse.”

The Gang laughed, cracking, tearful laughs, but still laughed nonetheless. It lifted all of us, and we all took a few minutes to collect ourselves, to breathe. It was probably one of the most traumatizing experiences of my life, definitely in the top 3 at minimum. Maybe Dad was right, we’re gonna need therapy after this. I know I could use some.

It still weighed heavy in my heart to think that I was responsible for all of this, at least partially. I could’ve lost Dad… permanently… if not for Yellow. I’m thankful he did what he did, but I’m gonna need… something after this. Sadly… that was not to be until we escaped. All we had was each other…

“Is everyone OK?” SC asked after a long, long pause.

“I’ve been far better…” I admitted, “but Dad’s alive… That’s all that matters.”

“You’re alive too, kiddo.” Dad added. “That is what’s important to me.”

“If my story is any indication… it’s that scars, both emotional and physical, can heal.” Purple added.

“Your story?” Mom asked.

“My birth dad abused me and mom, physically, verbally, emotionally… and in every other fancy way, Red.” Purple answered.

“Took the words out of my mouth.” Red said, snickering.

“We need to unwind, but sadly, we don’t have the time.” SC confessed.

“Exactly. Our adversary is still out there.” Yellow warned.

“Let’s just… put that whole thing behind us, bros.” Green insisted, sighing.

“Yes, just the thought of it makes me feel queasy.” Blue admitted. “And it takes a LOT to give me an upset stomach.”

“Agreed.” Candy confirmed. “Drago’s still out there… and he’s going for our dragons.”

“We’ve got to get back to Berk!” I exclaimed. “He’s got Toothless…”

“Even after what he did, you’re still defending him.” SC observed.

“I love him… I do… and Dad has shown endless love to me even after all the… stuff I did in my youth.”

“Do I have stories to tell, Neon.” Dad chuckled.

“I see he got your energetic lifestyle.” Mom laughed.

“And your heart.” Dad replied, smiling.

“We need to get back ASAP!” Red exclaimed, somewhat panicked. “If he does anything to those dragons…”

“Are we all ready for this?” SC asked, concerned. “We’re all gonna need to be on our A-game, physically and mentally.”

“We’re as ready as we can be.” Dad confirmed. “Right, kids?”

We all nodded in agreement, rising to our feet. We grabbed our elytra wings and put them on. Yellow put his Command Block back down, spawned wings for both Mom and Candy, gave himself a replacement Command Block and deleted the one he placed. After a quick tutorial about flying, all of us flew into the air, one last confrontation with Drago ahead of us.

Chapter 56: A Fiery Friendship (Gold)

We flew back to Berk as quickly as we could. We had already lost a lot of time, practically all of our dragons, and Drago was still out there, aiming for all the dragons we had back home. No, this could not happen. None of us would allow it, especially Red. I figured his heart was breaking at the thought of losing all the dragons to Drago, I know mine was. I had to get Toothless back. He’s so cool, and he’s… kinda cute, I’ll admit.

“Is everyone doing OK?” SC asked from in front of us.

“We’re good, SC.” Dad answered.

“As good as we can be, dude.” Green added.

“My mind is set on completing our mission and stopping our opponent.” Yellow piped up.

“That’s good to hear.” SC replied.

“We got to get Toothless back.” Red said, determined.

“Even after all he did?” Blue asked.

“It wasn’t his fault!” Red argued. “Good dragons under the control of bad people…”

“I know that feeling well.” Purple sighed. “I lived under Navy’s shadow for years. All the horrible things I did was to please him, to prove myself worthy of him. I refuse to let anyone else walk the path I walked, not if I can help prevent it.”

“We’re all with you, baby bro.” I agreed.

“Family sticks together.” Mom added. “Anyone who doesn’t isn’t true family.”

“And this one is one of the truest.” Candy said. “Thanks again, Red, for welcoming me into it.”

“You’re one of us, Candy.” Red replied. “One of the boys.” He snickered.

“Ohhhhh no, Reddy Bear. I’m one of the girls.” Candy playfully shot back. Red just snickered some more.

“So, what’s the plan for when we get there?” SC asked.

“Get Toothless back,” Red began.

“And kick Drago’s butt!” Candy finished.

We all agreed to that. After a fairly long flight, dragons are so much faster than elytra, we approached the island of Berk. In the distance, we noticed the unmistakable shape of Drago’s Bewilderbeast, towering over the island. Yellow also spotted jagged shards of ice covering the island, proving that Drago had not only gotten there first, but was also attacking the inhabitants, the Vikings, of the island.

“Alright, Gold, it’s up to us.” Red said to me. “We gotta get through to Toothless.”

“We got this.” I replied as confidently as I could. In all seriousness, I wasn’t sure if we could, but I had to save face.

“Boys… and Neon…” Candy began, “try to distract the Alpha. We need it to weaken its control over Toothless as much as possible. Fly around it like bugs, throw sheep at it, anything you can think of. We gotta give Red and Gold a window of opportunity.”

“On it, Candy!” SC exclaimed. “Guys, be careful! That icy breath is no joke! Watch each other’s backs, and fight as one!”

They split up, using their talents in their own ways to try to break the Bewilderbeast. Green and Purple sang some intentionally sour notes, Yellow and Blue sent volleys of TNT and arrows, SC and my parents threw sheep around with a launcher and Candy zipped around from below with her speed. Even our combined efforts didn’t do much, but I think they did something. Red and I flew in front of Drago, who was still riding a hypnotized Toothless.

“You sure are hard to get rid of, I’ll say that.” Drago seethed.

“We certainly don’t die easily.” Red replied tersely.

“Toothless, I know you’re in there.” I said to him, my hand extended. “Snap out of it, buddy. Fight it! Fight back!”

It seemed to get through to him, at least a little bit, as I could see his pupils momentarily return to their rounded rectangular self, but only for a fleeting moment, as they quickly returned to narrow slits like a hunting cat’s.

“He is not yours anymore.” Drago mocked. “He belongs to the Alpha! But, please, oh great Dragon Master, try to take him. He will not miss a second time.”

“Red, I need your help!” I cried out. “You are the real dragon master.”

“We fight as one.” Red said, joining me and extending his hand as well. “It wasn't your fault, bud. They made you do it. You’d never hurt him. You’d never hurt anyone!”

The passion in his soft voice was evident as we put our hands on Toothless's snout. His eyes widened and narrowed as he mentally struggled against the Bewilderbeast. It was working, at least for a moment. Toothless was fighting back.

“How are you doing that?” Drago asked.

“The strongest bonds can never be broken.” Red answered. “My family is living proof of that.”

“I love you, buddy.” I said to Toothless. “I’m your friend, your best friend…”

I could see Toothless smile, his wide eyes returning, only for Drago to rudely interrupt.

“Enough!” He thundered, hitting Toothless with his hook, only for Toothless to grab it with his teeth and yank him off. However, with no rider, Toothless began falling again, but Red and I were quick to reach him, mount him, and stabilize him.

“We’ve got to get them apart!” Red exclaimed as I swerved out of the path of an icy blast. “Goldy, use this.” He handed me a yellow blindfold.

“OK, Toothless, let’s take him down!” I shouted. “Trust me, bud. We’re fighting as one.”

I put the blindfold over Toothless’s eyes and flew around and above. I could hear my family cheering for me from all sides and covered Toothless’s ears. All the while Drago refused to go down easily.

“STOP THEM!” He roared.

“Now, Goldy!” Red exclaimed.

I locked Toothless’s tail and Red and I leapt off of him, flying with our wings. I swooped by with the gas-fire weapon and blew a cloud of green, flammable gas past Drago, completely covering him. Red then whipped out a flint and steel and sparked it, igniting the gas like a fuse on a stick of dynamite, which exploded on Drago, knocking him back, albeit still on the Alpha, but he lost the grip on his hook.

When we flew back to Toothless, now without his blindfold which flew off because of Toothless’s speed, only to see the Bewilderbeast’s tail in our flight path.

“We can’t repeat the Red Death!” I thundered. “Alright, buddy, let’s see what those new tail fins can do!”

With all my might, I pulled up as hard as I could. Toothless, thanks to his tail fins, turned almost straight up and away from the massive beast’s tail. I held on to Toothless as tightly as I could, and Red gripped me as if this was the last time we would be together. We had managed to avoid its tail, just barely.

“You did it, Goldy!” Red congratulated me. It was… awesome. Genuinely awesome. But despite my euphoria, one fact remained.

“It’s not over yet.”

We descended, landing on the ground in front of Drago, who was also on the ground. Red grabbed his sword and threw it in front of us, stopping Drago from grabbing his hook.

“It’s over.” Red said angrily, the two of us standing between Drago and his weapon.

“Or is it?” Drago replied. The Alpha loomed over us, glaring at us angrily before breathing a wave of ice over us.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

“Gold…”

“My Golden Boy…”

“Reddy Bear! Say something! Please…”

I didn’t know fully what happened, but I did hear my parents. Mom and Dad, their muffled voices, were outside this massive shard of ice, along with Candy, begging for Red to be OK. But if I could hear them, then… I was alive. I wasn’t frozen. No, Toothless had swooped in at the last moment and shielded both me and Red. He too was alive, and unfrozen as well. We were simply in an icy cage of sorts.

“A- A- Are you OK, G- G- Gold?” Red asked, shivering violently.

“I’m alive.” I answered. At that moment, I saw Toothless. He was screeching loudly, his tail fins shining a vivid blue. Suddenly, the ice surrounding us shattered into a million pieces, blown up by a thunderous blast from Toothless. After freeing the three of us, he leapt up onto a vantage and roared at the Alpha. He glanced at me.

“He’s challenging the Alpha…” Red gasped.

“To protect you, Gold.” Candy added.

Toothless shot powerful blasts at the Alpha, who tried to fight back, but the Nightfury dodged its powerful strikes. However, with Toothless relentlessly attacking it, the Alpha lost its control over the other dragons. One by one, Drago’s dragon army was depleted, much to the warlord’s frustration.

“No, no, no, no! No! Fight back! Fight!” Drago thundered, grabbing his weapon and running back onto his Alpha. “FIGHT! What's the matter with you?”

Nothing he did worked, and his army defected to ours. I put my wings back on and flew higher into the air, making sure to avoid the dragons’ shots.

“This is what it is to earn a dragon’s loyalty!” I shouted. “End this, or we’ll end it for you.”

“NEVER!” Drago insisted.

“Alright, then.” I shrugged. “Toothless, show them why you’re the real Alpha! Show them how AWESOME YOU ARE!”

Toothless and the other dragons sent a massive bombardment of blasts to the Alpha, one blast from Toothless being so powerful it broke one of its tusks. Upon breaking that tusk, Toothless let out one last powerful roar. Red then joined me in the air.

“The Alpha protects them all.” Red proclaimed.

Under an unending barrage of firepower, Drago’s Bewilderbeast retreated into the ocean… with Drago still on him. After a long pause, we all celebrated. He was gone. Toothless then descended to the ground, the other dragons followed suit and bowed to him, showing reverence to their new Alpha. He roared a powerful roar of victory, and the other dragons did the same. The guys ran up to their respective dragons and embraced them, and Red and I walked up to Toothless.

“Thanks, Toothless.” I said, choking back tears. “I love ya, buddy.”

Toothless licked us both like an excited puppy, provoking more giggles from Red.

“Ha ha ha! Hey, stop it, Toothless! Ha ha! You’re tickling me!” He squealed.

“Hey, ewww! Stop with the slobber, buddy!” I insisted, laughing as well. When he finally stopped, he glanced at something or someone behind us. We turned to see my family, the Squad.

“Goldy!” Purple exclaimed, running up to us. Mom and Dad were right behind him, and all four of us Tangos wrapped each other in a slimy, sticky, slobbery hug. We didn’t seem to care, though. We were just glad that we had done it. We had stopped Drago, and we all survived it.

“You did it, son!” Mom proclaimed. “I love you so, so much.”

“I’m so proud of you, Goldy.” Dad added. “I love you, kiddo.”

“Thanks, Mom. Dad. I love you both, too.” I cried.

“My brother, a dragon tamer!” Purple exclaimed. “You’re incredible, Golden Oldie!”

“Thanks, Baby Bro.” I joked back. When we released, I could see the rest of the Squad tossing Red into the air like a cheerleader.

“Reddy Bear! Reddy Bear! Reddy Bear!” They chanted, setting him down on his feet.

“We did it, guys!” SC proclaimed. “Awesome work, everyone!”

“We couldn’t have done it without Yellow’s quick thinking.” Blue complimented.

“True Blue, we all obtained a role in the warlord’s defeat.” Yellow insisted.

“But we couldn’t have done it without the dude’s love for animals.” Green complimented.

“Thanks, guys… It means a lot.” Red said shyly. “I love you guys.”

“We love you too, Reddy Bear.” SC replied.

“Hey Red… Did I hear correctly… That you’re ticklish?” Candy teased. Red turned a shade of pink.

“No! I’m not!” He insisted defensively.

“OK then…” Candy said smartly. “So you wouldn’t mind if I poked you in your tummy…” She poked Red in the stomach. He squeaked in a high-pitched voice, even higher than usual.

“Don’t do that, Candy!” Red giggled. Candy smirked at him.

“The big, tough Bear’s got a ticklish underbelly.” She teased.

“Try that again, I dare you.” Red threatened playfully. “Do it and I’ll sic Toothless on you.”

“I’m not scared. He wouldn’t harm anyone and you know it.” Candy began, grinning evilly. “Hey boys, how about we all try it?”

“Don’t you dare!” Red threatened, backing away from her. “I will fight you all if I have to.”

“Don’t worry, Reddy Bear, it won’t tickle… too much.” Candy snickered. “Hold him down, boys. I want to hear him giggle again. You said it yourself, SC, after all. We need to unwind.”

“That’s one way of doing it, I suppose.” SC shrugged as he and the FSF began surrounding a terrified-looking Red. We Tangos watched as everyone else ganged up on him, and despite Red’s best efforts to fight back, the Gang had strength in numbers. They held him down, Candy attacked with relentless tickling to his stomach, and Red laughed uncontrollably.

“I’ll get you for this, Candy!” Red gasped between his laughs. “All of you!”

“We’ll be ready for it, ya big furry.” Candy teased, still tickling him. “But don’t worry, I’ll make it… fast.” Using her enhanced speed, she tickled him faster, and Red laughed even harder. I couldn’t help but laugh too as I watched.

“You’ve got great people in your life, Mango.” Mom said.

“I’m blessed to know them,” Dad replied, “even more to have met you, Neon.”

“Awww!” Purple gushed. “The Tango family is whole once again.”

“Wait… Dad, the movie’s almost over.” I pointed out. “Mom… can you come with us?”

“Sadly, I cannot…” Mom sighed. “Someone has to watch over these dragons, but I will always be with you, in your hearts.”

“Oh Neon…” Dad cried. “I don’t want you to leave…”

“Don’t think of it as a good-bye,” Mom replied, “think of it as a, ‘See you later.’ We’ll be together again, all of us. I’m sure of it.”

Dad’s eyes welled up and he and Mom exchanged a hug and kisses. We Tango kids joined as well, a tearful “See you later” as Mom described.

“I’ll never forget you, Honey.” Dad said. “I love you.”

“I love you too, Mango.” Mom replied. “Goldy.”

“I love you, Mom.” I cried.

“See you soon… Mom…” Purple said uncertainly. “Wow, there’s something I never thought I’d say again.”

We Tangos exchanged final kisses before Dad, Purple, and I joined the others, who at this point had stopped restraining and–in Candy’s case–tickling Red, waving a short good-bye before returning to our familiar black hole.

“Where to next, Candy?” SC asked.

“Ooooh, we’re going back to the Valley of Peace!” She squealed.

“For the third time?” Yellow wondered. “I suspect this is the third installment of the Kung Fu Panda franchise.”

“Yep!” Red confirmed. “Purple, get ready to reprise your role as Dragon Warrior!”

“My sons… A Dragon Warrior and a Dragon Master.” Dad sighed. “I truly couldn’t be prouder.”

“I won’t let you down, Dad.” Purple promised.

“You never could, my little Prince.” Dad assured him. “Not even if you tried.”

Chapter 57: Student to Teacher (Purple)

We headed, once again, toward the Jade Palace courtyard, the familiar and majestic palace casting a shadow over us in a vivid, sunset sky. Using my wings, I glided down softly to the ground. You learn rather quickly how to counter a hard landing after going through the same black hole over and over again teleporting through movies. Thankfully, most of the Squad was with me once again.

“Is everyone OK?” I asked the others around me.

“I’m good.” SC called out. “Who’s here?”

“Red and I are present.” Candy called. “Oooooh, I’ve missed being back here!”

“Yellow’s fine, I am as well.” Blue added.

“How are you, dude?” Green asked me.

“I’m alive.” I answered. “Who’s missing?”

“El Rey y El Oro, King and Gold.” Yellow answered. “That’s not the first time in Kung Fu Panda that has occurred.”

“Separated from your family once again…” Red sighed. “Purple…”

“They’re most likely in the noodle shop.” I said. “As long as they’re safe, that’s what matters to me.”

“Po-ple the Dragon Warrior and the Furious Five back together!” Candy exclaimed. “C’mon, guys! Let’s get to the training hall! I’d imagine Shifu has some big news for us.”

“This franchise has been putting me through the wringer.” I sighed. “What’s next?”

I may not be as… obsessed, shall we say… with Kung Fu Panda as the two reds are, but I do love the series, and I am familiar with one character the titular panda meets in the third movie: His long lost biological father. That one fact got my stomach in knots. If I’m playing Po, which I have been the last two times, would I be seeing Navy again? Gold met his mom in How to Train Your Dragon, so that proved that it’s definitely possible… Even if Navy was as nice as Po’s father was in the movie, I wouldn’t want to see him. I’ve moved on, I have a real father who loves me, and I’ll always be Dad’s Little Prince, not Navy’s piece of crap, as he used to call me.

Except in much harsher terms that the author isn’t comfortable writing, nor am I comfortable saying.

I tried to push it out of my mind as we climbed the stairs and approached the doors to the training hall.

“Hey Candy, want to see my dramatic entrance?” Red joked.

“I have a feeling Shifu will interrupt you.” Candy replied.

“Hey, dramatic entrances are awesome!” Red proclaimed. “Who doesn’t want to enter a room and strike an awesome pose?”

“Maybe if I was among my fam,” Green answered, “but in a room of random people, no way, bro. Too much self-respect for that.”

“How about if you were living out one of your dreams: Being the star quarterback of the Green Bay Packers?” SC asked. “Or conducting an orchestra? I know you’ve been wanting to do that for years.” Green paused to consider it, and as we discussed it, Shifu burst open the doors.

“Master Shifu!” We all said in unison.

“Red is right.” He began. “Before the battle of the fist, comes the battle of the mind. Hence, the dramatic entrance.”

Shifu leapt into the training hall, throwing his staff. Instantly, archers shot flaming arrows into giant torches, igniting them and lighting up the hall.

“Now that’s a dramatic entrance.” SC pointed out.

“What’s all this about, Master Shifu?” Blue asked.

“Today will be my final class.” Shifu answered. The guys and I glanced at each other, confused. “My final class because from now on, your training will be in the hands of the Dragon Warrior.” He pointed his staff at me, much to my shock.

“Me?” I asked. “I- I- I’m no leader, let alone teacher. Let SC teach, or Candy. They have experience in leadership roles.”

“Candy is not the Dragon Warrior. You are.” Shifu insisted.

“Wow, salt in the wound.” I heard Candy jokingly mutter to herself.

“Master Shifu, what do I have to offer that my friends don’t already know?” I asked.

“There is always something more to learn, even for a master.” Shifu answered. “For instance, let me show you another move…” After a short pause and a spin of his staff, he continued, “The dramatic exit.

“What's that?”

He pointed at the roof. Out of instinct, I glanced to where he was pointing, but saw nothing. When I turned back around, I caught Shifu scurrying toward the door before stopping.

“The Second Coming, come with me.” After a short pause, SC obeyed, fist in his palm.

“Yes, Master Shifu.”

He followed the red panda out, leaving just me, the FSF, and Candy in the Training Hall. Despite being among friends, it still made me nervous thinking about teaching them.

“It’s not gonna go well for me, is it?” I asked Red.

“I can’t lie to you, buddy, it might not.” He admitted. “It went bad for Po when he first started out.”

“And, no offense, Po-ple, but I’d rather not find out how flammable I am, unlike Tigress.” Candy confessed.

“Lay off, guys.” Blue said. “Dragon Warrior Purple, we will follow your lead.”

“We all know what we’re doing.” Red assured me. “It’s what we’re best at: Fighting! Besides, I wanna get revenge against Candy for tickling me in HTTYD.”

“Catch me if you can, slowpoke.” Candy teased. “I know your greatest weakness now.”

“And I know all your weaknesses, Candy.” Red playfully shot back. “I taught you most of what you know about hand-to-hand combat, after all.”

“I will… try to teach.” I said uncertainly. I’ve never considered myself a teacher, so I took more of an overseer role while the others sparred and trained in the hall. While it didn’t go as badly as it did for Po in the movie, I could tell that I wasn’t teaching them. I was letting them do their thing, no “teaching” whatsoever. I couldn’t do it, my mind was somewhere else and my stomach was also tied up. And evidently Green noticed, as he approached me after we finished, taking me away for some one-on-one time.

“You OK, dude?” Green asked. “You seem preoccupied, and you have been all day.”

“My mind isn’t in the game, Green.” I admitted. “Tell the others I’m sorry. I wasn’t the teacher you needed me to be.”

“It’s your first time, bro. It took me a moment before I learned how to sing.” He sympathized, singing a soft scale. “I’m confident you can figure it out.”

“It’s not just that.” I elaborated. “There’s so much pressure being a teacher. It’s a leadership role, I’m responsible for everything that goes wrong, and I just don’t want to lose your faith and trust in me.”

“Purple, listen to me,” Green began, putting his hands on my shoulders, “I promise that will never happen. I made you a promise on that mountain top, that the guys and I will never abandon you. And after all this time together, you think we’re going to just leave you now? Never. We’re the Rainbow Squad, and there’s no rainbow without you, Purple.”

I looked up at him. He was smiling at me, and I couldn’t help but smile back. Much like Red’s positive energy, Green’s unfailing confidence started to spread to me. He had faith in me, he trusted me, and he wasn’t going to backtrack on his promises. That’s what I love about him, he refuses to give up on his friends… our friends.

“Thanks, Green.” I squeaked.

“You’re welcome, bro, but there’s something else nagging at you.”

“You can tell?”

“Purple, we’ve known each other for years.” Green quipped. “We’re part of the Secondary Squad, after all. I can read you like a treble clef, and you’re giving me some ‘sour note’ vibes right about now, homie.”

I couldn’t deny that.

“You’re right, Green, but… I just can’t say. Not yet.” I confessed. “I need some air. You should probably get some rest. We had a long night in HTTYD, and no doubt with the training, you’re probably sore and exhausted.”

“I’m on my A-game, dude. I’m more than willing to listen.”

“I know you are, buddy, but I’m just not ready to talk. Not yet, at least.” I replied. “Go, go, get some rest, some sleep. I need to get away… by myself… for a little while.”

“Are you sure?”

“Yes.”

Green paused for a moment before sighing deeply.

“Fine… Just whatever you’re carrying, don’t do it alone. The bros and I, we’re your homies. We’re here to support you when you need it.”

“Thanks, Green, that means a lot.”

“What are bros for?” He joked, shrugging. I chuckled.

“Love ya, buddy.” I said as I put my wings on.

“I love you too, little dude.”

We exchanged a fistbump before I took off into the air, out the doors, outside into the night.

Chapter 60: Encountering Kai

King

The kids, Shifu, and I returned to the palace, Li following us, albeit slowly. We eventually reached the top, even Li, and Shifu led us to the archives, which was basically a massive room with shelves and shelves of scrolls, stacked from floor to ceiling. During the flight, we all asked the two reds about this mysterious Kai, but they were being rather cagey. They insisted the archives would explain everything, so we simply waited, rummaging through the scrolls until, at last, Shifu found a scroll, this specific one a vivid green color.

“Behold. All the answers will be found within.” He explained, hopping down to us. He opened it, only to realize… “What? It's blank?” He moaned. “Are you kidding me? Not again…”

“Maybe there’s more written in it.” SC suggested. Shifu unrolled it further, and sure enough, there was writing on it.

“Oh ok, here we go. It is written in Oogway's hand.” Shifu said. The rest of us gathered around him as he began reading. “‘Long ago, I had a brother.’”

“Whoa whoa, a brother?” Green asked.

“In arms. In arms. Sorry. He says ‘brother in arms.’” Shifu continued.

“Are you capable of unrolling the entire scroll?” Yellow asked, a bit hastily. “I’m fully capable of understanding the parchment.”

Shifu ignored him and continued reading.

From what Oogway wrote, Kai the Bull was a friend, brother of Oogway, and the two of them were a great team of great warriors. However, an ambush left Oogway badly injured. Kai carried him for days to get help, eventually reaching a village of pandas. This gave most of us pause, and I glanced at Li, who was standing nearby. The pandas used chi to heal Oogway, and they taught him how to use it, but Kai saw the power and craved it for himself. Oogway had to stop him, and in a fierce battle that shook the Earth, Oogway prevailed and banished Kai to the Spirit Realm. He was never to return, but if he ever did, the only way to stop him was…

“...by a true master of chi.” Shifu finished.

“But… Master Shifu, you used chi earlier.” SC piped up.

“Me? I can barely make a flower bloom.” Shifu protested. “I'd need at least thirty more years, and a cave. He will continue stealing the chi of masters until he has consumed it all.”

“But then… How do we stop Kai?” Blue asked. “None of us knows chi.”

“I can teach you.” Li suggested. All of us glanced at him.

“You know chi?” Purple asked.

“Well, of course. I'm a panda.” Li answered. We paused.

“Give us a moment, Li.” I insisted. “I need a moment.”

I gathered the kids with me.

“Candy, Red, first things first… Kai escaped the Spirit Realm?” I asked.

“What even is the Spirit Realm?” Gold asked.

“To put it simply, it’s the afterlife, where characters in this universe go when they’re… Skadooshed.” Red explained.

“So wait… I sent Tai Lung there?” Purple squeaked. “And Lord Shen?”

“Pretty much.” Candy confirmed. “Anyway, Kai managed to capture the chi of every kung fu master that came before, including Master Oogway’s.”

“He sounds like a soul collector.” I noted.

“He is also known as Kai the Collector.” Candy pointed out, nodding.

“And collecting everyone’s souls is how he became powerful enough to return to the real world.” Red added, shuddering. “I can’t imagine it… So many animals… so many fighting styles… reduced to green stones on Kai’s belt.”

“We can’t let him get away with this.” Purple insisted. We all nodded in agreement.

“Candy, dude, how do we take him down?” Green asked. Candy and Red exchanged a look.

“In case we can’t make it…” Candy sighed, lowering her voice, “Purple needs to take Kai back by doing the Wuxi Finger Hold… on himself.”

“Whoa whoa whoa, hang on…” I began. “Are you saying that Purple, my son… has to die to keep us safe?”

“He’s not dying.” Red insisted. “He’s entering a new realm.”

“He can return… if we can master chi.” Candy added. I looked at Purple.

“Purple, I’m not letting you do this.” I insisted. “I can’t lose you.”

“And I’m not losing you or Gold.” Purple retaliated. “If that means sacrificing myself to do that…”

“No way, Purple.” Gold added. “We’re not doing this. There has to be another way.”

Candy just shook her head no.

“Purple, my little Prince, please don’t do this.” I begged. “Mastering chi… this ‘energy’ as SC put it earlier… You and I both know where life comes from, and Who sustains it.”

“We’re in a different place, Dad, with different rules.” Purple claimed. “If worst comes to worst… My life is in your hands. But I do know this: I’m not letting you or anyone else get hurt, not if I can prevent it.”

Purple hugged both me and Gold, and we hugged him back. When we released, SC spoke up.

“Here’s hoping we can stop Kai before then…” SC sighed. “We fight for each other, we fight as one. But for now… we’ll give it our all, Purple. We’re not losing you, either.”

“Thanks, SC.” Purple replied gratefully. We broke away from our group and looked at Li. “Alright, Pan-dad, how do I master chi?”

“You have to come home with me.” Li explained.

“To the secret village?” Purple asked.

“Yes, son.” Li continued. “You must discover what it is to be a panda. You have to learn how to live like one. Sleep like one. Eat like one. Those 103 dumplings? Hmph... I was just warming up.”

“I’m joining you.” I insisted. “I’m not sitting by… Not again.”

“Me too!” Gold exclaimed. “I’ve GOT to see this village.”

“Well… We can't share the location of the village with others, so…” Li began.

“If you don’t take me there, I’ll find it myself if I have to.” I said tersely.

“You’d better listen to him.” SC advised. “You don’t want to stand between a lion and his cubs.”

I gave Li a look of determination, and Li caved in, allowing me and Gold to join him and, with that, we were off to the panda village.

Red

We bid farewell to the Tango family as they and Li left for the panda village. I was a bit jealous of them, as I would’ve loved to meet the entire embarrassment of pandas and hug their fluffy fur, but the guys and I agreed that I needed to stay back, if only to buy more time for the Tangos to get there and for Purple to learn chi. We watched them go from the Jade Palace.

“I just hope Purple can master chi in time.” Blue said.

“He will. I’m sure of it.” SC insisted.

“Master Shifu, now what do we do?” I asked.

“You are going to find out where Kai is.” Shifu answered. “Follow the trail of those jade creatures, but do not engage. For with every foe he faces, Kai becomes stronger.”

“Yes, Master Shifu.” I said, putting my fist in my palm and bowing.

“And take Green.” Shifu added.

“Bruh…” Green muttered. “What did I do to deserve this?”

“Strength in numbers, I reason.” Yellow suggested. Candy and I exchanged a look.

“Reddy Bear…” She began.

“Candy, I don’t know if we’ll make it back as ourselves…” I sighed. “But if we don’t… Well, I’m sorry.”

“You will come home, ya big furry.” She teased. I laughed.

“Just for that, no. I’m not gonna.”

“You ready, ya lovebird?” Green joked.

“We’re just friends!” I insisted. Green snickered. “But yes, let’s fly.”

“Stay safe out there, you two.” Blue advised.

“Thanks, buddy.” I replied, taking off into the air on my elytra.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

We soared across the sky, following the green trails far into the distance. It’s been a while since I’ve hung out with Green, just the two of us. We enjoy a lot of the same things, but nothing more than simply messing with each other. Green is really good at doing that, only beaten by Candy in that aspect, but I’ve gotten one over on him every once in a while, like when I almost made him crash when I flew closer to him. That was pretty funny.

As we flew, Green spoke up.

“Dude, you know this movie. What happens to us?”

“Something bad, I fear.” I answered. “Kai takes most of the Furious Five… Even Shifu… We cannot let that happen.”

“The Furious Five… The other dudes?” Green asked.

“Yep.” I confirmed. “As much as I hate to say this, we can’t fight. Once we find him, we’ve got to head back. We need a full team to at least try to fight him off.”

“What’s the matter, little bro? You scared?” Green teased. “You’re the same dude who throws himself in harm's way more often than not.”

“I know the outcome in this case.” I answered. “I didn’t know the outcome when we’ve fought other baddies like Vic or Dark.”

“Ah, yes, because charging someone with giant pulsating blades and literal superpowers isn’t a guaranteed way to get yourself killed.” Green quipped. “You’re insane, little bro.”

“Save the compliments for later.” I joked back. “Look!”

Down below us was a scorching desert, and in it was a trio of animal kung fu masters, Masters Bear, Croc, and Chicken. We lowered and learned their villagers too were attacked by Jombies. They had tracked the Jombies here, to an old wooden ship. We landed and watched the animals charge inside, only for three flashes of green light to glow from inside.

“They’re gone…” I squeaked. “Those poor animals…”

“Is… Kai in there?” Green asked.

“Yeah, and he turned those animals into his Jombies.” I explained. “He’s only getting stronger, which means we gotta go before-”

As I was talking, a green blade flew out of the ship, wrapping a long chain around Green before he could react, and pulling him in.

“REEEEED!”

“GREEN!” I exclaimed, bolting toward him. Luckily, he dropped an Ender Pearl just outside the boat, freeing him from the chains, but only for a moment, as Green turned around. I could only watch as he was taken away from me. My emotions overtaking my mind, I charged into the boat, looking around and taking a fighting stance. Kai was in there, and he was gonna pay for doing that to Green.

I soon felt a presence, and I saw him… Kai, the imposing bull towering over me.

“Your chi is strong. Just like your friend.” Kai mocked, showing me the stone on his belt with Green.

“No…” I squeaked. “You’ll PAY FOR THAT!”

I put my wings on and fought to the best of my ability, but Kai easily overtook me with his extra power. Realizing that I wasn’t going to win this battle, I flapped my wings as hard as I could and took off into the air.

“Wings of-” I began, only to get trapped in Kai’s chains and yanked back down. “Regret!”

That’s all I remembered before Kai collected me as well.